Professional Documents
Culture Documents
1985-2014 Nemetschek Vectorworks, Incorporated. All The following are copyrights or trademarks of their
Rights Reserved. respective companies or organizations:
Nemetschek Vectorworks, Inc., hereafter referred to as Macintosh, QuickDraw 3D, QuickTime, and Quartz 2D
Nemetschek Vectorworks, and its licensors retain all are registered trademarks of Apple, Inc.
ownership rights to the MiniCAD Vectorworks iOS is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., and
computer program and all other computer programs as is used under license by Apple, Inc.
well as documentation offered by Nemetschek
Vectorworks. Use of Nemetschek Vectorworks software is Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the
governed by the license agreement accompanying your Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
original media. The source code for such software is a countries.
confidential trade secret of Nemetschek Vectorworks. You Android is a trademark of Google, Inc.
may not attempt to decipher, decompile, develop or
Amazon, Kindle, Kindle Fire, the Amazon Kindle logo
otherwise reverse engineer Nemetschek Vectorworks
and the Kindle Fire logo are trademarks of Amazon.com,
software. Information necessary to achieve
Inc. or its affiliates.
interoperability with this software may be furnished upon
request. Adobe, Adobe PDF Library, Adobe AIR, and the Adobe
logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
The Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide was written Parasolid is a registered trademark of Siemens Product
and illustrated by Alexandra Duffy, Teresa Heaps, Kristin Lifecycle Management Software Inc.
Bailey, and Susan Collins. CINEMA 4D is a registered trademark of MAXON
This manual, as well as the software described in it, is Computer GmbH, MAXON Computer Inc. and MAXON
furnished under license and may only be used or copied in Computer Ltd.
accordance with the terms of such license. The Rhino 3DM and Rhinoceros is a registered trademark of
information in this manual is furnished for informational Robert McNeel and Associates.
use only, is subject to change without notice, and should
Python is a registered trademark of the Python Software
not be construed as a commitment by Nemetschek
Foundation.
Vectorworks. Nemetschek Vectorworks assumes no
responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies SpaceNavigator is a trademark of 3Dconnexion.
that may appear in this manual. OpenEXR is a trademark of Lucasfilm, Ltd.
Except as permitted by such license, no part of this ACIS and SAT are registered trademarks of Spatial
publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval Corporation.
system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without The Forbo flooring textures are based on textures supplied
the express prior written permission of Nemetschek by Forbo Holding S.A.
Vectorworks. Permission is typically granted to reproduce Arroway textures provided by Arroway textures.
materials for personal use, but under no circumstances AutoCAD, FBX, and 3ds Max are registered trademarks
may it be used for commercial purposes or for financial of Autodesk, Inc.
gain. To obtain permission, contact Nemetschek
Vectorworks (email tech@vectorworks.net) or an A variety of water textures were provided by Dan
authorized Vectorworks distributor if not in the USA. Jansenson, author of the Remarkable Renderworks
manual.
Existing artwork or images that you may desire to scan or
copy may be protected under copyright law. The The shader appendix contains content, copyright
unauthorized incorporation of such artwork into your MAXON Computer GmbH, MAXON Computer Inc. and
work may be a violation of the rights of the author or MAXON Computer Ltd. All rights reserved. Reprinted
illustrator. Please be sure to obtain any permission with permission.
required from such authors. The Renderworks Camera tool was developed by Julian
Vectorworks, Renderworks, and MiniCAD are registered Carr, OzCAD, Sydney, Australia.
trademarks of Nemetschek Vectorworks, Inc. All other brand or product names are trademarks or
SmartCursor, and VectorScript are trademarks of registered trademarks of their respective companies or
Nemetschek Vectorworks, Inc.; X-ray Select (patent organizations.
pending)
For Defense Agencies: Restricted Rights Legend. Use,
reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set
forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights of Technical
Data and Computer Software clause at 252.227-7013.
For civilian agencies: Restricted Rights Legend. Use,
reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set
forth in subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the commercial
Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19.
Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of
the United States. The contractor/manufacturer is
Nemetschek Vectorworks, Incorporated, 7150 Riverwood
Drive, Columbia, MD, 21046, USA.
Contributions
Contributions were provided by Biplab Sarkar, Dave
Donley, Wes Gardner, Eric Gilbey, Gunther Miller, Don
Ward, Andrew Bell, and Tim Connors.
Riccardo Martires MasterWorks contest file submission
was used as the basis for a variety of illustrations.
Evanston Green Townhomes file used as the basis for
illustrations 2008 Nathan Kipnis Architects, Inc.
Registration and Updates
If you have not already done so, please register your copy
of the Vectorworks software with Nemetschek
Vectorworks at http://register.nemetschek.net.
If you would like to receive automatic notification of
Vectorworks software updates, you can select to
automatically check for updates on a weekly or monthly
basis from the Session tab of Vectorworks preferences
(See Session Preferences on page 20 in the Vectorworks
Fundamentals Users Guide.)
Vectorworks License Agreement
The license agreement binding the use of this software can
be found in the Vectorworks ReleaseNotes directory or by
clicking License in the About Vectorworks dialog box.
Table of Contents
Preface .................................................................................................................................................. i
Installing Vectorworks Products................................................................................................................................... i
Updating Vectorworks Products ..................................................................................................................................ii
New Features ..............................................................................................................................................................ii
Learning Vectorworks .................................................................................................................................................xi
Technical Support and Training................................................................................................................................ xiii
1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 1
Understanding Vectorworks........................................................................................................................................ 1
The Fundamentals Workspace................................................................................................................................... 3
The View Bar .............................................................................................................................................................. 6
Palettes and Tool Sets................................................................................................................................................ 9
Palette Layout Options ............................................................................................................................................. 10
List Box Functionality................................................................................................................................................ 13
Additional Key Functionality...................................................................................................................................... 14
Screen Tips............................................................................................................................................................... 15
Object Editing Mode ................................................................................................................................................. 16
Setting Vectorworks Preferences ............................................................................................................................. 17
Setting Document Preferences................................................................................................................................. 30
Setting Quick Preferences ........................................................................................................................................ 35
Context Menus.......................................................................................................................................................... 37
20 Worksheets.................................................................................................................................. 811
Creating Worksheets .............................................................................................................................................. 811
Using Worksheets................................................................................................................................................... 814
viii | Table of Contents
Index................................................................................................................................................. 913
Preface
Welcome to Vectorworks Fundamentals softwarea CAD program that includes all the 2D and 3D tools and
technology you need in one easy-to-use, cost-effective package. In addition to precision drafting, it provides powerful
tools for 3D modeling that can be used to create, present, and even manufacture designs. Built-in database and
worksheet capabilities help track costs and materials. A host of import and export formats makes it easy to share files.
The Vectorworks Fundamentals product also includes extensive symbol libraries, default drawing resources, and a
built-in scripting environment that can be used to automate routine tasks.
2. Click Add.
The Add New Serial Number dialog box opens.
3. Enter the serial number exactly as it appears on the label. The serial number is case sensitive. The letters o and i
are not used in serial numbers; enter zero or one instead.
4. Click Add.
ii | Preface
The list of Enabled Products in the Serial Numbers dialog box displays all products enabled by this serial
number. For security, serial numbers that begin with the letter A are partially hidden wherever they display in
Vectorworks.
5. Only one serial number can be applied at a time. When the serial number is set, click Done.
To remove a serial number:
1. Click Serial Numbers from the Session tab of Vectorworks preferences.
The Serial Numbers dialog box opens.
2. Select the serial number to remove, and then click Remove.
3. Click Done.
Network Protection
When you run multiple copies of the Vectorworks program across a network, serial numbers are checked when the
program is launched, and also periodically throughout the session.
If the same serial number is found to be in use, the All Serial Numbers In Use dialog box opens. From this dialog box,
click User Information to display the User Name, if given, and the IP address of the other location. Click Edit
Numbers to delete the existing serial number and enter a new one. Once the situation is resolved, click Retry
Numbers to regain access to the program. If the serial number is still in use after three attempts, the program
automatically shuts down.
New Features
This release includes many new features and significant enhancements to the Vectorworks Fundamentals and
Renderworks products, the Fundamentals workspace, and the product documentation, as described in the following
sections.
Preface | iii
Documentation Improvements
The following table lists major improvements to the documentation since the last major release.
Learning Vectorworks
There are a number of ways to learn how to use the Vectorworks program, including training CDs, both online help and
PDF versions of the user guides, and both online and classroom training.
Users Guides
This guide is the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. It is a comprehensive reference for all users describing
the core tools, commands, and features in the Vectorworks Fundamentals product. The guide also describes the
presentation capabilities of the Renderworks product, for users who purchased it.
The Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide describes the features in the Vectorworks Architect, Landmark,
Spotlight, and Designer products. It is designed for users who have purchased one or more Design Series products.
The following table describes the conventions used in the guides. All instructions in the guides are based on
click-click drawing.
Convention Meaning
Indicates functionality that exists in the Vectorworks Architect and Designer
products only
Indicates functionality that exists in the Vectorworks Landmark and Designer
products only
Indicates functionality that exists in the Vectorworks Spotlight and Designer
products only
Indicates functionality that exists in the Vectorworks Architect, Landmark, and
Designer products only
Indicates functionality that exists in the Vectorworks Architect, Spotlight, and
Designer products only
xii | Preface
Convention Meaning
Indicates functionality that exists in the Vectorworks Landmark, Spotlight, and
Designer products only
Indicates functionality that exists in all of the Vectorworks Design Series products
as well as Designer
Indicates functionality that exists in the Renderworks product only
Technical Support
Technical support is available for registered users in several ways. International users should contact their local reseller
for details concerning technical support; for reseller information, see www.vectorworks.net/international
United States users can contact Technical Support using the following methods:
Call 443.542.0411
Send an email to tech@vectorworks.net
Visit the technical support knowledgebase at kbase.vectorworks.net
When you contact Technical Support, provide a brief description of the problem that includes specific details about
what actions were taken prior to the problems occurrence. The more information you can give your support specialist,
the easier it will be to solve your problem quickly.
When you contact Technical Support by phone, please have access to your computer and be ready to tell the specialist:
Vectorworks software serial number
Vectorworks software version number
Operating system
Type of computer being used
Amount of RAM installed in the computer
List of any recent changes to the computers setup (such as new fonts, software, or hardware)
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a problem prior to calling Technical Support will also aid in a speedy resolution. Basic
troubleshooting tips include:
Test to see if the problem occurs in a new, blank file
Test to see if the problem occurs system wide (especially print and font problems)
Copy and paste part of the document to a new file to see if the problem persists
Run the computer in Safe Mode (Windows) to see if there is a system conflict
Check the community message board to see if the problem has already been reported or resolved:
techboard.vectorworks.net
Training
For details about training options, visit www.vectorworks.net/training
Tutorial manuals
One-on one online training
xiv | Preface
Other Resources
The following additional resources are available to Nemetschek Vectorworks users:
Documentation updates through the online help Auto Update Content or Check for Updates features
Vectorworks community board - techboard.vectorworks.net
Vectorworks YouTube channel - www.youtube.com/vectorworks
Independent local user groups - www.vectorworks.net/community/usergroups.php
Planet Vectorworks, our company news site- planet.vectorworks.net
Various social media sites, such as Facebook, Twitter, Delicious, LinkedIn, and Flickr
LISTSERV user lists - www.vectorworks.net/community/mailinglists.php
Knowledgebase
One of the primary technical support resources available to you is our Knowledgebase. This resource provides answers
to the most common technical questions, as well as video tutorials and tech tips, all in a central location. Use the search
box to find specific information or browse by categories. Youll also see information organized by the most popular
articles, recent entries, and more. Access our Knowledgebase at http://kbase.vectorworks.net
Modeling Environment
The Parasolid modeling kernel (a Siemens PLM product) was integrated into the program starting with version 2009.
This kernel provides the geometric foundation for sophisticated modeling operations. The Parasolid kernel provides
robustness, consistency, and high performance in modeling as well as drafting operations.
In most CAD programs, it is possible to create either a 2D or a 3D drawing. The Vectorworks program allows you to do
both, with drafting, modeling, and editing occurring in any view.
Symbols
Hybrid symbols display a 2D or 3D representation depending on the view. The software includes symbol libraries,
which contain a number of pre-configured hybrid symbols; alternatively, create your own symbols.
A good example of a hybrid object is a door. It displays as a line drawing in Top/Plan view and as a fully formed door
in a 3D view.
One advantage of working with symbols is that 3D models are automatically created from 2D drawings. For more
information on symbols, see Understanding Symbols on page 169.
2 | Chapter 1: Introduction
SmartCursor
Datum
Intersection
Design with precision using the SmartCursor. By providing a series of cues (including text displayed at the cursors
current location) that update with every move of the mouse, the drawing options are clear. Use the SmartCursor to
create snaps to specific points relative to other objects or to temporarily set a new origin (datum). Draw exact
perpendicular lines, angles, and more. The SmartCursor is described in detail in Drawing with Snapping on
page 133.
Image Preview
An image preview is used for a variety of functions, including drawing objects, placing objects, and the SmartCursor.
The image preview is the image displayed as the object is drawn, after a tool has been selected or an operation has been
invoked, but before the object is physically placed in the drawing. The image preview may exactly resemble the object
to be placed, or it may be a representation of that object, such as its bounding box. During the drawing process, the
image preview contains a feedback segment, which gathers information for display in the Data bar. The program also
uses this segment to properly invoke SmartCursor cues.
Viewports
When a design is complete, it typically needs to be presented to a client with views from several different directions,
complete with details, annotations, dimensions, and title blocks. To accomplish this in the Vectorworks program, create
viewport objects, which can show other design layers in this file, or even design layers in other files.
The Fundamentals Workspace | 3
Viewports can display entire as well as cropped views of a drawing, with specified layer and class visibility settings,
projection, render mode, and orientation parameters. If the drawing changes, the viewports can be easily updated to
reflect the changes.
In both the Vectorworks Fundamentals and the Vectorworks Design Series products, you can create one or more
viewports on a sheet layer, and each viewport can show one or more design layers from the current file. Additionally,
the Vectorworks Design Series products allow you to create one or more viewports on a design layer, and the design
layers shown can be either from the current file, or referenced from another file.
Viewports are described in Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports on page 734 in this guide, and in
Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports on page 723 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Scripting
The Vectorworks program includes comprehensive script capability through the SDK (using C++), or with the Python
or VectorScript language. Use existing scripts or create your own. Script resources can be saved within files, or you can
create customized plug-in tools, commands, and objects that fit your needs. You can save valuable time and effort by
creating reusable functions for drawings with scripts. See Using Scripts on page 847 for details.
A comprehensive source of developer oriented documentation related to the SDK, Python, and VectorScript is located
at http://developer.vectorworks.net
Worksheets
The Vectorworks program has comprehensive worksheet and database functionality. Object attributes and records can
be listed in a worksheet, and spreadsheet calculations can be performed on this data. For example, list all the rooms in
a drawing, and automatically calculate the number of bedrooms. Create a worksheet listing the items required to
furnish the rooms and the cost. Worksheets are described in Creating Worksheets on page 811.
Menu bar
Data Bar
Basic and Edit
palette Group
Options list
Rulers
Zoom Line
Thickness
preference
shortcut
Attributes
palette Vertical
scroll bar
Resource
Browser
Snapping
palette
Floating
Data bar
Tool Sets
palette
Message bar
menu
Message bar Horizontal scroll bar Print area border
Windows, palettes, tool sets, and dialog boxes that contain a sizing handle in their bottom right corner can be resized;
click-drag the sizing handle to the desired location.
The following table describes some of the workspace features common to all Vectorworks products.
Component Description
Menu bar Contains pull-down menus that access Vectorworks commands
Title bar All windows, palettes, tool sets, and dialog boxes have a title bar; click and drag any
title bar to move the item to the desired location. See Palette Layout Options on
page 10.
Data bar Depending on the tool and on the action being performed, the Data bar displays
information such as coordinate data, length, and angle. Use the Data Bar and Edit
Group Options list to set the Data bar either to float with the cursor, or to be
stationary on the Data bar. See Using the Data Bar on page 203 for more
information. These options can also be set from the selections listed under Windows
> Data Bar Options.
Tool bar Displays the various modes of the active tool; click a mode to select it. The bar also
displays mode information and accesses the tool preferences, if any. The Tool bar is
divided into sections grouped by mode function. To move easily through the mode
sections from the keyboard, press the U, I, O, P, [ (left bracket), and ] (right bracket)
keys. Each key corresponds to a consecutive Tool bar section (see the Mode
Modifier shortcuts in Modifying Snapping and Mode Shortcuts on page 876).
6 | Chapter 1: Introduction
Component Description
View bar Contains buttons and pull-down menus that control the view in various ways (see
The View Bar on page 6)
Message bar Displays tool explanations, undo messages, minor alerts, and a progress bar (when
applicable). To also display cursor location fields on the Message bar, click the
triangle at the far right of the bar; select the option to display all positional fields,
only cursor-based location fields, or no cursor location fields.
Drawing area This is the open portion in the middle of the Vectorworks application window where
drawings are created; it includes both the print area and the space that surrounds it
Print area Within the drawing area, a gray border defines the print area, if shown. Only the
objects that are included within the print area are printed. The print area is divided
into pages; each page equals a physical sheet of paper to be printed. A print margin
is built in for each page (see The Print Area on page 82).
Rulers Based on the current measurement system, rulers make it easier to precisely create
and place objects within the drawing.
The 0,0 point on the rulers represents the origin of the working plane axes. The Set
Origin command moves the working plane origin to the layer plane origin (see Set
Origin on page 80).
The rulers can be hidden with an option in the Vectorworks preferences (see Setting
Vectorworks Preferences on page 17).
Grids Based on the current measurement system, two grid systems make it easier to
precisely create and place objects within the file. To hide the reference grid, deselect
Show Grid Lines (see Snap and Reference Grids on page 78).
Component Description
Previous View Displays the previous view that was created by a pan, zoom, or scroll in the drawing area;
Vectorworks keeps track of up to 50 views
Next View Displays the next view; Vectorworks keeps track of up to 50 views
Classes tab shortcut Opens the Classes tab of the Organization dialog box
Classes Displays the active class, activates a class that is selected from the list of existing classes
in the file, or enables a new class to be created.
When a new class is created, it does not automatically become the active class.
An icon to the left of each name indicates the current visibility setting of the class (see
Setting Visibilities on page 118 for more information). A triangle next to the class
name indicates that the class has subgroups that can be selected individually (for
example, a wall class with exterior and interior subgroups).
Design Layers tab/Sheet Depending on whether a Design Layer or a Sheet Layer is active, opens either the Design
Layers tab shortcut Layers tab or the Sheet Layers tab of the Organization dialog box
8 | Chapter 1: Introduction
Component Description
Layers Displays the active layer, activates a design layer or sheet layer that is selected from the
list of existing layers in the file, or enables a new layer to be created.
When a new layer is created, it becomes the active layer.
The area to the left of each name indicates the view and visibility of the layer. Depending
on the view, any of the following icons can display for design layers; sheet layers are
always in Top/Plan view:
Component Description
Active Layer Plane Displays working plane coordinate views (such as Top or Front) based on X, Y, and Z
Views axes. In any standard view, and when switching views, the view is based on the active
layer plane position.
If switching from a rotated top/plan view (Vectorworks Design Series required), an
alert message provides the option to enable Working Plane Views mode instead.
Current View/ Standard Displays the current view, and activates a standard view (such as Top) that is selected
Views list from the list; see Using Standard Views on page 549. If the view is not standard (for
example, if the Flyover tool was used), Custom View displays.
Rotated View Rotates the plan view by the angle specified; see Rotating the Plan on page 721 in the
(Vectorworks Design Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide
Series required)
Unified View Toggles Unified View mode; see Unified Layer View on page 561
Current Render Mode If the current render mode has options, displays the appropriate options dialog box; this
Options option is available when the Render Mode - Long option is selected on the View bar
menu
Current Render Mode/ Displays the current render mode, and activates a render mode selected from the list;
Render Modes list select Options for Other Render Modes to access the options for a particular mode. See
Rendering with Vectorworks on page 660 and Renderworks Rendering Modes on
page 666.
View bar menu Selects the options to display on the View bar
Minimizing Palettes
To increase the available drawing area, palettes can be minimized while not in use, and then maximized when needed.
On Macintosh, click the palettes yellow title bar button or double-click the palettes title bar to minimize the palette.
Repeat the process to maximize the palette.
On Windows, click the palettes pin icon in the title bar to toggle between minimized (horizontal pin icon) and
maximized (vertical pin icon) display. Move the cursor over a minimized title bar to temporarily maximize the palette;
move the cursor off the palette to minimize it again.
Palette Layout Options | 11
Pop-out Tools
On tool palettes, an arrow on the right side of a tool icon or label indicates additional, related pop-out tools. Click and
hold down the mouse button to open the menu of pop-out tools.
12 | Chapter 1: Introduction
Utility Menus
Each tool palette has a button at the bottom that opens a utility menu, which controls the palette and tool display.
Task Action
Change the lists sort key Click the heading of the column to sort by; an arrow appears on the right side of
the column heading to indicate that it is the sort key
Change a columns sort order Click the column heading; the sort arrow in the heading indicates whether the
current sort is ascending or descending
Resize a column Click the vertical line on the right side of a columns heading and drag it left or
right
Select a group of items Click the first item, and then Shift-click the last item in the group
Select multiple items Click the first item, and then Command-click (Macintosh) or Ctrl-click
individually (Windows) each additional item
Select an item on the list Type the first letter(s) of the desired items name
14 | Chapter 1: Introduction
Task Action
Edit an item on the list Double-click the desired item
Open a context menu for an Ctrl-click (Macintosh) or right-click (Windows) the desired item
item on the list
For lists with a Visibility Option-click (Macintosh) or Alt-click (Windows) the desired setting
column, set the same visibility
for all items on the list
Display lists in hierarchical Currently, for the Classes tab of the Organization dialog box and Navigation
order palette (Vectorworks Design Series required), there is an option to display classes
(up to four levels) in hierarchical order, similar to how they display on the Classes
pop-up menus. The dialog box and palette display options are saved separately.
See Displaying Classes in Hierarchical Order on page 93, Context Menus on
page 37, and The Navigation Palette on page 599 in the Vectorworks Design
Series Users Guide.
Click the heading of a column The arrow indicates the current sort key and
sort order; click the column heading to reverse Drag the vertical line on the right
without the sort arrow (as side of a column heading to adjust
applicable) to sort the list by that the sort order; not available for classes sorted
in hierarchical order, or stories (Vectorworks the column size
column
Design Series required)
Option-click (Macintosh) or
Alt-click (Windows) one of
the Visibility columns to set
that visibility for all items on
the list
Key Usage
Esc Cancels the current operation. When a dialog box is open, this is the equivalent of
pressing the Cancel button. In the Data bar or Object Info palette, cancels the entry in a
field and returns the focus to the drawing area. Cancels rendering. Clears smart points.
Deselects the working plane.
Screen Tips | 15
Key Usage
Return (Macintosh) / When a dialog box is open, this is the equivalent to pressing the Done or OK button. In
Enter (Windows) a field in the Data bar or Object Info palette, this accepts the information and returns
the focus to the drawing area.
In the Object Info palette, press Shift+return (Macintosh) or Shift+Enter (Windows) to
save the entry and keep the focus in the same field, so that you can enter a different
value if necessary.
Tab Moves the cursor from one field to the next in the Data bar, Object Info palette, and
dialog boxes
Delete (Macintosh) / Removes the last segment of or cancels the creation of an object being drawn
Backspace (Windows)
Ctrl (Windows) Prevents palettes from docking when they are moved near an edge
Space Bar Engages the Pause/Boomerang mode. Holding down the Space Bar temporarily pauses
the current tool. A second tool can then be selected and used. Release the Space Bar to
return to the previous tool.
Command (Macintosh) / Briefly expands the currently selected screen tip
Shift (Windows)
Screen Tips
Screen tips are available throughout the program to identify items such as tool, mode, and snapping names. To view a
screen tip, hold the cursor briefly over the item in question.
Certain items have screen tips that can be collapsed (default) and expanded. When collapsed, only the name of the item
displays. When expanded, additional help information is displayed below the name. To expand screen tips, hold the
Command key (Macintosh) or Shift key (Windows) while the screen tip is visible.
On Windows, screen tips can also be collapsed or expanded by clicking on the disclosure arrow. When a screen tip is
expanded, it remains expanded until it is manually collapsed again. Screen tips for all other items are expanded until a
tip is collapsed again.
16 | Chapter 1: Introduction
Disclosure arrow
If other objects in the drawing are displayed, the objects on other layers respect the layer options settings (for
showing and snapping to objects in other layers) and the layer visibility settings. Other objects on the same layer
as the edited object are snappable. One exception to this is when editing page-based (green) symbols, which are
edited at a 1:1 scale; other objects which are not at a 1:1 scale are not snappable.
In addition, the view can be switched between regular and unified view mode as needed. (See Unified Layer
View on page 561 for more information.)
6. Click the Exit button to return to the regular drawing mode. (If a nested object is being edited, the Exit button
exits back to the next level.)
Edit Preferences
Click the Edit tab to set preferences that control various edit functions in the program.
Parameter Description
Click drag drawing Lets you draw objects with the click-drag method rather than the click-click method
(click-click is the default). Click once with the mouse button and do not release; drag the
cursor to a desired location and then release. See Using the Mouse on page 54.
Eight reshape Shows eight handles (four corner and four center) on most objects; deselect the option to
handles display only four corner handles
Offset duplications When you use the Duplicate command, places the duplicate object so that it is offset from
the original object; deselect the option to place duplicates directly over the original
18 | Chapter 1: Introduction
Parameter Description
Auto join walls When you use the Wall tool, automatically joins walls at corners and intersections; when
walls are separated, their ends automatically heal; when walls have core components,
components also automatically join (see Automatically Joining Walls on page 437)
Separate sheet views Saves the view origin and zoom factor for each sheet layer; deselect the option to use the
same view for all design layers and sheet layers
Mouse wheel zooms Sets the default behavior of the mouse wheel and the Mighty Mouse scroll ball. When
selected, the wheel zooms by default; when deselected, the wheel scrolls by default. See
Zooming with the Mouse Wheel on page 58 and Scrolling with the Mouse Wheel on
page 60 for details.
Allow ctrl-click/ When selected, allows a Ctrl-click (Windows) or Option-click (Macintosh) with the
option-click in-place Selection tool to create a duplicate copy of a selected object in place. Since it is simple to
duplication inadvertently create duplicate objects that cannot be easily detected, leaving this option
deselected is recommended; it is deselected by default. Regardless of the setting made here,
duplicates can be created with a Ctrl-click/drag or Option-click/drag.
Edit text horizontally Always displays the text editing box in a horizontal position, even when the text is rotated
by default (see Creating Rotated Text on page 345)
2D conversion Sets the number of segments that will be used to represent polylines and circles when you
resolution draw and edit objects
Default compression Specifies the default image compression to apply to images in a viewport cache and to
images created by the Render Bitmap tool (Renderworks required). PNG compression
provides the best image quality but produces larger files, while JPEG creates smaller files,
but with possible loss of detail. PNG is selected by default.
Allow interactive 2D Specifies whether the Selection tool, in Interactive Scaling mode, is allowed to resize
symbol scaling symbol instances; if allowed, a warning can be displayed to avoid inadvertently scaling
symbol. If Never is selected, symbols can still be resized from the Object Info palette; see
Scaling Symbols from the Object Info Palette on page 313.
Arrow Keys Select an arrow and modifier key combination as a shortcut for four common operations;
each key combination can be assigned to only one operation. Alternatively, disable the
ability to use arrow key combinations to perform any of these functions.
Switch active Select the key combination that switches the active layer (up and down arrows) and the
layer/class active class (left and right arrows)
Pan drawing Select the key combination that pans the drawing by half of the area currently in view
Nudge objects Select the key combination that nudges objects by one pixel, and select whether to display
an alert on the Message bar when nudging items to avoid accidentally moving objects
Move objects Select the key combination that moves objects, and select whether to move objects by the
snap grid distance or by the specified custom distance
Display Preferences
Click the Display tab to set the display preferences.
Setting Vectorworks Preferences | 19
Parameter Description
Rulers Shows the rulers
Colored axes in Top/Plan view Displays X (red) and Y (green) axes in 2D Top/Plan view
Scroll bars Shows the scroll bars
Black background Uses a black drawing background instead of the default settings
Zoom line thickness Lines in the drawing appear thicker when you zoom in; the screens redraw slower
if Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging is enabled
Create text without fill When you create text objects, dimension objects, and some plug-in objects that
contain text, the text block has no fill, even if the default attributes are set to add a
fill to new objects. This prevents objects beneath the text from being obscured.
Show parametric constraints Displays parametric constraints
Show other objects while in When certain complex objects are edited, an Edit window with a colored border
editing modes displays in the drawing area.
When you edit solids, groups, symbols (in the drawing only), or viewports in the
Edit window, select this option to make the other objects from the drawing visible
and snappable during editing; deselect the option to show only the object being
edited. (See Object Editing Mode on page 16 for more information.)
This option does not apply to other types of objects that are edited from the Edit
window, including extrudes, multiple extrudes, tapered extrudes, sweeps, meshes,
floors, and roof faces. For symbols, the option applies only when you edit a
symbol definition by clicking on a symbol instance in a design layer.
Gray other objects If Show other objects while in editing modes is selected, select this option to
gray the objects in the drawing that are not being edited
Use VectorCaching for faster Caches vector information for complex document entities, such as polylines and
drawing hatches; while this makes screen redraws faster, it also can potentially increase
RAM requirements by up to 50 percent
20 | Chapter 1: Introduction
Parameter Description
Center on objects after view When the view is changed to one of the standard views (such as Top or Left
change Isometric), automatically centers the view on the extent of the model that was
visible in the previous view; when objects are selected, centers the view on the
selection
Quartz imaging (Macintosh) or Draws lines of equal thickness with round end caps; also provides these features:
GDI+ imaging (Windows) fills in 3D planar objects
variable object opacity
layer transparency
anti-aliasing
object transparency in X-ray Select mode
better support for large-format printouts
PDF export (see Exporting Files on page 764)
Anti-aliasing When Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging is enabled, blends the
edges of fills and lines for a smoother appearance
Use Enhanced Navigation This preference provides more graphical information as you navigate in your
Graphics drawing (for example, during pan, zoom, flyover, and walkthrough). It also
provides more on-screen clarity and detail as you navigate between views.
If your hardware cannot support this feature, it can be deselected.
Display light objects Controls the visibility of light objects; hide light objects to reduce screen clutter
but maintain light effects
Always Light objects are always visible
Only in wireframe Light objects are only visible in Wireframe mode; otherwise, they are hidden
Never Light objects are hidden regardless of the render mode
Display 3D loci Controls the visibility of 3D loci
Always 3D loci are always visible
Only in wireframe 3D loci are only visible in Wireframe mode; otherwise, they are hidden
Never 3D loci are hidden regardless of the render mode
Edit Font Mappings Specifies the replacement fonts for fonts that are not available. Font mappings can
be changed or deleted. If mappings are deleted, the Font Mappings dialog box
appears so that unavailable fonts can be mapped.
Session Preferences
Click the Session tab to set general Vectorworks preferences.
Setting Vectorworks Preferences | 21
Parameter Description
Use sound Supplements the visual SmartCursor cues with audible cues; move the slider bar left
(to reduce) or right (to increase) the program volume relative to the system volume
Log time in program Records in a log file the time spent in the program, as well as the time spent to open
and close documents; the date format depends on the language and regional settings in
the operating system. The log file is called VW User Log.txt, and it is created in the
User Data and Preferences Folder (which displays on the User Folders tab of
Vectorworks preferences).
Display minor alerts on Displays minor warnings on the Message bar instead of in a dialog box
message bar
Run scripts in developer For plug-in development, controls the display of warning messages during script
mode execution. This is a convenient way for advanced developers to speed up the
development process. By default, the scripts of scripted plug-in objects, tools, and
menus are compiled once and stored in memory. The object, tool, or menu command
memory cache is executed when the script is invoked. However, in developer mode,
the script is compiled each time so that script changes are executed immediately and
the developer does not need to restart the application to view changes.
For Python scripts, warning messages are displayed along with Python log data, and
initialization code (extended properties set in the script options) are called on each
run. For VectorScripts, plug-ins are compiled on each run and warning messages are
displayed. Plug-ins may work more slowly when this option is enabled.
Maximum number of Sets how many undo operations are kept in memory; the maximum number of undos
undos is 100
Issue undo warnings Presents a dialog box when an action that cannot be undone is about to be performed
22 | Chapter 1: Introduction
Parameter Description
Undo view changes Sets how the program handles view changes when you undo actions
Never - ignores all operations that are strictly view changes
Grouping All View Changes - treats all consecutive view changes as one single
undoable action
Grouping Similar View Changes - treats similar consecutive view changes as a
single undoable action
Individually - treats each individual view change as an undoable action
Enable palette docking Lets you dock palettes; deselect the option to disable docks and to undock all active
(Windows) palettes
Automatically append file Appends the appropriate file extension (.vwx, or .sta for template files) to a newly
extensions (Macintosh) created drawing file on a Macintosh
Display default content Enables pre-defined content (such as hatches and gradients) to display for selection
throughout the program
Create a new document on Creates a new, untitled file when the program is launched. The new file is based on the
startup Default.sta template file (if one exists); otherwise, it is blank.
Change active layer for When the Create Similar Object command is invoked, changes the active layer to be
Similar Object Creation that of the source object. Select this option to create the new object on the same layer
(Vectorworks Design as the source object. See Creating Similar Objects on page 699 in the Vectorworks
Series required) Design Series Users Guide.
Enable Mac OS restore For Macintosh OS X 10.7 and later, enables the operating system to automatically
windows functionality for restore previously open files when re-launching Vectorworks. Keep this option
Vectorworks (Macintosh) deselected when working with several different versions of Vectorworks, to prevent
older versions from unsuccessfully attempting to open newer version files. This
option is not available on Windows or versions of the Macintosh operating system
prior to 10.7.
Setting Vectorworks Preferences | 23
Parameter Description
Check for updates Select how often the program should check for available software updates. When the
specified update check interval has elapsed, an alert dialog box displays if a new
Service Pack (maintenance release) or major release of the Vectorworks software is
available.
If both a Service Pack and major release are available simultaneously, the system
will send notification about the Service Pack first, followed by notification about
the major release in the next session.
Click More Info (or Tell Me More) in the alert dialog box to open a web browser
to display and download the available update. You must exit the program to
successfully install the software update
If it is not convenient to update the software at this time, click Not Now (or
Remind Me Later) in the alert dialog box. The alert dialog box will redisplay
when the specified update check interval has elapsed.
To disable notifications of a major release until the next major release is available,
click Not Interested.
If the program is unable to connect to the update server, it attempts to connect once a
day for seven days after the original failed attempt. If a connection to the update
server still cannot be established, a dialog box opens to suggest running a manual
update. If the Check for Updates command is run after the automatic update check
fails, the next automatic update check occurs the day after the manual check.
Error reporting Optionally sends information about application crashes and other basic usage
statistics to Nemetschek Vectorworks. Crash details allow our programmers to receive
crash notifications, including the area of the program where the crash occurred. Usage
patterns help us see what events led up to a particular crash.This reporting assists us
with product development while maintaining user privacy; to allay any concerns you
may have, we never see the data in your drawings, and the reporting has no impact on
your software operations.
Serial Numbers Opens the Serial Numbers dialog box to add or remove serial numbers for all installed
Nemetschek Vectorworks products (see Adding and Removing Serial Numbers on
page i)
Reset Saved Settings Reverts to default settings instead of user-specified settings for tool modes, dialog box
positions, and dialog box values. For palette positions and settings, reverts to the
settings established when the custom workspace was created (in the User Data and
Preferences folder).
In the dialog box that opens, select whether to reset settings for always performing the
selected action in alert dialog boxes. Also select whether to reset settings for all tool
modes, dialog box positions, dialog box values, and palette positions and settings.
Click OK to return to the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box.
Palette margins Sets whether the document window leaves a space for palettes when the window is
(Macintosh) opened
3D Preferences
Click the 3D tab to set preferences for 3D edits.
24 | Chapter 1: Introduction
Parameter Description
3D Rotation Sets the detail level that displays while the 3D view is rotated. Select Detailed to display
objects completely, but to rotate slower. Select Responsive to rotate faster, but to display
objects with less detail during the rotation.
Retain Rendering Determines the degree to which the program retains the rendered model in memory during
Model 3D rotation. Select Never to force the model to always display in Wireframe mode; select
Always to force the model to remain rendered.
3D conversion Sets the segmentation resolution used to display curved 3D objects; affects extruded and
resolution swept polylines, circles, and arcs
Use Enhanced Enhanced shadows are highly accurate shadows used in OpenGL rendering with shadows
OpenGL Shadows (Renderworks required). If the graphics card and video hardware is capable of displaying
(Renderworks enhanced shadows in OpenGL, this option should be enabled. A video card which is
required) capable of displaying enhanced shadows, but with 128 MB or less of video RAM (VRAM),
may lead to quality or stability issues during OpenGL rendering with shadows; if this is the
case, disable this option. This option is not available when the video card and/or hardware
is not capable of enhanced OpenGL shadow display.
Use occluded In rendered views, solid objects occlude, or hide, objects behind them. Keep this option
selection and enabled to more easily select, and snap to, solid objects without interference from hidden
snapping geometry. To access hidden geometry, use the X-ray Select mode of the Selection tool, turn
on the clip cube, or switch to Wireframe render mode.
Occluded selection and snapping enabled Occluded selection and snapping disabled
Setting Vectorworks Preferences | 25
Autosave Preferences
Click the Autosave tab to set preferences for automatic file saves and backups.
Parameter Description
Autosave every Enables the Autosave feature; also sets the number of minutes or operations between
autosaves
Confirm before save Before each save, opens a dialog box so that you can choose either to save or to continue
to work without a save. The timer/counter resets regardless of which option is selected.
See Automatically Saving Files on page 48.
Overwrite original file Writes over the original file with the latest changes during a save
Autosave a backup Automatically saves a backup copy of the file either to a folder named VW Backup (in
copy to the same folder as the original file) or to a custom location, such as a network drive (click
Choose to select a folder). The original file is not saved automatically; to save it, use one
of the save commands on the File menu.
Backup files have unique names that include the word Backup and a date and time
stamp appended to the original file name. Use backup file(s) to restore a project if
something happens to the original file.
Keep the ___ most If Autosave a backup copy to is selected, specifies the maximum number of backup
recent backups files to keep; the oldest backup file is replaced when a new backup is made
Interactive Preferences
Click the Interactive tab to set preferences for the display of the interactive drawing features, such as the cursor,
selection boxes, and selection highlighting. See Drawing with Snapping on page 133 for more information about
snapping. See Selection and Pre-selection Indicators on page 66 for more information about highlighting.
26 | Chapter 1: Introduction
Parameter Description
Cursor
Full screen cursor Displays a crosshair cursor that extends to the edges of the drawing area
Show selection box Displays a box beneath the cursor that indicates the active selection area; an object
beneath the box can be selected when the mouse is clicked
Show snap box Displays a box around the cursor that indicates the area in which to find possible snap
points; when a snap point is beneath the box, it can be snapped to
Show acquisition hints Show graphical hints near the cursor when smart points, edges, and vector locks can be
acquired (see Snapping Indicators on page 147)
Selection box size Controls the size of the selection box, if Show selection box is selected; must be
smaller than the snap box. The actual size of the selection box is shown.
Snap box size Controls the size of the snap box, if Show snap box is selected; must be larger than the
selection box. The actual size of the snap box is shown.
Highlighting
Selection highlighting When enabled, objects that are selected are highlighted with the specified colors and
patterns, and square handles indicate points that can be used to reshape objects with the
tool that is currently active.
When this option is disabled, square handles indicate objects that are selected, and the
handles may or may not be reshape points.
Animation If Selection highlighting is selected, specify how the selection highlights will be
animated when the cursor moves out of the drawing window or over a palette:
Off turns off all animation of highlights
On pulses the highlight continuously
Burst briefly highlights with 100% opacity
Cursor pre-selection Highlights any object that can be selected when the cursor is over the object
highlighting
Highlighting timer When a drawing object is beneath the cursor, specifies the number of seconds to delay
before pre-selection highlighting begins
Setting Vectorworks Preferences | 27
Parameter Description
Marquee pre-selection As a selection marquee is drawn over objects, highlights any object that will be
highlighting selected
Snapped object Highlights the geometry that generated the current snap
highlighting
Tool highlighting Highlights any object that can be modified or used by the current tool when the cursor
is over the object
Interactive Appearance Opens a dialog box to change the appearance of the interactive elements in
Settings Vectorworks, including general elements, object highlighting, SmartCursor elements,
and snap points; see Configuring Interactive Display on page 68
Parameter Description
User Data and Preferences Specifies the folder that contains program preferences, log files, workspaces,
Folder and any personal content you create. This might be a folder on the local
computer, or on a USB drive or network drive; this allows you to run
Vectorworks from any computer.
Choose Click Choose to change the user data folder. The program must be restarted if
you change the location of the user data. See User Data and Preferences
Folder on page 28 for details.
Explore (Windows) or Reveal To look at the contents of the current folder, click Explore (to open Windows
in Finder (Macintosh) Explorer) or click Reveal in Finder (to open Macintosh Finder)
To easily access the user folder, use the file list in the Resource Browser. See Accessing Existing Resources on
page 162 for more information.
Display Preferences
Click the Display tab to set the display preferences.
Setting Document Preferences | 31
Parameter Description
Black and white only Draws objects using only the colors black and white (black items display as black, and
all colorsincluding graydisplay as white); this choice overrides any other color
settings (including viewport settings) and is used mainly for printing on black and white
printers.
To create a grayscale effect for prints and PDFs when this feature is enabled, use
pattern fills instead of solid color fills. Set the pattern foreground color to black,
and set the background color to any other color. Patterns 4 through 9 in the pattern
fill selection box display as various shades of gray.
Hide details when layer Select to hide wall components and stair details when the layer is set to, or is below, the
scale < = 1: scale ratio specified (this setting does not affect wall component display in viewports;
see Advanced Sheet Layer Viewport Properties on page 740 to show or hide
components in viewports)
Save viewport cache Indicates whether to save viewport caches in the file; saving the cache may increase file
size, but saves time when files that contain viewports are opened. If deselected, any
viewports will require updating when the file is opened, but file size is reduced. Note
that the viewport cache(s) are already compressed to PNG or JPEG format to save space
(the format depends on the selection in Vectorworks preferences; see Edit Preferences
on page 17 for more information).
Display viewport Choose whether to display a red and white striped border around sheet layer viewports
out-of-date border and design layer section viewports that do not reflect the most recent changes to a
drawing. Regardless of this selection, the Update buttons text displays in red on the
Object Info palette when the viewport needs to be updated (see Status of a Sheet Layer
Viewport on page 741 in this guide and Status of Section Viewports and Section
Lines on page 754 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide).
Save site model cache Stores a filtered copy of the triangulated source data and the existing and proposed site
(Vectorworks Design model(s), so that the site model updates more efficiently. If disabled, updating the site
Series required) model causes the source data to be recalculated, but file size is reduced.
Use layer colors When specific pen and fill colors have been set for a design layer, draws all objects on
that layer with the specified colors (see Setting the Design Layer Color on page 102)
Mesh smoothing with Smooths mesh objects rendered with OpenGL or Renderworks; enter a higher crease
crease angle angle value for a smoother surface (valid values are 0 to 180)
Use automatic drawing Automatically coordinates and updates sheet numbers and drawing numbers among
coordination sheet borders, drawing labels, and section markers
(Vectorworks Design
Series required)
Adjust flipped text Re-orients mirrored, rotated, and flipped text in symbols, plug-in objects, and text
objects so that the text is always readable
32 | Chapter 1: Introduction
Dimension Preferences
Click the Dimensions tab to set the dimension preferences.
Parameter Description
Associate dimensions Associates dimensions with the applicable objects. When a dimension is associated with an
object, the dimension automatically updates when the object it is applied to is modified. For
more information about associative dimensioning, see Dimensioning on page 687.
Auto associate Select this option to automatically associate a dimension to the top-most object when more
than one object shares a dimension endpoint
Create dimensions in Assigns dimensions to the Dimension class as they are created (default setting). If
dimension class deselected, created dimensions are assigned to the active class.
Dimension Standard Select the default Dimension Standard to use, or click Custom to add a custom dimension
standard (see Using Custom Dimension Standards on page 687).
Changing the dimension standard does not affect dimensions that have already been placed
on the drawing.
Dimension Slash Sets the desired Thickness of the slash at each end of a dimension, in points, mils, or
millimeters
Resolution Preferences
Click the Resolution tab to set the resolution preferences.
Parameter Description
Rotated Text Display Sets how rotated text is displayed: Highest quality shows rotated text at the best quality
available, Normal quality shows rotated text slightly jagged, and Bounding box shows
only a bounding box representing the texts location
Bitmap Display Sets how bitmaps are displayed: Full resolution shows bitmaps at the best resolution
available, Reduced resolution shows bitmaps at a reduced detail, and Bounding box
shows only a bounding box representing the bitmaps location. Reduce the resolution to
save time when using the Pan tool or scroll bars.
Output
34 | Chapter 1: Introduction
Parameter Description
Design layer raster Sets the resolution for renderings when the Print command is used.
rendering DPI This setting controls only the design layer Open GL and Renderworks (if installed)
rendering resolution for print; it significantly affects the output file size. Any PICT/PDF
rasterization and Vectorworks geometry will print at the resolution of the printer. For
bitmaps and rendered viewports, each sheet layers DPI setting determines the upper limit
for print resolution. See Setting the Print Resolution on page 86 for more information.
Parameter Description
Screen Plane Only Planar tools operate on the screen plane only; all created 2D objects are set to the screen
plane. When a planar tool is active, only the screen plane can be selected from the Active
Planes list on the View bar.
Working Plane Only Planar tools operate on the active 3D plane, which is usually the layer plane. All created
2D objects are set to the active 3D plane, and when a planar tool is active, the screen plane
cannot be selected from the Active Planes list on the View bar.
Screen Plane or When a planar tool is active, either screen plane or any of the available 3D planes can be
Working Plane selected from the Active Planes list on the View bar
Setting Quick Preferences | 35
Parameter Description
Shadow Settings
Offset Enter a value for the shadow offset
Offset Units Select the shadow offset units.
Factor of Object Height calculates the offset based on the objects height and the
offset value.
Angle Set the shadow angle by entering a value between -180 to 180 or by using the slider.
0 is straight up.
Fill Style Select a fill style for the shadow
Color/Resource/Class Depending on the fill style selected, select a fill color, resource (hatch, image, gradient,
tile), or class for the shadow (see Applying Object Attributes on page 501)
Opacity Set the shadow opacity by entering a value between 0 and 100% or by using the slider
Use Class Opacity Select to use the objects class opacity setting (see Setting Class Properties on
page 109)
Top/Plan Preview Provides a dynamic representation of the shadow values selected
Select the desired item to display its shortcut button on the Tool bar, if it is not already present. A check mark to the left
of an item indicates that it is selected. Buttons display in the order the item was selected, so the first selected item
displays the furthest left on the Tool bar. If the application window is resized, the Tool bar will truncate the display of
buttons when necessary and replace them with ellipses on the right.
Quick Preferences menu
Autosave Displays the Autosave preference button (see Autosave Preferences on page 25)
Black and White Only Displays the Black and White Only preference button (see Display Preferences on
page 30)
Black Background Displays the Black Background preference button (see Display Preferences on
page 18)
Data Bar and Edit Group Displays the Data Bar and Edit Group Options list (see Data Bar and Edit Group
Options Options on page 205)
Context Menus | 37
Hide Details Displays the Hide Details preference button (see Display Preferences on page 30)
Show Acquisition Hints Displays the Show Acquisition Hints preference button (see Interactive Preferences
on page 25)
Show Clip Cube Displays the Show Clip Cube button (see Viewing a Model with the Clip Cube on
page 564)
Show Grid Displays the Show Grid preference button (see Grid Snapping on page 135)
Show Other Objects Displays the Show Other Objects While in Edit Modes preference button (see
While in Edit Modes Display Preferences on page 18)
Show Page Boundary Displays the Show Page Boundary preference button (see Page Setup on page 82)
Show Rulers Displays the Show Rulers preference button (see Display Preferences on page 18)
Use Layer Colors Displays the Use Layer Colors preference button (see Display Preferences on
page 30)
Zoom Line Thickness Displays the Zoom Line Thickness preference button (see Display Preferences on
page 18)
Document Preferences Opens the Document Preferences dialog box (see Setting Document Preferences on
page 30)
Vectorworks Preferences Opens the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box (see Setting Vectorworks Preferences
on page 17)
Context Menus
Click on an object, plug-in object, the drawing area, or a section of the Resource Browser with a right-click (Windows)
or Ctrl-click (Macintosh), to display a menu containing context-sensitive commands that pertain to the selected item or
38 | Chapter 1: Introduction
items. If several similar items are selected, only the applicable context menu commands become available to all the
items in the selection.
Document and object context menus can be customized to include frequently-needed commands; see Modifying
Context Menus on page 873.
Many context menu commands are also available from the menu command lists, and are described in those sections.
However, certain commands are available exclusively from a context menu; these commands are listed here.
This list is not exhaustive, as the capability is continuously being extended to additional commands and tools.
Double-clicking on an object performs the same function as selecting Edit from the context menu (it also reactivates
the working plane on which a planar object was created).
42 | Chapter 1: Introduction
Getting Started 2
This chapter describes how to get started with the Vectorworks Fundamentals product. It describes how to set up basic
program preferences, units, and default options. Printing and using tablets are also described.
Vectorworks searches your user folder, your workgroup folders, and the Vectorworks application folder for
template files. If no templates are found anywhere on the system, the Create Document dialog box does not open.
Instead, a blank new document is created automatically.
Opening a File
There are three ways to open a file that already exists. Up to eight files can be open at once in the program.
To open a file that already exists:
1. Select File > Open.
The Open dialog box opens.
2. Select the name of the file or template to open.
3. Click Open.
The program opens the last saved version of the selected drawing file.
To open a file that was recently used:
Select File > Open Recent and select a name from the list of the last 20 files that were opened or saved.
The file is opened; if the file is already open, it is moved to the front of the screen to become the current file.
To open a file from the operating system:
Double-click a file directly in Windows Explorer or Macintosh Finder.
If multiple versions of the Vectorworks program are installed, when you double-click to open a Vectorworks file
from the operating system, the results may vary for Windows and Macintosh.
44 | Chapter 2: Getting Started
Windows
On Windows, file associations are determined in the Vectorworks File Associations dialog box.
If Vectorworks file types have been associated with a particular copy of Vectorworks in the Vectorworks File
Associations dialog box, double-clicking a file opens it in that particular version of Vectorworks.
If the Vectorworks File Associations dialog box specifies that current Vectorworks file associations remain in
place, double-clicking a file opens the file in the version of Vectorworks with which it is associated.
Macintosh
If multiple versions of Vectorworks are currently open, double-clicking a file opens the file in whichever
version of Vectorworks you opened first.
If multiple versions of Vectorworks are installed but not open, double-clicking a file opens the file in the latest
version of Vectorworks.
The Vectorworks program can open files that were created in MiniCAD 7 or in Vectorworks versions 8 and above.
Files that were created in versions earlier than MiniCAD 7 must be converted to at least version 7, with a version of the
program that is earlier than version 12. If an earlier version of the program is not available, contact Nemetschek
Vectorworks Sales Support for assistance.
When a user attempts to open a file that another user already has open, an alert displays the name of the user who has
the file open and where it is open; additional information about the file can be displayed, including its path, when it was
opened, and how long it has been open.
Parameter Description
Replace Automatically populates when an original font is selected
With Lists the default font and all available system fonts (the default font is the system font for
the computer on which the program is installed)
Original Font Lists the unavailable font used in the file
Replacement Font Lists the font that will be used to replace the original font
New Mappings Lists fonts that have not previously been mapped
All Mappings Lists all fonts regardless of whether they have been previously mapped
Preview image
Vectorworks
Preview version used to
thumbnail create file
Closing a File
To close the current file:
1. Select File > Close or click the close box on the drawing window.
2. If the file changed since it was last saved, click Save (Macintosh) or Yes (Windows) to save and close the file.
Click Dont Save (Macintosh) or No (Windows) to close the file without a save.
To close all open files (Windows only):
1. Select Window > Close All.
2. If the files changed since they were last saved, click Yes to save and close the files. Click No to close the files
without a save.
Saving a File
The Save command saves the open file, which replaces the earlier version of the file. When you save a file for the first
time, specify the file name and location. The Save command is disabled if no changes have been made to the file since
it was first opened or created.
On Windows, the files require a .vwx or .mcd extension to be recognized by the Vectorworks program. If you do
not enter an extension, the program adds the .vwx extension automatically.
To save the current file:
1. Select File > Save.
If the file has not been saved before, the Save Vectorworks Drawing dialog box opens.
2. Enter a name for the file in the Name field, and then select the destination for the file.
3. Click Save.
48 | Chapter 2: Getting Started
The program saves the file. The time required may depend on the file size.
Save As
To save the current file with a different name:
1. Select File > Save As.
The Save Vectorworks Drawing dialog box opens.
2. Enter a new Name for the file, and then select the destination for the file.
3. Click Save.
The program saves a new copy of the file. The time required may depend on the file size.
Save a Copy As
To save a copy of the current file and continue to edit the current file:
1. Select File > Save A Copy As.
The Save dialog box opens.
2. Enter a new Name for the file, and then select the destination for the file.
3. Click Save.
The program saves a new copy of the file and keeps the original file open for further edits. The time required may
depend on the file size.
Parameter Description
Yes Saves the file; if the document has not been saved, the Save dialog box opens to name the file first
No Cancels the save operation and resets the autosave counters
Settings Opens the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box to edit the autosave parameters; select Dont backup
this document for the remainder of the session to disable the autosave feature for the active
document for the remainder of the session
Reverting to the Last Saved Version | 49
When the save is complete, the message Autosave complete displays in the lower right corner of the window; the
message clears when you click the mouse.
3. Select the type(s) of objects to convert to the new format, and then click OK.
All older version objects of the selected type(s) are converted into the new format.
Parameter Description
Source Folder Click Choose to open either the Choose Source Folder dialog box (Macintosh) or the
Browse for Folder dialog box (Windows). Select the folder that contains the files you
want to convert, and then click Choose (Macintosh) or OK (Windows) to return to the
Batch Convert dialog box.
Destination Folder To place the converted files into a different folder, click Choose to open either the
Choose Destination Folder dialog box (Macintosh) or the Browse for Folder dialog box
(Windows). Select the folder, and then click Choose (Macintosh) or OK (Windows) to
return to the Batch Convert dialog box. Then deselect Convert in place.
Include subfolders Converts the files within the subfolders of the source folder
Convert in place Moves the original Vectorworks files to an archive folder, and places the newly
converted files in the original source file locations. The archive folder is created within
the source folder and is named Old Version Vectorworks Files.
Deselect this option to place the converted files in the destination folder and make no
changes to the source folder.
Convert layer links into Creates viewports on design layers that reference one or more layers within the same
viewports file. Select this option to convert any layer links in the older version files into viewports.
(Vectorworks Design See Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports on page 723 in the
Series required) Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Convert referenced Creates viewports on design layers that reference one or more layers in an external file.
layers into referenced Select this option to convert any referenced layers in the older version files into
viewports viewports. See Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports on page 723 in the
(Vectorworks Design Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Series required)
Convert absolute Converts workgroup references with absolute file paths to relative file paths, if a relative
references into relative file path is allowed. A relative file path is not allowed if the file is on a different volume
references from the referenced file.
(Vectorworks Design
Series required)
Parameter Description
Total files in source folder The total number of files contained in the specified source folder
Total files successfully The total number of files successfully converted by the Batch Convert command
converted
Total current version files The total number of files that were already in the current version of the Vectorworks
copied program; if Convert in place is selected, the files are left in place in the original
folder; if Convert in place is not selected, the files are copied to the destination folder
Total files not converted The total number of files that were not converted
Not a Vectorworks file The number of files that were not converted because they were not Vectorworks files
Damaged files The number of files that were not converted because they damaged in some way and
could not be opened and processed
Unsupported The number of files that were not converted because they were MiniCAD 6 or an
Vectorworks file version earlier version, which is not supported by the Batch Convert command
Unknown reasons The number of files that were not converted, for which the program could not detect a
reason
One or more files had This message indicates that one or more of the successfully converted files contained a
solid conversion errors solid that could not be properly generated by the Parasolid kernel. Check the log file to
see which files had solid conversion failures. You may be able to edit the converted
geometry and regenerate the solids.
5. Click Details to view a log file with information about each file processed during the conversion.
Converting Previous Version Files | 53
Parameter Description
Keep the original file name with Select which file will have the original file name: the original file or the new
the file
Convert layer links into viewports Creates viewports on design layers that reference one or more layers within the
(Vectorworks Design Series same file. Select this option to convert any layer links in the older file into
required) viewports. See Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports on
page 723 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Convert referenced layers into Creates viewports on design layers that reference one or more layers in an
referenced viewports external file. Select this option to convert any referenced layers in the older
(Vectorworks Design Series version file into viewports. See Presenting Drawings with Design Layer
required) Viewports on page 723 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Convert absolute references into Converts workgroup references with absolute file paths to relative file paths, if
relative references a relative file path is allowed. A relative file path is not allowed if the file is on
(Vectorworks Design Series a different volume from the referenced file.
required)
3. Specify the conversion settings and click OK to save the change; future file conversions will use this setting.
4. In the conversion alert box, click OK to continue with the conversion.
5. If the file contains a solid that could not be properly generated by the Parasolid kernel, an alert displays to this
effect.
You may be able to edit the converted geometry and regenerate the solid. (See Converting Previous Version
Files on page 49 for more information.)
Exiting Vectorworks
To close the Vectorworks program along with any open files:
1. From the File menu (Windows) or Vectorworks menu (Macintosh), select Quit.
2. If there are any unsaved files, click Save (Macintosh) or Yes (Windows) to save the changes and exit. Click Dont
Save (Macintosh) or No (Windows) to exit without a save.
Drawing Techniques
Objects are created using the mouse, the keyboard, or a mouse and keyboard combination.
In click-drag mode, click and continue to hold down the mouse button while you create an object; release the button
when the object is the desired size and shape.
1st click
Release
In click-click mode, click the mouse to mark the start point of an object, and then click again at each of the objects
corners or vertices.
1st click
2nd click
The program defaults to click-click mode, and all procedures in this guide are based on click-click drawing. This
preference can be changed in Vectorworks preferences.
Use the Data bar for accurate object placement and creation. See Using the Data Bar on page 203.
Rectangle
Tool
Undoing Actions
One or more of the most recent actions can be undone. Specify the number of actions that can be undone on the Session
tab of Vectorworks preferences. See Session Preferences on page 20 for information on this tab. The maximum
number of actions that can be undone is 100. Select Issue undo warnings to open a warning dialog box when
attempting to undo an action that cannot be undone.
To undo recent changes:
Select Edit > Undo.
The most recent change is undone. Continue to select the Undo command to undo changes in the reverse order in
which they were performed.
The higher the maximum number of undos, the more memory may be required.
Redoing Actions
Actions that have been undone can then be redone. The number of actions that can be redone is determined by how
many undos were performed.
To redo actions that were undone:
Select Edit > Redo.
The most recent undo is reversed and the action is executed again. Continuing to select the Redo command will
redo changes in the reverse order that they were undone.
Moving Around
There are several ways to move around within a drawing file, which allows you to look at the whole drawing or at
select portions of it.
Panning
Use the Pan tool to move the drawing around the drawing window, changing the area of display. When in an uncropped
perspective projection, the Pan tool moves the viewpoint in the model while the line of sight remains centered in the
window; see Perspective on page 552.
Paste in Place works from user origin. If the page is moved, the image is placed in relation to the origin, not the new
page location.
58 | Chapter 2: Getting Started
Double-click the Move Page tool to set the page origin to be the same as the user origin.
Zooming
Zoom controls the visual scale of a drawing. It does not affect the physical size of objects as set by the layer scale in the
Organization dialog box. Like a magnifying glass, zoom controls how close or far away objects appear on the screen.
Zoom in to get a close-up view of a detail, and zoom out to get a broader view of the whole drawing.
During a zoom operation, the drawing continues to display normally if possible. A complex drawing may not display in
full detail during a zoom operation, but as soon as the zoom is complete, the drawing displays normally. When in an
uncropped perspective projection, zooming moves the viewpoint in the model while the line of sight remains centered
in the window; see Perspective on page 552.
The Vectorworks program includes zoom functionality through the mouse wheel, through buttons on the View bar, and
through the Zoom tool on the Basic palette.
Marquee Interactive
Mode Description
Marquee Magnifies the portion of the drawing that is within the marquee area; in click-drag mode,
simply click once (do not create a marquee box) to double the zoom factor.
To zoom out, hold down the Option (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) key during the zoom.
Interactive Interactively zooms the drawing area
Moving Around | 59
With the Zoom tool selected, double-click anywhere in the drawing to automatically activate the Selection tool.
Double-click the Zoom tool from the Basic palette to double the magnification of the drawing. The Zoom In
button on the View bar performs the same action.
Marquee Mode
Select a portion of the drawing to magnify using marquee selection.
To marquee zoom:
To zoom out, hold down the Option (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) key while you draw a marquee box around a portion
of the drawing. Click again to zoom out. The program reduces the magnification to display additional portions of the
drawing around the selected section.
Interactive Mode
Choose an area of the drawing to magnify interactively.
To interactively zoom:
Normal Scale
The Normal Scale command automatically displays the drawing file at 100% of its real-world scale. For example, if a
drawing scale is set to 1:1, every inch on the monitor corresponds to an inch on paper. Normal scale is the scale at
which the drawing is printed.
To set the drawing to normal scale:
1. Select View > Zoom > Normal Scale.
Vectorworks changes the view so that the objects screen size and print size are the same.
2. If the drawing size is larger than the monitors dimensions, scroll or pan around the drawing to see all elements.
Scrolling
Automatically Scrolling While Drawing
The Vectorworks program automatically scrolls the drawing area when an object is being drawn.
To use autoscroll:
1. Select any drawing tool.
2. Press and hold down the mouse button to begin drawing.
3. Drag the cursor on top of or past a scroll bar or ruler.
The drawing window scrolls in the direction of the cursor.
In click-click mode, if you do not hold down the mouse button while you draw, the autoscroll is halted if the cursor
passes a scroll bar or ruler; this allows interaction with the scroll bars, tool palettes, and tool sets.
Selecting Objects
Use the Selection tool from the Basic palette to select objects for the next command or edit operation. The Shift key
and the Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) key are modifiers for selection actions. Create rectangular, lasso, or
polygonal marquees around objects to select single or multiple objects. The following table describes the various
selection methods.
To deselect all selected objects, double-click on the Selection tool, click in an empty area of the drawing, or press the
x key twice in rapid succession.
Mode Description
Disabled Interactive Scaling No reshape handles display for a selected object, so that it can be dragged from any
point without accidentally affecting its size
Single Object Interactive Allows resizing by dragging a reshape handle that displays on a single selected
Scaling object.
Allows symbols to be scaled, similar to the Scaling option in the Object Info palette,
unless the Allow Interactive 2D symbol scaling Vectorworks preference has been
disabled; see Edit Preferences on page 17.
Page-based symbols can only be scaled symmetrically.
To rotate certain objects (such as rectangles, rounded rectangles, ovals, text objects,
bitmaps, and PICT images), press the Option key (Macintosh) or Alt key (Windows)
while dragging a reshape handle.
Unrestricted Interactive Allows resizing of multiple objects by dragging a reshape handle that displays on
Scaling one of the selected object(s)
Drag the middle
handle to the right to
reduce the width of
both rectangles
Wall Insertion Allows symbols and plug-in objects that are already on drawing to be placed into a
wall segment. When disabled, symbols can be moved next to or on a wall without
becoming part of the wall. See Wall Insertion Mode on page 179 for more
information.
Rectangular Marquee Creates a marquee box around objects when selecting. Click to set the start point,
drag the mouse in the desired direction, and release to set the end point. All objects
within the marquee are selected.
Selecting Objects | 63
Mode Description
Lasso Marquee Creates a free-form marquee, allowing a more exact selection of irregular shapes.
Click to set the start point, drag the mouse in the desired direction, and release to set
the end point. All objects within the marquee are selected.
Polygonal Marquee Creates a marquee with an irregular polygonal shape. Click to set the start point, and
then continue clicking to define the shape. Double-click to finish the marquee. All
objects within the marquee are selected.
To select objects:
Select All
The Select All command selects all visible objects in editable layers and classes. The active layer is always editable,
but other layers can be editable if they are visible and if the Layer Options are set to Show/Snap/Modify Others. For
more information about setting layer and class visibility and layer and class options, see Setting Visibilities on
page 118 and Setting Class and Design Layer Options on page 114.
To select all objects in the drawing area:
Select Edit > Select All.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the drawing area, and select Select All from the
document context menu.
The program selects all visible objects that can be modified. Each of these selected objects is displayed with
highlighting. Locked objects are also selected so they can be unlocked for modification.
Previous Selection
The Previous Selection command reselects the set of objects that were most recently selected. This is especially useful
if a large number of objects were accidentally deselected.
64 | Chapter 2: Getting Started
You can then use either the Coincident Selection key or the Select Coincident Objects command from the context
menu to open a dialog box from which you can select the appropriate objects. Coincident selection can work in
conjunction with X-ray Select mode when coincident objects are hidden by rendered solids (see X-ray Select Mode
on page 64).
To select one or more coincident objects:
1. Click the Selection tool from the Basic palette.
2. When the cursor indicates that multiple objects are available beneath it, press and hold the Coincident Selection
key (J by default) and click the drawing. Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) and select
Select Coincident Objects from the object context menu.
The Coincident Selection key can be changed in the Workspace Editor; see Modifying Snapping and Mode
Shortcuts on page 876.
3. The Select dialog box opens. Each object available for selection at that point displays in a list, in top to bottom
stacking order.
4. Click to select one or more items from the list; the selected objects are highlighted in the drawing.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box and select the objects.
Alternatively, double-click an item from the list to select it in the drawing.
In addition to the Selection tool, the X-ray Select mode can be used with other tools that require the selection of
objects, such as the Eyedropper, Visibility, and Select Similar tools. GDI+ imaging (Windows) or Quartz imaging
(Macintosh) must be enabled in the Display tab of the Vectorworks preferences for this feature to work.
To see and select objects with the X-ray Select mode:
1. Click the Selection tool from the Basic palette.
2. Press and hold the X-ray Select mode key (the B key, by default). In Top/Plan view, all 2D objects that have a fill
become semi-transparent (edge lines are unaffected); in a 3D view, rendered objects display in Wireframe mode
near the cursor.
The X-ray Select mode key can be changed in the Workspace Editor; see Modifying Snapping and Mode
Shortcuts on page 876.
The opacity of fills in X-ray Select mode can be changed in the Interactive Appearance Settings dialog box; see
Configuring Interactive Display on page 68.
3. Click or Shift-click to select objects as needed. Objects are selected the same way they are normally, except that a
filled object that is beneath another object behaves as if it has no fill; you must click the edge of the object to select
it.
4. Release the key to exit X-ray Select mode.
Layer 1 has an exterior view of a building made from filled Layer 2 has a section view of the same building, also
objects. Even though the layer options are set to Show/ made from filled objects. When the X-ray Select mode
Snap/Modify Others, the objects on Layer 2 are not visible key is pressed, all filled objects become transparent.
and cannot be selected by clicking with the Selection tool. The objects on Layer 2 are visible and can be selected
by clicking with the Selection tool.
66 | Chapter 2: Getting Started
Highlighting
Highlighting can indicate the following information about an object in a drawing.
Currently selected
Currently pre-selected because it is under the cursor (or within the selection marquee)
Locked
On an inactive layer
Causing one of the displayed snap points
Can be acted upon by the currently active tool
In the Vectorworks preferences, there are several options to customize the highlighting.
The different types of highlighting can be enabled and disabled individually.
The highlighting for selected objects can be animated.
The timing of the highlighting for pre-selected objects can be adjusted.
The color, opacity, and size of each type of highlighting can be adjusted.
By default, all highlighting options are enabled, and selected objects display as shown in the following illustration.
In a rendered 3D view, solid objects occlude or hide objects behind them. Highlighting of occluded objects is set, by
default, to be less opaque than that of objects not occluded behind other objects.
Selecting Objects | 67
Handles
In addition to highlighting, square handles can display on selected objects. The appearance of the handles is
controlled by the Selection highlighting setting on the Interactive tab in the Vectorworks preferences. Also, the colors
of the handles can be customized.
If selection highlighting is enabled (the default setting):
Handles display on a selected object if the object can be edited with the active tool
Unlocked objects on the active layer have blue handles
Unlocked objects on an inactive layer have white handles
Locked objects have no handles (since they cannot be edited)
Handles can be used as reshape points
If selection highlighting is disabled:
Handles display on all selected objects
Unlocked objects on the active layer have blue handles
Locked objects on the active layer have gray handles
All objects on an inactive layer have white handles
Some of the handles can be used as reshape points, and some cannot, depending on the object, and on which tool
is active
Selection highlighting enabled Selection highlighting disabled
The selected wall is highlighted in With three walls selected, the locked With three walls selected, the locked
orange; blue handles indicate that wall (bottom) is highlighted in gray; there wall (bottom) has a gray handle on the
the wall can be reshaped with the are no handles because the objects right side; the unlocked walls have blue
active tool cannot be reshaped with the active tool handles
68 | Chapter 2: Getting Started
Background - Perspective Sets the ground color and ground horizon color when
Horizon Ground in non-cropped perspective view; the foreground color
gradually transitions to the background color as a
gradient in the direction of the horizon
Background - Perspective Sets the sky color and sky horizon color when in
Horizon Sky non-cropped perspective view; the foreground color
gradually transitions to the background color as a
gradient in the direction of the horizon
Background - Top/Plan Sets the background color of the drawing area for
(Standard Background only) design layers in Top/Plan view
Editing Modes Border Sets the color, opacity, and thickness of the colored
border when in an editing mode
Page Boundary Sets the color and opacity of the page boundary border
70 | Chapter 2: Getting Started
Repeated
object
Reshape Handles - Active Sets the color of the square handles that can be dragged
Layer to reshape a selected object on the active layer
Reshape Handles - Inactive Sets the color of the square handles that can be dragged
Layer to reshape a selected object on an inactive layer
Working Plane Sets the color of the working plane and opacity of its
fill and frame, as well as the opacity and thickness of
the working plane axes
X-ray Select Mode Sets the opacity of the objects in X-ray Select mode
Object Highlighting
Action Sets the color, opacity, and thickness of the
highlighting for objects being modified
SmartCursor
Acquisition Hints Sets the color, opacity, and thickness of the graphical
hints which display near the cursor to show when a
smart point, smart edge, or vector lock can be acquired
or released
Datum Indicator Sets the color, opacity and thickness of the datum
indicator
Extension Lines - Angle Sets the color, opacity and thickness of angle extension
lines
Extension Lines - Smart Sets the color, opacity and thickness of smart point
Point alignment lines (the selected color may be overridden
by the default X, Y, and Z axis colors)
72 | Chapter 2: Getting Started
Selection Box Sets the color, opacity, and thickness of the selection
box around the SmartCursor
Smart Edges Sets the color, opacity and thickness of smart edge lines
Smart Points Sets the color, opacity, and thickness of smart points
Snap Box Sets the color, opacity, and thickness of the snap box
around the SmartCursor
Vector Locks Sets the color, opacity, and thickness of vector locks
Snap Points
Available Sets the color, opacity, and thickness of snap points
available near the cursor and within the snap box
Congestion Indicator Sets the color, opacity, and thickness of the snap box
when there are too many available snap points around
the SmartCursor (using the snap loupe is recommended
in this situation; see Using the Snap Loupe on
page 150)
Current Sets the color, opacity, and thickness of the current
snap indicator
Obtained Sets the color, opacity, and thickness of the acquired
snap point
Setting Up the Drawing | 73
3. Click the column heading to sort by interface element, if desired. Select the element to change, and then set the
parameters that display to the right of the element list as needed. Different parameters display, depending on the
element selected.
Parameter Description
Pattern / ForeColor / BackColor To use a solid color, select the color from the ForeColor menu; then from the
Pattern menu, select the solid pattern for that color
To use a pattern, select the ForeColor and BackColor colors from the menus
(see Selecting a Color from a Color Palette on page 543); then select a
Pattern
Color Select the color from the menu (see Selecting a Color from a Color Palette on
page 543)
Opacity Drag the slider right to increase or left to decrease the opacity of the interactive
element
Size Drag the slider right to increase or left to decrease the width of the interactive
element
world. The scaling value allows the proper representation of attributes such as line thickness, line type, marker size,
text size, and hatches.
In What You See Is What You Get (WYSIWYG) drawing, an intended output scale is needed to properly display
these attributes; this allows you to see how the drawing will look at that intended format. For practical use, set the layer
scale to be the same as that of the predominant output scale of the project. This will necessitate the least amount of
attribute scaling in viewports.
Vectorworks can set one scale for all design layers in a drawing, or set a different scale for individual design layers.
1. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) in the drawing area to access the document context menu, and
then select Active Layer Scale. Alternatively, if the layer scale is displayed on the View bar, click the Layer
Scale button.
The Layer Scale dialog box opens.
5. To scale text proportionally to the rest of the design layer, select Scale Text. Deselect Scale Text to keep the text
at its current size even if the scale changes.
6. Make sure that All Layers is not selected.
7. Click OK.
Units
The Vectorworks program provides a wide range of measurement systems to select from and also provides the
flexibility to create a customized measurement system. The selected measurement system is applied globally
throughout the drawing, from the measurements that display on the rulers to those used in dimensions and worksheets.
The Units command opens the Units dialog box, which organizes units settings on two tabbed panes:
The General Display and Dimensions tab settings affect the units throughout the drawing and the rounding
settings for primary dimensions.
The Dual Dimensions tab contains many of the same parameters found on the General Display and Dimensions
tab, but its settings apply only to secondary dimensions. If dual dimensions are not being used, these settings have
no effect. For more information on dual dimensioning, see Dual Dimensioning on page 698.
Parameter Description
Length
Units Select the desired length measurement system from the list.
If this setting is changed from one metric unit to a different metric unit, the
Decimal precision and Dimension object precision values are automatically
scaled by the same ratio, to maintain the same inherent precision the document
had before. If the setting is changed from a non-metric unit to a metric unit, the
precision values are automatically set to new default values suitable for the
selected metric unit.
Custom If the Custom unit is selected, click Custom to create a custom length measurement
system; see Creating a Custom Unit System on page 77
Show Unit Mark Select to display the unit mark along with the unit value; if the Feet & Inches unit is
selected, Vectorworks automatically displays unit marks and therefore, Show Unit
Mark is unavailable
Show Thousands Select to display a thousands separator in the values of dimension objects; the
Separators in Dimension separator used (a period or comma) depends on the current regional setting in the
Text operating system
Separators are for display only; they are not used in the Object Info palette, or in
the dimension text as it is being edited
Rounding Style Rounding only affects how numbers are displayed; if the number 1.23456 is entered
with a rounding of .00, the value is recognized as 1.23456 but displays as 1.23
Fractional Select for fractional rounding
Decimal Select for decimal rounding
Exact as Fractions / Select for a combination of fractional and decimal rounding
Non-Exact as Decimals
Fractional Display for If a fractional Rounding Style was selected, select a style for the fractions that appear
Dimensions in dimensions:
Standard:
Diagonally stacked:
Vertically stacked:
Rounding Precision
Fraction precision If a fractional or combination Rounding Style was selected, select the fractional
precision value, up to 1/64
Decimal precision If a decimal or combination Rounding Style was selected, select up to ten digits of
decimal precision
Dimension object Select a precision value for dimension objects; to link the dimension value to the
precision fraction or decimal precision value, click the link button to the right of the precision
fields:
Decimal rounding base Select whether decimal rounding is performed using multiples of tenths, quarters, or
halves; the option selected is reflected in the Decimal precision field
Setting Up the Drawing | 77
Parameter Description
Dimension rounding Select whether dimension rounding is performed using multiples of tenths, quarters,
base or halves; to link the dimension value to the decimal base value, click the link button
to the right of the rounding base fields:
Decimal Options
Leading Zero If one of the decimal rounding options is chosen, select to display a leading zero
Trailing Zeros If one of the decimal rounding options is chosen, select to display trailing zero(s)
Area / Volume / Angle
Units Select the area, volume, and angular measurement system from the list.
If this setting is changed from one metric unit to a different metric unit, the
Precision value is automatically scaled by the same ratio, to maintain the same
inherent precision the document had before. If the setting is changed from a
non-metric unit to a metric unit, the precision value is automatically set to a new
default value suitable for the selected metric unit.
Custom If the Custom area or volume unit is selected, click Custom to create a custom area or
volume measurement system; see Creating a Custom Unit System on page 77
Precision For area and volume measurement systems, select up to ten digits of decimal
precision. For angular measurement systems, select to display angular units in degrees
(there are 360 degrees in a circle, and the angle mark is ), radians (there are 2pi
radians in a circle, and the angle mark is r), or gradians (there are 400 gradians in a
circle, and the angle mark is g); also, select up to eight digits of angular precision or
specify degrees, minutes, and/or seconds.
Parameter Description
Unit Name Name given to the custom measurement systemfor example, Cubit
Unit Mark Mark (abbreviation) used to represent a unit in the custom measurement systemfor
example, cbt
Smaller from Larger Set the number of custom units that occur per selected unitfor example, There Are 2
Units Per Inch
Larger from Smaller Set the number of selected units that occur per custom unitfor example, There Are 2
Inches Per Unit
Reference Snap
Grid Grid
The Snap Grid assists with drawing and placing objects precisely. The snap grid appears as small dots when zoomed
in, depending on the snap grid dimensions. The snap grid is used in combination with the Snap to Grid snapping
option on the Snapping palette. As the mouse moves across the screen, it automatically catches at each increment on
the snap grid. When you are placing or drawing an object, it snaps to the grid.
With shortcut keys, objects can be moved constrained to the snap grid. See Edit Preferences on page 17 for more
information.
Setting Up the Drawing | 79
The Reference Grid normally displays on the screen (depending on the zoom factor and grid dimensions), and can be
printed. The most useful way to set the reference grid is so that it is an extension of the set scale.
Depending on the drawing, the snap and reference grids can have identical or different dimensions. For example, if you
are designing kitchen cabinets with a tolerance of one-sixteenth of an inch, set the snap grid to 1/16. It would be hard
to draw on a screen that displayed 16 horizontal and vertical lines squeezed within every inch. For that reason, you
might want to mark off only whole inches on the screen by setting the reference grid to 1.
At file setup, establish the snap and reference grid settings based on the drawing scale. See Grid Snapping on
page 135. The color of the reference grid can be changed; see Configuring Interactive Display on page 68.
Guides
The Make Guide command enables the placement of guidelines which can be used to visually align objects in the
drawing. Guides can be any shape and size. In addition to providing visual clues, guides work with the SmartCursor to
ensure precise alignment. Guide objects are locked into a class called Guides and are colored light purple. Guides are
printed unless the Hide Guides command is selected, or the Delete All Guides command has permanently removed
them.
To create a guide:
1. Create the object to become a guide.
2. Select the object.
3. Select Modify > Guides > Make Guide.
The object changes into a guide and is placed in a Guides class.
On the Guides command submenu, the following options can be selected.
Option Description
Make Guides The object becomes a guide
Select Guides Selects all the guides in a drawing
Show Guides Displays guides which were hidden
Hide Guides Temporarily hides the guides in the drawing
Delete all Guides Permanently removes all guides and the objects used to create them
You can snap objects to the guide(s) closest to it by using Snap to Object from the Snapping palette. The distance
at which the objects snap to the guides is determined by the Snap box size setting in the Vectorworks preferences.
See Interactive Preferences on page 25 for details on setting the snap radius setting.
To delete a single guide, highlight it and then select Modify > Unlock. The guide is now editable. Select Edit > Clear
to remove it from the drawing. A guide can also be unlocked in order to move it to a new location. Select Modify >
Lock to lock the guide into place once it is relocated.
80 | Chapter 2: Getting Started
Set Origin
Use the Set Origin command to change the placement of the origin in the drawing area. The working plane is also
moved to the layer plane origin. The origin is the point where the X and Y axes meet (0,0). Its default placement is at
the center of the drawing area.
All design layers have the same origin, but each sheet layer has its own origin, independent of the other layers.
To set the origin:
1. To set the origin for a specific sheet layer, select the sheet layer first.
Alternatively, edit the sheet layer properties from the Organization palette.
2. For design layers, make sure the active layer is in Top/Plan view.
3. Select Tools > Set Origin. The Set Origin dialog box opens.
Alternatively, double-click the Set Origin button (see Set Origin Button on page 81).
Parameter Description
Set Origin to Next Mouse Changes the cursor to a bulls-eye cursor; click to set the origin to any point within
Click the drawing area
Set Origin to Drawing Center Sets the origin to the internal drawing center; the drawing center is a fixed internal
point used to position all objects
Next Mouse Click Is Sets the clicked point to specific coordinates. After selecting this option, enter the
X and Y coordinates of the point. The origin is set according to the values entered
when clicking a locus point or another reference point. This option is most useful
for drawings that have a distant reference point.
Disable dragging for the Set Disables the Set Origin button, to prevent the origin from being moved
Origin button inadvertently
4. Click OK.
Creating Templates
Save a drawing file as a template to use it as a foundation for new files. Templates save layers, classes, title blocks,
sheet borders, resources, and the current settings for attributes and units. (See Creating a New File on page 43 for
details about using a template.)
When a template is opened, the Vectorworks program automatically opens a copy of the file. When the new drawing is
saved the first time, the program prompts for a new file name. This makes it impossible to accidentally replace the
master template with the new drawing file.
To create a template:
1. Start with a new, empty file.
2. Set up the file with all of the desired elements.
3. Select File > Save As Template.
4. Enter the name of the template (.sta) file and place it in an appropriate Templates folder. (See User Folders
Preferences on page 27 for details about how to specify the folder for your user data.)
To save the template for personal use, place it in the Templates subfolder in your user data folder: [User]/
Libraries/Defaults/Templates.
If Vectorworks Design Series products are installed, you can share the template with other users in a
workgroup. To do so, place it in the Templates subfolder of a workgroup folder on a network drive; other users
can then specify that workgroup folder in their Vectorworks preferences: [Workgroup]/Libraries/Defaults/
Templates.
82 | Chapter 2: Getting Started
The .sta extension is required for Windows. It is recommended for use on the Macintosh if the file will be shared
with Windows users.
5. Click Save.
The program launches with a blank drawing file, in 1:1 scale. To launch the program with a file containing different
settings, name the template file Default.sta and save it in the Templates subfolder in your user data folder: [User]/
Libraries/Defaults/Templates.
Printing
The Print Area
Within the drawing area is a colored border which defines the print area. Anything within the print area is printed and
anything outside of the print area is not printed.
Print area
Drawing area
The settings from both the Page Setup and Printer Setup dialog boxes determine the number of sheets of paper (pages)
required to print the entire drawing on the selected printer.
This allows the same drawing to be printed or plotted to numerous sources without readjusting the drawing. For
example, if you enter the dimensions of a D size sheet of technical paper in the Printable Area of the Page Setup
dialog box, and select Letter paper size in the Printer Setup dialog box, the program determines that the drawing
needs to be tiled across 12 sheets of 8-1/2 x 11 paper to a standard laser printer. The number of 8-1/2 x 11 pages
required for printing horizontally and vertically are automatically updated in the Page Setup dialog box. To send this
same drawing to a plotter, change the settings in the Page Setup dialog box for a plotter, and the program converts the
pages required accordingly.
The color of the print area border can be changed; see Configuring Interactive Display on page 68.
The page setup (including the printable area) is specified individually for each sheet layer (see Setting Sheet
Layer Properties on page 104).
Page Setup
The Page Setup dialog box settings determine the number of sheets of paper (pages) required to print the entire drawing
on the selected printer. It is also used to specify whether to display the gray drawing boundary box representing the
print area for design layers, and whether to display page breaks in the drawing file.
To change the page setup settings:
1. Select File > Page Setup.
The Page Setup dialog box opens.
Printing | 83
Parameter Description
Pages
Horizontal Specify the number of pages in the horizontal direction
Vertical Specify the number of pages in the vertical direction
Show page boundary Select to display a gray border around the perimeter of the print area for design layers
(this setting is selected by default); alternatively, press Alt+B (Windows) or
Command+B (Macintosh) to toggle selection in this field. This setting also affects the
visibility of the page boundary in a unified view.
Sheet layers always display the page boundary.
Show page breaks Indicates how the drawing is divided over each printable page; for design layers, the
page boundary must be displayed in order to see the page breaks (this setting is
selected by default)
Show watermarks If the file is created in an educational version of Vectorworks software, it includes a
watermark. This option is selected by default and indicates whether to display
watermarks on screen, at the top and bottom of every page boundary; the page
boundary must be displayed in order to see the watermarks.
The title bar clearly indicates watermarked files. A watermarked file always
prints the watermark, regardless of the display option set here.
Printable Area
Choose size unavailable If the desired paper size is not available in the Printer Setup dialog box (see Printer
in printer setup Setup on page 83), select this option, and then select the desired paper Size from the
list; this is useful when sending files to a print bureau that has different paper sizes
available than your printer
Size/Width/Height To manually specify the paper size, select the appropriate drawing units (inch or
millimeter) and enter the paper Width and Height
Printer Setup Accesses the Printer Setup dialog box for specifying the printer, paper size, drawing
scale, and orientation; see Printer Setup on page 83
Printer Setup
The Printer Setup dialog box settings determine the printer, paper size, scale, and orientation of the drawing.
84 | Chapter 2: Getting Started
3. Scaling resizes the entire drawing by a specified percentage. To access the Scaling field in the Macintosh Printer
Setup dialog box, select Vectorworks from the Settings list.
Selecting a printer in Printer Setup (Macintosh) only changes the drawings settings; to change the printer used for the
drawing, access the Macintosh System Preferences.
Printing a File
The program can print or plot to any device that is selected in the Print & Fax System Preferences (Macintosh) or
Printer and Faxes Control Panel item (Windows). The actual parameters of the printed or plotted file are determined by
the printer setup settings.
All visible objects, classes, and layers within the print area of the Vectorworks file are printed.
If Vectorworks Design Series is installed, you can also use the Publish command to print a batch of files. See Batch
Publishing on page 806.
To print a file:
1. Select File > Print. On the Macintosh, specify the printer setup parameters and then click OK.
The Print dialog box opens; the options that display depend on which printer or plotter is selected.
To display additional print options on the Macintosh, select Vectorworks from the drop-down box that displays
the default option, Copies & Pages.
Printing | 85
Windows Print dialog box with GDI+ Imaging enabled Macintosh Print dialog box with Quartz Imaging enabled
2. Specify the print options, such as which pages to print and how many copies to make. The following print settings
are available:
3. If the Rasterize print output option is selected, specify the edge of the image onscreen that is the first edge to
come out of the printer.
The first edge to come out of the printer depends on the printer driver, the page orientation, and the rotation
options that are supported by the driver. It cannot be predicted by the program. If the wrong page edge is selected,
some portions of the drawing may fail to print if the printer runs out of memory.
The Rasterize Print Output method can be significantly slower than other print methods.
4. Click Print (Macintosh) or OK (Windows) to print.
A raster rendered viewport is controlled by the Raster Rendering DPI setting of its sheet layer (which does not
affect vector geometry or bitmaps that are inside the viewport). See Setting Sheet Layer Properties on page 104.
A raster rendered design layer is controlled by the Design Layer Raster Rendering DPI on the Resolution tab in
the Document Preferences. See Resolution Preferences on page 33.
Vectorworks geometry is controlled by the resolution selected from the Print dialog box.
Rasterized PICT and PDF objects are controlled by the resolution selected from the Print dialog box; rasterization
occurs as follows:
On Macintosh, if Quartz imaging is not enabled, PDF and rotated PICT objects are rasterized.
On Windows, if GDI+ imaging is not enabled, PDF objects are rasterized; PICT objects are always rasterized.
The program assigns certain functions to the buttons on the tablet cursor and supports cursors with up to four
buttons. The program also provides the option of pressing the keyboards F2, F3, and F4 keys for buttons 2, 3, and
4, respectively. This is particularly useful for drawing tablets that have fewer than four buttons. There is an
automatic scrolling feature which, when activated in Tablet mode, scrolls the screen image when moving the
cursor past the displayed edge of the drawing. These functions are described in the following table.
Aligning a Tablet
When you use a tablet, you have options for aligning the tablet with the drawing area. Align the center of the drawing
with the tablets center, align the 2D locus point with the center of the tablet, or align the 2D locus point with the
position on the tablet of the next tablet cursor click. By default, the program aligns the center of the tablet with the
center of the drawing area.
To align the 2D locus with the center of a tablet:
1. Set a locus point.
See Creating Loci on page 244 for details on setting loci. Keep the locus point selected.
2. Select Tools > Tablet.
If already in Tablet mode, deselect and select it again to align the tablet.
The Tablet to Screen Mapping dialog box opens.
3. Click Align Tablet Center to Selected Locus.
The Align Next Tablet Click to Selected Locus option allows you to trace multiple objects from different sources
and have them display in the drawing at the correct coordinates. For example, if two buildings need to maintain a
set distance from each other, set a locus point, align the tablet to that locus, and create the first building. When that
building is completed, set a second locus where the second building is supposed to be, realign the tablet, and
create the second building. The boundary for the tablet is moved and the relationship between the objects is
maintained.
4. Click OK.
The center of the tablet is now aligned with the selected locus point. The tablets boundary box moves to indicate
the center of the drawing tablet in relation to the drawing area.
This action only affects the center of the drawing tablet. The drawing areas origin is unaffected.
Drawing Structure 3
The Vectorworks program has several features to help organize and display a drawing: design layers, sheet layers,
classes, viewports, and views. Create a structured system with these features to make it considerably easier to select,
view, and print drawing elements.
For efficiency and consistency, create master libraries of layers, classes, and resources that can be shared by multiple
users via workgroup referencing.
This section describes these organizational aids and how to use them effectively.
2. Select the appropriate tab for the element to be created or edited: Classes, Design Layers, Sheet Layers,
Viewports, Saved Views, or References. In the Vectorworks Architect product, the Stories tab is also available.
3. From the top of the dialog box, select either Details or Visibilities view.
90 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
Generally, the Details view shows the current settings for each element, and enables editing of layer and class
visibilities in the drawing area; the Visibilities view enables editing of layer and class visibilities in viewports and
in saved views.
4. Buttons at the bottom of each tab provide creation and management functions. Alternatively, right-click
(Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a list item to display a context menu, which has most of the same
functions as the tab buttons.
Button Function
Classes tab
New Click New to open the New Class dialog box. See Creating Classes on page 107.
When a new class is created, it does not automatically become the active class.
Edit Select a class and click Edit to edit it in the Edit Class(es) dialog box. See Setting
Class Properties on page 109. This option is not available when classes are
displayed in hierarchical order and a class group header is selected.
Duplicate Select a class and click Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of the duplicate is
the same as the original class, with a number added (as in cabinets-2); if the original
name ends in a number, the next available sequential number is used. This option is
not available when classes are displayed in hierarchical order and a class group
header is selected.
Delete Select a class and click Delete to open the Delete Class(es) dialog box. Specify what
to do with the objects currently assigned to the class(es) being deleted (delete them,
or reassign them to another selected class). Click OK to return to the Organization
dialog box. Vectorworks moves all objects in the deleted class(es) to the appropriate
class, or deletes them, as specified. This option is not available when classes are
displayed in hierarchical order and a class group header is selected.
Note that the Dimension and None classes cannot be deleted. These are default
classes in every drawing.
Preview Displays a preview of the current settings in the drawing area
Hierarchical Click to toggle the hierarchical display of classes; additional options are available
display mode for controlling the hierarchical display at various levels, and for controlling visibility
settings. See Displaying Classes in Hierarchical Order on page 93.
Design Layers
tab
New Click New to open the New Design Layer dialog box. See Creating Layers on
page 95.
When a new layer is created, it becomes the active layer.
Edit Select a layer and click Edit to edit it in the Edit Design Layers dialog box. See
Setting Design Layer Properties on page 97.
Duplicate Select a design layer and click Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of the
duplicate is the same as the original layer, with a number added (as in floorplan-2);
if the original name ends in a number, the next available sequential number is used.
Organizing the Drawing | 91
Button Function
Delete Select a design layer and click Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm the
deletion. When a design layer is removed from the drawing, all objects in that layer
are also removed.
Note that at least one design layer must remain in the drawing.
Preview Displays a preview of the current settings in the drawing area
Update (Layer import referencing method only) This option is available if a design layer has
Reference been imported into this file with workgroup referencing (the name of the referenced
(on the context layer displays in italics). To update this file with layer information from the master
menu only) file, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the layer, and select Update
Reference from the context menu. See Workgroup Referencing on page 121.
Level Types Manages available level types; see Managing Level Types on page 6 in the
(Vectorworks Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide
Architect
required)
Page Setup Opens the Page Setup dialog box; see Page Setup on page 82
Stories tab Displays information about the stories in the file; see Creating and Managing
(Vectorworks Stories on page 6 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide
Architect
required)
Sheet Layers
tab
New Click New to open the New Sheet Layer dialog box. See Creating Layers on
page 95.
When a new layer is created, it becomes the active layer.
Edit Select a sheet layer and click Edit to edit it in the Edit Sheet Layers dialog box. See
Setting Sheet Layer Properties on page 104.
Duplicate Select a sheet layer and click Duplicate to create a copy of it. The Sheet Title of the
duplicate is the same as the original layer. The Sheet Number of the duplicate is the
same as the original layer, with a number added (as in details-2); if the original
Sheet Number ends in a number, the next available sequential number is used.
Delete Select a sheet layer and click Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm the
deletion
Preview Displays a preview of the current settings in the drawing area
Viewports tab
New Select New to open the Create Viewport dialog box. For sheet layer viewports, see
Creating a Sheet Layer Viewport from a Design Layer on page 735 in this guide.
For design layer viewports (Vectorworks Design Series required), see Creating a
Referenced Design Layer Viewport on page 726 in the Vectorworks Design Series
Users Guide.
92 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
Button Function
Edit Select a viewport and then select Edit to edit it in the Properties dialog box. For
sheet layer viewports, see Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports on page 738 in this
guide. For design layer viewports (Vectorworks Design Series required), see
Properties of Design Layer Viewports on page 730 in the Vectorworks Design
Series Users Guide.
Duplicate Select a viewport and click Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of the
duplicate is the same as the original viewport, with a number added (as in details-2);
if the original name ends in a number, the next available sequential number is used.
The Drawing Title of the duplicate is the same as the original viewport. If the
original viewport has a drawing label, the Drawing Number of the label in the
duplicate viewport is the next available sequential number.
Vectorworks places the duplicate viewport directly on top of the original, in the
original sheet layer.
Delete Select a viewport and click Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm the
deletion
Preview Displays a preview of the current settings in the drawing area
Saved Views tab
New Click New to open the Save View dialog box; see Creating Saved Views on
page 115
Edit Select a saved view and click Edit to edit it in the Edit Saved View dialog box; see
Editing Saved Views on page 116
Duplicate Select a saved view and click Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of the
duplicate is the same as the original view, with a number added (as in deckview-2);
if the original name ends in a number, the next available sequential number is used.
Delete Select a saved view and click Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm the
deletion
References tab
New Click New to open the Open File dialog box. For layer import references, see
Adding and Editing Layer Import References on page 123 in this guide. For
design layer viewport references (Vectorworks Design Series required), see
Creating a Referenced Design Layer Viewport on page 726 in the Vectorworks
Design Series Users Guide.
Edit Select a referenced file and click Edit to open the Edit Reference dialog box. For
layer import references, see Adding and Editing Layer Import References on
page 123 in this guide. For design layer viewport references (Vectorworks Design
Series required), see Creating a Referenced Design Layer Viewport on page 726
in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Delete Select a referenced file and click Delete. In the Delete Reference dialog box, specify
what to do with the items in the file that are currently referenced. See Deleting
References on page 130.
Update Select a referenced file and click Update to update this file with information from
the master file. See Updating References on page 126.
Organizing the Drawing | 93
Button Function
Settings Click Settings to open the Reference Settings dialog box; see Setting the
Referencing Options on page 122
Class group
header
Disclosure
arrow
Managing Layers
Create layers in a drawing to provide immediate flexibility. Stack the design layers in any order, or temporarily hide
some of them. Reorder the layers, which moves all of the objects contained within each layer to another location
without actually modifying the objects or their alignment with each other.
Layer 3 Layer 2
Layer 2 Layer 1
Layer 1 Layer 3
If you hand-draw a floor plan on two design layers, one vellum sheet with a master drafting plan and another with an
addition to the plan, it would be easy to look at the floor plan with or without the addition. In the Vectorworks program,
the vellum is electronic, so far more can be done with it. A distance can be set between design layers rather than having
them lie flat on top of each other. Additionally, with the programs modeling capabilities, these layers can be viewed in
3D. For example, if the first floor, second floor, basement, and roof of a house are each placed in their own design
layers, not only can the 2D drafting plan be printed for any one of those layers, but the design layers can be linked
together, creating a model of a fully formed 3D house. Use viewports to display several views of the finished design,
either on design layers (Vectorworks Design Series required) or on sheet layers, which are special presentation layers.
The original design layers remain unchanged.
Managing Layers | 95
Layers have many other uses, as well. Move elements between design layers, or change the scale of a layer, instantly
making a detail of an area of the drawing without re-drawing anything. Create design layers with objects that should
always display, or layers that contain objects for display only at particular times. Control the visibility of the design
layers to limit the need for creating new objects.
Layer 3 Layer 3
Layer 2
Layer 1
Layer 1
In the Vectorworks Architect program, design layers can be associated with stories; stories define absolute elevations in
the building model, while layers can be set at an elevation relative to the story. This method of organizing a file makes
it much easier to manage a buildings layers and certain associated objects like walls and columns. See Setting Up the
Building Structure with Stories on page 4 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Use design layers to draw and model projects. Use sheet layers to create a presentation version of the finalized
drawing; this can include viewports, title blocks, notes, and other annotations (see Presenting Drawings with Sheet
Layer Viewports on page 734).
On the layers list in the View bar, sheet layers are listed first, and then design layers. A separator divides the two types
of layers in the list.
Sheet layers display with a wide gray border representing the print margin area, as opposed to design layers, which
have a thin gray border (when the page boundary is displayed). This makes it easier to distinguish the layer types at a
glance.
Creating Layers
When a new drawing is created, it automatically contains an empty design layer entitled Design Layer-1. Add design
layers to the drawing as needed to organize it. Add sheet layers as needed for presentation. Create new design layers
and sheet layers, or import them (and optionally, the objects they contain) from other current version files or from
standard files. In Vectorworks Design Series products, create a design layer viewport to reference design layers in other
files without importing them.
1. For convenience, a new layer can be created from multiple locations in the Vectorworks software.
New button on the Design Layers/Sheet Layers tab of the Organization dialog box (Tools > Organization)
Layers button on the View bar to open the Organization dialog box
New Design Layer or New Sheet Layer option from the Layers drop-down list on the View bar
Layer field on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette
New context menu on the Design Layers or Sheet Layers tab of the Navigation palette (Vectorworks Design Series
required)
2. From the New Design Layer or New Sheet Layer dialog box, create a new layer, or import a layer and its
properties from standard or existing Vectorworks files.
96 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
Parameter Description
Create a New Design Creates a new design or sheet layer.
Layer For a design layer, also enter a descriptive Name.
or Create New Sheet
Layer For a sheet layer, enter a unique Sheet Number, or use the default (as in
Sht-2). The Sheet Number can be displayed in drawing labels, section
markers, and title blocks on sheet layers. Also enter a descriptive Sheet
Title, which can be displayed in title blocks.
Import Design Layers Imports layers and their attributes from standard files or from existing files.
or Import Sheet Layer Files located in the Standards folder, as well as existing files selected
previously, are displayed in the list. Select a file; the available layers are
listed beneath the file name. If a layer name in the current file matches a layer
in the import file, that layer is not on the list as an import option.
Select the desired layer(s). To select multiple layers from the import list, hold
down the Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Macintosh) key while you click.
For more information about standards, see Importing Drawing Structure
from Standards or Other Files on page 94.
Choose Click Choose to select a file for layer import. Files must be in the current
version.
Import Layer Objects In addition to importing the design layer structure and attributes, imports the
(design layer only) contents of the layers; if a file has become corrupted, this is a possible way of
recovering its data. If there is a naming conflict with pre-existing symbols or
pre-existing layers in the current document, replace or rename the symbols or
rename the layers.
Creation Options
Saved View Visibility Sets the visibility of the new design layer in saved views (when saved views
(design layer only) exist in the drawing)
Viewport Visibility Sets the visibility of the new design layer in viewports (when viewports exist
(design layer only) in the drawing)
Managing Layers | 97
Parameter Description
Edit Properties After Immediately after creation, opens the Edit Design Layers or Edit Sheet
Creation Layers dialog box to set the properties of the new layer(s); see Setting
Design Layer Properties on page 97 or Setting Sheet Layer Properties on
page 104
1. Select Tools > Organization. Alternatively, click the Layers button on the View bar.
The Organization dialog box opens.
2. Select the Design Layers tab.
A list of the current layers in the drawing displays in their stacking order. Depending on which view option is
selected at the top of the dialog box, either details or visibilities of the design layers display. Stacking order,
drawing area visibility, and active layer can be changed in Details view. The visibility of layers in viewports and
in saved views can be changed in Visibilities view.
In the Vectorworks Architect product, Details view includes the stories and layer level types for each level.
Layers that are imported from another file for workgroup referencing display in italics.
3. To change other layer properties, select one or more layers and click Edit to open the Edit Design Layers dialog
box.
98 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
Parameter Description
Name If one layer was selected, displays the layers name, which can be edited
if necessary
Scale Sets the scale for the selected layer(s); see Changing the Scale of
Selected Design Layers on page 74
Stacking Order Changes the 2D stacking order of the layer(s); see Changing the Design
Layer Stacking Order on page 99
Story Associates the layer with a story; select the story from the list, or create a
(Vectorworks Architect new story for the layer (see Creating and Managing Stories on page 6 in
required) the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide). If the design layer does not
need to belong to a story, select None; for example, a detail layer does not
need to be associated with a building story.
Elevation Sets the height of a layer relative to the ground plane.
For Vectorworks Architect users, the elevation is set relative to the story,
if the layer is associated with a story. The elevation relative to the ground
plane also displays. For example, the second story of a building might be
slightly offset from the story elevation, and also several feet above street
level.
When a new layer is added to a drawing, its elevation values are
automatically entered based on the previous layers elevation and
layer wall height values.
Layer Wall Height Indicates the height of walls (and certain other objects such as columns)
created on that layer, when the Top Bound option for those objects is set
to Layer Wall Height
Level Type Specifies the layers level type; select the type from the list, or create a
(Vectorworks Architect new level type (see Default Story Layers on page 4 in the Vectorworks
required) Design Series Users Guide). Only one level type can be used per story (a
layer cannot have two ceiling level types, for example).
Managing Layers | 99
Parameter Description
Opacity Controls how the selected layer(s) and other visible layers display; see
(Quartz imaging Setting the Design Layer Opacity on page 100
(Macintosh) or GDI+
imaging (Windows) enabled
Transfer Mode Controls how the selected layer(s) and other visible layers display; see
(Quartz imaging Setting the Design Layer Transfer Mode on page 101
(Macintosh) or GDI+
imaging (Windows)
disabled
Renderworks Background When the Renderworks product is installed, select the Renderworks
background to use for the selected layer(s) from either the default content
or the current files content; see Libraries on page 155 and Creating
Layer Backgrounds on page 611.
If the Renderworks Background choices are not available, the
background selection is controlled by the Renderworks style in
effect. Set the background in the Renderworks style instead; see
Renderworks Styles on page 669.
Colors Specifies the default layer color for the selected layer(s); see Setting the
Design Layer Color on page 102
Saved Views Specifies the visibility settings for the selected layer(s) in each saved
view; see Setting Visibilities on page 118
Viewports Specifies the visibility settings for the selected layer(s) in each viewport;
see Setting Visibilities on page 118
Georeferenced Enables georeference information to be attached to the layer(s); click Edit
(Vectorworks Architect or Georeferencing to open the Georeferencing dialog box. See GIS and
Landmark required) Georeferencing on page 620 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users
Guide for details.
3. The Design Layers tab displays the new stacking order. Click OK to close the Organization dialog box and save
the changes.
Mode Description
Paint Makes objects in the new layer solid, obscuring objects in layers stacked below it (this
is the default setting)
Overlay Makes it so objects in the new layer do not obscure stacked layers
Invert Makes a reversed, or photo-negative image display when an object in the new layer
overlaps an object in another layer
Erase Makes objects in the new layer display all foreground patterns as white and all
background patterns as transparent
Not Paint Makes objects in the new layer solid and inverts any areas that overlap objects in
stacked layers
Not Overlay Makes objects in the new layer transparent and inverts layer colors
102 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
Mode Description
Not Invert Makes objects in the new layer transparent and converts any black pixels from
overlapping areas to white and white pixels to transparent
Not Erase Makes objects in the new layer transparent and converts any white pixels from
overlapping areas to black and black pixels to transparent
Most printer devices do not support all of these modes, especially PostScript printers and vector devices such as
pen plotters. The Rasterize print output option may produce the best results for certain transfer modes.
Macintosh OS X does not support layer transfer modes when printing, but they are available for on-screen
viewing. On the Windows platform, the use of color in transfer modes may produce color blending.
3. For both the fill and pen, set the Foreground and Background colors by clicking the appropriate list and selecting
a color from the main Color Menu dialog box. A preview example is shown at the bottom of the dialog box.
The fill background color controls the appearance of objects with a solid fill.
Managing Layers | 103
4. Click OK.
When the Use layer colors preference is selected, all objects on the layer are drawn with the specified colors.
Viewports have separate control of layer color (see Advanced Sheet Layer Viewport Properties on page 740).
The Force Select command on the document context menu also changes the active class and layer (if necessary),
and selects the clicked object.
To set the active design layer:
1. In the drawing area, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) a visible object on a non-active design layer.
2. From the document context menu, select Activate Layer.
The objects layer becomes active.
1. Select Tools > Organization. Alternatively, click the Layers button on the View bar.
The Organization dialog box opens.
2. Select the Sheet Layers tab and the Details view.
The Sheet Layers tab opens, with a list of the current layers in the drawing. The layer stacking order and the active
layer can be changed in Details view. Visibilities view does not apply to sheet layers.
3. To change layer properties, select one or more layers and click Edit to open the Edit Sheet Layers dialog box.
Managing Layers | 105
Parameter Description
Sheet Displays the number of the selected sheet layer; this number must be unique in the
Number document. If this value is changed and Use Automatic Drawing Coordination is
enabled in document preferences (Vectorworks Design Series required), any annotation
objects (sheet borders, drawing labels, or section markers) that show this number are
updated automatically.
Sheet Title Displays the descriptive title of the selected sheet layer. If Use Automatic Drawing
Coordination is enabled in document preferences (Vectorworks Design Series
required), any sheet borders that show this number are updated automatically.
Stacking Changes the 2D stacking order of the layer(s); see Changing the Sheet Layer Stacking
Order Order on page 105
Raster Specifies the resolution (Dots Per Inch) for printing and viewing the raster rendered
Rendering viewports in the selected sheet layer (does not affect vector geometry or bitmaps that are
DPI inside viewports); see Setting the Print Resolution on page 86 for more details
Origin Specifies the X and Y coordinates of the sheet layer origin; each sheet layer has its own
origin
Page Setup Opens the Page Setup dialog box for entry of sheet layer printing parameters; this saves
time later, when different sheet layers can be automatically sent to different printers with
different print area settings (see Page Setup on page 82)
Managing Classes
In addition to design layers, classes are a powerful way to organize the elements in a drawing project according to
category. This allows the objects to be viewed, changed, and tracked as a group. Because classes work across design
layers, they allow the grouping of similar objects in a drawing that for practical reasons need to exist on separate layers.
Classes also allow the same file to be used for all stages of a project and for various purposes. For example, the classes
shown for a license application could be different from those shown for the building contractor.
Vectorworks classes are similar in function toand are exported asAutoCAD layers. If a drawing will be
exported to AutoCAD, use classes to make it easy to turn on or off selected portions of the drawing. For example,
if a consultant using AutoCAD will be doing the duct layout for a building, a furniture class allows him or her to
turn off the furniture layer, instead of deleting furniture objects.
Setting up the classes at the beginning of a project is recommended, so that objects can be assigned to appropriate
classes as they are created.
Each new drawing created with the Vectorworks program automatically has two classes: Dimension and None. Any
dimensions created are assigned, by default, to the Dimension class (this is a preference setting that can be changed; see
Dimension Preferences on page 32). Group objects are assigned to the active class. All other objects and symbols are
assigned to the None class, which is the default active class. These two classes can be renamed but not deleted.
Managing Classes | 107
If the drawing was created from a template, other classes may have been provided. New classes can be created,
duplicated, edited, or deleted. The visibility of the classes can also be changed.
For example, for a drawing of a house with four separate plan layers (first floor, second floor, basement, and roof),
assign all bathroom fixtures to a class called Fixtures. Make the Fixtures class invisible to print the floor plans
without fixtures, and then make them visible to print the bathroom fixtures for each story of the house.
Class information can be linked to worksheets. Using the house example in the previous paragraph, not only can the
plumbing fixtures plan for the house be printed, but a running inventory of the cost for all plumbing fixtures can be
kept (see Using Worksheets on page 814).
Creating Classes
Consider class names at creation. If there are a large number of classes, organize them by naming each class with a
compound name consisting of up to four parts, separated by a dash. Each name part represents a different level in the
class naming structure. For example, a drawing of a building might have a class structure that includes main groups for
architecture, plumbing, and electrical objects. Within the architecture group, there might be door, floor, and wall
groups. Those groups in turn have subgroupsfor example, the wall subgroup might have interior and exterior
designations. A class is named according to its position in the class structure, as in Arch-Wall-Ext, Elec-Lite-Ceiling,
or Plum-Equip-New. Class names also impact hierarchical display in the Organization dialog box and Navigation
palette (Vectorworks Design Series required); see Displaying Classes in Hierarchical Order on page 93.
In the classes list on the View bar, each main group is a menu option, with submenus for the subgroups. In the
following example, the Arch option has a Wall submenu, with Ext and Int options. This type of organization makes it
easy to assign classes as objects are created.
Classes can be created as new, or imported from other current version Vectorworks files or standard files.
1. For convenience, a new class can be added from multiple locations in the Vectorworks software.
New button on the Classes tab of the Organization dialog box (Tools > Organization)
Classes button on the View bar to open the Organization dialog box
New Class option from the Classes drop-down list on the View bar
Class field on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette
New context menu on the Classes tab of the Navigation palette (Vectorworks Design Series required)
2. From the New Class dialog box, create a new class, or import a class and its properties from standard or existing
Vectorworks files.
108 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
To edit classes:
1. Select Tools > Organization. Alternatively, click the Classes button on the View bar.
The Organization dialog box opens.
2. Select the Classes tab.
A list of the current classes in the drawing displays. Depending on which view option is selected at the top of the
dialog box, either details or visibilities of the classes display. The visibility of classes in the drawing area and the
active class can be changed in Details view. The visibility of classes in viewports and in saved views can be
changed in Visibilities view (see Setting Visibilities on page 118).
3. To change other class properties, select one or more classes and click Edit to open the Edit Class(es) dialog box.
4. If desired, enter a new name for the class in the Class Name field. Then, set the graphic attributes of the class. See
Setting Class Attributes on page 112 for more information about graphic attributes.
110 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
Parameter Description
Use at Creation Applies the attributes displayed in this dialog box when creating an object
assigned to this class. If Use at Creation is not selected, these attributes
can be applied to the object later by assigning the Class Style from the
Attributes palette. See Setting Class Attributes on page 112 for more
information.
Fill
Style Select one of the following fill styles from the list
None No fill is applied to the objects in this class
If a Renderworks texture will be applied to objects in this class, also
select a fill style. If the object fill is None, no texture displays when
the objects are rendered.
Solid Applies a solid fill to the objects in this class; click the color box to select
the desired color from the main Color Menu dialog box
Pattern Applies a patterned fill and color to objects in this class. Click the pattern
box to select the desired pattern, and then select the foreground color and
background color from the color boxes next to the pattern.
Hatch Applies a hatch fill to objects in this class. Select the desired hatch from
either the default content or the current files content (see Libraries on
page 155).
Tile Applies a tile fill to objects in this class; click the tile preview to select a
tile from either the default content or the current files content (see
Libraries on page 155)
Managing Classes | 111
Parameter Description
Gradient Applies a gradient fill to objects in this class; click the gradient preview to
select a gradient from either the default content or the current files
content (see Libraries on page 155)
Image Applies an image fill to objects in this class; click the image preview to
select an image from either the default content or the current files content
(see Libraries on page 155)
Pen
Style Select None, Solid, Pattern, or Line Type from the list; click the line type
preview to select a line type from either the default content or the current
files content (see Libraries on page 155)
Color Click the color box to select a pen foreground color
Thickness Select the line thickness for the class; to use a custom thickness, select Set
Thickness from the line thickness list to access the Set Thickness dialog
box.
Markers Select the marker style for each end of lines, dimensions, arcs, polylines,
2D polygons, or freehand lines in this class. Choose the marker style from
the list of available markers. To use a custom marker style, select Custom
and specify the marker settings, or select Edit Marker List from the
marker style list to set the available marker types (see Editing the Marker
List on page 511).
Opacity When the Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging Vectorworks
preference is enabled, specifies the class transparency; drag the slider to
the left to increase the transparency, or enter an opacity percentage in the
box to the right of the slider
Walls, Roofs, and Other If Renderworks is installed, click these tabs to set the texture properties
tabs for wall, roof, and other objects assigned to the class. See Applying
Textures to Symbols, Walls, and Roofs on page 631 for more
information.
Saved Views If there are saved views in the drawing, opens the Saved View Visibilities
dialog box. Set the visibility for the new class(es) in the saved views
(Visible, Invisible, Gray, or Dont Save). See Setting Visibilities on
page 118.
Viewports If there are viewports in the drawing, opens the Viewport Visibilities
dialog box. Set the visibility for the new class(es) in the viewports
(Visible, Invisible, Gray, or Dont Save). See Setting Visibilities on
page 118.
5. Click OK to return to the Organization dialog box. If objects in an edited class already exist in the drawing, and
the class is set to Use at Creation, when prompted, specify how to apply the changes to the existing objects.
6. Click OK from the Organization dialog box to save the changes.
If multiple classes are simultaneously selected for editing, and some are set to apply attributes while others are not, Use
at Creation appears dimmed, indicating an unknown setting. Additionally, if some or all of the attribute values are
different for the selected classes, the editing fields for those values indicate that the value is unknown. When the OK
button is clicked, the currently defined settings shown are applied to all of the selected classes. Any information with
an unknown setting is not applied.
112 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
Parameter Description
Active Only Displays only objects in the active class/layer; only the active class/layer prints
Gray Others Displays the active class/layer normally and all other classes/layers appear dimmed
(except for those set to invisible); even though visible, objects in dimmed classes/
layers cannot be edited
Gray/Snap Displays the active class/layer normally and all other classes/layers appear dimmed
Others (except for those set to invisible); objects in any normally displayed or gray class/
layer can be snapped to. Only objects in the active class/layer can be edited.
Show Others All classes/layers display normally, except for those set to invisible or grayed; even
though visible, objects in classes/layers other than the active class/layer are not
editable and cannot be snapped to
Show/Snap All classes/layers display normally, except for those set to invisible or grayed;
Others objects in any normally displayed or gray class/layer can be snapped to. Only objects
in the active class/layer can be edited.
Show/Snap/ All classes/layers display normally, except for those set to invisible or grayed.
Modify Others Objects in any normally displayed or gray class/layer can be snapped to; only objects
in normally displayed classes/layers can be edited. (An object on another layer can
only be edited if its layer scale and view are the same as those of the active layer.)
Locked objects display with gray highlighting.
Managing Viewports
A sheet layer viewport or design layer viewport (Vectorworks Design Series required) shows a specific portion of one
or more design layers. The original location of the viewport layers can be either within this file or another file. The
view parameters in the viewport can be different from those of the original layers. For example, the scale, layer and
class visibility, or render mode might be changed to create a certain effect. A sheet layer viewport does not always
automatically change when the underlying drawing does. To see the drawing changes that were made after a sheet layer
viewport was created, update the viewport. One or more viewports can be placed on a sheet layer or design layer, to
show various parts of the drawing project in different ways.
Once created, viewports display in the Organization dialog box, where they can be edited, duplicated, or deleted. For
detailed information about how to create, edit, annotate, and update viewports, see Presenting Drawings with Sheet
Layer Viewports on page 734 in this guide, and Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports on page 723 in
the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Managing Saved Views | 115
Zoomed in view
Views are also used to create Move Along Path animations (see Creating Move Along Path Animations on page 729
for more information).
Saved views can be created, edited, duplicated, and deleted from the Organization dialog box as described in the
following sections.
Parameter Description
View Name Specify the view name
116 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
Parameter Description
Save View Saves the general view parameters of the active layer, including the projection,
Orientation 3D orientation, and page origin settings. If Vectorworks Design Series is
installed, the plan rotation and the clip cube position are also saved.
Save Zoom and Pan Saves the zoom and pan settings of the active layer
Save Page Location Saves the design layer page location with the view; if deselected, the current
page location setting is used when the view is displayed. The page location of
sheet layers cannot be saved.
Save Unified View Saves the unified view status with the view; if deselected, the current unified
view setting is used when the view is displayed
Save Render Mode Saves the render mode and options with the view; if deselected, the current
and Options render mode and options are used when the view is displayed
Saving the render settings with the view is an effective method of saving
and restoring custom rendering options.
Save Layer Specifies the layer visibility options to save; if deselected, the current layer
Visibility visibility settings are used when the view is displayed
Layer Options Select the design layer display options (see Setting Class and Design Layer
Options on page 114)
Active Layer Select the active layer; if a sheet layer is selected, the Layers button is disabled
Layers Opens the Layer Visibilities dialog box; specify the design layer visibilities for
the saved view (see Setting Visibilities on page 118)
Save Class Specifies the class visibility options to save; if deselected, the current class
Visibility visibility settings are used when the view is displayed
Class Options Select the class display options (see Setting Class and Design Layer Options
on page 114)
Active Class Select the active class from the list of classes
Classes Opens the Class Visibilities dialog box; specify the class visibilities for the saved
view (see Setting Visibilities on page 118)
3. Click OK to save the view with the specified settings. The saved view is then available from the Saved Views
menu and from the Organization dialog box.
The settings are the same as when the view is created (see Creating Saved Views on page 115). Classes and
layers that were added after a view was created are listed as visible in the visibility settings.
If the layer or class visibility was saved when the view was created, Restore Layer Visibility and Restore Class
Visibility are enabled. Select Restore Layer Visibility to restore the layer visibilities, the layer options, and the
active layer that were set when the view was saved. Select Restore Class Visibility to restore the class visibilities,
the class options, and the active class that were set when the view was saved.
Saved views are saved as VectorScript macros. If necessary, click Edit Script to edit the script.
7. Click OK to save the changes. Click OK again to close the Organization dialog box.
118 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
Another way to edit a saved view is through the Saved Views palette. Select Window > Script Palettes > Saved
Views. Press the Option (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) key and double-click the view name to edit. Double-click the
view script name to switch the current drawing area to the saved view.
Setting Visibilities
The active class and design layer are always visible; each inactive class and design layer can be set to be visible,
invisible, or gray. The visibilities of inactive classes and design layers are controlled in a very similar way, and they
both can be set independently for the drawing area, saved views, and viewports.
Class and design layer visibility in the drawing area and in saved views are also affected by the Class Options and
Layer Options settings. See Setting Class and Design Layer Options on page 114 for details.
The Visibility tool can make quick changes to layer and class visibilities. The Visibility tool is available in the
workspaces of all Vectorworks Design Series products; for the Vectorworks Fundamentals product, the workspace can
be edited to add the Visibility tool. See Changing an Objects Class or Layer Visibility on page 566 for details.
For maximum usability, visibilities can be set from multiple places, but the method of setting visibilities is the same.
The level of gray for grayed layers and classes can be adjusted for printing; see Printing a File on page 84.
Setting Visibilities | 119
To change the setting for a single class or design layer, click in one of its visibility columns. To change the settings for
multiple items, click a visibility column as follows:
Press the Ctrl key (Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) and click selected class or layer rows
Press the Shift key and click the first and last rows of a group of classes or layers
Press the Alt key (Windows) or Option key (Macintosh) and click any row to change all classes or layers
For classes displayed in hierarchical order, you can adjust the visibility settings of multiple subclasses by changing
the class group header visibility setting on the Classes tab; see Displaying Classes in Hierarchical Order on
page 93.
Parameter Description
Visible column Class/design layer is visible; objects in this class/layer display when another class/layer is
active
Invisible column Class/design layer is invisible; objects in this class/layer display only when the class/layer is
active
Gray column Class/design layer is gray; objects in this class/layer are dimmed when another class/layer is
active
Dont Save column For saved views, a fourth column displays to the right of the other columns. When selected,
class/design layer visibility is not saved for the saved view; the current class/layer visibility is
used when the view is displayed.
Setting Class and Design Layer Visibility for the Drawing Area
Use the Organization dialog box to set the visibilities of classes and design layers in the drawing area.
To set the visibility in the drawing area:
1. From the Organization dialog box, select the Classes or Design Layers tab in Details view.
2. Change the Visibility settings as desired. (See Setting Visibilities on page 118.)
120 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
Setting Class and Design Layer Visibility for Viewports and Saved Views
The visibilities of classes and design layers can be set during creation or editing of classes, design layers, viewports, or
saved views. Those settings can also be changed in the Organization dialog box.
To set the class and design layer visibility for viewports and saved views:
1. From the Organization dialog box, select a tab in Visibilities view.
Workgroup Referencing | 121
2. On the appropriate tab, select one or more class, design layer, viewport, or saved view names and change the
Visibility settings for classes and design layers as described in Setting Visibilities on page 118.
3. On the Saved Views tab, change the active design layer and class, and the design layer and class options as
described in Editing Saved Views on page 116.
4. To see the changes before saving them, click Preview (not available on the Saved Views tab).
5. Click OK to save the changes.
Workgroup Referencing
Vectorworks Referencing Capability
A workgroup is several people who work together on a project. Group members may work on the same file or on
different files for the same project. Additionally, it is often necessary to create standard elements and reuse them in
different files. It can be difficult to share these standards with other members of a workgroup and to keep up with
changes to them.
Referencing is the ability to link the current (target) file to a master file that contains the standards. Layers, classes, and
resources (such as hatches, worksheets, or symbols) in other Vectorworks files can be referenced. DXF/DWG and
DWF files can be referenced, similar to the way layers in Vectorworks files are referenced: either as design layers, or as
design layer viewports (Vectorworks Design Series only). In Vectorworks Design Series products, image files and PDF
files can also be referenced. When a referenced item in a master file changes, the changes are reflected in the target file.
Updates to target files can be performed automatically or only when manually requested.
You can reference specific layers with all of the classes and resources used in those layers, as well as any resources
from a master file. Workgroup-referenced design layers can be displayed in viewports. Referenced items are indicated
in the Resource Browser and in the Organization dialog box by italicized names.
There are two ways to reference design layers:
In the Vectorworks Fundamentals product, design layers are imported into the target file when they are referenced.
For backward compatibility, Vectorworks Design Series products support this method; see Setting the
Referencing Options on page 122.
In the Vectorworks Design Series products, the recommended method is to create a design layer viewport and then
reference the desired design layers from the master file. See Creating a Referenced Design Layer Viewport on
page 726 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide for details about this type of reference.
Depending on the type of object referenced, you may be able to update the master file from the target file.
Resources can be edited or renamed in the target file, and the corresponding resource in the master file is
automatically updated. See Referencing Resources on page 127.
122 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
Objects on layers referenced with layer import referencing are locked; they can be unlocked and edited in the
target file, but the change will not appear in the master file. Moreover, when the target files references are
updated, referenced items are over-written to reflect the master file. Therefore, any permanent change to a
referenced item must be made in the master file.
Objects on layers referenced in a design layer viewport cannot be edited directly, but there is an option to navigate
to the master file, make the change, and then return to the target file to view the change.
Keep the following concepts in mind for both design layer referencing methods.
Drawing information is shared and updated on a layer-by-layer basis.
For layer import referencing, referenced layers should be treated as read-only layers; any changes to referenced
information and any information added to referenced layers are removed the next time the referenced layer is
updated.
Referenced layer names cannot be changed.
Resources (symbol names) in layers that are referenced from the master file take precedence over resources in the
target file.
If there is a naming conflict with pre-existing symbols or pre-existing layers in the current file, replace the
symbols or rename the layers.
Sheet layer viewports cannot directly reference layers in external master files. If you are using layer import
referencing, create a reference to the master file, and select the external layers to import into the target file; then
make the imported layers visible in a sheet layer viewport. If you are using design layer viewport referencing
(Vectorworks Design Series required), create a design layer viewport from the master file and make the desired
layers visible; then make the design layer that contains the viewport visible in a sheet layer viewport.
Parameter Description
Check for out of date Automatically checks referenced files for changes after this time interval; if any
references every ___ references are out of date, an alert dialog box displays to allow the target file to be
updated
Use reference priority If the same resource exists in multiple referenced master files, deselect this option to
when updating resources update each referenced item from the original source, regardless of the priority order of
the referenced files. This is recommended because, if you change the priority order, or
if you update an individual reference (instead of all references), you could change the
source file of a resource inadvertently.
Select this option to update resources in the target file according to the priority order
set in the References tab of the Organization dialog box (see Prioritizing Referenced
Files on page 126). An alert message prompts you to confirm that you want to use
priority updating for references.
When manually updating Specifies what happens when the Update button on the References tab of the
Organization dialog box is clicked: the button either updates only the selected
references that are out of date, or it updates all of the selected references in the target
file
Use this method to Specifies which method to use to reference design layers in other Vectorworks
reference Vectorworks files documents. By default, Vectorworks Design Series products use design layer
(Vectorworks Design viewports, as described in Creating a Referenced Design Layer Viewport on
Series required) page 726 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide. Select Layer import to use
the referencing method described in Adding and Editing Layer Import References on
page 123 in this guide.
The selected method is also used to reference DXF/DWG and DWF files, as
described in DXF/DWG and DWF Import Options on page 783.
Parameter Description
New Opens the Open File dialog box to select a new reference file
Edit Opens the Edit Reference dialog box to change the parameters of a selected reference file
Delete Opens the Delete Reference dialog box to delete a file from the list of referenced files, and to
choose whether to keep the referenced layers and resources in the target file; see Deleting
References on page 130
Update Manually updates the referenced items from the selected file(s)
Settings Opens the Reference Settings dialog box to set options for updates of referenced items; see
Setting the Referencing Options on page 122
3. To edit a current reference file, select the file and click Edit.
The Edit Reference dialog box opens. Proceed to step 5.
4. To add a new reference file, click New.
The Open File dialog box opens. Select the desired file, and then click Open to open the appropriate dialog box:
Vectorworks file: New Reference dialog box
DXF/DWG or DWF file: Import Options dialog box
Image file: Image Import Options dialog box (Vectorworks Design Series required)
PDF file: Import PDF dialog box (Vectorworks Design Series required)
Referenced Vectorworks files must be the same version as the target file.
5. From the New Reference or Edit Reference dialog box, specify the parameters for the workgroup reference.
Workgroup Referencing | 125
Parameter Description
Source File Displays the path and file name of the referenced master file; if the Edit option was
selected, click Browse to edit the file location
Save reference location as Maintains either an absolute or relative file path reference from the current file to
the referenced file. Use the absolute path when the location of the referenced file
with respect to the current file is not going to change. Use the relative path when the
files might be moved to another computer or platform; as long as the relative path
between the files remains the same, the reference can be found. Both files must be
saved on the same volume to select this option.
The Source File path displays either an absolute or relative path, depending on the
selection.
Layers Available Specify the design layers to be referenced; selected layers are indicated with a check
mark. Sheet layers cannot be referenced. This step is optional; a layer does not have
to be selected to reference its resources. Resources in the entire referenced file are
available through the Reference command in the Resource Browser.
Options Select the update options
Save referenced cache to Saves a copy of the referenced data with the target file. When this option is
disk deselected, a copy of the referenced data is not saved, which means that the target
file size is smaller; the referenced data is updated when the target file is opened.
Automatically update out Updates the reference each time the target file is opened; when deselected, the
of date reference during reference is updated only when Update is clicked from the References tab of the
file open Organization dialog box
Update class definitions Updates class definitions along with the referenced objects that use those classes
Ignore source user origin Ignores the user origin in the master file; referenced objects will not change location
in the target file if the user origin changes in the master file
126 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
Parameter Description
Create layer link(s) on Creates a layer link for each newly referenced layer on the specified design layer;
layer select the design layer from the list or select New Layer to specify a new design
layer, set to the same scale as the first selected layer to reference
Workgroup referenced layers can be used in a sheet layer viewport. Because sheet layer viewports cannot directly
reference design layers in other files, reference the layers and then create a sheet layer viewport that shows the
referenced layers.
6. Click OK to return to the Organization dialog box.
The selected layers are added to the target file, along with any new layers and layer links.
Updating References
Referenced design layers and resources are either updated automatically when the target file is opened, or they are
updated manually upon command. These preferences are set in either the New Reference or the Edit Reference dialog
box. If the file is set to update automatically, manual updates can still be performed at any time.
Before an update, correct any broken references as described in Correcting Broken References on page 127.
To update references manually:
1. Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box.
2. From the References tab, select the master file(s) that contain the referenced items to be updated.
To update all references in the target file, select all of the files.
3. Click Update to update the referenced items in the target file from the selected files.
If priority updating is disabled (recommended), referenced items are always updated from the original file.
If priority updating is enabled, referenced items are updated according to the priority order on the References
tab.
For more information about priority updating, see Setting the Referencing Options on page 122, and
Prioritizing Referenced Files on page 126.
4. If a referenced item is missing, the Referenced Resource not Found dialog box opens.
Workgroup Referencing | 127
Parameter Description
Break the reference Breaks the reference with the master file, leaving the resource in the target file
Delete the resource Deletes all occurrences of the resource in the target file (from both the drawing and the
Resource Browser)
Replace resource with To replace the missing resource with another item from the master file, select this option,
and then select the replacement item from the list of available resources
5. Click OK To All to perform the same action for all missing resources. To select an action for each missing
resource individually, click OK; the dialog box redisplays for each missing item.
Referencing Resources
The resources of files listed in the References tab of the Organization dialog box, as well as the resources in any
Vectorworks file of the same version number, can be referenced through the Resource Browser.
128 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
Parameter Description
Preserve folder hierarchy Maintains the same folder structure the referenced symbol had in its source file
Select destination folder Adds the referenced symbol to the selected folder
Folder list Displays the target files symbol folders; the selected folder becomes the destination for
the referenced symbol
New Folder Creates a new folder within the selected folder; specify the folder name and click OK
to create the symbol folder
4. If the master file has never been referenced in the current file, the New Reference dialog box opens. Specify the
reference parameters and click OK.
Workgroup Referencing | 129
Parameter Description
Source File Displays the path and file name of the referenced resource file
Save reference location Maintains either an absolute or relative file path reference from the current file to the
as referenced resources file. Use the absolute path when the location of the referenced file
with respect to the current file is not going to change. Use the relative path when the files
might be moved to another computer or platform; as long as the relative path between the
files remains the same, the reference can be found. Both files must be saved on the save
volume to select this option.
The Source File path displays either an absolute or relative path, depending on the
selection.
Save referenced cache to Saves a copy of the referenced resource with the target file. When this option is
disk deselected, a copy of the referenced resource is not saved, which means that the target
file size is smaller; the referenced resource is refreshed when the target file is opened.
Automatically update Updates the reference each time the target file is opened; when deselected, the reference
out of date reference is updated only when Update is clicked from the References tab of the Organization
during file open dialog box
Update class definitions Updates class definitions along with the referenced resources that use those classes
5. The resource is added to the target file. Referenced resources display with italicized names in the Resource
Browser.
The following rules apply to referenced resources.
Situation Description
Editing a referenced resource A referenced resource can be edited within the target file, provided the source
file is not opened by another user, and the reference is not broken or the resource
out of date. Changes to the referenced resource are automatically exported to the
source file; while in edit mode, the source file is locked.
The following resources can be edited within the referenced file: gradients,
hatches, record formats, symbol definitions, plant symbols (Vectorworks
Landmark required), sketch styles and wall styles (Vectorworks Design Series
required), Renderworks backgrounds and textures (Renderworks required).
Resource name conflict If there is a name conflict between a referenced object and another object when
creating a reference, an alert displays and you have the option to replace the
object in the current document. (If the other object is also a referenced object, it
cannot be replaced and the update fails.)
Change user origin of master file If the user origin of a master file is changed, the location of the referenced
resources do not change, if Ignore source user origin is selected in the Edit
Reference dialog box
Change master file classes Changes to the class of a referenced resource are only reflected in the target file
after an update if Update class definitions is selected in the New Reference
dialog box
130 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
Situation Description
Resource deleted in master file If a referenced resource is deleted in a master file and the resource does not exist
in any other master file included in an update, when the reference to the master
file is updated, an alert displays. Click OK to confirm that the resource is an
orphan, or click OK to All to hide all alerts about orphaned resources during
the current update. Orphaned resources are no longer referenced.
To break a reference, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the desired resource, and select Break
Reference from the context menu. The resource remains in the target file, but it is no longer referenced to the
master file.
Deleting References
You can stop referencing a file, and choose whether to keep the referenced layers and resources in the target file.
To delete a reference to a file:
1. Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box.
2. Select the file to stop referencing, and then click Delete.
The Delete Reference dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Reference to Displays the master file name and path
Referenced Layers Select an option for layers that are currently referenced in the target file from the
master file
Keep in current document Keeps the layers in the target file, but removes the reference
Delete Removes referenced layers from the target file, including layer links and any
objects on the layer
Referenced Resources Select an option for resources that are currently referenced in the target file from
the master file
Keep in current document Keeps the resources in the target file, but removes the reference
Delete if unused Deletes unused referenced resources; keeps resources that have been placed in the
file, but removes the reference
3. Click OK.
Workgroup Referencing | 131
List of referenced
Vectorworks files
132 | Chapter 3: Drawing Structure
Drawing with Snapping 4
SmartCursor snapping allows you to draw with precision in both 2D and 3D. Used in conjunction with drawing tools,
the SmartCursor uses snap indicators, hints, extension lines, text (SmartCursor cues), and sounds, and then precisely
snaps the cursor based on the snapping categories enabled in the Snapping palette.
2. Double-click a snapping tool to open the SmartCursor Settings dialog box with specific snapping parameters for
that tool. Some of the tools do not have any additional parameters.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box can also be opened by selecting Tools > SmartCursor Settings. Each tab of
the dialog box is described in the following sections.
3. Enter the desired criteria, and then click OK to set.
The criteria are described in the following sections.
4. Click a snapping tool to activate it.
Snapping palette shortcut keys can be set in the Workspace Editor; see Modifying Snapping and Mode Shortcuts
on page 876.
134 | Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping
Different combinations of constraints and snapping parameters are required for different drawing tasks. Select the
Tools > Custom Tool/Attribute command to easily create a script with the current SmartCursor settings and
active tools on the Snapping palette. Execute the script by double-clicking on it from the Resource Browser to
quickly change snapping parameters and settings. See Creating Custom Tool/Attribute Scripts on page 848 for
more information.
General Snapping
The parameters on the General tab specify global SmartCursor functionality.
To set general snapping parameters:
1. Select Tools > SmartCursor Settings, or double-click a Snapping palette tool that has additional parameters.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box opens. Click the General tab.
Parameter Description
Show SmartCursor Cues Displays SmartCursor cues while drawing. The cues displayed depend on
the combination enabled in the Snapping palette, as well as the current
cursor position. SmartCursor cues are listed in SmartCursor Cues on
page 151.
Show Snap Points Displays temporary graphical hints to indicate that a snap point is
available; see Snapping Indicators on page 147 for more information.
Deselect to hide snap points.
Zoom Line Thicknesses When using the snap loupe (see Using the Snap Loupe on page 150), sets
in Snap Loupe the line thicknesses relative to the zoom level so that objects display
normally in the loupe view
Snap to Combined Page Snaps to the edges and center of the combined printable area of design
Area layer and sheet layer pages
Snap to Individual Pages Snaps to the edges and center of the individual pages within design layer
and sheet layer pages
Setting Snapping Parameters | 135
Parameter Description
Ignore Non-planar Snaps Snaps only to snap points that are planar within the current planes context,
in Planar Contexts ignoring snap points that are not co-planar. When using the automatic
working plane with a tool that operates on a plane, the current planar
context is the plane that is acquired by the automatic working plane.When
not using the automatic working plane, and you are creating a 2D object,
the current planar context is the current working plane.
This is useful in Wireframe mode when the automatic working plane is on,
and the cursor is over a planar face (not a curved face); and when the
automatic working plane is off, and you are drawing planar objects. It is not
needed in rendered views because snapping does not occur for geometry
hidden behind solid objects.
Interactive Appearance Opens a dialog box to change the appearance of the interactive elements in
Settings the Vectorworks program, including general elements, object highlighting,
SmartCursor elements, and snap points; see Configuring Interactive
Display on page 68
Note Reminds you that snapping can be suspended temporarily by pressing the
key (back quote key); see Setting Snapping Parameters on page 133
Reset Restores default parameter settings for all tabs
2. Click OK.
Grid Snapping
The snap and reference grids assist with precise drawing on both design and sheet layers, as described in Snap and
Reference Grids on page 78.
When snap to grid is on, the SmartCursor snaps to set points on the snap grid. For example, if the grid is set to 1, as the
mouse moves over the grid, it automatically catches every inch. When you create a line, the lines first and last point
will (if no other snapping is active) lie on the snap grid. Snap to grid is the only type of snapping that does not provide
any sort of visual cues. If snap to grid is on, the mouse is always on the grid, unless other snaps are also selected which
override snap to grid.
When snap to grid is on, the working plane displays with dots. The dots do not display for working planes when snap
to grid is off. See Appearance of the Planes on page 578.
1. Select Tools > SmartCursor Settings, or double-click the Snap to Grid tool in the Snapping palette.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box opens. From the Grid tab, specify the snap and reference grid settings.
136 | Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping
Parameter Description
Snap Grid The grid that aligns (snaps) objects during drawing and editing, when Snap to Grid is
active
Symmetrical Select to constrain the Y setting to be the same as the X setting, resulting in a symmetrical
grid (this setting is selected by default)
X and Y Sets the grid dimensions in the X and Y directions; the Y setting appears dimmed if
Symmetrical is selected
Reference Grid The visible grid used for visually aligning objects during drawing and editing
Symmetrical Select to constrain the Y setting to be the same as the X setting, resulting in a symmetrical
grid (this setting is selected by default)
X and Y Sets the grid dimensions in the X and Y direction; the Y setting appears dimmed if
Symmetrical is selected
Grid Options Sets how the reference grid behaves on screen and when printing
Show Grids Displays the reference grid when possible (even with this option selected, the reference
grid may not display depending on the zoom factor); also displays the active layer plane
grid in 3D views. This setting is selected by default.
Print Grid Prints the reference grid on both design layers and sheet layers
3D Grid Axes
Show 3D Z Axis Shows the Z axis for working planes (this setting is selected by default)
Z axis
Show 3D Axis Labels Shows labels for each axis in the active layer plane and working plane
2. Click OK.
3. To activate snapping to the snap grid, click the Snap to Grid tool from the Snapping palette.
Setting Snapping Parameters | 137
Object Snapping
When snap to object is on, the SmartCursor finds specific parts of an object, such as corners, endpoints, midpoints, or
centers of 2D objects and arc edges, as well as meshes, extrudes, sweeps, spheres, 3D polygons, 3D planar faces, and
walls, floors, roofs, roof faces, loci, and columns. Cues display near the cursor to identify the location.
1. Select Tools > SmartCursor Settings, or double-click the Snap to Object tool in the Snapping palette.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box opens. From the Object tab, specify the object snap settings.
Parameter Description
End Point Finds the endpoint of arcs, and the end of an objects edge
Endpoint Endpoint
Midpoint
Midpoint
Center Point Locates the center of 2D objects and arc edges, as well as meshes, extrudes,
sweeps, spheres, 3D polygons, 3D planar faces, and walls, floors, roofs, roof
faces, and columns
Center Center
Parameter Description
Quadrant Points Finds the top, left, right, and bottom of circles, ovals, rectangles, and rounded
rectangles
Top Center
Insertion Point Locates the object origin of loci, lights, objects, symbols, text, and for
dimensions, one of the referenced points
Insertion Point
Vertex Locates the corner point on polyline, polyline Bzier, and polyline cubic
segments; for 3D, finds the vertex of a solid or the control point of a NURBS
curve
Point
Point
Nearest Point on Edge For 2D, finds the closest point on an objects edge, and for 3D, finds any
non-specific point along a solid edge or NURBS curve. It may be more
convenient to use smart edge snapping instead; see Smart Edge Snapping
on page 142.
Object
Angle Snapping
Two points define an angle; Snap to Angle only applies to the second point of a two-point feedback segment, such as
when drawing a line or polygon. When snapping to angles, the SmartCursor finds the angles specified, and by default,
the SmartCursor also finds angles relative to the horizontal and vertical axes. Snap to Angle can also detect a plan
rotation angle (Vectorworks Design Series required); items created along that angle when in a rotated plan view, appear
horizontal when in a non-rotated, world coordinate view.
Setting Snapping Parameters | 139
1. Select Tools > SmartCursor Settings, or double-click the Snap to Angle tool in the Snapping palette.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box opens. From the Angle tab, specify the angle snap settings.
Parameter Description
Angles
Angles from Snaps to the specified angles with respect to the horizontal or vertical axes. For
Axes example, if 45 is specified, the angles found include 45, 135 (90+45),
225(180+45), and so on. Specify the angles to detect, separated by a semi-colon;
45 and 30 are suggested by default. Up to eight angles can be set.
45
45
Angles relative Snaps to the specified angles relative to the previously drawn segment, instead of
to prior with respect to the axes. This is convenient when drawing multi-segment shapes,
segment since the angle snap is based on the prior segment while drawing, and no mental
arithmetic is required.
The / key toggles this option on and off. When off, angles snap relative to the axes
as in the Angles from Axes setting. The shortcut key can be set in the workspace
editor; see Modifying Snapping and Mode Shortcuts on page 876
Plan Rotation Finds the angle of plan rotation; this snap is useful when drawing in a rotated top/
(Vectorworks plan view, and requiring objects to be horizontal when the plan is no longer rotated
Design Series
required)
Alternate Specifies an additional rotated coordinate system that provides angle snaps and
Coordinate alignments along its axes
System
140 | Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping
Parameter Description
Enter Angle Sets an angle other than the angles entered in Angles from Axes. Enter an
alternate angle.
Extension Lines Draws an extension line from a smart point to the alternate angle and 90 to the
alternate angle
Holding the Shift key while drawing forces the SmartCursor to select the nearest snap angle.
2. Click OK to set the angle snapping options.
3. To activate angle snapping, click the Snap to Angle tool from the Snapping palette.
1. Select Tools > SmartCursor Settings, or double-click the Smart Points tool in the Snapping palette.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box opens. From the Smart Point tab, specify the smart point snap settings.
Setting Snapping Parameters | 141
Parameter Description
Horizontal/Vertical Displays an extension line when the cursor aligns horizontally,
Extensions vertically, or in the X, Y, or Z direction with a smart point or datum
Align V
Align Y
Extension Lines Creates an extension line from a smart point when drawing at a snap
angle and the SmartCursor is aligned perpendicular to the smart point
15 / Align
Snap to line between Smart Snaps to the extension line between smart points
Points
Edge
Allow extensions from Creates extension lines from smart points located near the cursor.
nearby Smart Points When deselected, prevents extension lines generated by smart points
located close to the cursor, so that alignment does not occur to
unintentionally acquired smart points in cluttered drawings.
142 | Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping
Parameter Description
Acquire Smart Point Sets a smart point at the cursor location when the cursor pauses for the
indicated number of seconds. (Experienced users may wish to reduce
the pause time to 0.1 or 0.2 seconds.)
Alternatively, press the T key to set or release a smart point at the cursor
location, even if the Acquire Smart Point option is disabled.
Set Datum Sets a floating datum to define a temporary data origin by pausing the
cursor for the indicated number of seconds (normally, set this time
interval to be longer than the smart point acquisition time).
Alternatively, press the G key to set or release a datum at the cursor
location, even if the Set Datum option is disabled.
Datum
Datum Offset Sets an offset from the temporary datum origin that is indicated by an
additional marker along the extension line; enter the offset value
Datum
Datum
1. Select Tools > SmartCursor Settings, or double-click the Smart Edge tool in the Snapping palette.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box opens. From the Smart Edge tab, specify the smart edge snap settings.
Setting Snapping Parameters | 143
Parameter Description
Acquire Edge Sets a smart edge at the cursor location when the cursor moves over an object
edge for the indicated number of seconds. Alternatively, press the T key to set
or release a smart edge at the cursor location, even if the Acquire Edge option
is disabled.
Smart Edge
Snap to Bisector Finds points along the bisector that intersects two smart edges
Bisector Bisector
Snap to Offset Sets an offset from either end of a smart edge extension line that is indicated
by additional markers along the extension line; enter the offset value
Offset
Offset / Align V
144 | Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping
Parameter Description
Snap to Extension Generates extension lines from smart points perpendicular and parallel to the
Lines smart edge
Align X
Align Edge 90
Distance Snapping
When snap to distance snapping is on, the SmartCursor finds points at a selected distance along a straight or curved
line, polygon edges, wall edges, and other linear objects.
1. Select Tools > SmartCursor Settings, or double-click the Snap to Distance tool in the Snapping palette.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box opens. From the Distance tab, specify the distance snap settings.
2. Set the distance using a fraction, percentage, or a dimensional distance. Select Multiple Divisions to repeat snap
points along a line. For example, the SmartCursor can snap every quarter inch, or every 1/8 of the length of the
line.
Setting Snapping Parameters | 145
The SmartCursor measures from each endpoint to the center of the line. If a line is 10 units long and the distance
is set to 6 units, the distance will not be found at all, since it is longer than half a line. Similarly, any fraction
greater than 1/2 the length of the object or less than 0 cannot be used.
3. Click OK to set the Snap to Distance options.
4. To activate Distance snapping, click the Snap to Distance tool from the Snapping palette.
Snap to Intersection
When snap to intersection snapping is on, the SmartCursor finds the intersection between two objects or between the
parts of an object.
Object/Object
Click the Snap to Intersection tool from the Snapping palette. No parameters are required.
Click the Snap to Tangent tool from the Snapping palette. No parameters are required.
Tangent
Tangent
Hold down the Option (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) key to switch the tangent to the opposite side of the object.
Click the Snap to Working Plane tool from the Snapping palette. No parameters are required.
Shadow point on
working plane While moving along the top edge of the extrude with
working plane snapping on, the cursor snaps to the
working plane
Feedback segment
(Line tool in use) Feedback segment
snaps to vertical and
to smart point
extension line
Functionality Location/Description
Enable/disable snapping tools Snapping palette, Setting Snapping Parameters on page 133
Enable/disable individual snapping SmartCursor Settings dialog box; Setting Snapping Parameters on
parameters page 133
Change the appearance of snap Interactive Appearance Settings dialog box; Configuring Interactive
points and indicators Display on page 68
Enable/disable snap box, selection Interactive tab of Vectorworks preferences; Interactive Preferences on
box, and acquisition hints page 25
Change the appearance of the snap Interactive tab of Vectorworks preferences; Interactive Preferences on
box and selection box page 25
Save snap settings as a script Custom Tool/Attribute command; Creating Custom Tool/Attribute
Scripts on page 848
Change snapping shortcut keys Keys tab of the Workspace Editor; Modifying Snapping and Mode
Shortcuts on page 876
Drawing with Snapping | 147
Functionality Location/Description
Snapping to objects in other layers Class and layer option commands; Setting Class and Design Layer Options
or in classes or layers set to gray on page 114
Snapping Indicators
There are several types of snap points. Use these in combination with the settings in the Snapping palette, SmartCursor
Settings dialog box, the Interactive Appearance Settings dialog box, and Interactive tab in Vectorworks preferences to
tailor snapping and snapping appearance to your drawing task. In addition to the snap points, other interactive elements
assist with snapping.
Available snap points
Available snap points display near the cursor, within the snap box area, to indicate that a snap point is near the
cursor.
The current snap point indicator is black in 2D. In 3D, the indicator displays with red, green, and blue colors,
which correspond to the red (X), green (Y), and blue (Z) axes. The orientation of the 3D indicator is relative to the
current working plane; dashed lines indicate the negative axes.
Smart point
When the Smart Point snapping is enabled, up to three smart points can be defined at one time; see Smart Points
Snapping on page 140. A smart point displays as a red rectangle by default. If extension lines are enabled, the
extension line for the smart point appears as a dashed line. A datum is a special type of smart point and counts as
one of the three smart points.
Smart point Smart point with extension line Datum Datum with extension line
Selection box
Snap box
The selection box shows the area where object geometry can be selected or recognized by a tool that selects or
clicks objects (such as the Selection tool or the Eyedropper tool). The snap box indicates the area from which the
current snap will be obtained. The current snap is obtained from all the available snaps inside the snap box. The
snap box allows a snap to be held while the selection box moves around to change the snapping selection.
The size and visibility of the selection box and snap box can be adjusted, and these indicators enabled, from the
Interactive tab in Vectorworks preferences. See Interactive Preferences on page 25.
Acquisition hints
Acquisition hints display the potential snap points that can be acquired near the cursor. They indicate that a smart
point, smart edge, or vector lock can be acquired.
Smart edge
Vector lock
Drawing with Snapping | 149
Enable the acquisition hints from the Interactive tab in Vectorworks preferences. See Interactive Preferences on
page 25.
Alignment Indicators
Lightly colored axis and plane indicators provide subtle hints to help determine whether the cursor is aligned to an
axis (2D) or an axis and/or plane (3D). The color of the indicator matches the axis color (red for X, green for Y,
and blue for Z) to help you determine when the cursor is aligned to an axis or plane.
Green Y plane
alignment indicator
Green Y axis alignment
indicator
Green Y axis
alignment indicator
4. The SmartCursor locks to the vector and the operation is snapped along the desired direction.
The Data bar can create a vector lock along a specific direction. Enter values in the Data bar as described in Using the
Data Bar on page 203. A vector lock displays, and the SmartCursor only snaps to points on the locked line.
3. Click to perform the desired operation; the snap loupe window closes automatically, returning to the drawing.
Alternatively, press the Esc key to exit the snap loupe without clicking, or click outside of the loupe to close it.
SmartCursor Cues
The following table lists the individual cues that the SmartCursor uses along with a description of each. In many cases,
two cues are used together to indicate that two snaps have been activated. For example, the cue Align H/Angle means
that the point located is both aligned horizontally to the indicated smart point and also snapping to an angle.
Some cues display when a first point has already been found, and a second point is being sought. These two points form
a line called the feedback segment. This segment forms an angle and length which the SmartCursor uses for some of its
snaps.
For a line, the feedback segment is the same as the line being drawn. However, for other objects, the interactive image
does not lie on the feedback segment. The SmartCursor works on the feedback segment created from the first to the
second points (for polygons, from the previous point to the current point).
Cue Description
Snap to Angle
Alt Feedback segment is parallel to the alternative coordinate system angle
Alt 90 Feedback segment is perpendicular to the alternative coordinate system
angle
Delta angle Feedback segment is at the specified snap angle from the rotated grid
Horizontal Feedback segment is horizontal
Parallel Feedback segment is parallel to an object
Perpendicular Feedback segment is perpendicular to an object
152 | Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping
Cue Description
Plan Rotation Feedback segment is aligned to the rotated plan angle
(Vectorworks Design
Series required)
Symmetric Feedback segment is sketching out a square or circle
Vertical Feedback segment is vertical
X Feedback segment is aligned with the X axis
Y Feedback segment is aligned with the Y axis
Z Feedback segment is aligned with the Z axis, or point is aligned to a smart
point in the direction of the Z axis
X Feedback segment is aligned with the X axis of the rotated grid
Y Feedback segment is aligned with the Y axis of the rotated grid
Z Feedback segment is aligned with the Z axis of the rotated grid, or point is
aligned to a smart point in the direction of the Z axis of the rotated grid
Smart Point
-------------- Extension line used for all smart point cues except Datum
Align Feedback segment is perpendicular to a segment from the cursor to a smart
point
Align H Point is aligned horizontally with a smart point
Align V Point is aligned vertically with a smart point
Align X Point is aligned with the X coordinate of a smart point
Align Y Point is aligned with the Y coordinate of a smart point
Align Z Point is aligned with the Z coordinate of a smart point
Align X Point is aligned with the X coordinate of a smart point, in the space of the
rotated grid
Align Y Point is aligned with the Y coordinate of a smart point, in the space of the
rotated grid
Align Z Point is aligned with the Z coordinate of a smart point, in the space of the
rotated grid
Align Edge Point is aligned to smart edge
Align Edge 90 Point is aligned perpendicular to smart edge
Align Alt Point is aligned to the user coordinate system
Align Alt 90 Point is aligned perpendicular to the user coordinate system
Datum Point is the Datum
O Circle around Datum
Working Plane Point is on the grid plane
SmartCursor Cues | 153
Cue Description
Snap to Distance
Along Line 2DPoint is at a specified distance along line
3DPoint is at a specified distance along line from the end point of a
NURBS curve, 3D polygon, or edge of a solid object
Data bar
-------------- Extension line used to indicate X or Y value is locked
Angle Feedback segment is constrained to an angle
Length Feedback segment is of a fixed length set in Data bar
Snap to Object
Arc Cursor is over the corner point of a polyline arc segment
Arc Center Cursor is over the center point of an arc
Arc End Cursor is over the end of an arc segment
Bzier Cursor is over the corner point of a polyline Bzier segment
Bottom Center Cursor is over the bottom center of rectangle or group
Bottom Left Cursor is over the bottom left of the objects bounding box
Bottom Right Cursor is over the bottom right of the objects bounding box
Center 2DCursor is over the center of the objects bounding box
3DCursor is over the geometric center of certain objects, NURBS curves,
3D polygons, or the center of a circular NURBS curve
Center Left Cursor is over the center left of the objects bounding box
Center Right Cursor is over the center right of the objects bounding box
Corner Cursor is over the corner point of a polyline segment
Endpoint Cursor is over the end of an objects edge
Fit Cursor is over the corner point of a polyline cubic segment
Insertion Point Cursor is over the object origin for symbols, parametric objects, and text
objects; for dimensions, the cursor is over one of the referenced points
Light Cursor is on a light
Locus Cursor is on a locus
3D Locus Cursor is on a 3D locus
Midpoint Cursor is over the middle of an objects edge
Object 2DCursor is on an objects edge
3DCursor is on any non-specific point along a solid edge or NURBS
curve; displays at all corner points when the Nearest Point on Edge option
is deselected for object snapping
154 | Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping
Cue Description
Point 2DCursor is on an object point
3DCursor is on one of the vertices of a solid, the control point of a
NURBS curve, the control point of a NURBS surface, or NURBS curve
interpolation point
Top Center Cursor is over the top center of the objects bounding box
Top Left Cursor is over the top left of the objects bounding box
Top Right Cursor is over the top right of the objects bounding box
Smart Edge
Bisector Point is on the bisector between two smart edges
Edge Feedback segment is parallel to a smart edge, or cursor is on the edge
between two smart points
Edge 90 Feedback segment is perpendicular to a smart edge
Offset Point is a preset distance from a smart edge
Smart Edge Point is on a smart edge, but not on the object itself
Snap to Tangent
Tangent Feedback segment is tangent to an arc
Tangent/Tangent Feedback segment is tangent to two arcs
Using Vectorworks Resources 5
The Vectorworks program provides a variety of resources to aid in drawing. It is also possible to create custom
resources to your specifications. These resources are easily accessible from the Resource Browser, which is the central
repository for all available Vectorworks resources.
Some of these resources are also available as default content at the point of use to facilitate faster, easier drawing.
Custom resources can also be made available by default. This provides the flexibility to choose among default content,
custom content, or all available resources while drawing.
Libraries
Vectorworks software comes with hundreds of libraries, which can be accessed through the Resource Browser (see
Accessing Existing Resources on page 162). Default content (which is available at the time of use) is automatically
installed with the Vectorworks software. All other content, including industry-specific content, is optionally added
during the installation process (Internet access required). If the additional content was not added during installation, it
can be added later. Select Help > Download Content to download it.
This content is contained in .vpkg files. If multiple copies of the Vectorworks application are installed, the files
may open by default in a different version of Vectorworks. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on
the .vpkg file and use Open with from the context menu to select the desired version of the Vectorworks software.
Excluding standards and templates (which are installed based on the drawing unit selected during installation), all
libraries for the Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks products are universal, and are installed regardless of the
drawing unit selected during installation.
Libraries are organized by professional discipline and subject. The Vectorworks Design Series products contain
additional libraries. Even more content is available exclusively for Vectorworks Service Select subscribers; see
Vectorworks Service Select on page xiv.
For a list of libraries and the product(s) to which they belong, see the Libraries-Index and Product Matrix.pdf file
located in the [Vectorworks]\Libraries folder.
A subset of content (some of which are resources available in libraries) is also available by default at the point of use.
The ability to use default content is a preference on the Session tab of the Vectorworks preferences, which can be
disabled if default content use is not desired; see Session Preferences on page 20.
Default content is available from a variety of dialog boxes and also from the Attributes and Object Info palettes. Once
default content is selected for use, it is automatically imported into the current file and if it is a resource (such as a hatch
or gradient) it also displays in the Resource Browser; see Accessing Existing Resources on page 162.
To create default content for yourself only, put the file in the appropriate subfolder within
[User]\Libraries\Defaults (where [User] is the user data folder specified in your Vectorworks preferences). For
example, place a hatches file in [User]\Libraries\Defaults\Attributes - Hatches. See User Folders Preferences on
page 27 for more information.
If Vectorworks Design Series products are installed, you can create default content that is project-specific, or that
is shared with a workgroup. To do so, put the file on the network in the appropriate subfolder within
[Workgroup]\Libraries\Defaults (where [Workgroup] is a workgroup folder specified in your Vectorworks
preferences). For example, place a hatches file in [Workgroup]\Libraries\Defaults\Attributes - Hatches). When
coworkers set up this workgroup folder in their preferences, they also have access to the default content. See
Sharing Custom Files with a Workgroup on page 39 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide for more
information.
The name of your custom library file also affects resource availability in the Vectorworks program.
To totally supersede the Vectorworks default hatches, use the same name as the hatch file in the Vectorworks
program folder (Hatches_Default.vwx).
To make your custom default hatches available along with the Vectorworks default hatches, use a unique name,
such as Custom_Hatches.vwx.
If a file name is repeated in any of the folders, only the content from one file is shown, according to the following
precedence: user folder, workgroup folder, application folder. For example, if the following files exist, only hatches
from the file in the user folder show in the hatch list in the Attributes palette in the Vectorworks program.
[User]\Libraries\Defaults\Attributes - Hatches\Hatches_Default.vwx
[Workgroup]\Libraries\Defaults\Attributes - Hatches\Hatches_Default.vwx
[Vectorworks]\Libraries\Defaults\Attributes - Hatches\Hatches_Default.vwx
If a custom library file contains multiple types of content, the program only displays the content type for the folder that
contains the custom file (or an alias or shortcut to the file). For example, if a file contains both wall hatches and
textures, and the file is in the Libraries\Defaults\Walls - Textures folder, only the wall textures are displayed as defaults
in the Vectorworks program.
To make the custom library resources available from the Resource Browser only (not as defaults in dialog boxes
and palettes), place the file in a Favorites folder in either your user folder or a workgroup folder. See Using
Favorites Files on page 164.
Resource name
Select a library option
to browse for a file from
which to display Resource
resources, without display window
opening the file
Active symbol Resource type
button
Feature Description
Files menu Lists menu commands that are used to create and manage a set of favorite resource files
(see Using Favorites Files on page 164) and to browse the resources in an existing
document (see Quick Resource Browsing on page 163)
Files list Specifies the file from which to display resources in the Resource Browser. Select a file
from the Open Files or Favorites sections of the list, or select an option from the Libraries
section of the list and browse to locate the file that contains the resources you need.
Select Always Display Active Document to automatically display the resources in the
active file whenever you switch from one open file to another.
See Using Resources from Open Files, Favorites, and Libraries on page 163.
Home button Displays the resources of the currently active file
Resources menu Lists menu commands that are used to work with resources; see the following:
Viewing Resources on page 159
Creating New Resources on page 161
Finding Resources on page 165
Working with Resources on page 167
Up one level button Moves one level up the symbol folder or script palette folder hierarchy
File folder list Lists the files resource folders, if there are symbol folders or script palette folders in the
file. Select a folder to display the folders resources in the resource display window.
To return to a view of the entire resource hierarchy, select Top Level. All resource types
and folders that are currently selected to be shown display in the resource display window.
Resource type In Thumbnails mode, displays resources divided into categories by type; the types are
displayed in headings that can be shown and expanded, or collapsed and hidden (see
Hiding and Showing Resources on page 161). In List mode, click the column header to
sort the columns by resource name or by resource type.
Resource tooltip Shows the full resource name as a tooltip when the mouse pointer hovers over a resource;
for referenced resources, the tooltip also shows the source file name
Using the Resource Browser | 159
Feature Description
Resource preview Displays resources with a preview image, or lists the resources with a representational icon
(see Viewing Resources on page 159)
Resource name Shows the resource name; a name in italics indicates a referenced resource. Type the first
letter of a resource to quickly display resource names beginning with that letter. The color
of a symbol (black, red, or blue) indicates the symbol type (see Symbol Types on
page 170).
Resource display Displays the resources from the file shown in the Files list, and the symbol folder shown in
window the File Folder list. Select which resource types to display from the Resources menu (see
Hiding and Showing Resources on page 161).
Active symbol button Displays the currently active symbol in the resource display window
2. By default, the resources from the currently active document display. Locate and select a resource to use from this
file, or use the Files list to view resources from other files. If the resource you need does not exist, you can create
one.
3. Once a resource is selected, you can use it in the drawing, or select another action from the Resources menu, such
as Edit or Export to another file. See Working with Resources on page 167 for more details.
Viewing Resources
Resources can be viewed in either Thumbnails (default) or List mode.
In Thumbnails mode, resources are displayed in 64x64 pixel full color. Gradient fills, hatch fills, image fills, line types,
symbols, plug-in objects, text styles, and tile fills are previewed with an actual image; other resources are previewed
with a representational icon. For symbols, the thumbnail view and render mode can be set from the Resource menu,
and when editing symbols, the thumbnail view can be set to match the editing view. Long resource names display on up
to five lines, and the number of characters displayed depends on the system font selected. In List mode, resources are
displayed as 16x16 pixel representational icons.
Referenced Resource (see Workgroup Referencing on page 121) Resource name displays in
italics
Renderworks Background (Renderworks required; see Creating Layer
Backgrounds on page 611)
Renderworks Texture (Renderworks required; see Creating Textures on
page 591)
mp
In Thumbnails mode, click on the disclosure arrow next to the resource type name in the Resource Browser to hide or
display resources. Alternatively, double-click on the resource name bar to hide or display resources.
Select Window > Palettes > Save Palette Positions to save the current show/hide status across Vectorworks sessions.
To revert to settings established when the custom workspace was created (in the User Data and Preferences folder),
click Reset Saved Settings from the Session tab of Vectorworks preferences (see Session Preferences on page 20).
Ctrl-click here to
display the
context menu
Removing Favorites
To remove a single favorite file:
1. In the Resource Browser, select the favorite file to delete from the Files list.
2. Select Remove Current Favorite from the Files menu.
The file is removed from the Favorites list.
To remove all favorite files:
1. In the Resource Browser, select Remove All Favorites from the Files menu.
A confirmation dialog box opens.
2. Click Yes to remove all favorites.
All favorite files are removed from the Favorites list.
Finding Resources
There are three ways to quickly access specific resources through the Resource Browser:
Use the Resource Browsers incremental name search feature to locate and select a resource that is already in the
document.
Use the Resource Browsers Find Resource command to search for a specific resource name in the current file or
in another file in a specified file path. When the resource is found, it can be selected from the Resource Browser.
Find an instance of the resource in the drawing, and then Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) and
select Locate in Resource Browser from the context menu to select the resource in the Resource Browser.
Incremental Search
To quickly access a resource that is already in the document, click in the resource display window and begin to type the
resources name. The resource display window scrolls to the first resource or folder that begins with the letter(s) you
entered. The resource type (such as Textures or Worksheets) must be shown in the browser window to be part of the
search. If the resource is in a folder, select the folder from the File folder list first.
166 | Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources
Finding a Resource
Use the Find Resource command to quickly locate a resource in any file created with the current version of the
program, and optionally to select that resource in the Resource Browser.
To locate and use a resource:
1. In the Resource Browser, select Find Resource from the Resources menu.
The Find Resource dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Find resource names containing Enter the full or partial resource name to find
Search Location
Current file Select to search for the resource in the current file
Files on disk Select to search for the resource in the displayed path. To search for the resource
in a different folder, click Choose; select the folder to search in, and then click
Open (Macintosh) or OK (Windows) to return to the Find Resource dialog box.
Include subfolders Select whether to include subfolders in the search process
Options
Resource types Select to search for all resource types or for one specific resource type
Match case Select whether the search is case sensitive
Find whole words only Select this option to search for occurrences that are whole words only, and not
part of a larger string of text
To reference the resource, select Reference from the Resources menu. If the source file is not currently
referenced by this file, specify the new reference information. (See Referencing Resources on page 127.)
The resource is added to the current files Resource Browser. (Default content is automatically imported into the
current file at the point of use, and displays in the Resource Browser; see Libraries on page 155.)
Image resources can be compressed to reduce the Vectorworks file size. See Compressing Images on page 285
for more information.
Understanding Symbols
Symbol Advantages
Objects can be saved as 2D (screen plane), 3D (2D planar or 3D), or hybrid (2D screen plane and 3D combined)
symbol definitions. Vectorworks software also ships with thousands of symbols. Symbol definitions save the object
170 | Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources
properties, such as size, color, and class, within the symbol definition; these properties are retained each time the
symbol is placed, and when a symbol is imported into a different drawing.
Symbols provide several advantages:
Smaller file sizes: The symbol and its definition are stored only once in the drawing file. Placement information
(location coordinates, rotation) is all that is required for each symbol instance.
One-time editing: Changes to the symbol definition automatically update all the instances of the symbol in the
drawing.
Attached database information: The information associated with a symbol can be used to generate reports and
worksheets. Information attached to a symbol is specific to that instance, allowing each instance to be edited
individually.
Ease of import: With the Resource Browser, importing symbols from one file to another is fast and easy, and any
database information attached to the symbol is also imported.
Symbol Types
In Vectorworks, you can create 2D and 3D objects. Symbols, which are converted objects, can also consist of 2D, 3D,
or hybrid objects.
In addition, there are special symbol categories which indicate the symbols behavior at placement. These categories
are color-coded within the Resource Browser for identification. The category a symbol belongs to depends on the type
of object converted to a symbol and the options selected at symbol creation.
Symbols can be nested within other symbols.
Plug-in Objects
Plug-in objects have all the power of standard symbols, with the added advantage of being customizable. Unlike
symbols, plug-in objects have the option of being placed onto the drawing and remaining modifiable. This is useful if
the drawing needs to contain many different variations of the same object.
Some tool sets and libraries contain plug-in objects; for example, the Scale Bar tool, located in the Dims/Notes tool
set, inserts a plug-in object. In addition to the tool sets, pre-defined plug-in objects are available in the Libraries folder
(in subfolders beginning with the word Object or Objects), and are accessed through the Resource Browser.
When a plug-in object from a tool set is inserted, an object properties dialog box may open the first time the item is
placed in the drawing. The properties in this dialog box set the default values for the object during this session. Modify
the properties prior to inserting the object, or accept the default values and click OK. Object instances can be modified
through the Object Info palette after insertion.
Custom plug-in objects can be created through the Tools > Plug-ins > Plug-in Manager; see Creating Scripted
Plug-Ins on page 857.
In addition, a symbol can be saved as a red symbol that becomes a plug-in object upon insertion.
There are four different types of plug-in objects: point, linear, rectangular, and path. Each type is different in how it is
placed in the drawing and edited.
Linear and rectangular objects cannot be inserted directly into a wall. However, once placed in the drawing, they
can be dragged onto a wall to insert them.
Point Plug-in Objects
Point plug-in objects are placed by a single click in the drawing to specify the location, and then a second click to set
the rotation angle. This is the same way symbols are placed using the symbol insertion tool. A preview image of the
object is visible at the cursor location. Point plug-in objects cannot be edited (resized or rotated) with the cursor; they
are edited using the Object Info palette.
Linear Plug-in Objects
Linear plug-in objects are placed with two clicks. The first click sets the beginning point and the second sets the
endpoint of a line. The orientation of the object is determined by this line. The object can be resized or rotated by
clicking on a reshape handle at either end of the line. It can also be edited using the Object Info palette.
Rectangular Plug-in Objects
Rectangular plug-in objects are placed by a sequence of three clicks in the drawing. There are two different placement
modes which determine how these three clicks are interpreted.
Center-line Placement
Edge Placement
Center-line Placement Mode: The first click specifies the origin of the object, the second click specifies the
length, and the third click defines half the width of the rectangular object. After the second click, the cursor
displays feedback symmetrically on both sides of the center-line of the rectangle.
Edge Placement Mode: The first click specifies one corner of the rectangular object, the second click determines
the length, and the third click specifies the entire width.
172 | Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources
When a rectangular plug-in object is selected, there are eight selection handles visible. The object can be resized by
dragging these handles, or edited through the Object Info palette.
Path Plug-in Objects
Path plug-in objects are created with a sequence of several clicks that define the vertex points along a path. There are
two different types of path plug-in objects based on the type of path that is used. A 2D path plug-in object uses a
polyline path and a 3D path plug-in object uses a 3D NURBS curve for its path.
Path plug-in objects can be edited using the Reshape tool directly. They can also be edited through Modify > Edit
Group, or the Object Info palette.
To create a hybrid symbol, select both the 2D and 3D objects, which become the 2D and 3D components of the
symbol. In Top/Plan view, align the objects first (symbol alignment can be adjusted after creation with the Edit
Symbol command). The symbol preview that displays in the Resource Browser is generated in the symbol view at
creation or editing.
If a hybrid symbol will be inserted into a wall, you can optionally specify the 3D wall hole component in addition
to the 2D and 3D components; see Adding a 3D Wall Hole Component to a Symbol Definition on page 494.
For 2D symbols inserted in walls, two loci can be specified as wall break locations. In Top/Plan view, place two
loci at opposing locations with the object to convert, and select them all before converting. When the symbol is
inserted into the wall, the wall breaks at the loci locations instead of the symbol bounding box.
2. Select Modify > Create Symbol.
The Create Symbol dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Name Provide a name for the new symbol. Do not use single quotes in symbol names. Single
quotes in names are reserved for use in scripts.
Insertion Point Controls how the symbol is inserted
Plan Projection Center/ Sets the insertion point according to the objects geometry.
3D Object Center/ If working in Top/Plan view, the insertion point is defined by the bounding box
Plug-in Object Origin center. For 3D objects, the z coordinate is defined by the object's relation to the
active layer plane.
If working in 3D view, the insertion point is defined as the center of the object's
bounding cube.
If creating a symbol from a Plug-in object, the insertion point is defined to be the
same as the object's insertion point.
Next Mouse Click Sets the insertion point manually, with the cursor, after clicking OK
Units Determines the symbols size units
Page-based Sets the symbol size according to the page. When inserted, the symbol automatically
scales relative to the page environment. This is useful for annotation objects that
should always remain the same size on the page, regardless of the layer scale.
World-based Sets the symbol size according to constant world dimensions; its insertion size depends
on the layer scale
174 | Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources
Parameter Description
Insert in Walls Select whether the symbol will be insertable in walls. When Wall Insertion mode is
enabled, objects that have the Insert in Walls option enabled will insert into walls (see
Inserting Symbols on page 175).
On Centerline/On Edge If Insert in Walls is selected, select how the symbol will be inserted. On Centerline
snaps the symbols insertion point to the center line of the wall. On Edge snaps the
symbols insertion point along either edge of the wall.
Wall Breaks If Insert in Walls is selected, select how the wall will break around the symbol when it
is inserted into a wall
Other Options
Leave Instance In-Place When selected, replaces the current selection with a symbol instance; when deselected,
the object is removed from the drawing
Change 2D Objects Converts any planar 2D objects in the layer plane into screen plane 2D objects, for the
from Layer Plane to Top/Plan representation of the symbol. If deselected, any 2D planar objects in the layer
Screen Plane plane that are part of the symbol will not display in Top/Plan view, so a hybrid symbol
may not display properly in Top/Plan view.
Convert to Group Converts the symbol into a grouped object when inserted, disassociating it from the
original symbol definition. Converted grouped objects are identified in the Resource
Browser with a blue name.
Deselect to convert the symbol into a black, unmodifiable symbol; each instance is
controlled by the symbol definition.
Convert to Plug-in Converts the symbol into a plug-in object when inserted, allowing the current
Object parameters to be pre-set when the plug-in object is inserted. Converted plug-in objects
are identified in the Resource Browser with a red name.
Deselect to convert the symbol into a black, unmodifiable symbol; each instance is
controlled by the symbol definition.
Assign To Class Select the class the symbol will be assigned to upon insertion. The symbol can be
assigned to the active class or to another class present in the drawing; alternatively,
create a new class by selecting New.
When a new class is created, it does not automatically become the active class.
3. Click OK.
4. If the Next Mouse Click insertion point option was selected, click to specify the desired symbol insertion point.
5. Specify the folder location for the new symbol in the next Create Symbol dialog box.
Click the folder to select it as the destination for the new symbol.
Inserting Symbols | 175
Parameter Description
Folder list Displays the files symbol folders; the selected folder becomes the destination for the new
symbol
New Folder Creates a new folder within the selected folder; specify the folder name and click OK to
create the symbol folder
Dont show this dialog Hides this dialog box if you only want to see it when a file already contains symbol folders
6. Click OK.
The new symbol is added to the Resource Browser.
Inserting Symbols
Symbols are resources available from the Resource Browser. To open the Resource Browser, select Windows >
Palettes > Resource Browser. Display the symbol to insert in the Resource Browser (see Accessing Existing
Resources on page 162).
The currently active symbol is inserted; the active symbols name displays at the bottom of the Resource Browser.
Clicking on the active symbol button automatically displays the currently active symbol in the resource display
window.
Symbols are inserted from the Resource Browser by dragging and dropping, or with the Symbol Insertion tool.
Symbols can be inserted as individual objects or inserted to become part of a wall.
Active symbol
button
Active symbol name
176 | Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources
Standard Insertion
Mode Description
Standard Insertion Inserts the symbol based on its specified insertion point, or aligned according to one of
the symbol alignment modes
Offset Insertion Inserts the symbol in a wall according to an offset reference point
Symbol Pick up Designates a symbol from the drawing as the active symbol
Wall Insertion Toggles between inserting a symbol or plug-in object into a wall with wall breaks, and
inserting a symbol or plug-in object near or on a wall without breaking it.
To prevent all symbol and plug-in objects from inserting into walls, turn off Wall
Insertion mode. When Wall Insertion mode is enabled, objects that have the Insert in
Walls option enabled will insert into walls (see Creating New Symbols on page 172).
Symbol Alignment These alignment modes apply to Standard Insertion mode, and temporarily override the
Modes insertion point. These modes change the alignment of the insertion point along the X axis
of the bounding box surrounding the symbol. Alternatively, keep the original point as the
insertion point.
Align Symbol Left Moves the insertion point to the left edge of the symbols bounding box, along the
original X axis
Inserting Symbols | 177
Mode Description
Align Symbol Moves the insertion point to the center of the symbols bounding box, along the original X
Center axis
Align Symbol Right Moves the insertion point to the right edge of the symbols bounding box, along the
original X axis
Align Actual Uses the symbols originally specified insertion point
Insertion Point
Vertical
2nd click
Horizontal
1st click
The first click inserts the Move the cursor up to rotate Click again to set the
symbol horizontally the symbol vertically symbols position
178 | Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources
To place another copy of the symbol in the drawing, move the cursor to another location and click. The selected symbol
and Symbol Insertion tool remain active until another tool is selected.
1. Select the desired symbol from the Resource Browser. The symbol must have the Insert in Walls option enabled
(see Creating New Symbols on page 172).
2. Select Make Active from the Resources menu. The Symbol Insertion tool, on the Basic palette, becomes active.
Alternatively, double-click the symbol in the Resource Browser to make the symbol active and to select the
Symbol Insertion tool.
3. Click the Offset Insertion mode button.
4. Click the desired alignment mode.
5. Click to set the reference point from which the symbol is to be offset. The reference point does not have to be
within the wall.
The symbol preview displays when the cursor is over a wall.
6. Click to set the offset location of the symbol.
7. If the symbol is not oriented properly in the wall, move the cursor slightly away from the insertion point, and then
flip the symbol about its axis to the correct position.
In click-drag mode, click and hold the mouse to insert the symbol and still be able to flip it. A quick click
eliminates the ability to flip the symbol and locks the orientation of the symbol as it is placed.
8. Click to set the symbol.
The Enter Offset dialog box opens, displaying the distance between the clicked points. The fields available depend
on whether the wall is straight or round.
Enter Offset dialog box for Enter Offset dialog box for
straight walls round walls
Parameter Description
Offset For straight walls, specify the offset distance. For round walls, specify either the Distance or the
Angle between the reference point and the symbol. The distance is measured along the outer arc
of the round wall.
Editing Symbols | 179
Parameter Description
Offset Using Select whether to offset the symbol using the insertion point or the next mouse click on another
point on the symbol
9. Click OK.
10. If the Insertion Point option was selected, the symbol is placed into the wall so that the insertion point is offset as
specified from the reference point.
If the Next Click option was selected, a witness line of the specified length or angle extends from the reference
point to the end point. Click on the symbol to indicate the appropriate offset point and to place the symbol into the
wall so that the clicked point is offset as specified from the reference point.
Editing Symbols
Once a symbol instance is placed in a drawing, its information can be displayed in the Object Info palette. Select a
symbol instance to display its properties. A symbols location can be adjusted, or its layer and class association can be
changed by selecting a new class or layer from the appropriate list. A symbol can be replaced with another symbol,
rotated in 2D or 3D space, and, for symbols located in walls, flipped, replaced, and repositioned.
180 | Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources
Most of a black symbols physical attributes cannot be directly changed in the Object Info or Attributes palette. Instead,
the components of a symbol must be accessed and edited through the Edit Symbol window. Changes made to a symbol
definition affect all existing and future instances of that symbol, unless the symbol was inserted as a group (blue) or
plug-in object (red).
If you delete a symbol definition and there are instances of that symbol in the drawing, you can specify whether to
replace all instances with loci or to delete them completely.
Only the symbols that are currently part of the active drawing are listed.
4. Click OK.
The old symbol instance is replaced with the new symbol instance.
The new symbol uses the settings from the replaced symbol. Future occurrences of the new symbol are unaffected by
these settings.
Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the symbol, and select Edit from the context menu.
To edit the components of a hybrid symbol directly, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the
symbol, and select Edit 2D Component, Edit 3D Component, or Edit 3D Wall Hole Component from the
context menu.
2. Only one component of a hybrid symbol can be edited at one time. If the symbol is hybrid, the Edit Symbol dialog
box opens. Insertion options and units can be specified when the symbol is edited from the Resource Browser, and
additional double-click behavior for the dialog box can be specified when the symbol is edited from the drawing.
Select the component to edit.
Edit Symbol dialog box accessed from Resource Browser Edit Symbol dialog box accessed from drawing
Parameter Description
2D/3D Component Edits the 2D screen plane or the 2D planar/3D component of the symbol
3D Wall Hole Component Edits the 3D wall hole component of the symbol definition (see Adding a 3D Wall
Hole Component to a Symbol Definition on page 494)
Symbol Options Edits the method of inserting the symbol into a wall, and whether symbols are
world-based or page-based (see Creating New Symbols on page 172). To edit the
symbol options of multiple symbols, see Editing the Symbol Options of Multiple
Symbols on page 183)
Double-click Sets the future behavior when double-clicking on a symbol in a drawing. Select
whether to display the Edit Symbol dialog box, or directly edit the 2D or 3D
component or insertion options. Select Edits the Component based on current view
to automatically edit the 2D component if in Top/Plan view, or the 3D component if in
one of the 3D views.
Use the edit view Matches the Resource Browser thumbnail view to the selected editing view. For
example, if a hybrid symbols thumbnail preview is set to Top/Plan, and the 3D
component of the symbol is edited while in a Right Isometric view, the thumbnail view
switches to Right Isometric to match.
3. Click Edit.
If Symbol Options was selected, the Symbol Options dialog box opens. See Creating New Symbols on
page 172 for information on wall insertion options and units.
If one of the component options was selected, the Edit Symbol window opens, containing the symbol to be
edited. A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Exit
Symbol command becomes available from the Modify menu, and the Exit Symbol button is visible in the top
right corner of the drawing window.
To edit nested symbols, select Modify > Edit Symbol again.
Editing Symbols | 183
The visibility of other objects when in editing mode is controlled by the Show other objects while in editing
modes option in the Display tab of the Vectorworks preferences (see Display Preferences on page 18). To show
the other objects in a less obtrusive way, also select the Gray other objects option. If the symbol was edited from
the Resource Browser, other objects cannot be displayed; edit a symbol instance from the drawing to display other
objects while in editing mode. See Object Editing Mode on page 16 for more information). If a page-based
(green) symbol is being edited, the editing mode scale has changed to 1:1, and while other objects that are not at a
1:1 scale may be visible at their own active layer scale, they are not snappable.
The Show other objects while in editing modes preference does not work when editing a symbol definition from
a flipped symbol instance; an alert message displays when this operation is attempted.
If you are pasting 2D layer plane objects from the clipboard while editing a symbol, an alert allows you to assign
those objects to the screen plane. Normally, select Yes so that the 2D components display correctly in Top/Plan
view.
In addition, if you are editing a 2D-only symbol and adding 3D objects (including 2D planar objects) or hybrid
objects, or editing a 3D-only symbol and adding screen plane or hybrid objects, an alert informs you that you are
creating a hybrid symbol. Portions of the symbol may not be visible in certain views. Similarly, if removing
portions of a hybrid symbol during editing, you may be creating a 2D-only or 3D-only symbol which may not
display as expected in certain views. Keep in mind that 2D objects that are part of a symbol must be in the screen
plane to be visible in Top/Plan view; if they are planar, they will be visible in 3D views. 3D objects that are part of
a symbol are not visible in Top/Plan view.
4. When editing components, make the symbol edits in the Attributes or Object Info palette. To edit the symbol
insertion point, select all the components of the symbol, and relocate the components about the insertion point
crosshairs. The intersection of the crosshairs gives the feedback segment Locus when encountered.
Insertion point
Crosshairs
The other component of a hybrid symbol is not automatically adjusted to match changes made to the insertion
point. It must be edited separately. Switch easily to the other component from the context menu.
5. After editing, click the Exit Symbol button (or select Modify > Exit Symbol) to update all instances of the
symbol and return to the normal drawing mode.
If the edited symbol is nested in other symbols, the Exit Symbol button returns back to the symbol container.
3. The options are the same as those described in Creating New Symbols on page 172. However, the dialog box
displays the current status of parameters for the selected symbols. When the parameter settings of the symbols are
different, the option displays as blank, or a check box displays with an indeterminate state; any edits to that
parameter affect all the selected symbols.
If the selected symbols consist of a mixed set of symbol types, the available conversion options may differ
(Convert to Group/Convert to Plug-in Object). Symbols are converted as described in Creating New Symbols
on page 172.
4. Click OK to edit the symbol options.
Parameter Description
Dont convert sub-objects to groups Excludes any subobjects, such as nested symbols, from the
conversion process
Convert nested symbols and plug-in objects Converts nested symbols and/or plug-in objects within the symbol to
individual objects within the group
Convert all sub-objects Converts all objects within the symbol to individual objects within
the group
Use caution when converting hybrid symbols. If in Top/Plan view, the 3D component of the symbol may be lost
during the conversion. Similarly, in a 3D view, the 2D screen plane portion of the symbol may be lost.
3. Click OK.
The symbol is converted into a group. To make changes to grouped items, select Modify > Edit Group or
Ungroup.
The object can be left as a grouped object or saved as a new symbol. Any changes to the original symbol definition
do not affect this instance.
Instead of repeatedly converting a symbol to a group, create a blue symbol which automatically converts to a
group upon insertion; see Creating New Symbols on page 172.
Managing Symbols
Creating a New Symbol Folder
Create symbol folders to organize symbols within the Resource Browser.
To create a new symbol folder:
1. From the Resources menu, click New Resource to display the New Resource menu.
2. Select Symbol Folder.
The Assign Name dialog box opens.
3. Enter the name to assign to the new symbol folder.
4. Click OK.
The new folder is added to the Resource Browser.
Parameter Description
Folder list Displays the files symbol folders; the selected folder becomes the destination for the
symbol
New Folder Creates a new folder within the selected folder; specify the folder name and click OK to
create the symbol folder
3. Click OK.
Vectorworks moves the symbol to the new folder.
Parameter Description
Preserve folder Imports the symbol folder, and any subfolders and symbols it contains, and maintains
hierarchy (symbol folder the same folder structure it had in its source file
import only)
Select destination folder For symbol folders, imports the symbol folder, and any subfolders and symbols it
contains, to the selected folder; for symbols, imports the symbol to the selected folder
Folder list Displays the files symbol folders; the selected folder becomes the destination for the
symbol or symbol folder
New Folder Creates a new folder within the selected folder; specify the folder name and click OK to
create the symbol folder
Dont show this dialog If the current file has no symbol folders, select this option to hide this dialog box when
when the current file has you import symbols or symbol folders by dragging them into drawings in the future
no symbol folders
4. Click OK.
If the target file already contains a resource with the same name, the Resource Name Conflict dialog box opens
with three options: replace the resource, rename the resource, or do not import the resource. Select an option, and
then click OK.
5. Click OK.
The symbol folder and any symbols it contains are imported into the active Vectorworks file.
Deleting Symbols
When a symbol resource is deleted, all instances of the symbol in the current document can be either deleted or
replaced with loci to preserve the symbol locations.
To delete a symbol resource:
1. In the Resource Browser, select the symbol definition to delete, and select Delete from the Resources menu.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a symbol definition, and select Delete from the
context menu, or select the symbol definition and press the Delete key.
2. An alert displays to confirm that the resource should be deleted. If there are any instances of the symbol currently
in the document, specify whether to replace all instances with loci or to delete them completely. Click Yes.
188 | Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources
The symbol resource is deleted and each symbol instance is either deleted or replaced with a locus.
Record Formats
Record formats, which store a wide range of data (like price or part numbers), can be attached to any object or symbol.
Records attached to an object or symbol definition become a permanent part of it, remaining with the object or symbol
even when it is imported or cut and pasted into another drawing. Several record formats can be attached to a single
object or symbol, and record values can be individually changed for each object to which the record is attached. Record
formats can be split and merged, to manage unwieldy or unnecessary formats.
In the Vectorworks Design Series products, record formats can be linked to an external database for automated,
two-way communication; see Database Connectivity on page 1019 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Parameter Description
Name Enter a name for the field, up to 63 characters
Type Select the type of field
Record Formats | 189
Parameter Description
Integer Select to use whole numbers ranging from -32,768 to 32,767.
Using Integer requires less memory than Number.
Boolean Select to use a data value of either True or False
Text Select to enter a string of characters (default option), such as a word or a sentence
Number Select to use numbers outside the range of Integer, fractions or decimals, or to specify a
number format. Click Format to define the number format in the Number Format dialog
box; click OK to return to the Edit Field dialog box.
General The default format
Decimal Uses decimal numbers; enter a value for the number of decimal places, and if desired, select
to use commas as separators
Scientific Uses scientific numbers; enter a value for the number of decimal places
Fractional Uses fractional numbers; enter the rounding value for fractions
Dimension Uses dimension numbers
Dimension Area Uses dimension area format and displays the specified area units after the number
Dimension Volume Uses dimension volume format and displays the specified volume units after the number
Angle Determines the accuracy of angles and measurement system applied; measurement system
is degrees, minutes, and seconds or decimal numbers up to eight decimal places
Date Uses dates; select the desired date format from the list
Default Enter the data value in the Default text box, if desired
ODBC functionality
(Vectorworks Design
Series required)
There are several methods of attaching record formats to symbols. Attach a record format to a single symbol instance,
or to an object in the drawing, without affecting previous or future instances. Attach a record format to a symbol
definition that then applies to each symbol added to the drawing afterwards, or attach a record to a symbol definition
and affect all existing and future symbol instances.
For global symbol changes, use the utility described in Attaching Records on page 197.
ODBC functionality
(Vectorworks Design
Series required)
4. The record formats present in the drawing are listed. Select the records to attach to the symbol definition, and click
OK.
5. Existing symbol instances, as any future symbols placed from the symbol definition, have the record format
attached.
Method Result
Edit the record format resource, changing the field Future objects or symbols with the record attached reflect the
list and/or default field values (see Editing changes; existing attached records are unaffected
Default Record Formats on page 192)
192 | Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources
Method Result
Edit the field values of a record attached to a Changes to field values affect the selected object only; the
selected object (see Viewing and Editing Object record fields cannot be changed. Existing and future objects
Records on page 192) with the record attached use the default values.
Edit the record field values of a symbol definition Changes to field values affect future instances of the symbol.
(see Editing Symbol Default Record Values on Existing symbols, other symbols with the record attached, and
page 193) the record format resource are unaffected.
Alternatively, make global changes with the symbol utilities (see Changing One Record Format Field on page 198
and Changing All Record Format Fields on page 198).
Parameter Description
Name Displays the name of the current record format
Field list Lists the fields of the current record format
New Creates a new field (as described in Creating Record Formats on page 188)
Edit Edits the selected field
Remove Deletes the selected field
4. Select the record format field to edit and click Edit to change the default value, or click New or Remove to add or
delete fields.
5. Click OK.
The edits do not affect existing values for attached records. Changes are applied to the default field values when
attached to symbols or objects, or for future symbols with the record attached.
If selecting multiple objects with different records attached, the Data tab displays records that are attached to
objects with a grayed box, but does not indicate which records are attached to which objects.
ODBC functionality
(Vectorworks Design
Series required)
Resize the list boxes by selecting and dragging the resize bars between them.
To edit record field values for a selected object:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Object Info.
The Object Info palette opens.
2. Select the object.
Click the Data tab on the Object Info palette. The Object Info palette displays information about the record
format(s) attached to the selected object(s).
Parameter Description
Name Displays the name, if any, given to an object
Record Displays all records contained in the drawing; records attached to the selected object are indicated
Formats with an X in the check box to the left of the record name. If more than one object is selected, only
the records attached to all objects display an X.
Record Fields Displays all the fields in the selected record; if a default value was assigned to the field, it displays
after the field name. If no item is currently selected in the drawing, the label Record Field
Defaults displays instead.
Record Info Edits the field values for the selected record; all entered values override any default values for the
object
3. Select the desired record in the Record Formats, and then the desired field in the Record Fields. Change the
Record Info the default value.
This information applies to the selected object only; other new and existing objects with that record attached will
still use the original (default) record format values. If a selected chair has a different part number from the default
value that was entered in the record format, enter the new part number for that chair only. If the part number for all
chairs has changed, edit the default record format instead.
Parameter Description
Source Record Format Lists the record formats in the file; select the record format to edit
Fields to split Lists the record fields in the selected source format; click in the first column to select
fields to be split out
New Record Format name Enter the name of the new record format to create. The split record fields are placed
in the new record format.
Record Formats | 195
2. Click to place a check mark next to the record fields that should be split from the selected format.
3. Enter a name for the new record format; it will contain the split record fields.
4. Click OK.
The indicated record fields (and associated data) are removed from the source record format and placed in the new
record format, in record format order. All objects which had the original record format attached now have both the
original record format and the new record format attached. No record fields and data are lost during this operation.
2. Select the format to be merged from the Merge Record Format list.
The record fields from this record format will be merged, and this record format will be deleted.
3. Select the record format to receive the record fields that are merged.
4. Click OK.
The merged record fields are appended to the end of the receiving formats record fields, in record format order. If
there is a naming conflict and there are two fields with the same name, the transferred field name begins with an
_ (underscore). Any objects which had the first format attached now have the merged record attached instead.
Any objects which already had the merged record attached now have the additional record fields included. The
first Merge Record Format is deleted.
3. Select the text and place it in the exact location where the record data value is to display.
4. With the text still selected, select Tools > Records > Link Text to Record.
196 | Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources
Records list
Field list
ODBC functionality
(Vectorworks Design
Series required)
123-456789
Attaching Records
This command attaches the selected record format to all of the symbol definitions in a specified symbol folder.
To attach a record:
1. Select Tools > Records > Attach Record.
The Attach Record dialog box opens.
2. From the Symbol Folder list, select the criteria for attaching a record.
Select None to attach the record to the symbol definition(s) at the root of the symbol library (symbol definitions
not in any folder). Select All to attach the record format to all of the symbol definition(s) in the files symbol
library. Selecting a symbol folder changes all of the symbol definitions only in that folder and any subfolders.
3. From the Record Format list, select one of the record formats defined in the current file to be attached to the
selected symbol definition(s).
4. Click OK.
Confirm the operation and the number of symbol definitions affected.
Symbol instances already on the drawing are not affected.
5. Click OK.
To quickly verify that a record has been attached to the symbol library, create a report. See Creating Reports on
page 811.
Detaching Records
This command detaches the selected record format from all symbol definitions in a selected symbol folder.
To detach a record:
1. Select Tools > Records > Detach Record.
The Detach Record dialog box opens.
2. From the Symbol Folder list, select None, All, or a symbol folder, if any.
198 | Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources
Select None to detach the record from the symbol definition(s) at the root of the symbol library (symbol
definitions not in any folder). Select All to detach the record format from all of the symbol definition(s) in the
files symbol library. Selecting a symbol folder changes all of the symbol definitions only in that folder and any
subfolders.
3. From the Record Format list, select one of the record formats defined in the current file to detach from the
symbol library.
4. Click OK.
Confirm the operation and the number of symbol definitions affected.
2. From the Symbol Folder list, select None, All, or a symbol folder, if any.
Select None to change the record of the symbol definition(s) at the root of the symbol library (symbol definitions
not in any folder). Select All to change the record format of all of the symbol definition(s) in the files symbol
library. Selecting a symbol folder changes all of the symbol definitions only in that folder and any subfolders.
3. From the Record Format list, select the record format.
The Field Name selections depend on the record format selected.
4. Select the Field Name to change.
5. Enter the New Value.
6. Click OK.
Confirm the operation and the number of symbol definitions affected.
2. From the Symbol Folder list, select None, All, or a symbol folder, if any.
Select None to change the record of the symbol definition(s) at the root of the symbol library (symbol definitions
not in any folder). Select All to change the record format of all of the symbol definition(s) in the files symbol
library. Selecting a symbol folder changes all of the symbol definitions only in that folder and any subfolders.
3. From the Record Format list, select the record format.
4. Click OK.
The Change Fields dialog box opens. The title bar displays the name of the record being edited.
5. Select the field name(s) to change and enter the new information.
All of the field names of the record format are listed. If the record file has more than 16 fields, click Next to
continue viewing the remaining fields in the record.
6. After making the desired changes, click OK.
Confirm the operation and the number of symbol definition(s) affected.
2. From the Symbol Folder list, select None, All, or a symbol folder, if any.
Select None to change the symbol attributes at the root of the symbol library (symbol definitions not in any
folder). Select All to change the symbol attributes of all of the symbol definition(s) in the files symbol library.
Selecting a symbol folder changes all of the symbol definitions only in that folder and any subfolders.
3. Select the Class to assign the symbol definition.
4. Select the class attributes to use, and indicate how to treat class attributes that are not used.
Either keep the objects existing attributes, or use the current defaults if a class attribute is not specified.
5. Click OK.
Confirm the operation and the number of symbol definition(s) affected.
2D object in Top/Plan view 2D planar object in isometric view 2D screen plane object in isometric view
Objects are created as planar objects by default; they display in Wireframe mode with their graphic attributes on the
layer plane in views other than Top/Plan, and become part of the 3D model. 2D objects can be created and edited on
any plane and in any view; the editing occurs within the planar context of the objects plane. When performing
operations on multiple selected planar objects in a 3D view, the objects must be co-planar.
Double-click on a planar object to set the working plane to the plane on which the object was created.
The Split tool, as well as the Modify > Rotate > Rotate, Rotate Left, and Rotate Right, and Flip commands,
operate within the screen plane only.
While most 2D objects should normally be planar, some objects function best as screen plane objects. For example, all
elements on sheet layers are, by definition, on the screen plane. Objects created as crop objects for viewports are
automatically placed in the screen plane. In addition, when creating special hybrid symbols, the 2D component of the
symbol should be created in the screen plane, so that the symbol has a representation when viewed in Top/Plan.
2D objects created in version 2010 and later retain their planar designation upon conversion. 2D objects created in
versions of Vectorworks software prior to 2010 become screen plane objects upon conversion.
The Active Planes list located on the View bar sets the currently active plane, and determines whether 2D objects are
created as planar or screen plane objects. The available planes depend on the drawing view, current tool, presence of
named working planes, and plane mode options. To create planar objects, select Layer Plane from the Active Planes
list. To create screen plane objects, select Screen Plane. (To create planar objects on the automatic working plane,
select Automatic as described in the next section.) The selected planar mode remains in effect until the next time it is
changed.
202 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
The Active Planes list on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette switches the planar property of selected existing 2D
objects. A selected 2D object drawn in screen plane mode can be switched to layer (planar), and vice versa.
Depending on your workflow and preferences, the available options on the Active Planes list can be restricted, to never
show the layer plane or never show the screen plane. See Plane Mode Preferences on page 34.
With the Hemisphere tool selected, the The hemisphere is created on the Rendered view
automatic working plane displays on an automatic working plane, and it is
applicable surface as the cursor moves over it. automatically made planar to the
The axes display the working plane origin. surface
When the cursor is not over a suitable surface while in a 3D view, the default automatic plane is in effect. The default
automatic working plane aligns to the layer plane, and an object drawn is placed on the layer plane. See
Understanding the Working Plane on page 575 for more information.
In some cases, it may be desirable to turn off the automatic working plane, as when drawing on the layer plane or
screen plane, when drawing on a hidden surface where the automatic plane does not appear, or when drawing on a
specific working plane that was established by the Set Working Plane tool. The \ key (backslash) toggles the
automatic working plane on and off. This key can be customized in the Workspace Editor; see Modifying Snapping
and Mode Shortcuts on page 876. The color and opacity of the automatic working plane can also be customized; see
Configuring Interactive Display on page 68.
Use the Circle tool to create a circle The circle that was just created is The extruded cylinder is
on the side face of an object. The still selected, and can immediately created.
automatic working plane indicates a be extruded when the Push/Pull
suitable planar surface. mode is enabled.
When the automatic working plane mode is enabled and the Push/Pull mode is in use over an object that supports solid
operations, press and hold the Option key (Macintosh) or Alt key (Windows) and pull out to create a solid addition or
push in to create a solid subtraction.
The Push/Pull mode of planar objects operates directly after creation of the object. If the object is deselected, it can be
extruded later with the Push/Pull tool; see Direct Modeling with the Push/Pull Tool on page 417. In some cases, the
Push/Pull mode may need to be toggled off, such as when creating several planar objects one after another.
The data displayed in the bar is gathered from the feedback segment of the object being created. The coordinates are
relative to a floating datum, if one exists; otherwise the coordinates are absolute. The more common Data bar fields are
described in the following table; other fields that can display are described where their use is relevant.
Parameter Description
2D Parameters
Delta X The offset distance from the previous click or position along the X axis
Delta Y The offset distance from the previous click or position along the Y axis
L The length or distance from 0,0, or the radius of the object that is being drawn
204 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
Parameter Description
A The angle or rotation of the object that is being drawn
X The X (horizontal) location of the cursor in the drawing window
Y The Y (vertical) location of the cursor in the drawing window
3D Parameters
WP A The angle or rotation of the object that is being drawn relative to the working plane X axis
X The absolute location of X in working plane coordinates
Y The absolute location of Y in working plane coordinates
Z The absolute location of Z in working plane coordinates (applies to 3D objects only)
L The length or distance of the object that is being drawn
Z The Z (depth) of the object being drawn
Ctr X The center of the object along the X axis
Ctr Y The center of the object along the Y axis
Ctr Z The center of the object along the Z axis
Delta X The offset distance from the previous click or position of X in working plane space
Delta Y The offset distance from the previous click or position of Y in working plane space
Delta Z The offset distance from the previous click or position of Z in working plane space
Delta X The offset distance from the previous click or position of X
Delta Y The offset distance from the previous click or position of Y
Delta Z The offset distance from the previous click or position of Z
Radius The radius of the object being drawn
Height The height of the object being drawn
The location and behavior of the Data bar fields can be adjusted by options listed under Windows > Data Bar Options
or from the Data Bar and Edit Group Options list (see Data Bar and Edit Group Options on page 205 for details).
Key Action
Enter When the focus is in a Data bar field, sets the value that is currently displayed, and moves the focus
to the drawing area
When the focus is in the drawing area, completes the object (or completes the current segment of
the object, for path objects such as polygons, walls, and dimensions)
Tab When the focus is in a Data bar field, sets the entered value and moves to the next field (if no value
was entered, the field is not set)
When the focus is in the drawing area, moves the focus to the first field in the Data bar
Shift+Tab When the focus is in a Data bar field, sets the entered value and moves to the previous field (if no
value was entered, the field is not set)
When the focus is in the drawing area, moves the focus to the last field in the Data bar
To clear an entry before it is set, press the Backspace key. The previous value in that field redisplays.
If the SmartCursor option is enabled in Vectorworks preferences, a dotted line displays to represent the location of
the values entered for the X, Y, and Z axes.
3. A vector lock (red dashed line) displays to represent the location of the values entered in the Data bar.
See Creating Vector Locks on page 149 for more information.
4. To complete the object according to the values you entered, click the mouse button. For non-path objects, you can
also press Enter to complete the object if the focus is in the drawing area, or press Enter twice to complete the
object if the focus is in the Data bar. For path objects, such as polygons, walls, and dimensions, you may need to
click to complete the object.
Creating Lines
Creating Single Lines
Use the Line tool to create single lines.
Unconstrained Center
Preferences
Constrained Vertex
208 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
Mode Description
Constrained Constrains the line to be vertical, horizontal, and 30 or 45 from vertical or horizontal in
any direction
Unconstrained Draws the line at any angle
Press and hold the Shift key to snap the line to predetermined angles
Vertex The first click is the start point of the line
Center The first click is the center point of the line; the line is drawn outward in both directions
from the center point
Preferences Scales the length of the line by a specific amount as it is drawn
2nd click
1st click
With the Length Scale Factor set to 1.5, click the The finished line is 1.5 times longer
center of the filled arc to start the line, and then click than the radius of the filled arc
a point on the edge of the filled arc
1st click
Constrained
4. Enter the distance between the double lines in the Separation field on the Tool bar.
5. Click the Preferences button to set other criteria.
210 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
Parameter Description
Separation Enter the distance between the double lines; same as the Separation field on the Tool bar
Control Offset For Custom Control line mode, enter the distance from the top line of the cursor. The
distance must be less than the Separation distance between the double lines.
Options
Create Lines Creates parallel lines
Create Polygons Creates a double-line polygon with closed ends
Create Lines and Creates parallel lines with a polygon between them; the polygon has a line weight of zero
Polygons
Components Click to define components between the double lines (see Applying Components Between
Double Lines on page 210)
Parameter Description
Preview Displays a preview of the components between the double lines, including the defined
components; the preview is drawn from left to right, so the top of the preview, by default,
indicates the left part of the double lines as they will be drawn. The arrow shows the drawing
direction.
Overall Thickness The thickness of the double line with components is defined by the sum of the component
thicknesses
Components Lists the components that form the structure of the double line, in order from left to right as
displayed in the preview. To change the order of a component, click and drag within the #
column.
The Core designation applies to walls, but not to double lines.
New Click to define the components between the double lines; see Creating Wall Components
on page 438
Edit Opens the Component Attributes dialog box to edit the selected components thickness and
attributes (you can also double-click on a component to open the Component Attributes
dialog box)
Delete Deletes the selected component; the double line thickness is adjusted accordingly
1. Click the Break Line tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click in the drawing to place the break line and move the mouse to indicate the line length. Click again to set the
end of the break line.
212 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
If this is the first break line placed in this session, the Break Line Object Properties dialog box opens. The settings
displayed apply to all break lines created during this session and can be edited in the Object Info palette after
placement.
3. Click OK.
4. The break line parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter Description
Break Style Selects the style of the break line (Straight, Curved, or Arc)
Break Width Indicates the width of the break only
Break Height Indicates the height of the break only
Break Radius Sets the radius of the break only
Number of Breaks Indicates whether a single or multiple break should be drawn
Creating Rectangles
The Rectangle tool can be used to create rectangular shapes and has four modes available. The Push/Pull toggle mode
is available in 3D views for instantly extruding the rectangle after creation.
Center to Corner Three Point Rotated
Midpoint to Corner
Mode Description
Corner to Corner Defines the rectangle by clicking two diagonal points
Center to Corner Defines the rectangle by the distance from the center to one corner
Midpoint to Corner Defines the rectangle by the distance from the midpoint of one side to an opposite
corner
Three Point Rotated Creates a rectangle that is rotated by a specified angle
Push/Pull (3D views only) Instantly extrudes the rectangle after creation; available in 3D views
To create a square (1:1 rectangle), press and hold the Shift key while drawing. To create a rectangle with golden ratio
proportions (approximately 1:1.618), press and hold Ctrl+Shift (Windows) or Cmd+Shift (Macintosh) while drawing.
The Ratio field in the Object Info palette displays square, golden, or the ratio of the sides of an unconstrained
rectangle.
Creating Rectangles | 213
1. Click the Rectangle tool from the palette and click Corner to Corner from the Tool bar.
2. Click at the rectangles start point; this point becomes one corner of the rectangle. Move the mouse to the opposite
corner until the desired size is previewed.
3. Click to set a corner point on the rectangle.
2nd click
1st click
1. Click the Rectangle tool from the palette, and click Center to Corner from the Tool bar.
2. Click at the rectangles start point; this point becomes the center of the rectangle. Move the mouse to an opposite
corner until the desired size is previewed.
3. Click to set a corner point on the rectangle.
2nd click
1st click
1. Click the Rectangle tool from the palette, and click Midpoint to Corner from the Tool bar.
2. Click at the rectangles start point; this point becomes the center of one of the rectangles sides. Move the mouse to
an opposite corner until the desired size is previewed.
Press the Alt key (Windows) or Option key (Macintosh) to orient the rectangle vertically.
3. Click to set a corner point on the rectangle.
2nd click
1st click
1. Click the Rectangle tool from the palette, and click Three Point Rotated from the Tool bar.
2. Click to set the start of the rectangle. Move the mouse to set the rotated angle.
3. Click to set the rotation angle. Move the mouse until the desired size is previewed.
4. Click to create the three point rotated rectangle; the bounding box position indicator in the Object Info palette
matches the rotation of the rotated rectangle. (If multiple rotated rectangles are selected, the box position indicator
matches the rotation of one rectangle.)
1st click
3rd click
2nd click
1. Enable the Push/Pull toggle mode in the Tool bar for the Rectangle tool.
2. Create a rectangle using any of the modes described in the previous sections.
3. With the rectangle still selected, click, move the cursor, and then click to create the extrude.
A planar rectangle can be extruded at any time with the Push/Pull tool. See Direct Modeling with the Push/Pull
Tool on page 417.
The extrude height can be changed with the Reshape tool (see Reshaping Extruded Objects and Solid
Primitives on page 302), or modified in the Object Info palette.
Symmetrical corners have the same X and Y rounded corner diameters. Proportional corners are created as one third of
the width and height of the rounded rectangle; for example, a rounded rectangle with a width of 6 and a height of 3
has a Diam X value of 2 and a Diam Y value of 1. Rounded rectangles with both symmetrical and proportional
corners have the same horizontal and vertical arc lengths. Unconstrained rounded rectangles can also be created using
specific X and Y corner diameters.
Two modes are available. The Push/Pull toggle mode is available in 3D views for instantly extruding the rectangle
after creation.
Rotated Push/Pull
Diagonal Preferences
Mode Description
Diagonal Defines the dimensions of the box containing the rounded rectangle
Rotated Defines the width and height lengths to create the rounded rectangle, which can be
rotated if desired
Push/Pull (3D views only) Instantly extrudes the rounded rectangle after creation; available in 3D views
1. Click the Rounded Rectangle tool from the Basic palette, and click Diagonal from the Tool bar.
2. Click the Preferences button.
The Round Rect Preferences dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Corner Styles Select the method of rounding the rectangle corners
Symmetrical: the corner diameters are identical in the X and Y direction
Proportional: the corner diameters are one third of the rounded rectangle width and
height
Symmetrical and proportional: the corner horizontal and vertical arc lengths are
identical
Unconstrained: Deselect both checkboxes to specify the X and Y corner diameters
216 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
Parameter Description
Corner Diameters For symmetrical or unconstrained rounded rectangle corner style, enter the corner X and
corner Y diameter; symmetrical automatically keeps the same value for X and Y
3. Click OK.
4. Click to set the start point.
5. Click to set the end point of the rectangle.
2nd click
1st click
1. Click the Rounded Rectangle tool from the Basic palette, and click Rotated from the Tool bar.
2. Set the rounded rectangle preferences as described in Rounded Rectangle by Box on page 215.
3. Click to set the start point.
4. Click to define the rounded rectangle rotation angle and width.
5. Click to define the rounded rectangle height.
1st click
3rd click
2nd click
1. Enable the Push/Pull toggle mode in the Tool bar for the Rounded Rectangle tool.
2. Create a rounded rectangle using any of the modes described in the previous sections.
3. With the rectangle still selected, click, move the cursor, and then click to create the extrude.
1st click 2nd click
Creating Circles | 217
A planar rectangle can be extruded at any time with the Push/Pull tool. See Direct Modeling with the Push/Pull
Tool on page 417.
The extrude height can be changed with the Reshape tool (see Reshaping Extruded Objects and Solid
Primitives on page 302), or modified in the Object Info palette.
Creating Circles
The Circle tool has six modes and the Push/Pull toggle mode.
Diameter Circle from Three Lines Tangent and Center
Radius Push/Pull
Mode Description
Radius Defines the circle by its radius
Diameter Defines the circle by its diameter
Circle by Three Points Defines the circle by its circumference
Circle from Three Lines Defines the circle by making it tangent to two or three selected lines
Point and Center Defines the circle by a point on its circumference and then its center
Tangent and Center Defines the circle by defining a tangent to the circle and then its center
Push/Pull (3D views only) Instantly extrudes the circle after creation; available in 3D views
To create a NURBS curve, draw a circle and then select Modify > Convert > Convert to NURBS.
Circle by Radius
To create a circle by radius:
1. Click the Circle tool from the Basic palette, and select the Radius mode.
2. Click to set the center of the circle.
3. Move the mouse to the desired radius and click to set the radius of the circle.
2nd click
1st click
Circle by Diameter
To create a circle by diameter:
1. Click the Circle tool from the Basic palette, and select the Diameter mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the circle diameter.
3. Move the mouse to the desired diameter and click to set the diameter of the circle.
218 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
2nd click
1st click
1. Click the Circle tool from the Basic palette, and select the Circle by Three Points mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the circle diameter.
3. Move the mouse and click to set the second point on the circle and click again to set the third point on the circle.
3rd click
2nd click
1st click
1. Click the Circle tool from the Basic palette, and select the Circle from Three Lines mode.
2. Click to select the three lines or linear segments to which the circle will be tangent. Each line is highlighted as it is
selected. The lines (or their extensions) must intersect in at least two places.
3. When the third line is selected, a preview of a tangent circle displays where the cursor is currently located. You
can create circles tangent to two or three lines. In places where only two lines intersect, the size of the circle is
controlled by the cursor location. Move the cursor until the desired tangent circle displays, and then click to set the
circle.
1st click
2nd click
3rd click
A preview of the circle tangent to the
selected lines (or their extensions)
displays beneath the hand cursor
Move the cursor to preview other tangent circles Click to place the tangent circle
Creating Circles | 219
1. Click the Circle tool from the Basic palette, and select the Point and Center mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the circumference of the circle.
3. Move the mouse to the center of the circle and click to set the radius of the circle.
1. Click the Circle tool from the Basic palette, and select the Tangent and Center mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the line tangent to the circle.
3. Click to set the second point on the line tangent to the circle, defining the tangent line.
4. Move the mouse to define the radius perpendicular to the tangent. Click to set the radius of the circle. It is not
necessary to click on the center point; click anywhere along an axis parallel to the tangent. This allows you to set
the radius based on other geometry, if desired.
3rd click: defines
the radius
perpendicular to the
tangent
1st click 2nd click
1. Enable the Push/Pull toggle mode in the Tool bar for the Circle tool.
2. Create a circle using any of the modes in the Tool bar.
3. With the circle still selected, click, move the cursor, and then click to create the extrude.
A circle can be extruded at any time with the Push/Pull tool. See Direct Modeling with the Push/Pull Tool on
page 417.
220 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
Cylinder height and radius can be changed with the Reshape tool (see Reshaping Extruded Objects and Solid
Primitives on page 302), the radius can be modified in the Object Info palette, and the resolution can be adjusted
through the 3D Conversion Res setting (see Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 17).
Creating Ovals
The Oval tool can be used to create oval shapes and has three modes available. The Push/Pull toggle mode is available
in 3D views for instantly extruding the oval after creation.
Height and Width
Box Push/Pull
Center
Mode Description
Box Defines the dimensions of the box containing the oval
Height and Width Defines the height and width lengths to create the oval
Center Defines the center, then the major and minor radii to create the oval
Push/Pull (3D views Instantly extrudes the oval after creation; available in 3D views
only)
Oval by Box
To create an oval by box:
1. Click the Oval tool from the Basic palette and select the Box mode.
2. Click to set the first point of the box containing the oval and then click again to set.
To create a true circle, press the Shift key while creating the oval.
2nd click
1st click
1. Click the Oval tool from the Basic palette and select the Height and Width mode.
2. Click to set the first point of the oval height, and then move the mouse to define the height.
3. Move the mouse, and then click to define the oval width.
Creating Arcs | 221
2nd click
3rd click
1st click
Oval by Center
To create an oval by center:
1. Click the Oval tool from the Basic palette and select the Center mode.
2. Click to set the center point of the oval, and then move the mouse and click to define one of the radii.
3. Move the mouse and then click to define the other radius.
3rd click
1st click
2nd click
1. Enable the Push/Pull toggle mode in the Tool bar for the Oval tool.
2. Create an oval using any of the modes in the Tool bar.
3. With the oval still selected, click, move the cursor, and then click to create the extrude.
An oval can be extruded at any time with the Push/Pull tool. See Direct Modeling with the Push/Pull Tool on
page 417.
The extrude height can be changed with the Reshape tool (see Reshaping Extruded Objects and Solid
Primitives on page 302), or modified in the Object Info palette.
Creating Arcs
The Arc tool, which creates circular arcs of any angle, has seven modes. Create an arc by radius, three points, tangent,
two points and center, two points and radius, two end points and another point on the arc, or by arc length and
optionally, chord length. The Push/Pull toggle mode is available in 3D views for instantly extruding the arc after
creation.
222 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
Radius Push/Pull
Mode Description
Radius Defines the arc by its center
Three Points Defines the arc by clicking three points
Tangent to Line Defines the arc by defining a tangent to a line
Center Defines an arc by clicking two points and a center
Specified Radius Defines an arc by two points and a specified radius
Point on Arc Defines an arc by two end points and another point on the arc
Arc Length Defines an arc by the arc length and specified chord length
Push/Pull (3D views only) Instantly extrudes the arc after creation; available in 3D views
Either move the mouse to draw the arc or use the Data bar to enter an angle. Degrees start on the positive X axis (the
East direction), and increase going counter-clockwise. (East is 0 degrees; North is 90 degrees; and West is 180
degrees.) To draw a quarter-circle wall beginning at 0 degrees and ending at the 6 oclock position, enter -90 (minus 90)
degrees. Enter 270 to draw an arc three-quarters of a circle around.
To create a NURBS curve, draw an arc and then select Modify > Convert > Convert to NURBS.
To edit an arc, click the middle handle with the Selection tool and drag to change the arc radius.
Press the Option key (Macintosh) or Alt key (Windows) to change the arcs size.
Arc by Radius
To create an arc by its radius:
1. Click the Arc tool from the Basic palette, and select the Radius mode.
2. Click to set the center of the arc.
3. Click the start point of the arc. Move the mouse until the desired arc orientation and size is previewed.
4. Click to set the end point of the arc.
3rd click
1st click
2nd click
1. Click the Arc tool from the Basic palette, and select the Three Points mode.
Creating Arcs | 223
1st click
2nd click
3rd click
1. Click the Arc tool from the Basic palette, and select the Tangent to Line mode.
2. Click to set the start point of the arc.
3. Click to define the line to which the arc will be tangent. Move the mouse until the desired arc orientation and size
is previewed.
4. Click to set the end point of the arc.
3rd click
Use tangent snapping to assist with drawing the arc tangent to geometry; see Snap to Tangent (2D Only) on
page 145.
Tangent
Arc by Center
To create an arc by two points and center:
1. Click the Arc tool from the Basic palette, and select the Center mode.
2. Click to set the start point of the arc.
3. Click to set the end point of the arc.
As the cursor moves, the center of the arc is manipulated.
4. Click outside the arc to set the center.
224 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
1st click
2nd click
3rd click
Completed arc
1. Click the Arc tool from the Basic palette, and select the Specified Radius mode.
2. Click to set the start point of the arc.
3. Click to set the end point of the arc.
The Arc Radius dialog box opens.
1. Click the Arc tool from the Basic palette, and select the Point on Arc mode.
2. Click to set the start point of the arc.
3. Click to set the end point of the arc.
4. Move the mouse until the desired arc shape and size is previewed, and then click to set the arc. To constrain the
angle of the line between the arc endpoints, press the Shift key when drawing the arc.
Creating Arcs | 225
3rd click
3rd click
1st click
2nd click
When the Shift key is pressed, the angle of the line between the arc endpoints (1st and 2nd clicks) is
constrained, and the chord defining the arc height is perpendicular to the center of that line
1. Click the Arc tool from the Basic palette, and select the Arc Length mode.
2. Click to set the start point of the arc.
3. Click to set the end point of the arc.
The Arc Length dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Arc Length The drawn arc length is displayed, and can be changed; this allows you to
create several arcs with the same chord length and varying arc lengths
Specify Chord Length Select to manually specify the chord length, changing the arc endpoint
Chord Length The chord length is the distance between the two end points of the arc; the arc
length must be greater than the chord length
1. Enable the Push/Pull toggle mode in the Tool bar for the Arc or Quarter Arc tool.
2. Create an arc using any of the modes in the Tool bar.
3. With the arc still selected, click, move the cursor, and then click to create the extrude.
An arc can be extruded at any time with the Push/Pull tool. See Direct Modeling with the Push/Pull Tool on
page 417.
The extrude height and radius can be changed with the Reshape tool (see Reshaping Extruded Objects and Solid
Primitives on page 302), the radius can be modified in the Object Info palette, and the resolution can be adjusted
through the 3D Conversion Res setting (see Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 17).
1st click
Creating Polylines
Polyline Tool
The Polyline tool creates open and closed polylinesobjects made of a series of connected arcs, curves, or lines.
While drawing a polyline, set the type of control point for each segment either by clicking on the desired mode while
drawing or by using the keyboard shortcuts (see Creating or Editing a Workspace on page 869) to select the desired
mode. A polyline can have different combinations of vertices. Use a polyline to create planar shapes with internal
holes.
Creating Polylines | 227
The corners of the polyline can be smoothed with the Poly Smoothing commands (see Smoothing Objects on
page 269). Markers can be added with the Attributes palette (see Marker Attributes on page 510). The Push/Pull
toggle mode is available in 3D views for instantly extruding the polyline after creation.
Bzier Vertex Tangent Arc Arc Vertex Fillet
Mode Description
Corner Vertex Creates polyline segments with straight lines and angled vertices at the control points. The
type of vertex created is a corner vertex.
Bzier Vertex Creates polyline segments with curves pulled toward, but not touching the control points. The
type of vertex created is a Bzier vertex.
Cubic Vertex Creates polyline segments with curves that pass through the control points. The type of vertex
created is a cubic vertex.
Tangent Arc Creates polyline arc segments that are tangent to the previous segment (use tangent snapping
to assist with drawing the tangent polyline; see Snap to Tangent (2D Only) on page 145).
The type of vertex created is a radius vertex.
Point on Arc Creates polyline arc segments that are drawn by clicking three points: the start point, a point
the arc passes through, and the end point; useful for tracing existing arcs. The type of vertex
created is a radius vertex.
Arc Vertex Fillet Creates polyline segments with curves that look like a fillet placed at the control points; click
Preferences to set the radius of the fillet. The type of vertex created is an arc vertex.
Push/Pull (3D Instantly extrudes the polyline after creation; available in 3D views
views only)
To create a polyline:
In Corner Vertex mode, press and hold instead of clicking to create a Bzier vertex instead of a Corner vertex.
4. Continue drawing segments in this manner until the polyline is complete.
5. Click the mouse at the start point to complete a closed polyline object (end point of the last segment is at the exact
start point of the first segment), or double-click the mouse to complete an open polyline object (end point of the
last segment is at a different location than the start point of the first segment).
228 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
The resulting polyline object, whether open or closed, is a filled object. If desired, remove the fill through the
Attributes palette to see objects behind the polyline.
Closed polyline created using Corner Vertex and Tracing of existing arcs created using
Tangent Arc modes Point on Arc mode
Edit polylines, changing their shape or their vertices, with the Reshape tool or the Object Info palette. The corners of
the polyline can be smoothed with the Poly Smoothing commands (see Smoothing Objects on page 269). Markers
can be added with the Attributes palette (see Marker Attributes on page 510).
A closed polyline, when extruded with the Model > Extrude command, accepts a fill or texture and displays as a
solid object. An open polyline, when extruded, does not render as a solid. To close a polyline before extruding it,
select the polyline. In the Object Info palette, select the Closed option to close the polyline.
1. Enable the Push/Pull toggle mode in the Tool bar for the Polyline tool.
2. Create a polyline using any of the modes in the Tool bar.
3. With the polyline still selected, click, move the cursor, and then click to create the extrude.
1st click 2nd click
A polyline can be extruded at any time with the Push/Pull tool. See Direct Modeling with the Push/Pull Tool on
page 417.
The extrude height can be changed with the Reshape tool (see Reshaping Extruded Objects and Solid
Primitives on page 302), or modified in the Object Info palette.
Mode Description
Freehand Edit Reshapes the singularly selected polyline, polygon, rectangle, circle, or arc; for
more information, see Reshaping Objects with the Freehand Tool on
page 229
Preferences Sets the smoothing level when drawing a curve. Increasing the degree of
smoothing decreases the vertices, and therefore it is easier to reshape the curve.
Decreasing the degree of smoothing increases the vertices which produces a
more accurate representation of the curve. Select Off to draw the curve without
using the smoothing feature.
Action Guidelines
Change existing curve
New Curve Direction Appended Curve
Retained Curve
Retained Curve
Retained Curve
Creating Polylines | 231
Action Guidelines
Retain partial curve New Curve Direction Appended Curve
Retained Curve
5. Click again to finish drawing the freehand polyline edit. The valid object is edited and converted to a polyline.
Creating Spirals
The Spiral tool draws an Archimedes spiral. The number of turns, distance per turn, start radius and thickness can be
specified, as well as the number of points used to define the curve. Use the alignment modes on the Tool bar to
temporarily override the insertion point. These modes change the alignment of the insertion point along the X axis of
the bounding box surrounding the spiral.
Wall Insertion Spiral Alignment Modes
Standard Insertion
For information on using the Offset Insertion and Wall Insertion modes, see Offset Symbol Insertion Mode on
page 178 and Wall Insertion Mode on page 179.
To draw a spiral:
Thickness
Start radius
Parameter Description
Distance per Turn Enter the distance between the outer edges of each turn in the spiral
Number of Turns Specify the number of turns which determine the total sweep angle of the spiral; one turn
equals 360 degrees
Start Radius Enter the distance from the center to the beginning of the spiral
Increment (deg) Specify the number of points used to define the curve; the higher the increment, the fewer the
number of points (for example, an increment of five degrees means 360/5=72 points per turn)
Thickness Specify the thickness value of the area between the outer and inner edge of the turn
5. Click OK.
A spiral with the specified parameters is placed on the drawing.
To create a 3D spiral, see Creating Helix-Spirals on page 415.
Creating Triangles
The Triangle tool has three modes. The steps for drawing the triangle are the same for each mode; the only difference
is the fields that display in the dialog box that opens.
Two Sides and Included Angle
To create a triangle:
1. Click the Triangle tool from the Basic palette and select the desired mode.
2. Click to set the first and second points of the first side.
The Triangle Settings dialog box opens; the fields available depend on the mode that was selected.
Creating 2D Polygons | 233
Three Sides mode Two Sides and Included Two Angles and Common
Angle mode Side mode
3. The length of the first side of the triangle displays. Enter the remaining fields as required for the selected mode
and click OK. The following restrictions apply.
Mode Restriction
Three Sides The sum of the lengths of any two sides of the triangle must be greater than the
remaining side
Two Sides and Included Angle The angle must be less than 180 degrees
Two Angles and Common Side The sum of the two angles must be less than 180 degrees
2nd click
1st click
Click two points to define the After you enter the required side lengths and
first side of the triangle angles, two possible triangles display; click
the triangle to keep
Creating 2D Polygons
There are several ways to create 2D polygons. Single-line polygons, double-line polygons, and regular polygons can be
created; a polygon always has square vertices and is composed of a series of straight line segments. A polygon that
represents a curve will require more vertices (and more complexity) than a polyline.
Polygons can be created automatically from existing geometry, which is especially useful for illustrating the elements
of a hidden-line rendered viewport.
2D Polygon Tool
The 2D Polygon tool creates open and closed polygons with single lines. Polygons can have as few as three vertices or
as many as 32,767 vertices. The 2D Polygon tool can also automatically create polygons by filling or outlining existing
geometry, to easily annotate a drawing graphically by outlining, filling, or texturing (with an image or gradient fill) the
new polygons.
234 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
Three modes are available. The Push/Pull toggle mode is available in 3D views for instantly extruding the polygon
after creation.
Inner Boundary Outer Boundary
Vertex Push/Pull
Mode Description
Vertex Creates a polygon by clicking to set each vertex
Inner Boundary Creates a polygon out of existing geometry by clicking within the boundary of
an object
Outer Boundary Creates a polygon out of the outer boundary of existing geometry by defining
geometry with a lasso marquee
Push/Pull (3D views Instantly extrudes the polygon after creation; available in 3D views
only)
1. Click the 2D Polygon tool from the Basic palette, and select Vertex from the Tool bar.
2. Click to set the polylines start point (first vertex).
3. Click at each vertex.
4. Double-click at the final vertex to end an open polygon, or click at the starting vertex (a point cue displays) to end
a closed polygon (the first and last vertex are automatically joined).
3rd
5th click
2nd
4th
1. Click the 2D Polygon tool from the Basic palette, and select Inner Boundary from the Tool bar.
If desired, set the attributes in the Attributes palette (fill style, pen style, line and line endpoint style). The
attributes of the polygon can also be specified after creation.
2. Click over one or more objects to create a polygon based on the inner boundary of the 2D objects and/or faces of
solids in the active plane. Different methods of using the 2D Polygon tool will achieve different results.
Creating 2D Polygons | 235
Modification Method
Create a polygon Click to place the polygon
Add to a polygon as it is created Press the Shift key while clicking over existing adjacent geometry to
add to the polygon
Apply the attributes of an existing Select the existing object and press the Option key (Macintosh) or the
object to the new polygon Alt key (Windows) while clicking to create the new polygon(s)
To speed up the polygon fill for complex images, zoom in on the area first.
The polygon overlays the existing geometry, and the original objects are unchanged
Another way to create planar objects from faces is with the Extract Surface mode of the Extract tool. See Extracting
Geometry on page 404.
1. Click the 2D Polygon tool from the Basic palette, and select Outer Boundary from the Tool bar.
If desired, set the attributes in the Attributes palette (fill style, pen style, line and line endpoint style). The
attributes of the polygon can also be specified after creation.
236 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
2. Click in the drawing and drag to create the lasso marquee. A polygon is created based on the outer boundary of
any 2D objects on the active plane completely enclosed within the marquee. Alternatively, press the Option key
(Macintosh) or Alt key (Windows) while creating the marquee, and the polygon is based on the outer boundary of
any co-planar 2D objects that are encountered by the marquee.
1. Create a sheet layer viewport from a design layer as described in Creating a Sheet Layer Viewport from a Design
Layer on page 735.
2. For the Rendering mode of the viewport, select Hidden Line. Update the viewport rendering by clicking Update
from the Object Info palette.
3. Edit the viewport in annotation mode by selecting Modify > Edit Viewport.
The Edit Viewport dialog box opens. Select Annotations and Display Viewport Cache.
If desired, set the attributes in the Attributes palette to the desired fill settings (Fill Style, Pen Style, Line and Line
Endpoint Style). The attributes of the polygon can also be specified after creation.
Apply an image fill to the polygon to simulate a texture (see Using Image Fills on page 527).
6. Because the viewport is rendered with hidden line and the viewport cache is used for annotations, any of the
objects in the drawing can be used as the basis for new polygons. If in Inner Boundary mode, click the paint
bucket cursor on the desired drawing objects. If in Outer Boundary mode, create a lasso marquee to include the
desired objects. A 2D polygon is created based on the inner or outer boundary of the geometry.
The 2D Polygon tool works on 2D objects in the design layer. It does not apply to 2D objects or annotations that
have been added to the sheet layer.
7. Click Exit Viewport Annotation at the top right corner of the drawing window to return to the sheet layer.
An alert dialog box may ask if keeping the viewport cache is necessary. The viewport cache can be removed, if
desired, as it is no longer necessary for creating the polygons.
1. Enable the Push/Pull toggle mode in the Tool bar for the Polygon or Regular Polygon tool.
2. Create a polygon using any of the modes in the Tool bar.
3. With the polygon still selected, click, move the cursor, and then click to create the extrude.
1st click 2nd click
A polygon can be extruded at any time with the Push/Pull tool. See Direct Modeling with the Push/Pull Tool on
page 417.
The extrude height can be changed with the Reshape tool (see Reshaping Extruded Objects and Solid
Primitives on page 302), or modified in the Object Info palette.
Mode Description
Top Control Line The cursor creates the right line
Center Control Line Creates lines equidistant from the cursor
Bottom Control Line The cursor creates the left line
Custom Control Line Specify an offset value
Parameter Description
Separation Enter the distance between the double lines; same as the Separation field on the Tool bar
Control Offset For the Custom Control Line mode, enter the distance from the top/right line of the cursor
Options
Create Lines Creates a series of lines
Create Polygons Creates a double-line polygon
Create Lines and Creates parallel lines with a polygon between them; the polygon has a line weight of 0
Polygons
Components Click to define components between the double lines (see Applying Components Between
Double Lines on page 210)
5. Click OK.
Creating 2D Polygons | 239
6th
5th
2nd
Inscribed
Mode Description
Inscribed Creates a polygon by drawing its radius
Circumscribed Creates a polygon with a radius equidistant from the center of the polygon and the
mid-point of any of its sides
Edge Creates a polygon by drawing one of its sides
Push/Pull (3D views only) After the polygon is created, click the selected polygon and drag to extrude it
Press and hold the Option (Macintosh) or Ctrl (Windows) key while drawing to toggle between circumscribed and
inscribed modes.
1st click
2nd click
240 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
Creating 3D Polygons
The 3D Polygon tool creates polygons that have a location in 3D space, but no height. The polygon can be created
through any 3D point, not necessarily constrained to the working plane.
The Closed setting is available for objects created with the following tools:
2D Polygon 3D Polygon
Triangle
If a polygon or polyline is open, select the Closed setting to close it; any edges that were hidden are also closed.
Open edge
Hidden edge
When the Closed setting is selected, the open and hidden edges of the polygon are closed
If a polygon or polyline is closed, deselect the Closed setting to open it. The last segment of the object to be drawn is
removed (for polygons) or hidden (for polylines).
For polylines, the last segment of the object must be between vertices created with Corner Vertex, Tangent Arc, or
Point on Arc modes; otherwise, the polyline cannot be opened by deselecting the Closed setting. To open a segment
other than the last segment, use the Hide or Show Edges mode of the Reshape tool.
When the Closed setting is deselected, the last To hide a different segment, use the Reshape tool in
segment to be drawn is opened Hide or Show Edges mode
Creating Spheres
The Sphere tool creates spheres using one of the three modes.
Diameter
Mode Description
Radius Defines the base of the sphere by radius
Diameter Defines the base of the sphere by diameter
Center and Radius Defines the base of the sphere by center (according to the height above the working
plane) and radius
242 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
The sphere radius can be changed with the Reshape tool (see Reshaping Extruded Objects and Solid Primitives on
page 302), the radius can be modified in the Object Info palette, and the resolution can be adjusted through the 3D
Conversion Res setting (see Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 17).
Sphere by Radius
To create a sphere by radius:
1. Click the Sphere tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select the Radius mode.
2. Click to set the center of sphere base.
3. Move the mouse to the desired radius and click to set the radius of the sphere base. The radius can also be set in
the Data bar.
Sphere by Diameter
To create a sphere by diameter:
1. Click the Sphere tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select the Diameter mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the sphere base diameter.
3. Move the mouse to the desired diameter and click to set the diameter of the sphere base.
1. Click the Sphere tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select the Center and Radius mode.
2. Click to set the center of the sphere base on the working plane.
3. Move the mouse and click to set the height of the sphere above the working plane.
4. Move the mouse to the desired radius and click to set the radius of the sphere base. The radius can also be set in
the Data bar.
The center and height, relative to the working plane, of the sphere is automatically established if the first click is on a
snap point, for example a 3D locus or vertex on another 3D object.
When in a non-isometric view, the sphere is created centered on the working plane.
Creating Hemispheres
The Hemisphere tool creates hemispheres using one of three modes.
Diameter
Radius Up Radius
Mode Description
Radius Defines the base of the hemisphere by radius
Diameter Defines the base of the hemisphere by diameter
Creating Cones | 243
Mode Description
Up Radius Defines the base of the hemisphere by center and rotation
The hemisphere radius can be changed with the Reshape tool (see Reshaping Extruded Objects and Solid Primitives
on page 302), the radius can be modified in the Object Info palette, and the resolution can be adjusted through the 3D
Conversion Res setting (see Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 17).
Hemisphere by Radius
To create a hemisphere by radius:
1. Click the Hemisphere tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select the Radius mode.
2. Click to set the center of the hemisphere base.
3. Move the mouse to the desired radius and click to set the radius of the hemisphere base. The radius can also be set
in the Data bar.
Hemisphere by Diameter
To create a hemisphere by diameter:
1. Click the Hemisphere tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select the Diameter mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the hemisphere base diameter.
3. Move the mouse to the desired diameter and click to set the diameter of the hemisphere base.
Hemisphere by Up Radius
To create a hemisphere by up radius:
1. Click the Hemisphere tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select the Up Radius mode.
2. Click to set the center of the hemisphere base.
3. Move the mouse to the desired radius and click to set the rotation and top of the hemisphere.
Creating Cones
The Cone tool creates cones using one of two modes.
Radius and Height Radius and Tip
Mode Description
Radius and Height Defines the base of the cone by radius and tip of the cone by height
Radius and Tip Defines the base of the cone by radius and, if desired, snaps the tip of the
cone to a point
When in a non-isometric view, the height of the cone is set in the Set Extrusion Height dialog box. In an isometric
view, the cone height can be set by dragging with the mouse or entering the height in the Data bar. For more
information on the different views, see Using Standard Views on page 549.
244 | Chapter 6: Creating Objects
The cone height can be changed with the Reshape tool (see Reshaping Extruded Objects and Solid Primitives on
page 302), the radius can be modified in the Object Info palette, and the resolution can be adjusted through the 3D
Conversion Res setting (see Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 17).
1. In a 3D isometric view, click the Cone tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select the Radius and Height
mode.
2. Click to set the center of the cone base.
3. Move the mouse to the desired radius and click to set the radius of the cone base. The radius can also be set in the
Data bar.
4. Move the mouse and click to set the cone height.
3rd click
1st click
2nd click
1. Ensure that Snap to Object and Smart Points snapping is enabled (see Setting Snapping Parameters on
page 133).
2. In a 3D isometric view, click the Cone tool from the 3D Modeling tool set and select the Radius and Tip mode.
3. Click to set center of the cone.
4. Move the mouse to the desired radius and click to set the radius of the cone base. The radius can also be set in the
Data bar.
5. Using snapping, snap the top of the cone to a snap point on another 3D object. A preview object displays. Click to
create the cone.
3rd click
1st click
2nd click
Creating Loci
A locus is a reference point that is used to draw and measure objects. Loci do not print.
Turn on Snap to Objects from the Snapping palette to snap to loci (see Object Snapping on page 137).
Creating Loci | 245
2D Locus Tool
The 2D Locus tool places a 2D locus in a drawing. Because they are merely movable reference points, loci cannot be
reshaped or resized.
To place a 2D locus:
3D Locus Tool
The 3D Locus tool places a snappable 3D locus or reference point onto the drawing. Like 2D loci, they are reference
points. They can be moved, but they cannot be reshaped and they do not print.
To place a 3D locus:
The Object Info palette organizes data into three tabbed panes:
Tab Description
Shape Displays information about a selected objects geometry, class, layer, and location (see
Shape Tab on page 248)
Data Lists any database records attached to a selected object (see Data Tab on page 252)
Render When the Renderworks product is installed, this tab is added for the assigning and
mapping of textures to 3D objects (see Applying a Texture to an Object on page 620). If
sketch rendering is active in a Vectorworks Design Series product, the Sketch parameter
is available on the Render tab, even if the Renderworks product is not installed.
Coordinate Specifies options for displaying IFC data (Vectorworks Architect/Landmark required) and
/IFC menu for the display of coordinates in rotated plan views (Vectorworks Design Series required).
See Assigning IFC Data to Objects on page 782 and Rotating the Plan on page 721 in
the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Object Info palette drop-down list items can be selected by using the mouse or by typing the first letter(s) of the desired
item to highlight the closest match in the list (excluding class and layer lists).
Set the Object Info palette position, active pane upon opening, and Data pane separator position, as described in
Modifying Palette Positions and Settings on page 877. Save palette positions and settings by selecting Window >
Palettes > Save Palette Positions. To revert the palette position and settings back to the settings established when the
custom workspace was created (in the User Data and Preferences folder), click Reset Saved Settings from the Session
tab of Vectorworks preferences (see Session Preferences on page 20).
248 | Chapter 7: Editing Objects
Shape Tab
Object properties can be directly edited through the Object Info palette from the Shape tab. Objects can also be edited
with the tools on the Basic palette throughout this chapter.
The Shape tab always displays class and layer information. The detailed object information that is also displayed
depends on the type of object selected, and can be simple or very extensive depending on the object.
When a new class or layer is created from the Object Info palette, any selected objects are assigned to the new
class/layer, but the active class/layer does not change to the newly created class/layer.
and ovals, when the Rotation angle is less than 45 from 90 or 270, the Vectorworks software automatically swaps
the height and width markers for the Box Position indicator and the values in the Height and Width fields.
Different object coordinates display for an object depending on its plane, position, and plan rotation.
When a Vectorworks Design Series product is installed, the coordinates menu preference also affects the display
of coordinates in rotated plan view (see Rotating the Plan on page 721).
3D view with working Coordinates are relative to the layer plane (X and Y) and to the active
plane active working plane (X, Y). The working plane coordinates display in the same
color set for the working plane itself in the interactive preferences.
Rotated plan Coordinates are relative to the layer plane (X and Y) and to the rotated plan
(Vectorworks Design (Screen X and Screen Y). The rotated plan coordinates display in blue, as do
Series required) the rulers.
Some 3D objects, such as 3D polygons, NURBS curves, meshes, 3D symbols, spheres, cones, hemispheres, and 3D
loci, can display coordinates relative to the layer plane (X, Y, Z)also called the user coordinate systemor the active
working plane (X, Y,Z), when a working plane is selected. Click the planes button to change the relative coordinate
display.
Coordinates relative to
layer plane
Coordinates relative to
active working plane
Some symbols are page-based at creation or upon import. These do not display a Box Position indicator in the Object
Info palette. (The object can only be resized symmetrically.) The coordinates are relative to the screen plane (X and Y),
and 2D/3D symbols also show the Z coordinate for a streamlined workflow between views.
Some objects, such as lines and walls, can display and edit selected object information in either Cartesian or polar
mode.
250 | Chapter 7: Editing Objects
Cartesian coordinate
system
Polar coordinate
system
Coordinate Description
System
Cartesian Cartesian coordinates are the same as those used in the drawing area; values are
based on positive and negative X and Y axes
Polar In polar mode, values are relative to the drawing origin. Angles are represented as
positive or negative values from 0 to 180. Values from 180 to 359 are automatically
converted to negative. 0 is at the 3 oclock position.
Key Function
Enter Save the entry and return the focus to the drawing area
Tab Save the entry and move the focus to the next editable field
Shift+Enter Save the entry and keep the focus in the same field, so that you can enter a different
value if necessary
4. To edit each object in a selection separately, click the Multiple Edit mode button. This switches to Individual Edit
mode. Once in Individual Edit mode, use the Next arrow button to move forward through the selected objects and
the Previous arrow button to move backward through the selections. Each object highlights briefly as it is selected.
To be sure which object is currently selected, click the center circular button to highlight it again. If either arrow
appears dimmed, the end of the selected objects in that order has been reached.
Individual Edit mode
Currently selected Previous object
object type Highlights currently
selected object
Next object
Alternatively, select multiple objects of the same type, and then modify them at one time in Multiple Edit mode.
When several objects of the same type have been selected, the palette operates in batch editing mode. If the
parameter settings of the objects are different, the field displays as blank, or a check box displays with an
indeterminate state. Any parameter edits affect all the selected objects in multiple edit mode.
Some objects have more editable fields than others. If the Object Info palette is not fully extended when an object of
this type is selected, scroll options are provided. To scroll up and down, click the scroll arrows, any area of the scroll
bar, or click-drag the scroll box (Windows) or scroller (Macintosh).
252 | Chapter 7: Editing Objects
Macintosh Windows
Scroll box
Scroller
Scroll bar
Scroll bar
Scroll arrow
Scroll arrow
Use either the Selection tool or the Reshape tool from the Basic palette to select a vertex to edit. With the tool selected,
Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the vertex (if the SmartCursor is enabled, it snaps to each vertex
and identifies the vertex type to assist with selection) and select Select Vertex in Object Info Palette from the context
menu.
For certain vertex-based objects, you may first need to select the item and select an edit command to enter object
editing mode. A colored border around the drawing window indicates editing mode is active (see Object Editing
Mode on page 16).
The X and Y coordinates of the selected vertex display for editing in the Object Info palette.
Data Tab
The Data tab lists all records in the drawing, along with check boxes showing which records are attached. The Object
Info palette can be used to make changes to record settings for individual objects.
To view and edit record information:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Object Info.
2. Click the Data tab.
Editing Object Information | 253
ODBC functionality
(Vectorworks Design
Series required)
Parameter Description
Name Displays the name, if any, given to an object
Record Format Database In the Vectorworks Design Series products, links record formats to an
Connection external database for automated, two-way communication; see Database
(Vectorworks Design Connectivity on page 1019 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users
Series required, database Guide.
connection required)
Object Database Links the object instance to the external databases table rows
Connection
(Vectorworks Design
Series required, database
connection required)
Record Formats Displays all the records that are active in the drawing; if any of these
records are attached to the selected object, the box to the left of the record
name displays an X. If more than one object is selected, only the records
attached to all objects display an X.
Record Fields Provides a list of all the record fields if a record is attached to the selected
object; if any field has a default value assigned, it displays after the field
name. If no item is currently selected in the drawing, the label displays
Record Field Defaults instead of Record Fields.
Record Info Edits the field values for the selected record; all entered values override
any default values for the object
Resize the list boxes by selecting and dragging the resize bars between them.
See Record Formats on page 188 for more information on attaching, editing, and deleting record formats.
254 | Chapter 7: Editing Objects
Moving Objects
Objects can be moved in several ways.
Use the Move command (operates in the screen plane) or Move 3D command to move an object an exact distance.
Use the Move by Points tool to move, duplicate, and distribute objects by clicking.
Use the selection tools to select and drag objects to a new location.
Nudge selected objects one pixel at a time, or by the snap grid (see Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 17
and Nudging Symbols in Walls on page 490).
Parameter Description
Cartesian Specify the distance to move the object; for Cartesian coordinates, select
Cartesian and enter the X and Y Offset distances
Polar Specify the distance to move the object; for polar coordinates, select Polar and
enter the Distance and Angle
3. Click OK.
The object is moved in the screen plane according to the criteria specified.
Parameter Description
Cartesian Select the X, Y, Z (Cartesian) coordinate system
X, Y, Z Offset For Cartesian coordinates, specify the distance to move the object
Working Plane Select the X, Y, Z (working plane) coordinate system
X, Y, Z For working plane coordinates, specify the distance to move the object
Offset
3. Click OK. The object is moved in 3D space according to the criteria specified.
Move
Mode Description
Move Moves and duplicates selected objects according to the distance and direction
specified by two mouse clicks
Distribute Moves and distributes duplicate objects between the points specified by two mouse
clicks
Reference Point Moves selected objects according to a clicked reference point and a specified offset
distance from that point; the Preferences settings are not applicable when this mode
is selected
Object Keeps the original objects; this is the same as selecting the Retain option in the tool
Retention preferences
Parameter Description
Number of Specifies the number of copies of the original object(s) to create; same as the
Duplicates Number of Duplicates field on the Tool bar.
A value of 0 (zero) means that the original object will be moved; in this case, the
Retain option below (and the Object Retention button on the Tool bar) have no
effect.
Original Object
Retain Keeps the original object(s); this option performs the same function as the
Object Retention button on the Tool bar
Leave Selected Keeps the original object(s) selected for further action
To select additional objects or to change the currently selected objects to move, duplicate, or distribute, press and
hold the Alt key (Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) while shift-clicking or click-dragging the mouse around
them to marquee select them; the Selection tool is activated in boomerang mode while the Alt or Cmd key is being
pressed.
3. Select either the Move or Distribute mode, depending on the desired outcome.
4. Click once (anywhere on the drawing) to indicate the vector start point, and click again to indicate the vector end
point. Duplicates are placed in the vector direction, at the distance specified by the click points, along the line
defined by the click points.
Move mode, 1st click
two duplicates,
retain original 2nd click
5. The current Offset distance between the two click points displays. Enter the desired distance.
258 | Chapter 7: Editing Objects
6. Select whether the first click made was the reference point or a point on the object to be moved.
7. Click OK. The selected object is moved as specified, along the line defined by the click points.
8. The setting for how the first click is interpreted remains set until it is changed.
1st click
Copying Objects
The Copy command copies an object to the clipboard, where it is temporarily stored. The original object remains on
the drawing.
To copy an object:
1. Select the object(s) to copy.
2. Select Edit > Copy.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the object, and select Copy from the object
context menu.
The program places a copy of the object in the clipboard.
Pasting Objects
The Paste command places the clipboard object into the same drawing file, into another Vectorworks file, or into
another software programs file (if that program also has copy, cut, and paste commands). As long as the Vectorworks
program remains open while the object is in the clipboard, the object retains all its object information for pasting into
Vectorworks documents.
Some image quality can be lost when objects are pasted into other programs.
To paste an object:
1. Open the file and layer where the object is to be added.
2. Select Edit > Paste.
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Objects | 259
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the object, and select Paste from the object
context menu.
The program pastes the object centered on the location of the last mouse click, unless the last mouse click is
outside the current view. In that case, the object is pasted at the center of the drawing. When pasting a clipboard
object into a different Vectorworks file, the program automatically centers the object in the drawing area.
When a raster image is pasted into a Vectorworks file, it is automatically compressed to PNG format to reduce the
Vectorworks file size.
Paste as Picture
Like the Paste command, the Paste as Picture command places a copy of the clipboard contents in the active
Vectorworks drawing file. However, Paste as Picture places the entire clipboard contents as a single object/picture.
Because the contents are now one item, individual objects (including symbols and text) can no longer be edited.
There are two advantages to using the Paste as Picture command. First, as a single item, the clipboard objects are more
quickly placed into the drawing file. In addition, the pasted objects retain any PostScript comments, as well as all other
embedded information.
To paste as a picture:
1. Open the file and layer where the object is to be added.
2. Select Edit > Paste as Picture.
Paste in Place
The Paste in Place command works exactly like the Paste command, except that the clipboard contents are pasted into
the active drawing at the same coordinates (relative to the layer origin) from which they were copied. When you paste
to a sheet layer, remember that each sheet layer has its own origin, which may be different from the origin of the layer
where the object was copied (see Set Origin on page 80 for details).
To paste in place:
1. Open the file and layer where the object is to be added.
2. Select Edit > Paste in Place.
Method Description
Send to Front Sends the selected object to the front of stack
Send Forward Sends the selected object toward the front of the stack, in front of the next object in the
stack that overlaps it; if no other object overlaps the selected object, the stacking order
is not changed
Send to Back Sends the selected object to the back of the stack
Send Sends the selected object toward the back of the stack, behind the next object in the
Backward stack that overlaps it; if no other object overlaps the selected object, the stacking order
is not changed
Removing Objects
Clearing Objects
The Clear command deletes any selected object or objects. It has the same effect as pressing the Delete key, meaning
that the object(s) are not stored on the clipboard. The only way to retrieve a cleared object is to select Undo. This
command provides an additional way of removing an object from the drawing without deleting the current contents of
the clipboard.
To clear an object from the drawing:
1. Select the object or objects to remove from the drawing.
2. Select Edit > Clear.
Element Description
Unused Resources
Gradients Deletes any unused gradient resources
Hatches Deletes any unused hatch resource
Images Deletes any unused image resources
Line Types Deletes any unused line type resources
Record Formats Deletes any unused record format resources.
Also select Special Record Formats to delete unused record
formats that store plug-in object default values. An alert prompts
you to confirm that the default values should be deleted.
Renderworks Backgrounds Deletes any unused Renderworks background resources
(Renderworks required)
Renderworks Styles Deletes any unused Renderworks render style resources
(Renderworks required)
Renderworks Textures Deletes any unused texture resources
(Renderworks required)
Sketch Styles Deletes any unused sketch style resources
(Vectorworks Design Series
required)
Slab Styles Deletes any unused slab style resources
(Vectorworks Architect required)
Symbols Deletes any unused symbol resources.
Also select Special Symbols to delete the resources for plug-in
object symbols and group symbols (those listed in red and blue
in the Resource Browser). This will not delete any associated
plug-in or group objects that have already been placed in the
drawing. An alert prompts you to confirm that the special
symbol resources should be deleted.
262 | Chapter 7: Editing Objects
Element Description
Text Styles Deletes any unused text style resources
Tiles Deletes any unused tile resources
Wall Styles Deletes any unused wall style resources
(Vectorworks Architect or
Landmark required)
All Checked box: All attributes in the Unused Resources group
are selected; click to deselect all attributes in the group.
Empty box: No attributes in the Unused Resources group are
selected; click to select all attributes in the group.
Box displays (Windows) or (Macintosh): One or
more attributes in the Unused Resources group are not
selected; click to select all attributes in the group.
The Special Record Formats and Special Symbols
options are not automatically selected along with the other
unused resources; they must be selected individually.
Other Items
Empty Layers Deletes any layers that do not contain any objects
Empty Story Layers Deletes any stories that do not contain any layers
(Vectorworks Architect required)
Empty Symbol Folders Deletes any unused symbol folders
Unused Classes Deletes any unused classes
Objects Outside of Page Deletes any objects that are totally outside the page boundaries;
Boundaries for if an object is partially within the boundary, it will not be
deleted. Objects can be deleted from the active layer only, from
all design layers, and from all sheet layers.
All Checked box: All attributes in the Other Items group are
selected; click to deselect all attributes in the group.
Empty box: No attributes in the Other Items group are
selected; click to select all attributes in the group.
Box displays (Windows) or (Macintosh): One or
more attributes in the Other Items group are not selected; click
to select all attributes in the group.
Preview items that will be purged Opens the Purge Preview dialog box after you click OK on the
Purge dialog box; if needed, items can be removed from the
purge list
2. Click OK.
If Preview items that will be purged was selected, the Purge Preview dialog box opens. The Name and Type of
each item that will be purged displays. Red and blue names indicate symbols that are defined to be inserted as
plug-in objects and groups, respectively (see Symbol Types on page 170). For symbol definitions and empty
symbol folders, the Location column indicates which resource folder currently contains the item. For objects that
are outside of the page boundaries, the Location column indicates which sheet layer or design layer currently
contains the item.
Duplicating Objects | 263
To prevent an item from being purged, click the column to the left of the items name to remove the check mark.
Duplicating Objects
Duplicating Single
The Duplicate command makes a copy of an object or group of objects and places it on the drawing. Depending on the
setting in Vectorworks preferences, the duplicated object or objects will either be offset or placed directly on top of the
original.
To duplicate any object:
1. Select the object(s) to copy.
2. Select Edit > Duplicate.
The program places a copy of the selected object(s) in the drawing according to the settings in the Vectorworks
preferences dialog box.
When objects with an offset are duplicated, the offset is maintained with the duplicate.
Duplicate Array
The Duplicate Array command controls how many copies of selected objects are made and how these copies are
arrayed, or placed, in the drawing.
For information about placing symbols in walls in a duplicate array, see Inserting Symbols in a Duplicate Array on
page 488.
To create a duplicate array:
1. Select the object or objects to copy.
2. Select Edit > Duplicate Array.
The Duplicate Array dialog box opens. Select the desired duplication array Shape. The dialog box dynamically
displays the appropriate fields based on the selected linear, rectangular, or circular array shape.
264 | Chapter 7: Editing Objects
3. Click OK.
If the array location is already specified, the program automatically places the duplicate array.
If Next Mouse Click was selected, move the mouse where the copies are to be placed, and click. For circular and
rectangular arrays, click the mouse at the center of the array.
Grouped 2D objects and polyline path 3D object (in 3D view) and NURBS curve
Parameter Description
Select a path object Click Prev or Next to select the object that represents the path; the selected
path object is highlighted
Duplicate Placement Specifies the duplicate object placement parameters
Number of Creates the specified Number of duplicate objects, equally spaced along the
Duplicates path
Fixed Distance Duplicates objects at the fixed intervals specified in Distance
Start Offset Specifies the distance from the end of the path to the first duplicated object;
enter zero to place the first object at the start of the path
Curve Length Displays the length of the path object, for reference
Tangent to path Rotates the duplicates so they are always tangent to the path
3. Click OK.
Smoothing Objects | 269
The duplicates are arrayed with their centers along the selected path object.
Smoothing Objects
The smoothing commands smooth all selected polygon and polyline vertices in one step, changing all vertices of the
object into the selected vertex type. The commands also work on NURBS curves. The No Smoothing command
changes smoothed vertices into cornered vertices.
To smooth an object:
1. Select the object(s) to smooth.
2. Select Modify > Poly Smoothing. From the submenu, select the smoothing method to use.
Option Description
No Smoothing Creates straight lines and corner vertices
Bzier Spline Creates curves pulled towards but not touching the vertices
Smoothing
Cubic Spline Creates curves that pass through the control points
Smoothing
Arc Smoothing Creates fillet-like curves at the control points. The arc radius is based on
the current fillet radius of the Fillet tool (see Fillet Tool on page 326).
If no radius is set, the largest radius that can fit between each vertex is
used.
Radius Smoothing Creates curved radius vertices, which are easier to reshape than arc
vertices
Adjacent NURBS surfaces, which may have been split by the Split tool (see Splitting Objects and NURBS Surfaces
on page 321), can be composed into a single NURBS surface with this command.
To compose adjacent objects or NURBS surfaces:
1. Select the objects or NURBS surfaces to be composed.
If a large number of objects are connected end to end, use the Edit > Select Connected Objects command to
select them.
2. Select Modify > Compose. The objects are combined to create a single object or NURBS surface.
If there are multiple objects touching at the same endpoint, the two objects closest in stacking order are combined.
Unlocking Objects
Unlock an object or group of objects that was previously locked with the Unlock command. Unlocked objects can be
copied, moved, deleted, or edited.
To unlock objects:
1. Select the object or objects to be unlocked.
2. Select Modify > Unlock
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the object, and select Unlock from the object
context menu.
The Object Info palette no longer indicates that the object is locked. Depending on the selection highlighting
setting in Vectorworks preferences, the handles and/or highlighting also change to indicate that the object is now
unlocked (see Selection and Pre-selection Indicators on page 66).
Rotating Objects
There are several ways to rotate objects. Use the Rotate tool to rotate an object, or a duplicate of an object, directly
with the mouse. Use the various Rotate commands to rotate the object by choosing a preset rotation, or by entering
custom rotation information in a dialog box.
Certain objects, such as rectangles, rounded rectangles, ovals, bitmaps, PICT images, and text objects, can be
rotated with the Interactive Scaling mode of the Selection tool. Press the Alt key (Windows) or Option key
(Macintosh) while dragging a reshape handle.
272 | Chapter 7: Editing Objects
Rotate Tool
The Rotate tool can rotate objects in the drawing. Double-clicking the tool when an object is selected opens the Rotate
Object dialog box as described in Custom Rotation on page 274.
The Rotate tool can rotate, or rotate and duplicate the selected object(s) about an axis or aligned relative to another
object.
Duplicate Alignment Rotation
Standard
Standard Rotation
Mode Description
Standard Rotates the selected object
Duplicate Creates a duplicate object and rotates it
Standard Rotation Rotates the object about a defined axis
Alignment Rotation Rotates the object by aligning it with another object
Standard Rotation
To rotate an object around a specified axis:
2nd click
1st click
3rd click
Rotating an object using the Standard and Standard Rotation modes
Rotation by Alignment
To rotate an object by aligning it with another object:
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the object(s), and select Rotate from the object
context menu.
Parameter Description
Rotate Left 90 Rotates the selected object counter-clockwise 90
Rotate Right 90 Rotates the selected object clockwise 90
Flip Horizontal Flips the selected object about its center
Flip Vertical Flips the selected object vertically about its center
Custom Rotation
The center of rotation for this command is limited to the center of the objects bounding box. The rotation is performed
within the screen plane.
To rotate by a custom angle:
1. Select the object or objects to rotate.
2. Select Modify > Rotate > Rotate. Alternatively, double-click the Rotate tool.
The Rotate Object dialog box opens.
3D Custom Rotation
The precision of the rotation values that can be entered (degrees, minutes, and/or seconds) depends on the Units setting.
To rotate at custom angles in 3D:
1. Select the 3D object or objects to rotate.
2. Select Modify > Rotate > Rotate 3D.
The Rotate Object in 3D dialog box opens. Specify the rotation parameters.
Parameter Description
Rotation Angle Enter the angle of rotation
Mirroring Objects | 275
Parameter Description
Center of Rotation Specify the desired center of rotation
Working Plane Rotates using the center of the working plane
Center
Object Center Rotates about the center of the selected object
Next Mouse Click Rotates around the next mouse click in the drawing window
Rotation Axis Select whether the rotation axis will be based on the Active Layer Plane or
the Working Plane, and about which axis
3. Click OK.
Unrotating 3D Objects
The Unrotate 3D Objects command returns any 3D object that has its own coordinate system to its upright position.
Use the command to rotate symbols, extrudes, multiple extrudes, and sweeps so that they align with the world
coordinate system.
To unrotate a 3D object:
1. Select the 3D object or objects to unrotate.
2. Select Modify > Unrotate 3D Objects.
Mirroring Objects
The Mirror tool can mirror, or mirror and duplicate, objects across an axis line or across the working plane.
Standard Mirror Across Working Plane
Duplicate
Mode Description
Standard Mirrors the selected object. The mirrored object is on the same plane as
the original object.
Duplicate Creates a duplicate of the selected object and then mirrors the duplicate.
The mirrored object is on the same plane as the original object.
Mirror Across Working Mirrors the selected object to the other side of the working plane;
Plane (3D views only) available in 3D views
3. Select Standard or Duplicate from the Tool bar, depending on whether the original object is to remain in place.
4. Click to set the beginning of the axis line. As you begin to drag the mouse to create the axis line, a preview of the
mirrored objects placement displays. Click again to set the end of the line. For objects in walls (such as doors or
columns), the axis line is constrained to be perpendicular to the wall. 2D objects are previewed as vectors without
fill and 3D objects are previewed in Wireframe mode, regardless of the current render mode.
The object or its duplicate is mirrored on the opposite side of the plane created by projecting the axis line onto the
working plane.
Standard mode previews the items mirrored placement on the other side of the axis line after the first click, then
moves it at the second click
Duplicate mode previews the mirrored duplicate items placement on the other side of the axis line after the first
click, then places the new object at the second click
The end points of the mirror axis line must occupy distinct points on the active working plane. In 3D views,
mirroring will not work if the two points are coincident on the active plane.
For objects in walls, the mirrored object is placed in the wall, if there is room for it.
Converting Objects | 277
Duplicate mode creates a mirror duplicate of the column across the working plane
Converting Objects
Objects can be converted in several ways.
Convert to Lines
The Convert to Lines command changes a single object into the series of lines needed to create it. For example, a
rectangle is converted into four lines.
278 | Chapter 7: Editing Objects
Circles and ovals can also be converted into numerous line segments. However, especially when converting circles, the
accuracy of the line segments depends on the 2D conversion resolution setting chosen in the Vectorworks Preferences
dialog box.
To convert an object to lines:
1. Select the object to convert.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to Lines.
3. If the object can be rendered, select the wireframe, hidden line, or dashed hidden line rendering conversion option.
4. Click OK.
The object is converted into lines and each segment can be manipulated.
Convert to Polygons
The Convert to Polygons command changes any object with a surface into the 2D polygon or series of polygons
needed to create it.
Circles and ovals can also be converted. However, especially when converting circles, the accuracy of the polygons
depends on the 2D conversion resolution setting chosen in the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box.
When most closed 3D geometry is converted to 2D polygons with the hidden line rendering option, back-facing
polygons are discarded.
To convert an object to polygons:
1. Select the object to convert.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to Polygons.
3. If the object can be rendered, select either the wireframe or hidden line rendering conversion option.
4. Click OK.
The object is converted to a group of polygons. To select an individual polygon, first select Modify > Ungroup.
Grouping Objects | 279
Convert to 3D Polygons
The Convert to 3D Polys command converts any 2D line or surface object, including polylines, polygons, circles,
ovals, and rectangles, into a 3D polygon. Once converted, the new polygon contains a Z dimension, assigning it a place
in 3D space. It can be rotated and manipulated with 3D tools. The new polygon will not, however, have a thickness.
When you convert two or more objects simultaneously, the converted objects are placed in a group.
To convert a 2D object to 3D polygons:
1. Select the 2D object or objects to convert.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to 3D Polys.
Convert to Mesh
The Convert to Mesh command converts any extrude, multiple extrude, sweep, or wireframe object into a mesh
object. Use the Object Info palette to edit the mesh object vertice(s). The command can also collect a number of
separate 3D polygons into a single mesh object.
A mesh object can contain up to 30,000 vertices.
To convert to mesh:
1. Select the 3D object to convert.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to Mesh.
The object changes to a mesh object. To edit the mesh, select Modify > Edit Group and edit the 3D polygons that
make up the mesh.
Grouping Objects
The Group command groups two or more individual objects (including text and symbols) together. The group of
objects is then treated as a single object. For example, grouped objects can be moved to a different layer in one move.
In addition, this command can group two or more groups of objects into a single group.
280 | Chapter 7: Editing Objects
To group objects:
1. Select the objects (or groups) to be grouped.
2. Select Modify > Group.
The objects are grouped into one object, and the group is placed in the active class.
Editing a Group
Use the Modify > Edit Group command to edit individual objects in a group without ungrouping them. This command
also edits a group of objects that is nested inside another group; each time the command is selected, the program moves
one level deeper into the group. See Object Editing Mode on page 16 for details.
Ungrouping
The Ungroup command ungroups objects or groups that were previously combined with the Group command. Nested
groups must be ungrouped one at a time.
Vertical Align/Distribute
Horizontal Align/Distribute
3. Select the object alignment/distribution criteria. Objects are only moved along the horizontal and vertical axes.
Parameter Description
Align Select to align items along the horizontal or vertical axis
Distribute Select to distribute items along the horizontal or vertical axis
Horizontal
Left Align/distribute by the left side of the selected objects
Center Align/distribute by the centers of the selected objects
Right Align/distribute by the right side of the selected objects
Spacing Distribute the spacing equally between the left and right sides of adjacent
objects
Vertical
Top Align/distribute by the top of the selected objects
Center Align/distribute by the centers of the selected objects
Bottom Align/distribute by the bottom of the selected objects
Spacing Distribute the spacing equally between tops and bottoms of adjacent objects
4. Click OK.
The program aligns/distributes the selected objects.
282 | Chapter 7: Editing Objects
Loci and locked objects are special objects and behave differently when present during an alignment/distribution
operation.
If a locus point is one of the selected objects, all objects are aligned relative to that locus. If there are multiple loci in the
selection, then the loci are aligned/distributed like any other object.
Locked objects in a selection do not move. Other objects are aligned/distributed relative to the locked objects.
Parameter Description
Alignment/ Select whether to align/distribute about the active layer plane or the working plane
Distribution Axes
Align/Distribute Select Align and specify the coordinate value to use when aligning objects, or select Distribute
to distribute objects
Minimum Align/distribute objects along the specified axis by the minimum coordinate value of each
object
Center Align/distribute objects along the specified axis by the center coordinate value of each object
Maximum Align/distribute objects along the specified axis by the maximum coordinate value of each
object
Aligning and Distributing Objects | 283
Parameter Description
Spacing Distribute spacing between objects along the specified axis, ensuring that the space between the
objects is equal along the axis
3. Click OK.
The program aligns/distributes the selected objects.
Parameter Description
Horizontal Alignment
Align shoulder points Select to align the shoulder points of the selected leader lines
Align label points Select to align the label points of the selected leader lines. If this option is used in
conjunction with Align shoulder points, all of the selected label points are also
aligned to the label point of the topmost leader line.
Move shoulder points If Align shoulder points is not selected, and Align label points is selected, select this
option to move both the label and shoulder points, keeping the current distance
between those points for each line. Deselect this option to move only the label points,
keeping the current shoulder point positions.
Vertical Distribution
None Select to leave the selected leader lines in the same vertical position when they are
aligned horizontally
Parallel objective lines Select to move the shoulder points vertically, so that the target lines of all selected
objects are parallel to the line of the topmost object. This option can be used with or
without a horizontal alignment option.
Equal distance between Select to move the shoulder points vertically, so that the vertical distance between the
shoulder lines shoulder lines of all selected objects is equal to the distance between the lines of the
two topmost objects. This option can be used with or without a horizontal alignment
option.
Shoulder line
Target line
Target point
Label point
Shoulder point
Unaligned plant labels Labels aligned with Align shoulder points (along red
reference line), with no vertical distribution
Labels aligned with Align label points (along red Labels aligned with Align label points (along red
reference line), and Move shoulder points reference line), but no Move shoulder points
Compressing Images
The bitmap images and image resources in a Vectorworks file can be compressed with the JPEG compression method,
to save file space. JPEG compression can significantly reduce bitmap image file size, but can result in the loss of fine
detail for some images.
The compression method and file size for a selected image display in the Object Info palette. Images that are already
compressed by the JPEG compression method remain unchanged.
A selected bitmap file displays Bitmap as the object type at the top of the Object Info palette. A bitmap file may
already have had PNG compression applied at import; the Compress Images command changes its compression
format to JPEG.
286 | Chapter 7: Editing Objects
3. Select Apply JPEG Compression to Selected Bitmap Objects. Click OK to compress the selected images.
2. Select Apply JPEG Compression to All. Choose whether to apply the JPEG compression to all bitmap images in
the drawing, image resources, or both. Click OK to compress the images.
Tracing Bitmaps
The Trace Bitmap command traces bitmap objects and picture objects (images which have been imported with the
Import PICT as Picture command). It creates a group of vector lines from the image.
To trace a bitmap or picture object:
1. Select the image to trace.
2. Select Modify > Trace Bitmap.
3. Enter the desired criteria in the Trace Bitmap dialog box.
Tracing Bitmaps | 287
Parameter Description
Maximum width in pixels Specify the maximum number of pixels to be recognized as a single line; pixel
counts above the selected value are traced
Collinearity Sensitivity Select a value to define the segment size and accuracy of the trace
4. Click OK.
The time it takes to trace the image can vary from seconds to hours. The tracing time required is determined by the
image size, as well as the line threshold and collinearity sensitivity settings selected.
288 | Chapter 7: Editing Objects
Object Operations 8
In addition to the object editing tools and commands described in Editing Objects on page 247, objects can be
modified by operations such as extruding, sweeping, reshaping, combining, trimming, and performing surface
operations on one or multiple objects. Surface operations (such as the Add Surface command) can be performed on
planar objects while in a 3D view.
Extruding Objects
Single Extrude
The Extrude command changes 2D objects into 3D objects with a height. The type of object and its attributes
determines the type of extrude that is produced. Lines are extruded as flat planes, while all other objects are extruded as
wireframe 3D objects. While more than one object can be extruded at a time, grouped objects must first be ungrouped
in order to be extruded. Objects that are locked must first be unlocked in order to be extruded.
Objects are extruded into the current viewing projection, so the extrusion direction is dependent on the current view.
They can be rotated afterwards if desired. See Rotate Tool on page 272 or Preset Rotation Angles on page 273. The
extruded object height can be edited interactively with the Reshape tool; see Reshaping Extruded Objects and Solid
Primitives on page 302 for more information.
When you extrude multiple objects at the same time, they are turned into a single 3D group of objects. To edit an
individual object, either ungroup the set or use the Edit Extrude command to access the individual objects.
The Push/Pull tool can also be used to create extruded objects from planar objects; see Direct Modeling with the
Push/Pull Tool on page 417.
To extrude an object:
1. Select the 2D object(s) to extrude.
2. Select Model > Extrude.
The Create Extrude dialog box opens.
3. Enter the Extrusion height and specify any change in size along the X and Y axes, and then click OK.
Multiple Extrude
A pyramid, sphere, or other 3D object can be created from a series of 2D objects using the Multiple Extrude
command. Include a 2D locus, or several loci, in the selection to provide an extrusion reference point or points.
290 | Chapter 8: Object Operations
The process matches segments on each object to create the extrude. The segment order may be reversed for one or
more of the objects, producing unexpected results (such as a twisted extrusion). If this occurs, convert the objects
to open polygons prior to selecting the Multiple Extrude command.
To create a multiple extrude:
1. Select the 2D objects to extrude.
2. Select Model > Multiple Extrude.
The Create Extrude dialog box opens.
3. Enter the Extrusion height and specify the change in size along the X and Y axes.
4. Click OK.
The program extrudes the set of objects/locus points by connecting one to another in their stacking order, turning
the objects into a single 3D object.
2D locus
The Extrude Along Path dialog box opens. Specify the extrusion parameters.
Parameter Description
Select a path object Click the Next or Prev button to select the object that represents the path
Uniform Scale Scales the object linearly along the designated path; enter a Scale Factor of 1 to
perform no scaling, or enter a positive scale factor other than 1 for uniform scaling
Exponential Scale Scales the object exponentially along the designated path; enter a Shape Factor
of 0 to perform no scaling, or enter a shape factor other than 0 for exponential
scaling
Lock Profile Plane Locks the orientation of the profile plane to the global Z axis, constraining the
extrusion to be perpendicular to the XY plane
Fix Profile Maintains the original relative position and orientation of the profile object with
respect to the path. Normally, this should be deselected, so that the profile is
moved and rotated with respect to the path.
Scaling options are available when the path object is a single continuous curve without sharp corners or
discontinuities.
3. Click OK to extrude the object along the selected path.
No scaling (scale
factor 1) Uniform scaling Exponential scaling
4. The type of Scale, Shape/Scale Factor, Lock Profile Plane, and Fix Profile status of an extrude along path
object can be edited in the Object Info palette.
292 | Chapter 8: Object Operations
3. Enter the Height (Z) of the extrude and the Taper Angle. A positive taper degree shrinks the object as it extrudes,
while a negative taper degree widens the object.
Set a Taper Angle of 0 to create an extrusion with no taper.
4. Click OK to create the tapered extrude.
If a tapered extrude fails, the object reverts to the last known good value.
Sweeping Objects
The Sweep command converts 2D objects into 3D cylindrical objects. Use it to convert a single object at a time, or to
convert several selected objects. While more than one object can be swept at a time, grouped objects must first be
ungrouped. Locked objects must first be unlocked in order to create a sweep.
A sweep has four basic elements: a centroid (locus), an arc angle, a segment angle, and a pitch. The locus acts as the
sweeps center of rotation. If a locus is not selected, the program sweeps the object around its left edge or point farthest
on the left if more than one object is selected. A locus can be relocated or added after creation using the Edit Sweep
Reshaping Objects | 293
command. The other three elements (arc angle, segment angle, pitch) can be edited after the sweep has been created
through the Object Info palette.
If more than one object is selected when creating a sweep, the objects are automatically grouped. To edit an object
within the sweep, use the Edit Sweep command.
To create a sweep:
1. Select the 2D object(s) to sweep and, if created, the locus.
2. Select Model > Sweep.
The Create Sweep dialog box opens. Enter the sweep criteria and click OK.
Parameter Description
Size
Height Indicates the sweep height
Radius Indicates the sweep radius
Angles
Start Angle Specifies the angle to begin the sweep; normally start at 0
Arc Angle Specifies the degree of the sweep. By default, objects are swept a full 360.
Segment Indicates the number of segments that make up the sweep. The default is 36
Angle segments, each one 10 from the next on the arc. The angle setting must be a positive
number. A large number of segments can slow down performance.
Pitch Sets the degree to which the sweep spirals. A sweeps pitch is represented in the
plus- or minus-height per revolution. For example, if the pitch is 1, every revolution
raises the object a single inch. The default is 0.
Reshaping Objects
The Reshape tool reshapes an object after it has been created, by moving, removing, changing, or adding to its
vertices. Change the length of objects (including dimensions), reshape single objects, or reshape multiple objects at
294 | Chapter 8: Object Operations
once. Reshape polygons and polylines, including lines drawn with the Freehand tool (which are considered polylines).
In addition, specify exact radius measurements for circular arc control points. The Reshape tool can also be used to
reshape 3D solids, walls, roofs, NURBS curves and surfaces, and other objects.
The modes and functionality available for the Reshape tool depend on the currently selected object or objects, and the
current view.
2D Reshape Modes
The Reshape tool has six reshape modes when 2D functionality is enabled. It also has five control point modes for
changing the existing vertex. In addition, the tool can operate in three marquee selection modes.
Cubic Fillet
Move Polygon Change Delete Corner Spline (Circular Rectangular Polygonal
Handles Vertex Vertex Point Point Arc) Point Marquee Marquee
Mode Description
Move Polygon Handles Changes a shape by clicking and moving a vertex or midpoint handle
Move Edges Parallel Moves an edge parallel to its original position without changing the adjacent angles
Change Vertex Changes an existing vertex into a corner, Bzier, cubic, radius, or arc vertex
Add Vertex Adds a vertex as a corner, Bzier, cubic, radius, or arc vertex
Delete Vertex Removes the selected vertex
Hide or Show Edges Clicking on the midpoint hides the polyline or polygon segment; clicking on a vertex
hides the segment that follows the vertex
Corner Point In Change Vertex mode, changes the vertex to a corner vertex; in Add Vertex mode, adds
a corner vertex
Bzier Control Point In Change Vertex mode, changes the vertex to a Bzier vertex; in Add Vertex mode, adds
a Bzier vertex
Cubic Spline Point In Change Vertex mode, changes the vertex to a cubic vertex; in Add Vertex mode, adds
a cubic vertex
Reshaping Objects | 295
Mode Description
Radius (Point on Arc) In Change Vertex mode, changes the vertex to a radius vertex; in Add Vertex mode, adds
Point a radius vertex
Fillet (Circular Arc) In Change Vertex mode, changes the vertex to an arc vertex; in Add Vertex mode, adds
Point an arc vertex. Click Preferences from the Tool bar, enter a Fillet Radius in the Fillet
Settings dialog box, and click OK (for the largest possible fillet, set the Fillet Radius to
zero).
Rectangular Marquee Creates a rectangular marquee box around several vertices. Click to set the start point,
drag the mouse in the desired direction, and release to set the end point. All vertices
within the marquee are selected for performing a subsequent reshape operation.
Lasso Marquee Creates a free-form marquee around several vertices, allowing a more exact selection of
vertices of irregular 2D shapes. Click to set the start point, drag the mouse in the desired
direction, and release to set the end point. All vertices within the marquee are selected for
performing a subsequent reshape operation.
Polygonal Marquee Creates a marquee with an irregular polygonal shape around several vertices. Click to set
the start point, and then continue clicking to define the shape. Double-click to finish the
marquee. All vertices within the marquee are selected for performing a subsequent
reshape operation.
In addition to clicking the Reshape tool from the Basic palette, there are other ways to reshape 2D objects.
Double-clicking eligible 2D objects (polylines, polygons, rectangles, rounded rectangles, and ovals) with the
Selection tool automatically activates the Reshape tool.
2D objects and symbols can be resized with the Single Object Interactive Scaling mode of the Selection tool; see
The Selection Tool on page 61.
Certain objects (polylines, polygons, rectangles, rounded rectangles, circles, ovals, and arcs) can also be reshaped
with the Freehand tool. See Reshaping Objects with the Freehand Tool on page 229.
Additional editing modes are available for certain other objects, such as a site model (Vectorworks Design Series
required). Those specific modes are described in sections about editing or reshaping the object.
Functionality similar to the Reshape tool is available from the Object Info palette Shape tab; see Editing
Vertex-Based Objects on page 252.
3D Reshape Modes
The Reshape tool changes the height and radius of an extruded object, tapered extrude, or a 3D object that is not a
mesh object. In addition, use it to reshape walls (see Editing Walls on page 445), 3D polygons, and solid primitives
(such as cylinders, hemispheres, cones, and spheres), reshape retaining walls (Vectorworks Design Series required),
change the angle (rise/run) of roofs created with the Roof Face command, and reshape roof objects created with the
Create Roof command (see Reshaping Roof Objects on page 464).
The Reshape tool generally has three modes when 3D functionality is enabled. Depending on the selected object,
additional modes are available, as described in the associated sections.
For some objects, such as 3D solids, the reshaping functionality is accessed directly from the drawing, and the
marquee modes display in the tool bar.
Add Vertex
Mode Description
Move Vertex Changes the location of a selected vertex or several vertices
Add Vertex Adds a vertex to the object
Remove Vertex Removes a vertex from the object
Marquee Modes
When no objects are selected, the Reshape tool has three marquee modes to draw a planar marquee in any view.
Lasso Marquee
Rectangular Polygonal
Marquee Marquee
Mode Description
Rectangular Marquee Creates a rectangular marquee box around several vertices. Click to set the
start point, drag the mouse in the desired direction, and release to set the end
point. All vertices within the marquee are selected for performing a
subsequent reshape operation.
Lasso Marquee Creates a free-form marquee around several vertices, allowing a more exact
selection of vertices of irregular 2D shapes. Click to set the start point, drag
the mouse in the desired direction, and release to set the end point. All
vertices within the marquee are selected for performing a subsequent reshape
operation.
Polygonal Marquee Creates a marquee with an irregular polygonal shape around several vertices.
Click to set the start point, and then continue clicking to define the shape.
Double-click to finish the marquee. All vertices within the marquee are
selected for performing a subsequent reshape operation.
Click-drag in the drawing to begin drawing a marquee around vertices for reshaping; the currently active marquee
mode determines the marquee type that will be drawn. Regardless of what marquee mode is currently active, you can
alternatively press and hold the Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) key to draw a lasso marquee or press and hold
Shift+Alt (Windows) or Shift+Option (Macintosh) to draw a polygonal marquee.
As soon as a reshape marquee exists and an object is selected, the available modes switch to the 2D reshape modes, and
2D reshape functionality is enabled (see 2D Reshape Modes on page 294). This allows 2D reshape behavior to be
performed, even on a 3D object and in a 3D view, when the vertex is enclosed in the reshape marquee. For example,
wall length can be changed with the Reshape tool in a 3D view, if the wall end vertex is enclosed within a reshape
marquee that is co-planar with the bottom elevation of the wall.
3D objects can be moved if fully inside the marquee and in Top or Top/Plan view.
While using any marquee selection mode, if the vertices to be selected are surrounded by a filled object, first select the
object(s) using the Selection tool. Press and hold the Shift key while drawing the marquee around the vertices; the
currently active marquee mode determines the marquee type that will be drawn. The desired vertices are selected
without the boundary object being selected.
Perform the desired reshape operation on the selected vertices.
Reshaping Objects | 297
Bzier
If an object cannot be reshaped with this tool, its handles do not display.
To reshape a 2D rectangle, rounded rectangle, oval, polyline, polygon, or path object by moving an edge:
Only straight edges with straight adjacent segments can be reshaped with this mode; if an object or segment of an
object cannot be reshaped, the reshape handles do not display.
298 | Chapter 8: Object Operations
With the Hide/Show Edges cursor, click a vertex near an edge to show or hide the edge
Create marquee to select multiple vertices, and then drag selected vertices to new location
Press the Delete key (Macintosh) or Delete or Backspace keys (Windows) to delete the vertices or holes.
Alternatively, enter an exact length in the Data bar. Press the Tab key while still pressing the mouse button until
the L field is highlighted, enter a value for the length, and release the mouse button.
Reshaping Objects | 301
Walls are resized with the wall intersections, doors, or other symbols maintained in place. The marquee remains
visible until another tool or command is selected.
Reshaping Polylines
Polylines can be reshaped in a manner that is similar to an Edit Group operation. The polyline itself is locked in this
process, but holes can be added to it, filleted, chamfered, offset, duplicated, extracted, and deleted from it.
To reshape a polyline:
1. Select the polyline to change.
2. Select Modify > Edit Polyline.
3. Select polyline holes and move, delete, or reshape them. Add new holes to the polyline, or move a hole out of the
polyline to extract it, creating individual polylines.
The original polyline is locked and cannot be edited.
4. Click Exit Polyline to return to the drawing.
302 | Chapter 8: Object Operations
Original polyline In Edit Polyline mode, a hole is added The polyline has been edited
With the Reshape cursor, drag the resize handle Change the radius of a cylinder, sphere, Change the angle of a tapered
up (or down) to the desired extrude height hemisphere, or cone by dragging the resize extrude by dragging the side resize
handle to the desired radius handle to the desired angle
Alternatively, use the Push/Pull tool for these operations. Changing the top or bottom face of an extrude does not
change the object type; it remains an extrude.
Reshaping 3D Polygons
The Reshape tool, located in the Basic palette, can manipulate and reshape 3D polygons.
To reshape 3D polygons:
1. Select the 3D polygon to reshape. Only one 3D polygon can be selected for reshaping at a time.
2. Click the Reshape tool from the Basic palette.
Select the mode from the Tool bar.
Reshaping Objects | 303
Add Vertex
Mode Description
Move Vertex Changes the location of a selected vertex or several vertices
Add Vertex Adds a vertex to the object
Remove Vertex Removes a vertex from the object
3. Select a vertex. When the cursor is over a vertex, the standard arrow cursor changes to an unfilled, four-way
arrow.
1. Select the NURBS curve to reshape. To reshape multiple vertices, the curve must be a single, smooth continuous
NURBS curve.
2. Click the Reshape tool from the Basic palette.
Select the mode from the Tool bar.
Working Plane
Remove Vertex Constrain Y-axis Constrain
Mode Description
Move Vertex Changes the location of a vertex or several vertices
Add Vertex Adds a vertex to the NURBS curve
Remove Vertex Removes a vertex from the NURBS curve
Change Vertex Toggles an existing vertex between a corner vertex and smooth vertex
Working Plane Moves the selected vertex or vertices on a working plane
Constrain
X-axis constrain Moves the selected vertex or vertices along the X axis
Y-axis constrain Moves the selected vertex or vertices along the Y axis
Z-axis constrain Moves the selected vertex or vertices along the Z axis
3. Select a vertex. When the cursor is over a vertex, the standard arrow cursor changes to an unfilled, four-way
arrow.
Alternatively, to select several vertices at one time in Move Vertex mode, click with the Shift key pressed or click
and drag to create a marquee around the desired vertices. Position the cursor over one of the vertices.
Mode Description
Move NURBS Surface Vertex Changes the position of the selected vertex or vertices only
Move NURBS Surface U Vertices Changes the position of all vertices in a row in the U direction
Move NURBS Surface V Vertices Changes the position of all vertices in a row in the V direction
Working Plane Constrain Moves the selected vertex or vertices on a working plane
X-axis Constrain Moves the selected vertex or vertices along the X axis
Y-axis Constrain Moves the selected vertex or vertices along the Y axis
Z-axis Constrain Moves the selected vertex or vertices along the Z axis
To select one vertex or row of vertices, position the cursor over one of the NURBS surface vertices. When the
cursor is over a vertex, the standard arrow cursor changes to an unfilled, four-way arrow.
To select several vertices at one time, click with the Shift key pressed or click and drag to create a marquee around
the desired vertices.
If several vertices are selected, position the cursor over one of them.
3. Click-drag the mouse to move the vertex or vertices.
4. Release the mouse at the desired location.
Functionality similar to the Reshape tool is available from the Object Info palette Shape tab; see Editing
Vertex-Based Objects on page 252.
306 | Chapter 8: Object Operations
Offsetting Objects
The Offset tool either creates a duplicate object offset from the original, or offsets the selected object from its original
location. Use this tool to easily create parallel objects, such as lines and walls. Also use it to produce a larger or smaller
version of closed objects, such as ovals and connected walls. NURBS surfaces are offset by the offset distance along
the surface normal direction.
The Offset tool can be used with the following objects (see the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide for
information about the Vectorworks Design Series objects).
Vectorworks Fundamentals Objects
The Offset tool has four modes, which are also options in the Offset Tool Preferences dialog box.
Offset by Point Offset Original Object
The 2D conversion resolution field, on the Edit tab of the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box, adjusts the degree
of smoothing. The higher the conversion resolution, the higher the degree of smoothing, which produces a more
accurate offset of objects. For more information on 2D conversion resolution, refer to Setting Vectorworks
Preferences on page 17.
Parameter Description
Method
Offset by Distance Places the offset object at the specified Distance from the original
location (same as selecting the Tool bar button and entering the distance
on the Tool bar)
Offset by Point Places the offset object at a distance specified by a mouse click (same as
selecting the Tool bar button)
Duplication
Duplicate and Offset Creates a duplicate of the object at the offset location (same as selecting
the Tool bar button)
Offset Original Object Moves the original object to the offset location (same as selecting the
Tool bar button)
Wall Offset
Offset from Center Line Offsets walls from the center line of the walls original location
Offset from Nearest Offsets walls from the nearest edge of the walls original location
Edge
Smooth Corners Rounds sharp corners in the offset object
Close Open Curves Draws lines at both ends of the offset and original objects, to create a
closed shape from the open curves
Depending on the offset preferences, either a duplicate object or the original object is placed at the offset location.
Select the walls with the Selection tool, and then select the Offset tool. Select Offset by Distance mode, and set the
offset Distance to 2. Click outside the walls to offset them 2 beyond the original location.
In Offset by Point mode, click the Click the point where the offset is to Click again to place the offset object
object to be copied and offset; the be placed; a preview displays
object is highlighted
Trimming and Clipping Objects | 309
For grouped objects, the offset result depends on where you click
Trim Tool
The Trim tool trims a portion of the 2D object indicated. Objects that can be edited in this manner include lines, arcs,
rectangles, rounded rectangles, circles, ovals, polylines, and polygons. The Trim tool has two modes that determine
how the object will be trimmed.
Mode Description
All Objects The object is trimmed to all intersecting coplanar objects regardless of the current
selection
Currently Selected Objects The object is trimmed only to the intersecting coplanar object(s) that is currently
selected
310 | Chapter 8: Object Operations
The 2D object to be trimmed is All Objects mode Currently Selected Objects mode
highlighted when the hand cursor is The object is trimmed to all intersecting The object is trimmed only to the
over it coplanar objects regardless of the intersecting coplanar objects that are
current selection currently selected
To trim another portion of the same object, move the hand cursor to the desired location and click.
Clip Tool
The Clip tool cuts out pieces from 2D objects, such as lines, arcs, rectangles, rounded rectangles, circles, ovals,
polygons, and polylines. In addition, this tool can be used to split an object. The Clip tool operates on all selected
objects in the active plane.
Inclusion Rectangle
Exclusion Circle
Split Polygon
Mode Description
Exclusion Cuts a hole in the object(s) according to the clipping object shape
Inclusion Trims everything away from the outside of the clipping object shape
Split Splits the object(s) and the clipping area into separate objects
Rectangle, Polygon, Circle Each mode can use one of the clipping shapes; select rectangle, polygon, or circle
To clip objects:
To select additional objects or to change the currently selected objects to clip, press and hold the Alt key
(Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) while shift-clicking or click-dragging the mouse around them to marquee
select them; the Selection tool is activated in boomerang mode while the Alt or Cmd key is being pressed.
3. Select the clipping mode and the clipping object shape.
4. Click and drag to create a marquee box. The marquee is defined on the active plane.
The object is clipped as defined by the clipping object shape.
1st click
2nd click
Resizing Objects
Fixed Point Resize Tool
The Fixed Point Resize tool resizes rectangles, rounded rectangles, polygons, circles, and ovals using a fixed point on
the drawing as the point of reference. It is best used to scale an object relative to a particular location in the drawing. To
rescale an object symmetrically or asymmetrically by a specific factor, use the Scale Objects command. See Scaling
Objects on page 311.
To resize an object:
If the drag point is moved past the selected fulcrum, the object is reversed.
The starting point for dragging cannot be the same as the fulcrum point or exactly horizontal or vertical to it.
Scaling Objects
The Scale Objects command rescales the X and/or Y dimension of any selected solid, object, or group, or rescales the
selected items uniformly in the X,Y, and Z dimensions. The selected item is rescaled using its center point. The object
312 | Chapter 8: Object Operations
can be rescaled by indicating a segment on the drawing and entering a new distance for the segment. If no objects are
selected, the entire drawing can be scaled.
Spheres, hemispheres, and cones cannot be scaled asymmetrically. Symbols and layer links cannot be scaled with
this command. Use the Object Info palette or the Selection tool to scale symbols.
To scale objects:
1. Select the object(s) to scale.
If no objects are selected, all objects on all layers of the drawing are scaled.
2. Select Modify > Scale Objects.
The Scale Objects dialog box opens. Specify the scaling method and parameters.
Parameter Description
Symmetric Scales uniformly along X, Y, and Z axes
X, Y, Z Factor Enter the scaling factor (for example, enter 2 to double or .5 to halve the scale)
Symmetric By Scales symmetrically using the ratio of the current and new distance values as
Distance a scale factor
Current Distance Enter the current distance to be scaled, or click the button to use a temporary
tool to indicate the distance on the drawing
New Distance Enter the new value for the distance
Asymmetric Scales along only the specified X and Y axes; when asymmetrically scaling a
solid, the current view must be aligned with the solids matrix for scaling to
occur
X / Y Scaling Enter the scaling factor (for example, enter 2 to double or .5 to halve the scale)
Factor
Resizing Objects | 313
Parameter Description
Scale text Scales selected text to the new scaling factor
Entire drawing Scales all objects on all layers, including text, symbols, and hatches
3. If specifying the scale factor with the Symmetric by Distance option, click the button to switch temporarily to the
drawing. Click to indicate the start of the segment, move the mouse, and click to indicate the end of the segment.
You are returned to the Scale Objects dialog box, and the Current Distance value has been specified. Enter the
New Distance for the segment.
4. Click OK.
A selected solid can also be scaled asymmetrically by selecting the Modify > Scale Objects command and entering an
Asymmetric scale factor. However, the current view must be aligned with the solids matrix for scaling to occur.
Table is too long and too close to chair Table scaled along X axis
Shearing Objects
The Shear tool simultaneously skews all of the vertices of a rectangle, rounded rectangle, polygon, circle, oval, or
polyline, using a fixed point on the drawing as a point of reference. It is like placing a thumbtack on one point of an
object, or the drawing, and reshaping every other object point except the one tacked down. The Shear tool can be used
to fake a 3D perspective.
To shear an object:
Click to tack down a point then drag the resize cursor to shear the object
Joining Objects
Join Command
The Join command can be used to join two single lines, two double lines, or two walls together. Joined lines intersect
but remain as individual objects.
Join
To join walls, single lines, or double lines:
1. Select the two non-parallel walls, lines, or double lines to join.
2. Select Modify > Join > Join.
The selected walls/lines are joined together with any excess trimmed away.
Mode Description
Single Object Connect Trims or extends the first selected object to join a second or boundary object
This mode can be used to connect roof faces; see Connecting Roof Faces on
page 456.
Dual Object Connect Trims or extends to join two objects at their endpoints or intersections
This mode can be used to connect roof faces; see Connecting Roof Faces on
page 456.
Dual Object Combine Trims or extends to join two objects into one object at their endpoints or intersections
Multiple Object Connect Designates the first selected object as a boundary, and then trims or extends multiple
consecutively selected objects to join the boundary
Use Vertical Thickness If the tool is being used to connect two roof faces that have different thicknesses, this
of Subject Roof Face option automatically adjusts the roof face thickness of the second clicked roof face to
match the vertical thickness of the first clicked roof face; see Connecting Roof Faces
on page 456
When connecting or combining a pair of NURBS, polylines, or open polygons by their endpoints, you may need to
supply additional information to complete the process. In this situation, the Connect/Combine Options dialog box
opens.
Combining and Connecting Objects | 317
Option Description
Mid-Point Connects/combines the two objects by joining the two endpoints midway between them
Blend Connects/combines the two objects by creating another object between them
Position Matching Connects/combines two NURBS curves or surfaces by moving the first objects selected end
(NURBS curves and point to the selected end point of the boundary object (not available if the end points are
surfaces only) coincident)
318 | Chapter 8: Object Operations
Option Description
Tangency Matching Connects/combines two NURBS curves or surfaces by making the first objects selected end
(NURBS curves and point tangent to the selected end point of the boundary object
surfaces only)
Curvature Matching Connects/combines two NURBS curves or surfaces by making the first objects selected end
(NURBS curves and point match the curvature of the selected end point of the boundary object
surfaces only)
1. Click the Connect/Combine tool from the Basic palette, and select Single Object Connect from the Tool bar.
2. Click on the object to connect, and then click on the boundary object. The first object is resized to join the
boundary object.
Connecting Multiple Objects
To connect multiple selected objects to a boundary object:
1. Click the Connect/Combine tool from the Basic palette, and select Dual Object Connect from the Tool bar.
2. Click the first, and then the second, object to connect.
The Connect/Combine Options dialog box opens. Select a method for resizing and connecting the two objects (see
Connect/Combine Tool on page 316).
The two objects are resized to connect to each other.
1st click
2nd click
Blend
Position Matching
Tangency Matching
Curvature Matching
1. Click the Connect/Combine tool from the Basic palette, and select Dual Object Combine from the Tool bar.
2. Click on the first, and then the second, object to combine.
The two objects are trimmed or extended if necessary and combined into one object.
Splitting Objects and NURBS Surfaces | 321
1. Click the Connect/Combine tool from the Basic palette, and select Multiple Object Connect from the Tool bar.
2. Click on the boundary object, which becomes highlighted in red.
3. Position the cursor over the first object to trim or extend to the boundary; it becomes highlighted in red. Click to
resize the object to join the boundary object.
4. Continue to click on objects to connect to the boundary. Each consecutively clicked object is connected, until you
click in an empty space to deselect the boundary object.
Splitting an object may change its type; for example, splitting a roof face creates a solid section, which can no
longer be edited as a roof face.
The following modes are available for the Split tool.
Line Trim
Currently
Point Split Selected
Objects
Line Split All Objects
Mode Description
Point Split Cuts an object or NURBS surface at a specified point
Line Split Splits an object or NURBS surface along a cutting line
Line Trim Splits an object or NURBS surface along a cutting line, and then keeps a designated side
All Objects For Line Split and Line Trim modes, splits all objects along a cutting line regardless of
the current selection
Currently For Line Split and Line Trim modes, splits only the currently selected objects along a
Selected cutting line
Objects
Surfaces generated by successive splitting can be joined together with the Compose command (see Composing
and Decomposing Objects and Surfaces on page 269).
This tool may not be able to manipulate certain types of surface geometry (see Surface Geometry Requirements
on page 387).
Highlight the object to split by using the Next and Prev buttons.
4. The object is split into two pieces.
Click
The wall is split into two separate
pieces at the click location; the lower
segment has been moved for clarity
If the object is closed, as in a circle or rectangle, the object is converted so that its endpoints meet unjoined at the
split. Some objects are not truly closed, and instead break into two segments.
The surface is split by iso-parametric curves passing through the click point along U and V parametric directions.
If the split point is on an existing iso-parametric curve, the surface is split in both directions (U and V).
324 | Chapter 8: Object Operations
Clicking once on the iso-parametric curve (shown in light gray) with the
Split tool creates four split surfaces (in black)
All Objects mode Two solid sections have been moved and the image rotated for clarity
Splitting Objects and NURBS Surfaces | 325
To place a fillet:
Standard
Trim
Mode Description
Standard Places a fillet without affecting the original object; the fillet and the object must be
grouped to form a single object
Split Places a fillet and splits the filleted object. If the fillet is between two objects, the
fillet and the objects must be grouped to make a single object. If filleting the corners
of a polygon, the fillet takes the place of the corner and becomes a part of the object.
Creating Fillets and Chamfers | 327
Mode Description
Trim Places a fillet and trims the filleted object. If the fillet is between two objects, the
fillet and the objects must be grouped to make a single object. If filleting the corners
of a polygon, the fillet takes the place of the corner and becomes a part of the object.
Chamfer Tool
The Chamfer tool places a chamfer, or line, between two objects or adjacent sides of an object, including rectangles,
NURBS curves, polygons, 3D polygons, polylines, or line segments. A chamfer cannot be placed between parallel lines
or NURBS curves.
The tool has three modes: chamfers can be placed without affecting existing objects, they can split the existing objects
at the chamfer endpoints, or they can trim (or extend) the existing lines to the chamfer endpoints.
Chamfer Preference Fields
(the available fields vary based on the entry option
selected in the Chamfer Settings dialog box)
Trim
Standard
Split Preferences
To create a chamfer:
Mode Description
Standard Places a chamfer without affecting the original object; to create a single object,
group the chamfer and the chamfered object together
328 | Chapter 8: Object Operations
Mode Description
Split Places a chamfer and splits the chamfered objects. This mode extends lines, if
needed, for the chamfer to connect. To create a single object, group the chamfer
and the chamfered object together. If the corner of a polygon is chamfered, the
chamfer takes the place of the corner.
Trim Places a chamfer and trims the chamfered objects. If the corner of a polygon is
chamfered, the chamfer takes the place of the corner. This mode extends lines, if
needed, for the chamfer to connect.
3. To specify the chamfer size with a different method (for example, by a set chamfer length), click Preferences
from the Tool bar. The Chamfer Settings dialog box opens. Enter the appropriate values and click OK.
Parameter Description
Entry Options Select a method for specifying the chamfer size; once selected, the required entry fields
also display on the Tool bar for easy entry
Editing Object Surfaces | 329
Parameter Description
First and Second Lines Enter the distances from the end of the First Line and Second Line at which to place
the ends of the chamfer line
First Line and Angle Enter the distance from the end of the First Line at which to place one end of the
chamfer line, and enter the Angle between the First Line and the chamfer line
4. Fields on the Tool bar indicate where the chamfer will be placed, according to the current settings in the chamfer
preferences. Change the default values if necessary.
5. Click the object where the chamfer will begin.
6. Click the object where the chamfer will end.
The chamfer is drawn according to the mode selection.
2D primitive objects that can be filled and are not grouped (arcs,
polygons, polylines, ovals, circles, rectangles, rounded rectangles)
Revision clouds
Floors
330 | Chapter 8: Object Operations
Roof faces
Pillars
These commands work in any view, as long as the objects involved are in the same plane. If a combination of 2D and
2D/3D hybrid objects (such as floors or pillars) will be used in an operation, the view must be set to Top/Plan. In Top/
Plan view, screen plane and layer plane are considered to be co-planar.
The equivalent 3D commands operate on solids and can be used in a view other than Top/Plan; see Editing 3D Object
Surfaces on page 332.
Intersect Surface
The Intersect Surface command provides an easy way to create a new object that is the exact size and shape of the
overlapping area of two co-planar objects.
To intersect surfaces:
1. Select the two overlapping objects to use to create a third object.
The new objects properties are based on the object on the bottom of the stack of objects. If the bottom object is a
2D primitive (such as a rectangle or circle), the new object will have its attributes. If the bottom object is
something other than a 2D primitive (such as a floor or pillar), the new object will be the same type, with the same
properties. If necessary, use the Send command to stack the objects to produce the desired attributes or object
type.
2. Select Modify > Intersect Surface.
The new object is placed directly on top of the two original intersecting objects. To see the new object, select it
and drag it to the side.
Add Surface
The Add Surface command creates a single object from two or more co-planar objects, as long as all of the following
are true:
The objects are not symbols.
The objects touch or overlap each other.
Editing Object Surfaces | 331
Click here
To combine surfaces:
1. Select the two or more closed objects to use to create a new polygon or polyline.
2. Select Modify > Combine into Surface.
The cursor changes into a paint bucket.
3. Place the paint bucket inside the area to be combined and click.
A single polygon or polyline object is created from the selected objects. The new object uses the current attributes.
Clip Surface
The Clip Surface command trims the bottom object in a selection so that any areas overlapped by the top object are cut
out of it. Objects must be co-planar. Multiple objects can be used as clipping objects in one operation. Symbols and
grouped objects cannot be clipped or be used as clipping objects.
332 | Chapter 8: Object Operations
If there is a stack of more than two overlapping objects, then each object under the clipping object (the top object in the
stack) will be clipped.
There are two important things to remember about this command:
If the object to be clipped is an open polygon, it is automatically converted to a closed polygon before it is clipped.
Depending on the objects selected, the command may change the bottom objects type; for example, if a hole is
clipped into a rectangle, the clipped rectangle is automatically changed into a polyline.
To clip a surface:
1. Ensure that the object to be clipped is the bottom object.
If necessary, change the objects order with the Send command (see Changing Object Stacking Order on
page 259).
2. Select the object to be clipped.
3. Select the clipping object.
4. Select Modify > Clip Surface.
The bottom object is clipped by the clipping object; the clipping object can be deleted if it is no longer needed.
In Top/Plan view, select the roof face Select Clip Surface, and then move
(gray object on bottom) and the the rectangle clipping object to
rectangle (white object on top) reveal the modified roof face
Object Criteria
Sweeps Cannot contain lines, or be swept around a locus which is between the left and
right bounds of the swept 2D primitive; if not swept around a locus, should have a
vertical segment on the left edge
Helical Sweep Must be swept around a locus outside the left and right bounds of the object
Multiple Extrude Must have planar polygons
Editing Object Surfaces | 333
Object Criteria
Meshes Cannot have interpenetrating polygons; every edge of every polygon in the mesh
must be shared with one other polygon
Walls Must not have symbols that extend above the top or below the bottom of the wall
2D objects must have a fill applied prior to being converted to 3D to be considered a solid object. If the converted
3D object did not have a fill applied prior to conversion, it can be added using the Enter Group command to
return to the original 2D object.
Adding Solids
The Add Solids command joins two or more 3D objects into a single model.
To add solids in 3D:
1. Select two or more 3D objects to combine.
2. Select Model > Add Solids.
A single solid model is created from the objects.
Intersecting Solids
The Intersect Solids command creates a single model from the volume created where two or more 3D objects
intersect.
To intersect solids:
1. Select the two or more 3D objects to combine.
2. Select Model > Intersect Solids.
A single solid model is created from the objects; it is the size and shape of the overlapping volume of the selected
objects.
Subtracting Solids
The Subtract Solids command cuts (subtracts) one or more 3D objects from another 3D object, creating a new model.
The subtracting object should extend beyond the surface of the original object.
To subtract solids:
1. Select both the object(s) to subtract and the object to subtract from (the base object).
334 | Chapter 8: Object Operations
If Retain Subtracting Objects is selected, a mass equal to the subtracting object is removed from the base object,
but the subtracting object remains in place and can be manipulated independently.
Sectioning Solids
The Section Solids command discards a portion of solids or NURBS surfaces, allowing the creation of planar or
stepped sections through a solid or surface. The sectioned surface can be marked by the sectioning surface color.
The sectioning surface must be larger than the base object.
To section a solid:
1. Select both the object to be sectioned (the base object), and the sectioning surface.
The operation will delete the portion of the base object on the same side as the sectioning surfaces normal; select
Show Normal in the Object Info palette to display the surface normals (see Displaying Surface Normals on
page 386). Click Reverse Normal in the Object Info palette if needed to achieve the desired results.
4. Click OK.
If Retain Sectioning Object is not selected, a solid section is created, with the sectioning surface deleted.
Obtaining Engineering Properties | 335
If Retain Sectioning Object is selected, a solid section is created, but the sectioning surface remains in place and
can be manipulated independently.
The solid section parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Parameter Description
Width/Depth/Height (display only) Displays the parameters of the solid section surface
Reverse Section Side Switches the remaining side of the solid being sectioned
Use Section Color Applies the color of the sectioning surface to the sectioned surface
Parameter Description
Units Update the displayed information to reflect the selected unit of measurement
Place locus at centroid Select to add a locus at the centroid of the selected object after closing the
Engineering Properties dialog box
Place properties on drawing Select to place a list of the properties at the next mouse click after closing the
Engineering Properties dialog box
Write properties to a file Select to send the properties to a text file; specify the file name and location after
closing the Engineering Properties dialog box
4. Click OK.
Parameter Description
Place locus at center of mass Places a 3D locus at the center of mass of the object
Place properties on drawing Places the volumetric properties as text on the drawing at a specified location
3. Click OK. If Place locus at center of mass was selected, the 3D locus is placed automatically on the object. If
Place properties on drawing was selected, click in the drawing file to specify the location of the text.
Drafting Aids
The Drafting Aids menu contains several commands that create new arcs, lines, or rectangles that are based on existing
objects, or simplify existing objects, to make drafting faster and easier.
Parameter Description
Method
Number of Segments Draws the specified number of equal segments along the arc
Segment Length Draws segments of the specified length along the arc
Options
Draw Polygon Draws the segments as polygons
Draw Lines Draws the segments as lines
Parameter Description
Place loci Places loci at the segment divisions
Break Line Into Segments Creates segments from the original line, converting it; deselect to place loci only
Leave Original Line Intact Retains the original line, and creates segments from a copy of the line
Number of Segments Specifies the number of segments to create
3. Click OK to draw either a new segmented line or convert the selected one.
Drafting Aids | 339
After you select the two lines, Click another point to The specified number of
the next click indicates the indicate the ending divisions are created; in this
starting edge for the dividing edge for the dividing case, two lines are added to
lines lines create three divisions
Even Divide
The Even Divide command divides lines, arcs, circles, and rectangles into the specified number of subdivisions. You
can choose whether or not to retain the original object.
To evenly divide lines, arcs, circles, and rectangles:
1. Select one or more objects to divide.
2. Select Modify > Drafting Aids > Even Divide.
The Even Divide dialog box opens.
340 | Chapter 8: Object Operations
Parameter Description
Number of Divisions
for Line, Circle and
Arc
Number of Specifies the number of even subdivisions to create from each selected line,
Divisions circle, or arc (must be greater than 1)
Number of Divisions
for Rectangle
Number of Specifies the number of even subdivisions to create along the width of each
Divisions in Width selected rectangle; enter 1 to create rectangles of the same width as the original
rectangle
Number of Specifies the number of even subdivisions to create along the height of each
Divisions in selected rectangle; enter 1 to create rectangles of the same height as the
Height original rectangle
Original Object
Retain Select to retain the original object from which the subdivisions are created;
deselect to delete the original object
Leave Selected If the original object is retained, select this option to leave both the original
object and the newly-created objects selected after the division operation.
Deselect this option to leave only the newly-created objects selected after the
operation.
3. Click OK to create new objects that are even subdivisions of the selected object(s).
In this example, four rectangles were created from the original rectangle; the width was divided into four
even sections, and the height remained in one section (one rectangle moved for clarity)
Drafting Aids | 341
Parameter Description
Simplify by
Maximum Deviation Select to remove the corner vertices within a specified maximum tolerable
deviation between the original and the simplified polygon(s)/polyline(s)
Deviation Specify the maximum deviation value.
A deviation value of zero removes all collinear vertices.
Minimum Distance Select to remove corner vertices located equal to or less than a specified
minimum distance from adjacent vertices
Distance Specify the minimum distance value.
A distance of zero removes all extra vertices existing at the same
location.
This 398-foot red polyline imported from a site model has 3,130 vertices
Inserting Text
Use the Text tool to create both single lines and blocks of text in your drawings. Once created, text objects can be
moved, duplicated, duplicated in an array, and rotated. The text bounding box can be resized to adjust a blocks height
or width. Text is placed relative to the specified alignment point, not the bounding box.
Mode Description
Horizontal Creates horizontal text lines and text blocks
Rotated Creates text blocks at an angle
Tight Fill If a fill is applied to the text object, the fill displays only behind the text on any given line;
blank lines have no fill
Text Style list Applies a stored set of attributes to text as it is created, including the font, size, spacing,
font style, alignment, and color
344 | Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation
1. Click the Text tool from the Basic palette, and select Horizontal from the Tool bar.
2. From the Tool bar, set the Tight Fill mode and Text Style as desired.
3. Click to designate the text insertion point; a text editing box with a blinking cursor displays.
4. Enter the text. Text wrapping is off by default, so the text box automatically expands as you type.
5. When the text line is complete, press the Esc key.
1. Click the Text tool from the Basic palette, and select Horizontal from the Tool bar.
2. From the Tool bar, set the Tight Fill mode and Text Style as desired.
3. Click and drag to create a text box of the approximate width needed.
A text editing box with a blinking cursor displays. The position of the text cursor indicates the horizontal
alignment of the text to be placed.
Inserting Text | 345
4. Enter the text. Text wrapping is on by default, so the text automatically wraps to the next line when it reaches the
edge of the text box. To end the current paragraph and start a new one in the current text block, press Enter.
5. When the text block is complete, press the Esc key.
1. Click the Text tool from the Basic palette, and select Rotated from the Tool bar.
2. From the Tool bar, set the Tight Fill mode and Text Style as desired.
3. Click and drag the mouse to specify the angle and width of the text box, and release the mouse button to set. If
needed, move the mouse to adjust the text box position along a line perpendicular to the text box. Click again to
set the position.
When drawing in rotated plan view (Vectorworks Design Series required), set angle snapping to snap to the plan
rotation angle (see Angle Snapping on page 138) and display the Rotated Plan cue. If the text is created to the
same angle as the plan, when the plan is unrotated, the text will align with the world coordinate system.
4. A text editing box with a blinking cursor displays.
To always create and edit rotated text in a horizontal text box, select Edit text horizontally by default on the Edit
tab of the Vectorworks preferences (see Edit Preferences on page 17).
5. Enter the text. The text automatically wraps to the next line when it reaches the edge of a text box. To end the
current paragraph and start a new one in the current text block, press Enter.
6. When the text block is complete, press the Esc key.
Click to make the box
horizontal temporarily
Release
2nd click
1st click
Click and drag; release the Move the mouse to adjust the box Enter the text
mouse button to set the box position along the red perpendicular
width and angle line; click again to set the position
1. Click the Text tool from the Basic palette, and select Tight Fill from the Tool bar.
2. From the Tool bar, select either the Horizontal or Rotated mode, and set the Text Style as desired.
3. From the Attributes palette, select the fill for the text object (unless the selected text style has a background fill).
4. Click and drag to create a text box of the approximate width needed.
346 | Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation
A text editing box with a blinking cursor displays. The position of the text cursor indicates the horizontal
alignment of the text to be placed.
5. Enter the text. The text automatically wraps to the next line when it reaches the edge of a text box. To end the
current paragraph and start a new one in the current text block, press Enter.
6. When the text block is complete, press the Esc key.
Pasting Text
To move text between Vectorworks files, select Edit > Copy, and then Edit > Paste. Text is added exactly as copied,
including any formatting. If you define a text block before pasting, the text pasted into the block is wrapped to fit
within the text block. If the scale of the original layer and the new layer are different, the text size changes accordingly;
for example, if you copy 16 point text from a 1:1 layer and paste it to a 4:1 layer, the text changes to 4 points. This also
means that any styled text you paste to a different layer scale becomes un-styled; reapply the text style to restore the
proper text size.
When you paste text from a different program, click on the drawing using the Text tool first. If you paste text without
first establishing an insertion point, each line of text is brought in as an individual text block. Embedded graphics are
not supported and are removed when the text block is pasted into the Vectorworks file. In addition, multi-aligned text is
converted to the current default alignment.
Modifying Text | 347
Modifying Text
Once a text object is created, you may need to make changes, such as add words, change the font color, or change the
margins. Changes can be applied to a portion of the text or to the whole object. A text object can even be converted into
polylines and extruded, or converted to a 3D path object. Depending on what changes are required, either select the text
object with the Selection tool or activate the text editing mode.
The standard keyboard shortcuts for Macintosh and Windows apply in the text editing box. For example, use
Command+B (Macintosh) or Ctrl+B (Windows) to apply bold formatting.
Text that is rotated or skewed can be edited in place. A rotation button is provided on the right side of the text editing
box to display the text box horizontally for easier editing, or to access the ruler if it is not displayed. When the edits are
complete, press the Esc key; the text box returns to the original position.
On Macintosh, if Quartz imaging is disabled, text cannot be edited in a rotated position. The text box
automatically switches to a horizontal position in editing mode.
The text object can also be resized and rotated similar to other 2D objects, using the reshape handles.
Drag the middle handle left
to widen the text box;
the height adjusts
automatically
Formatting Text
The Format Text command modifies multiple text attributes from a single dialog box. Individual attributes also can be
changed with various commands on the Text menu, including font, size, font style, alignment, spacing, and
capitalization (lower case, UPPER CASE, and Title Caps). All attributes are available on the Object Info palette, as
well. Some objects have the ability to select the font formatting while setting the object attributes.
Formatting can be applied to an entire text block or to selected characters and words. If no text is selected, the settings
become the defaults for the Text tool.
To format text:
1. To select the text to change, do one of the following:
To format the entire text box, select the text object with the Selection tool.
To format a word, double-click the text object to activate the editing mode; then double-click anywhere within
the word to highlight it.
To format a line, double-click the text object to activate the editing mode; then triple-click anywhere within the
line to highlight it.
To format a section of the text, double-click the text object to activate the editing mode; then highlight the
desired text by dragging over it.
To exit the text editing mode when text is highlighted, press the Esc key.
2. Once the text is selected, do one of the following:
From the Text menu, select the text option to change.
Select the option to change from the Object Info palette.
Select Text > Format Text. Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the text, and select
Format Text from the context menu. The Format Text dialog box opens.
Modifying Text | 349
Parameter Description
Style Displays the style of the currently selected item(s). If multiple items with different styles are selected,
<Un-Styled> is selected.
Select a style from the list; the remaining parameters change to match the settings for that style. If you
change any of the other parameters after selecting a style, the style reverts to <Un-Styled>.
Save Opens the Assign Name dialog box to save the current settings as a new style. Enter a name for the
style and click OK.
The new style is automatically assigned the current solid pen and fill color that are set as the
default for new objects in the Attributes palette.
Font Displays the font of the currently selected item(s) and lists all available, installed fonts. This field is
blank when multiple items with different fonts are selected.
Select a font from the list, or type the first letter(s) of the desired font to highlight the closest match in
the list.
Size Displays the size and unit measurement (points, millimeters, or inches) of the currently selected
item(s). This field is blank when multiple items with different size/unit measurement are selected.
Select a standard text size, or enter your own.
Spacing Displays the line spacing of the currently selected item(s). If multiple items with different spacing are
selected, Other is selected.
Select one of the standard spacing options, or select Other and specify a size and unit measurement
(points, millimeters, or inches) of your own.
350 | Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation
Parameter Description
Font Style Displays the font style of the currently selected item(s). If multiple items are selected and they have
different settings for a particular style, the selection box displays an indeterminate state:
(Windows) or (Macintosh).
Specify the desired options. Outline and Shadow options are available for Macintosh only.
Superscript and Subscript are disabled when the entire text block is selected.
Alignment Displays the alignment of the currently selected item(s). If multiple items with different alignments are
selected, the Alignment fields are blank.
Specify the horizontal and vertical alignment.
Preview Previews text font, size, and style
Use one of various methods to rotate a text box. Select the text box and then use the Rotate command, Rotate
tool, or Selection tool. See Rotating Objects on page 271 for details.
2. Select the desired unit of measure, enter the font Size, and then click OK.
Parameter Description
Text Size Specifies text size options
Preserve Height Maintains the aspect ratio of the text, keeping width and height parameters the same as they
and Width were in the original text
Scale Width Only Changes the width of the text to fit the path, but does not change the height accordingly
(resulting in wider, shorter text, depending on the path)
Scale Height and Changes the width of the text to fit the path, and then changes the text height to match
Width (resulting in wider, tall text, depending on the path)
Create Text As Specifies the format for converting the text
Curves Converts the text into a group of polylines (if the path is drawn on the active layer plane) or
NURBS curves (if the path has a Z height or a Rot about Path greater than 0)
Surfaces Converts the text into a group of NURBS surfaces
Extrusions Converts the text into a group of extrude objects; specify the Height of the extruded letters
3. Click OK. The selected text follows the path object, and the original path object is deleted.
The Text Along Path parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette. The parameters are identical to those in
the Text Along Path dialog box, with two additional parameters.
Parameter Description
Above Path Places the bounding box of the letters directly above the path; above depends on the direction
that the path was drawn. Deselect this option to place the letters below the path. Depending on
the path and letters, the appearance of the text may be improved by switching it above or below
the path.
Rot about Path Indicates the angle of rotation about the path, using the path as a rotation axis
To edit the path object, select Modify > Edit Text Along Path, and then select Path. The path object can be edited
with the Reshape tool. To reverse the direction of the path object, click Reverse Direction; this affects the text
placement above or below the path.
Using Text Styles | 353
Parameter Description
Style Name Enter a name for this text style.
Font Select a font from the list; type the first letter(s) of the desired font to automatically scroll and
highlight the closest match in the list
Size Enter a size and select a unit measurement (points, millimeters, or inches)
Spacing Select one of the standard spacing options, or select Other and specify a size and unit measurement
(points, millimeters, or inches) of your own
Font Style Specify the desired options. Outline and Shadow options are available for Macintosh only
Alignment Specify the horizontal and vertical alignment
Color Select a color for the Text from the color menus (see Selecting a Color from a Color Palette on
page 543).
To have a background fill behind the text, select the Background option and also specify a color.
To have no background fill, deselect the Background option.
Preview Previews text font, size, style, text color, and background color, if applicable
If you change any of the attributes of styled text (for example, if you change the size from 16 points to 18 points), the
text style automatically becomes <Un-Styled>. Text also becomes un-styled if you apply the <Un-Styled> option to it,
but the text attributes remain the same.
If you move styled text to a layer that has a different scale from the original layer, the text will be scaled accordingly,
and it automatically becomes <Un-Styled>; reapply the text style to restore the proper text size.
The alignment, spacing, and background color attributes of a text style are only applied if an entire text object is
selected; these attributes are ignored if you apply a style to a portion of a text object.
If a text object contains text with multiple styles, the text object itself does not display a text style in the Object Info
palette. The styled portions of text within the object are still updated if the referenced text style resource is changed.
Checking Spelling | 355
Checking Spelling
Check the spelling of either selected text or all the text in a file with the Check Spelling command. Spelling in text
blocks, symbols, records, worksheets, and viewports can be checked. Available dictionaries include:
Dictionaries can be edited and added. See Adding and Editing Dictionaries on page 357.
Parameter Description
Text Blocks Checks text contained in text blocks
Symbols Checks text contained in symbol definitions
Records Checks text contained in records
Worksheets Checks text contained in worksheets
Viewports Checks text annotations contained in viewports
3. Select the items to have spelling checked, and then click OK. If a spelling error is detected, the Document
Spelling Check dialog box opens so that corrections can be made.
If no spelling errors are detected, a message displays to indicate that the spelling check is complete.
Parameter Description
Spelling error in Identifies the location of the object containing the potential spelling error
Not in Dictionary Lists the potentially misspelled word; if none of the suggested corrections in the
Suggestions list is an acceptable replacement, type the correction into the Not in
Dictionary field (or delete the word by leaving the field blank). Then click Change or
Change All to replace the error with the typed word. The word is replaced and the spelling
check resumes.
Suggestions Suggests the closest matching word(s) from the dictionary
Checking Spelling | 357
Parameter Description
Change / Change All Select one of the suggested words from the list of Suggestions to replace the misspelled
word and click Change. The misspelled word is replaced with the suggested word.
Alternatively, press Enter with the suggestion selected. To replace all occurrences of the
same error in the file, click Change All. The word is replaced and the spelling check
resumes.
Ignore / Ignore All If the word is spelled correctly, but it is not present in the dictionary, click Ignore to leave
the word as is and continue the spelling check. Click Ignore All to ignore all occurrences of
the word in the file. The word is ignored and the spelling check resumes.
Learn Click to add the word to the dictionary; this allows the spelling checker to recognize all
future occurrences of the word
Options Click to customize the spelling check options; see Spelling Check Options on page 357
Done Click to discontinue the spelling check; all changes up to that point are saved, but can be
undone by selecting Edit > Undo
The spelling of layers, classes, symbol names, object names, script palette names, dimension text, locked objects,
or records attached to locked objects is not checked.
Specify the types of misspelled words for the spelling checker to find. If a check box is not selected, the spelling
checker ignores errors for that category of words. Examples include:
Customize the spelling checker to reduce unnecessary spelling checks in your typical files. Click OK to return to the
Selection Spelling Check or Document Spelling Check dialog box.
Parameter Description
Action Locates and, if selected, replaces a given text string with a new text string
Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the text string
Replace Next Replaces the next occurrence of the text string
Replace All Replaces all selected occurrences of the text string
Selected
Replace All Replaces all occurrences of the text string
Look in Searches for occurrences in the specified parts of the document
Text Objects Searches in all text objects
Record Fields Searches in all record fields, including Callout objects
Worksheets Searches in all worksheets; appears dimmed if Replace All Selected is chosen, since there
is no selection attribute for a worksheet
Find String Enter text string to search for
Replace With Enter replacement text string; dimmed if Find Next is selected
Options Specifies the depth of the search
Active Layer Only Searches in the active layer only
All Layers Searches on all layers within the document, regardless of visibility
Visible Layers Searches in all currently visible layers
Only
Case-sensitive Searches for text that exactly matches the criteria, including capitalization
Creating Hyperlinks | 359
Creating Hyperlinks
The Hyperlink tool inserts a hyperlink object in the drawing, for navigating to saved views or sheet layers in the file,
opening other files or folders, or launching applications or web sites. The hyperlink can consist of text and/or geometry,
and can be created from a custom symbol; symbols can be page based or world based. Hyperlink properties are easy to
customize and they can be batch edited from a worksheet. Hyperlinks to websites and sheet layers can be exported to a
PDF file (Vectorworks Design Series required); hyperlinks to sheet layers are functional when the sheet layers are
exported as a batch to a single PDF file.
Inserting a Hyperlink
To insert a hyperlink object:
Parameter Description
Layout Select the desired appearance of the hyperlink
Symbol Select a symbol from the hyperlink symbols available in the file and the default content
symbols provided. (Default content is automatically imported into the current file at the
point of use and displays in the Resource Browser; see Libraries on page 155.)
Symbols can be page based or world based; default hyperlink symbols are page based.
#Hyperlinktext# indicates the area of the symbol that displays the Label text.
360 | Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation
Parameter Description
Edit Symbol The selected symbol can be edited for use in this file. Clicking Edit Symbol exits the
Hyperlink Settings dialog box, and the Edit window displays for editing the symbols
2D component (a colored border around the drawing window indicates the editing mode
is active). Reshape the geometry, change attributes, add text, paste images, and perform
other editing operations, and then click Exit Symbol to return to the drawing.
The hyperlink symbols in the drawing can also be edited from the Resource Browser;
see Editing Symbol Definitions on page 181.
Edited symbols are available for selection from the Symbol list.
New Symbol Opens the New Symbol dialog box; provide a name for the new hyperlink symbol and
click OK to return to the Hyperlink Settings dialog box. A new text-only hyperlink
symbol is automatically created and added to the resources in the file. This new custom
hyperlink symbol can then be selected from the Symbol list and edited by clicking Edit
Symbol.
Details
Label Enter the text to display for the hyperlink
Function Select the hyperlink function
Open Webpage Launches the specified website in the default browser; enter the URL in Webpage
Launch Application Launches the specified application; click Browse to select the application. Choose
whether the path to the application should be saved as absolute or relative. To set a
relative path, the Vectorworks file must exist on the same volume as the application.
Open Document Opens a file, such as a movie or image; click Browse to select the file. Choose whether
the path to the file should be saved as absolute or relative. To set a relative path, the
Vectorworks file must exist on the same volume as the file to open.
Open Folder Opens the specified folder; click Browse to select the folder. Choose whether the path
to the folder should be saved as absolute or relative. To set a relative path, the
Vectorworks file must exist on the same volume as the folder to open.
Activate Saved View Displays the specified saved view; select the view from the Saved View list
Activate Sheet Layer Activates the specified sheet layer; select the sheet layer from the Sheet Layer list
3. Select the hyperlink symbol and function, and then click OK.
On the Tool bar, the current hyperlink function and target displays.
4. Click in the drawing to insert the hyperlink object.
5. To execute the hyperlink, Ctrl-click (Windows) or Cmd-click (Macintosh) on the hyperlink, or click Open Link
from the Object Info palette or context menu of a selected hyperlink object.
Editing Hyperlinks
The Object Info palette of a selected hyperlink object displays its currently assigned Function and Target. Click Open
Link to execute the hyperlinks function. Click Edit to open the Hyperlink Settings dialog box and specify the
hyperlink properties as described in Inserting a Hyperlink on page 359. Other methods of accessing the Hyperlink
Settings dialog box include double-clicking on the hyperlink or pressing Ctrl-click (Macintosh) or right-click
(Windows) and selecting Edit from the context menu.
If a link is invalid or broken, the Object Info palette displays a message in red text, and an alert displays when the
hyperlink is executed. Edit the hyperlink settings to specify a valid target.
Inserting Callouts | 361
The hyperlink symbol definition can be edited from the Resource Browser (see Editing Symbol Definitions on
page 181); this affects all instances of the symbol.
It can be tedious to edit multiple hyperlinks in large projects. In this type of situation, use scripted commands or create
a report containing the hyperlink objects by selecting Tools > Reports> Create Report. See Creating Reports on
page 811. In the resulting worksheet, columns labeled Editable can be changed, for convenient editing.
Inserting Callouts
The Callout tool places callout objects on a drawing. A callout object is a block of text attached to a leader line with an
optional bubble surrounding the text. Use callout objects to annotate items in a file.
In the Vectorworks Design Series products, the Callout tool includes extended capabilities which allow it to be
used for keynotes, and in conjunction with an external notes database (see Notes Management on page 641 in
the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide).
Towards Text Three Point
Towards Target
Mode Description
Towards Target Click first where the callout text is to be placed, and then near the object to be
annotated
Towards Text Click first near the object to be annotated, and then where the callout text is to be
placed
Two Point Two clicks are required to place the callout object; in Two Point mode, the length
of the shoulder is determined in the callout preferences or Object Info palette
Three Point Three clicks are required to place the callout object; in Three Point mode, the
third click determines the length of the shoulder
Preferences Opens the Callout Preferences dialog box
362 | Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation
Parameter Description
Text Options
Rotate Text When selected, rotates the callout text to the specified Text Angle
Text Angle Specifies the angle of text rotation; certain angles may not be available, depending on
the texts Horizontal Position settings
Max. Text Width Indicates the maximum text width before text wraps; if the text string is shorter than
maximum width, the bubble sizes to fit the text. Rotated text cannot restrict the
maximum text width.
Vertical Position Sets the vertical position of the text relative to the shoulder; select Auto to align the
top text line to the shoulder if the leader is on the left, or to align the bottom text line
to the shoulder if the leader is on the right
Horizontal Position Sets the horizontal position of the text relative to the shoulder; select Auto to position
the text to the right if the leader is on the left, or to the left if the leader is on the right
Always Left-Justify Text Forces the text to be left-justified, even when the text is to the left of the leader
Format Text Opens the Format Text dialog box, to set text attributes or select a text style
Inserting Callouts | 363
Parameter Description
Bubble Options
Bubble Style Select the type of bubble to draw around the text
RR Corner Radius For Round Rect bubble styles, sets the corner radius
Text Margin Sets the distance between the bubble and the text
Bubble Shadow Select to draw the bubble with a drop shadow (does not apply to None, Bracket, or
ISO styles)
Leader Options
Shoulder Length Sets the length of the line between the text and the start of the leader; can be changed
by moving a control point or in the Object Info palette. In Three Point mode, this
length is set by the third mouse click.
Leader Type Select Line, Arc, Bzier, or None; curved leader lines contain additional control
points for controlling the curve shape
Leader Radius For arc leader types, specifies the arc radius
Use Marker Select a marker style from the marker style list, or select Custom to create a custom
marker. Select Edit Marker List to open the Edit Marker List dialog box; see
Editing the Marker List on page 511.
Other Options
Apply Settings to New Select whether these callout preferences should apply to new callouts in this file only
Callouts in or globally, to all future files
Leader shoulder
example
Leader
endpoint
5. Click again to determine either the leader endpoint or leader shoulder, depending on the mode.
364 | Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation
6. If in Three Point mode, click a third time to define the shoulder length.
The Notes Manager: Callout dialog box opens. Enter the callout object text; text wraps if longer than the specified
maximum text width. Press Enter to add a carriage return.
New dishwasher
4. Click OK.
5. Set the text attributes as needed using the Text > Format Text command. You can also drag and drop a text style
from the Resource Browser onto the callout object.
Parameter Description
Constrained Constrains the line to be vertical, horizontal, and 30 or 45 from vertical or horizontal in
any direction
Unconstrained Draws the line at any angle
Press and hold the Shift key to snap the line to predetermined angles
1. Click the Leader Line Simple object from the Basic tool set and select the Constrained or Unconstrained mode
from the Tool bar.
2. Click and move the mouse to define the leader line shoulder length. Click and move the mouse to define the leader
line, and click to set the end point.
366 | Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation
Once the leader line has been placed, its marker can be selected from the Attributes palette (see Marker Attributes on
page 510).
Parameter Description
Sheet Size Select a standard size and format for the sheet border, or select Fit to Page to set the sheet
border to the page dimensions (see Page Setup on page 82). Select Custom to use custom
sheet border dimensions, and specify the Width and Height dimensions.
Title Block Opens the Import Title Block dialog box, for selecting a title block symbol to insert (see
Adding a Title Block on page 370), or select None for no title block
Lock to Page Center Locks the sheet border center position to the page center; deselect to position the sheet
border manually. If the plan has been rotated (Vectorworks Design Series required), select
Lock to Page Center to position the sheet border correctly when in a non-rotated view.
Use As Title Block When a title block has been selected, displays only the title block and hides all other sheet
Only border elements
Adding a Sheet Border | 367
4. Click once in the drawing to set the sheet border insertion point, and then click again to set the sheet border
orientation.
5. The sheet border is placed on the drawing. Sheet borders should be placed as 2D screen objects (See Planar
Modes of 2D Objects: Screen Plane and Layer Plane on page 201).
6. Set the text attributes as needed using the Text > Format Text command. You can also drag and drop a text style
from the Resource Browser onto the sheet border object.
7. Set the line attributes as needed using the Attributes palette.
8. The sheet border can be re-sized and re-scaled after placement, and title blocks and revision histories can be
added.
Parameter Description
Plane Generally, for sheet borders, select Screen to place the border on the screen plane. See
Planar Modes of 2D Objects: Screen Plane and Layer Plane on page 201.
Lock to Page Center Locks the sheet border center position to the page center; deselect to position the sheet
border manually. If the plan has been rotated (Vectorworks Design Series required),
select Lock to Page Center to position the sheet border correctly when in a non-rotated
view.
Size Select a standard size and format for the sheet border, or select Fit to Page to set the sheet
border to the page dimensions. Select Custom to use custom sheet border dimensions,
and click Border Settings to specify the dimensions.
Orientation Select Portrait or Landscape orientation
Horizontal Dimension Displays the sheet border horizontal dimensions
Vertical Dimension Displays the sheet border vertical dimensions
Border Settings Opens the Sheet Border Settings dialog box, for specifying further properties (see
Specifying Additional Sheet Border Settings on page 369)
368 | Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation
Parameter Description
Title Block Opens the Import Title Block dialog box, to select a title block symbol to insert (see
Adding a Title Block on page 370). This dialog box can also be accessed from the
sheet border context menu; right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the sheet
border, and select Title Block.
To remove a title block, select the Defaults symbol folder, and then select None from the
Symbols list.
Current Title Block When a title block has been inserted, displays the title block symbol name
Use As Title Block When a title block has been selected, displays only the title block and hides all other
Only sheet border elements
Title Block Position Specifies the title block location relative to the sheet border
Title Blk Scale Factor If the title block is too large or small at normal scale (scale factor 1), scales the title block
size, including text. A value below 1 makes the title block smaller, while a value above 1
makes the title block larger; text is automatically scaled along with the title block
geometry.
Title Blk Margin Adds a horizontal, vertical, or block margin to the title block
Use Revision Block Adds a revision history block to the sheet border
(Vectorworks Design
Series required)
Show Revision Zone Adds a revision zone column to the revision block, for specifying the location of the
(Vectorworks Design revision
Series required)
Use Tolerance Block For ASME title blocks, adds a tolerance block area to the title block
(Vectorworks Design
Series required)
Use Projection Block For ASME title blocks, adds a projection block area to the title block; specify First Angle
(Vectorworks Design or Third Angle in Projection
Series required)
Show Grids Displays grid text and lines in the sheet border margin. This setting can also be accessed
from the sheet border context menu: right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on
the sheet border, and select Show Grids.
Show Grid Lines Displays grid lines on the drawing
Fold Marks Select the fold mark measurements when adding fold marks to the sheet border. The first
measurement specifies the drawing fold width and the second measurement indicates the
margin fold width. Select Custom to specify custom fold mark distances.
Fold marks are designed for use with ISO drawings.
Margin Width When custom fold marks are selected, enter the margin fold width
Folded Width When custom fold marks are selected, enter the drawing fold width
Folded Height When custom fold marks are selected, enter the drawing fold height
Hide Border When the sheet border includes a title block, hides the sheet border and displays only the
title block (this allows a different sheet border to be used with that title block, if desired)
Fill Border Fills the area between the outer and inner border lines with a fill selected from the
Attributes palette
Adding a Sheet Border | 369
Parameter Description
Add Parts List Adds a parts list to an ASME title block, when a parts list worksheet has been created
(Vectorworks Design
Series required)
Edit Title Block Opens the Edit Title Block dialog box, for specifying the title block information.
Depending on the selected title block, different fields and tabs are available.
In Vectorworks Design Series products, ASME title blocks include a tolerance tab, for
editing the tolerance block information (see Editing a Tolerance Block on page 564 in
the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide). US Arch title blocks include Project and
Sheet tabs; information is entered from the Issue Manager but can be edited manually
(see The Issue Manager on page 664 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide).
Edit Revision Data Opens the Edit Revision Data dialog box, for specifying revision information and format
(Vectorworks Design (see Editing Revision Block Data on page 563 in the Vectorworks Design Series
Series required) Users Guide)
Edit Issue Data Opens the Edit Issue Data dialog box, for specifying issue data on US Arch title blocks
(Vectorworks Design (see Editing Issue Data on page 565 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide)
Series required)
Parameter Description
Drawing Size Specifies the sheet border size
Vertical/Horizontal Specifies the sheet border vertical/horizontal dimensions; initially, these are based on the
Dimension Size selected in the Object Info palette, but the dimensions can be edited. This parameter
is not available when the Size is Fit to Page.
Dimensions Shown Applies the dimensions to either the outer or inner border dimensions
Are
Margins Specifies the sheet border margin widths
Zones/Grids
Vertical Zones Specifies the number of vertical zones to include
Grid Text Order Indicates whether vertical grid text starts at the top or bottom of the border
Horizontal Zones Specifies the number of horizontal zones to include
Grid Number Order Indicates whether horizontal grid numbers start at the left or right of the border
Grid Label Size Specifies the text size for both grid text and numbers
Reset to Default Values If the sheet border Size is set to one of the standard sizes (such as US Arch B or ISO AS),
select this button to restore the default sheet border settings
Parameter Description
Symbol Folders Specifies the location of the sheet border symbols
Symbols Provides a graphical list of available sheet border symbols
3. Select a title block symbol from the selected symbol folder. The Defaults folder contains the default title block
resources; see Libraries on page 155. The title blocks listed under Top Level are title block symbols that exist in
the current file.
To remove an existing title block, select None.
4. Click OK to add the selected title block symbol to the sheet border. The title block is scaled to match the current
layer scale if necessary.
When a sheet border with a title block is inserted into a drawing, the Sheet Border Components symbol folder is
automatically created and displays in the Resource Browser. Title block symbols added to the sheet border are
automatically placed in that folder.
Description Method
The attributes of the title block elements are Specify By Class in the Attributes palette for these elements. For
inherited from the sheet border text font and style attributes, set the Pen Style by class to use the
same font and style as the sheet border. For text color, set the Pen
Color to Color By Class.
The title block elements retain the attributes Set the attributes of the geometry and text from the Attributes palette
as created when the title block is created. For text font and style attributes, set
the Pen Style to Solid to use the text attributes set when the title
block was created. For text color, select the desired Pen Color.
Different settings can be combined so that some attributes are inherited from the sheet border, while others remain
as created. For example, if a line should use the same color as the sheet border, but have a dashed line type with a
thickness of 1 mm, when creating the line, set the lines Pen Color to Color By Class, its Line Thickness to 1
mm, and its Pen Style to the desired dashed line type.
2. Select all the title block elements, and then select Modify > Create Symbol.
The insertion point of the symbol should be at lower right corner of the title block. See Creating New Symbols
on page 172.
3. Create a new record format as described in Creating Record Formats on page 188.
The field names of the record format are used as the titles for the associated editable fields in the Edit Title Block
dialog box.
To create a multi-line field, append a pound sign (#) to the field name, as in Drawing Title#.
Adding a Sheet Border | 373
Use a P_ prefix to indicate project fields (fields with the same value on all title blocks in the file). An S_ prefix
indicates sheet fields (fields with a different value on any title blocks). The prefixes cause the Edit Title Block
dialog box, accessed from the Object Info palette, to be separated into project and sheet tabs. Fields without a
prefix are placed on the General tab.
Use an _SN suffix to indicate that a field should gets its value from the Sheet Number of its sheet layer. If Use
Automatic Drawing Coordination is enabled in document preferences (Vectorworks Design Series required),
the _SN suffix also means that when this title block field is updated, the Sheet Number of the sheet layer and of
annotation objects on the layer are updated.
Use an _SD suffix to indicate that the field should get its value from the Sheet Title of its sheet layer. If Use
Automatic Drawing Coordination is enabled in document preferences (Vectorworks Design Series required),
the _SD suffix also means that when this title block field is updated, the Sheet Title of the sheet layer is updated.
If the field should also be multi-line, use an _SD# suffix.
To work with the Issue Manager (Vectorworks Design Series required), special considerations apply when the title
block fields are formatted. See Creating a Custom Title Block in Vectorworks Design Series on page 972 in the
Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
4. Attach the custom record format to the title block symbol through the Resource Browser as described in
Attaching Record Formats to a Single Symbol Instance or Object on page 190.
5. Edit the title block symbol and attach the record fields to the associated symbol text; see Linking Text to Record
Formats on page 195 for more information.
6. To be available to the Sheet Border tool, either the file must be saved in the sheet border- title block folder in the
[Vectorworks]\Libraries\Defaults folder, or the custom symbol and its associated record format must be imported
into the Custom Title Blocks.vwx file, located in the same default content folder.
Alternatively, import the title block symbol from another file.
7. To place the custom title block, click Title Block from the Object Info palette of a selected sheet border, and select
the custom title block symbol.
374 | Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation
Oval Preferences
Regular Convex
Polygon Shape
1. Click the Revision Cloud tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click the Preferences button on the Tool bar to define the revision cloud properties. The properties can also be set
after placement, from the Object Info palette. Click OK.
3. Select the revision cloud mode and select to draw the cloud with either a convex or concave shape. The convex
shape draws billows outward from the preview image or from the specified vertices. The concave shape draws
billows inward from the preview image or from the specified vertices.
Mode Description
Oval Inserts the revision cloud around the perimeter of a preview oval. Click to set the start point,
move the cursor in the desired direction, and click to set the end point. Constrain the oval to 45
degrees to draw a circle.
1st click
2nd click
Convex Shape Concave Shape
Using Notation Objects | 375
Mode Description
Rectangular Inserts the revision cloud around the perimeter of the preview rectangle. Click to set the start
point, move the cursor in the desired direction, and click to set the end point. Constrain the
rectangle to 45 degrees to draw a square.
1st click
2nd click
Convex Shape Concave Shape
Regular Polygon Inserts the revision cloud around the perimeter of the specified vertices. Click to set the start
point (first vertex), click at the desired location for each subsequent vertex, and either click at
the starting vertex to close the polygon or double-click at the final vertex to create an open
polygon. If the polygon is open, the cloud is completed based on the outline.
2nd click
Start and
end click
3rd click
Convex Shape Concave Shape
Freehand Inserts the revision cloud around the perimeter of the specified vertices. Click to set the start
Polygon point and click-drag to draw the freehand polygon. If the polygon is open, the cloud is
completed based on the outline.
Start and
end click
Parameter Description
Billow Size Select the relative billow size from extra small to extra large, or select Custom to specify a
billow size
Billow Radius For a custom billow size, sets the billow size
Billow Variability Select the variability (the variation between the smallest and largest billows)
Billow Height Select the relative billow height (small, medium, or large)
Billow Type Select a convex or concave billow type
Vertex Parameters Edits the revision cloud vertices; see Editing Vertex-Based Objects on page 252
The following illustration demonstrates the effects of varying the billow size and billow variability parameters.
376 | Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation
None
Billow Variability
Low
Medium
High
Billow Size
Parameter Description
Rotation Specifies the number of degrees to rotate the label (0.00 is horizontal)
Drawing Title Specifies the title text that displays above the labels horizontal ruling line; defaults to
the file name (on a design layer), to nothing (on a sheet layer), or to the Drawing Title
(in a viewport), but it can be edited.
If Use Automatic Drawing Coordination is enabled in document preferences
(Vectorworks Design Series required), and the label is in a viewport, changing this field
will update the viewports drawing title, and vice versa.
Using Notation Objects | 377
Parameter Description
Drawing Number Identifies this drawing on the current sheet. This value displays in the top half of the
label bubble, unless Number Style is set to None. If the label is in a viewport or sheet
layer, the program automatically numbers items and updates this field; this number must
be unique on this layer. If the label is on a design layer, enter an identifier manually.
Sheet Number Identifies the sheet that contains the drawing. This value displays in the bottom half of
the label bubble, if Number Style is set to Drawing and Sheet. If the label is on a sheet
layer, this field defaults to the Sheet Number.
If Use Automatic Drawing Coordination is enabled in document preferences
(Vectorworks Design Series required), and the label is on a sheet layer, this field cannot
be edited and always contains the Sheet Number.
Number Style Specifies which drawing identifier numbers (from the Drawing Number and Sheet
Number fields) display in the label
Scale Display Style Specifies which scale information displays beneath the labels horizontal ruling line
Custom Scale If Scale Display Style is set to Custom, enter information to display in the scale area
Use Architectural Scale Select this option to use the US Architect scale style (as in 1/4 = 1- 0); deselect the
option to use the Engineering style (as in 1:48)
Bubble Style Select the style of the label bubble graphic, which can contain the Drawing Number and
Sheet Number that identify the drawing
Circle Rectangle
Draw Full-width Bubble Select this option to extend the bubble graphic to the full length of the ruling line; not
available if Bubble Style is set to None
Title / Scale / Drawing# Select the font sizes for the various elements of the drawing label
/ Sheet# Text Size
378 | Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation
Parameter Description
Bubble Scale Factor Specifies the labels bubble size; enter a larger value to increase the size (the number
must be greater than zero)
Line Length Mode Sets the length of the drawing labels horizontal ruling line. A fixed length ruling line is
set by the Printed Length value. An auto-fit ruling line is set to the length of the longest
text bounding box, either above or below the ruling line. A control point ruling line is set
by the location of its control point; click the control point to select it and click in the
desired location in the drawing to adjust the ruling line length or to flip the ruling line to
the opposite side.
Control Point
Auto-Fit
Printed Length For a drawing label using a fixed length ruling line, sets the length of the drawing label
on the printed page
Flip Select this option to move the bubble (including the Drawing Number and Sheet
Number) to the right side of the label:
Rule Offset Specifies the vertical offset between the labels bubble and horizontal ruling line on the
printed page (0 is centered); enter a negative number to move the line, title, and scale
below the center line of the bubble
Title Margin Specifies the vertical distance between the labels horizontal ruling line and the text
above it. Enter a positive value to move the text further above the ruling line, or a
negative value to move the text closer to the ruling line.
Scale Margin Specifies the vertical distance between the label line and the text below it. Enter a
positive value to move the text further above the ruling line, or a negative value to move
the text closer to the ruling line.
5. Set the text attributes as needed using the Text > Format Text command. You can also drag and drop a text style
from the Resource Browser onto the drawing label object.
6. Set the line attributes as needed using the Attributes palette.
3. Click on the drawing at the desired location to place a reference marker object.
4. Click again to set the rotation.
If this is the first time the object is inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. These
parameters apply to subsequent placements of the object and can be changed in the Object Info palette. Click OK.
Reference marker objects maintain a constant size regardless of the drawing scale.
Parameter Description
Rotation Specifies the number of degrees to rotate the marker (0.00 is horizontal)
2D Scale Factor Specifies the marker size; increase the scale value to obtain a larger marker
Type/Config Select one of the types and configurations from the list
Elevation
Detail
Section
Drawing Number Specifies the drawing number of the item the marker references
Sheet Number Specifies the sheet number of the item the marker references
Separator For Config 1 configurations, specifies the separator between the Drawing Number and
Sheet Number information
Arrow Angle For some configurations, specifies the angle of the marker arrow
Arrow Fill Select a filled or unfilled arrow style from the list
5. Set the text attributes as needed using the Text > Format Text command. You can also drag and drop a text style
from the Resource Browser onto the reference marker object.
6. Set the line attributes as needed using the Attributes palette.
1. Click the Data Stamp tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the drawing at the desired location to place a data stamp.
380 | Chapter 9: Adding Text and Annotation
If this is the first time the object is inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. Specify the
preferences to use for this tool during this session, and then click OK.
3. Click again to set the rotation.
The data stamp parameters can be edited from the Object Info palette.
Parameter Description
Show Date Select to display the current date
Show Time Select to display the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds
Show File Name Select to display the drawings file name
Draw Box Select to display a border around the data stamp
Use Labels Select to display date, time, and file name labels placed before the data
Date Display Style Select the format for the date display. Options include:
Short - 1/1/13
Medium - Jan 1, 2013
Long - January 1, 2013
Medium w/ Weekday - Mon, Jan 1, 2013
Long w/ Weekday - Monday, January 1, 2013
Text Size Select a font size for the data; the font itself can be changed from the Text menu
Text Style Select a text style for the data
Label Style Select a text style for the labels
Margin Spacing Specify the space between the text and the surrounding border
Label Size Factor Specify the label size relative to the data size
Update Click Update to manually update the data stamp date, time, or file name prior to printing
it or exporting it, so that it reflects the most current data
The date and time formats are determined by each Vectorworks application users local computer settings.
Advanced 3D Modeling 10
The 3D Power Pack technology is fully integrated with the Vectorworks program to provide comprehensive NURBS
(Non-Uniform Rational B-splines) functionality.
The 3D Power Pack provides the following features and benefits:
Advanced solid modeling operations
Advanced surface modeling operations
Solid-surface interactions
Participation of surfaces in Boolean operations
Easy manipulation of surface geometry
Simple 3D user interface
The 3D Power Pack commands are on the Model menu. Additionally, there are several tools in the 3D Modeling tool
set that provide advanced capabilities, such as the Push/Pull, Taper Face, Chamfer Edge, and Fillet Edge tools.
NURBS curve
Degree = 3
Vertices = 6
Weight of each vertex = 1
Increasing the relative weight of one of the vertices means the vertex has more of an influence on the curve and pulls
the curve towards that vertex.
NURBS curve
Degree = 3
Vertices = 6
Weight of selected vertex = 8
Weight of remaining vertices = 1
The Reshape tool can be used to move a vertex or several vertices, changing the shape of the curve (see Reshaping
NURBS Curves on page 303).
382 | Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling
Increasing the degree of a NURBS curve proportionally increases the number of vertices, allowing for more flexibility
in drawing the curve, but also more complexity due to the numerous weights affecting the curve.
NURBS curve
Degree = 10
Vertices = 27
Weight of each vertex = 1
The same principles that apply to a NURBS curve apply to a surface. A NURBS surface is a grid, or mesh, of weighted
control points in the U and V directions.
V direction
NURBS surface
U Degree = 2
V Degree = 2
Vertices = 9
Weight of each vertex = 1
U direction
Increasing the degree of a NURBS surface in the U and/or V direction increases the number of vertices, adding
flexibility as well as complexity.
NURBS surface
U Degree = 6
V Degree = 6
Vertices = 49
Weight of all each vertex = 1
A NURBS surface also has a direction, or normal, which affects the outcome of certain operations, such as fillet surface
creation. Iso-parametric curves indicate the U and V direction, and edge curves are drawn along the edges, helping to
visualize the NURBS surface.
Edge
Iso-parametric curve
Each vertex on the surface can have a weight which pulls the surface towards the weighted vertices.
3D Power Pack Fundamentals | 383
NURBS surface
U Degree = 6
V Degree = 6
Vertices = 49
Weight of selected vertex = 100
Weight of remaining vertices = 1
The Reshape tool can move a single vertex or a row of vertices, deforming the surface (see Reshaping NURBS
Surfaces on page 304).
Both NURBS curves and surfaces can be defined by control points or by interpolation points. The curve or surface
passes between control points or through interpolation points.
Control point Interpolation point
Interpolated curves and surfaces may be easier to modify. See Creating NURBS Curves on page 387 and
Interpolated NURBS Surfaces on page 389.
Complex, free-form shapes can be created with NURBS curves and NURBS surfaces. The shapes can then be
combined, clipped, added to, trimmed, extended, analyzed, and otherwise modified as described in these sections.
Selecting Edges
The cursor changes to an arrowhead when on or near an edge, and the edge is highlighted for selection. If more than
one edge is near the cursor, the nearest edge is highlighted. Click the edge to select it.
The cursor also changes to an arrowhead when on or near an iso-parametric curve for the Extract tool in Extract
Iso-parametric Curves mode.
Action Description
Select more than one edge Press the Shift key and select the edges
Deselect a selected edge Click on the edge again with the Shift key pressed
Deselect edges that have been selected Click on an empty area
Deselect the last selection Press the Backspace key, or double-click on the edge
Arrowhead cursor
Arrow cursor (away (on or near edge)
from edge)
3D Power Pack Fundamentals | 385
Multiple edges
selected
Iso-parametric
curve
Selecting Faces
When the cursor is over a face, the face geometry is highlighted, making it very easy to determine which face will be
selected. Click on a face to select it.
Multiple faces can be selected while pressing the Shift key, much like the edge selection described earlier. Deselecting
faces is also similar to deselecting edges.
Face selection can also be an edge-based selection. When the cursor is on or near an edge or near an iso-parametric
curve, you can select the face on either side of the edge depending on the cursor position. Face highlighting helps
determine which face will be selected.
Normally, only the front surfaces of a solid object can be selected directly. To select the back face of a solid, press the
Option key (Macintosh) or the Alt key (Windows) during face selection.
If the cursor is positioned over more than one back face and the desired face to select is difficult to determine, the
Select Face dialog box opens to specify the face. Click Next or Prev until the desired face is highlighted. Click OK to
select the face.
386 | Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling
If desired, click Reverse Normal when a single NURBS surface is selected to reverse the direction of the surface
normal. The arrow changes direction accordingly to indicate the new direction.
If desired, click Reverse Direction when a single NURBS curve is selected to reverse the direction of the curve.
The arrow changes direction accordingly to indicate the new direction.
The set of edges or faces used to create the fillet/chamfer or shell cannot be changed once the operation is performed;
edges or faces cannot be deleted from or added to the existing set. To add or delete edges or faces, first ungroup the
object, and then perform the operation again.
The properties that can be changed from the Object Info palette include the thickness of a shell, direction of shelling
(inside/outside), the radius of a fillet or setback distance of a chamfer. In the case of variable radius fillets, the
percentage of length and radius value at each point can be edited. However, only the parameters of the topmost object
can be changed.
For example, if a shell is created, and then some of the shell edges are filleted, only the fillet parameters can be changed
directly from the Object Info palette. To change the shell thickness, the fillet object must first be ungrouped. To change
the original extrusion, both the fillet and the shell must be ungrouped. Once changes have been made, reapply the shell
and fillet.
The Modify > Edit Group command cannot be used for these objects.
Converting to NURBS
The Convert to NURBS command converts planar objects and 3D polygons into NURBS curves, and converts the
faces of solids to NURBS surfaces. This is a quick way of creating NURBS curves from circles and arcs, or NURBS
surfaces from an extrusion, sweep, or other solids.
To convert to NURBS curves or surfaces:
1. Select the object or solid to convert to NURBS surfaces.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to NURBS.
The selection is converted to NURBS surface(s) or a NURBS curve, as reflected in the Object Info palette.
If the solid consisted of several faces, the conversion results in a group of NURBS surfaces. Select Modify > Ungroup
to access the individual NURBS surfaces that make up the solid.
Interpolation Point
NURBS curves can also be created from planar objects by converting them to NURBS; see Converting to
NURBS on page 387.
1. Click the NURBS Curve tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and click NURBS Curve Degree Setting from the
Tool bar.
Alternatively, double-click the NURBS Curve tool to open the Curve Degree dialog box.
2. The Curve Degree dialog box opens. Specify the curve degree for the NURBS Curve tool to use. Click OK.
Set the degree value to 1 to create a NURBS curve with linear segments (similar to a 3D polygon). A linear
NURBS curve can be used to measure an object from point to point in a 3D view.
1. Click the NURBS Curve tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select the Interpolation Point mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the curve.
3. Click to set the point through which the curve passes.
Continue clicking to add more interpolation points, extending the curve.
Interpolation point
1. Click the NURBS Curve tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select the Control Point mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the curve.
3. Click to set the point that the curve pulls toward but does not touch.
Continue clicking to add more control points, extending the curve.
NURBS Surfaces | 389
Control point
NURBS Surfaces
Interpolated NURBS Surfaces
As described in Creating NURBS Curves on page 387, NURBS curves can be created by interpolation points or
control points. Similarly, a NURBS surface can be created by interpolation points. An interpolated surface is a NURBS
surface that passes through a two-dimensional array of 3D interpolation points. Regular NURBS surfaces are defined
by their control points, which may not lie on the surface and can be difficult to use for reshaping the surface (it is
difficult to know how much the control point should be moved in order to reshape the surface by a specific distance).
Because interpolation points lie on the surface, it is much easier to modify these points with the Reshape tool or the
Object Info palette, and have the surface pass through the points.
An interpolated surface can be created, or an existing untrimmed NURBS surface can be converted to an interpolated
surface, for easier reshaping.
When an interpolated surface is used in another operation, such as a Boolean operation or trimming, the surface
becomes a control point surface.
Parameter Description
U Direction
Number of Points Specifies the number of interpolation points (up to 1000) to create in the U direction; this
number must be greater than the U degree number
Degree Indicates the flexibility of the surface in the U direction, from 1 to 28; a larger number
results in a more variable surface
V Direction
Number of Points Specifies the number of interpolation points (up to 1000) to create in the V direction; this
number must be greater than the V degree number
Degree Indicates the flexibility of the surface in the V direction, from 1 to 28; a larger number
results in a more variable surface
4. Click OK to create the interpolated surface. Select Show Vertices in the Object Info palette to display the
interpolation points. Use the Reshape tool to reshape the interpolated NURBS surface.
3. Click OK to create the interpolated surface. Select Show Vertices in the Object Info palette to display
interpolation points. Use the Reshape tool to reshape the interpolated NURBS surface.
Mode Description
No Rail Creates a loft surface using two or more NURBS curve cross sections
One Rail Creates a loft surface using a NURBS curve rail and one or more NURBS curve cross sections
Birail Sweep Creates a loft surface using two NURBS curve rails and one NURBS curve cross section
Similar to the Multiple Extrude command, the Loft Surface tool normally creates a 3D object (a generic solid) from a
series of other objects (in this case, NURBS curves). Unlike Multiple Extrude, the cross sections do not need to be
equally spaced, and the resulting profile can be manipulated to avoid self-intersection and to control twist.
This tool can potentially create surfaces which cannot be further manipulated in the 3D Power Pack. See Surface
Geometry Requirements on page 387.
392 | Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling
1. Click the Loft Surface tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select No Rail from the Tool bar.
2. Click on each cross section. The cursor changes into an arrowhead when over a valid cross section. The point
nearest to the click is selected.
Parameter Description
Select Curve Selects the previous or next cross section curve. Reverse changes the direction
of the curve to twist or untwist the loft surface.
Reverse Click to reverse the curve direction
NURBS Surfaces | 393
Parameter Description
Select Alignment by Point Selects the previous or next point on the selected cross-section curve. If the
cross section does not have any corners, this option is disabled.
Select Alignment by Percentage Selects points along a geometrically continuous cross section (such as a circle)
by a specified percentage, or by adjusting the slider
Ruled Creates a linearly interpolated object
Closed Creates a loft surface that closes in on itself. Because the start point cannot be
selected as the end point of a loft, the Closed option automatically completes
the connection.
Create Solid Creates a solid loft surface with capped ends; deselect to create a group of
NURBS surfaces instead of a generic solid
Keep Curves Retains the cross sections after the loft is created
Preview Displays the proposed loft surfaces based on the current settings
5. Click OK to close the dialog box and create the loft surface(s).
1. Click the Loft Surface tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select One Rail from the Tool bar.
394 | Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling
3. Once all curves are selected, press Enter or click the check mark button on the Tool bar.
The Loft Creation dialog box opens.
4. Specify the desired loft creation settings (see Loft Surface Using No Rails on page 392).
5. Click OK to close the dialog box and create the loft surface(s).
The rail NURBS curve should intersect all cross-section curves if there is more than one curve.
When a single cross section is used, the curve is swept along the rail and the cross section does not need to
intersect the rail.
1. Click the Loft Surface tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Birail Sweep from the Tool bar.
2. Click on each rail, and then click on the cross section. The cross-section profile curve does not need to intersect
the rail curves.
In this mode, only one cross section can be selected.
NURBS Surfaces | 395
Rails
3. Once the profile curve is selected, press Enter or click the check mark button on the Tool bar.
The Loft Creation dialog box opens.
4. Specify the desired loft creation settings (see Loft Surface Using No Rails on page 392).
5. Click OK to close the dialog box and create the loft surface(s).
The loft surface is created differently depending on whether the profile curve is open or closed, and how the start/end of
the rails touch the profile curve. In certain instances, the click order (which rail is clicked first) and location (part of the
profile curve that is clicked) will produce a different loft surface.
Status of Profile Curve and Rails Effect of Rail Click Order/Profile Click Location
Open Profile Curve
Start/end of one of the rails touches the start/ The rail click order and profile click location do not affect the loft
end of the open profile surface creation
Start/end of the rails do not touch the start/end Both the rail click order and the location where the profile is
of the open profile, or do not touch the open clicked affect how the loft surface is created
profile at all
Rails
Top rail clicked first, then bottom rail, and Top rail clicked first, then bottom rail, and
Rails do not touch the open profile curve then the top of the profile curve then the bottom of the profile curve
OR OR
Bottom rail clicked first, then top rail, and Bottom rail clicked first, then top rail, and
then the bottom of the profile curve then the top of the profile curve
Status of Profile Curve and Rails Effect of Rail Click Order/Profile Click Location
Start/end of the rails do not touch the closed The click order affects how the loft surface is created
profile at all
Rails
Top rail clicked first, then bottom Bottom rail clicked first, then top
Rails do not touch the closed profile curve rail, and then the profile curve rail, and then the profile curve
Multiple open NURBS that form both boundary and interior curves can be used to create a NURBS surface, but
must have an equal number of intersections.
A NURBS surface is not created if there is more than one intersection created by the selected curves, creating multiple
enclosed regions. It is also not created if there is an intersection between selected curves in the same parametric
direction or if there are an unequal number of intersections.
Only one enclosed region allowed Intersection between curves in the Unequal number of intersections
same parametric direction
NURBS Surfaces | 397
Parameter Description
Number of Points Specifies the number of control points on the drape surface; the greater the number of
points, the closer the drape surface is to the object
U Direction Enter the number of points to create in the U direction; this number must be greater than 3
V Direction Enter the number of points to create in the V direction; this number must be greater than 3
Plane Z Value Specify the base level of the drape surface (how far down the bottom of the drape goes),
which must be less than the highest Z coordinate of the object
Parameter Description
Fillet Radius Specifies the radius of the fillet surface
Trim Type
Edge Tangency Creates a blend between the minimal and maximal intersections on each end of the
fillet
Minimal Trims the fillet surface to the minimal intersecting areas on the face boundaries
400 | Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling
Parameter Description
Maximal Trims the fillet surface to the maximal intersecting areas on the face boundaries
None Generates the entire fillet without trimming the fillet surface
Parameter Description
Tangent Creates a fillet surface with a tangent continuous G1 cross section
Continuous
Blend
Trim Original Creates a fillet surface and trims the original surfaces where they connect to the
Surfaces fillet surface
3. Click OK.
A NURBS fillet surface is created between the two objects.
The position of the fillet surface depends on the surface normals. The fillet is created differently if the Reverse
Normal button is clicked for one or both of the surfaces in the Object Info palette.
3. Add the solid and the planar cap surfaces by selecting them all and choosing Model > Add Solids.
profile
axis
rail
Click 3
Click 1
Click 2
The rail defines the extent of the revolution. An open rail curve generates surfaces until the rail ends.
Parameter Description
Move Select Entire Object to edit all the vertices of the surface, Vertex Only to edit only
the selected vertex, U Vertices to edit all of the vertices in a row in the U direction,
and V Vertices to edit all of the vertices in a row in the V direction
Edit U/V Scrolls through the vertices of the selected NURBS surface in either the U parametric
direction or V parametric direction
X, Y, Z / X,Y,Z Depending on the selection in the Move list, displays the position of the current
surface or vertex; edit the values to change the surface/vertex position
404 | Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling
Parameter Description
U Degree/ V Degree A NURBS surface is defined mathematically by two parameters, U and V, which
increase or decrease along certain directions called the U and V parametric
directions. The two directions are perpendicular to each other.
Increasing the U or V Degree value adds vertices in that parametric direction; the
vertices can then be manipulated
V Degree Degree in the V parametric direction; increasing this value adds vertices that can then
be manipulated
Weight NURBS curves and surfaces are represented mathematically by weighted control
points. The weight value can be anywhere between .01 and 100. A weight above 1
pulls the curve or surface toward the control point; a weight below 1 has the reverse
effect.
Reverse Normal Flips the surface normal direction
Untrim Creates a NURBS surface, if the surface has been trimmed
NURBS Surface Displays the NURBS surface parameters
parameters (display only)
Show Vertices Select to display the surfaces vertices
Show Normal Displays the surface normal as a red arrow for the selected NURBS surface
Extracting Geometry
The Extract tool can be used to extract geometry from the edge or surface of a NURBS surface or solid object, leaving
the original unmodified. The extracted geometry can then be used for snapping or for other surface operations.
Extract Curve Extract Surface
Preferences
Mode Description
Extract Point Extracts 3D loci from the edges of a NURBS surface or solid object. 3D loci are
placed at the start, end, and mid-points of the selected edges. For circular edges,
a 3D locus is created at the circle center as well.
Extract Curve Extracts a NURBS curve from the edge of a solid object
Extract Iso-parametric Curves Extracts an iso-parametric curve from the surface of a solid object
Extract Surface Extracts a NURBS surface from the face of a solid
Preferences Provides options for extracting tangent entities, faces, or all entities; the specific
items extracted depends on which mode is selected. These options have no effect
in Extract Iso-parametric Curves mode.
To extract geometry from the edge or surface of a NURBS surface or solid object:
1. In the desired view, click the Extract tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select the desired mode from
the Tool bar.
Extracting Geometry | 405
2. If Extract Iso-parametric Curves mode was selected, skip to step 4. For all other modes, click Preferences from
the Tool bar.
The Extract Preferences dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Select Tangent Entities In Extract Point or Extract Curve mode, extracts loci or curves from tangentially
connected edges of the selected object; in Extract Surface mode, extracts surfaces
from tangentially connected faces of the selected object
Select Faces In Extract Point or Extract Curve mode, extracts loci or curves from all edges of
the selected face(s)
Select All Entities In Extract Point or Extract Curve mode, extracts loci or curves from all edges of
the selected object; in Extract Surface mode, extracts surfaces from all faces of
the selected object
Create Planar Objects In Extract Surface mode, creates planar objects from faces by extracting the
geometry of a planar face. For example, create a polyline extracted from the face
of a wall. The polyline could then have a hatch applied to simulate the appearance
of brick in 3D views.
Another way to create planar objects from faces is with the Polygon from Inner
Boundary mode of the 2D Polygon tool. See Creating a Polygon from an Inner
Boundary on page 234.
In Extract Iso-parametric Curve mode, click the Extracted curve moved for clarity
hemisphere surface to select curve(s)
In Extract Surface mode, with the Select Tangent Extracted surface moved for clarity
Entities preference selected, click an interior surface to
select all tangent interior surfaces
Mode Description
Proximity Determines the minimum distance between NURBS curves/surfaces and 3D loci, or the
intersection between NURBS curves/surfaces
Interrogation Interactively determines the curvature of NURBS curves and surfaces and displays curvature
parameters
1. Click the Analysis tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Proximity from the Tool bar.
2. Click on a NURBS curve, NURBS surface, or 3D locus, and then click on another NURBS curve or surface.
NURBS Surface-curve Interaction | 407
A 3D locus is placed on each NURBS curve at the closest minimum distance or intersecting points between the
two items, or a NURBS curve is placed at the intersection of two NURBS surfaces.
NURBS curve
Locus points placed at each intersection between Locus points placed at the NURBS curve placed at the
a NURBS curve and NURBS surface minimum distance from a 3D intersection of two NURBS
locus point to both a NURBS surfaces
curve and a NURBS surface
1. Click the Analysis tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Interrogation from the Tool bar.
2. Click on the NURBS curve of interest, and then move the cursor along the curve to display the curvature circle (in
red) and tangent curve (in blue) at the cursor position.
Tangent curve Curvature circle
3. Click the curve to obtain curve properties at a specific location along the curve. The Curve Properties dialog box
opens, displaying curvature parameters for that location.
408 | Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling
Option Description
Create Curvature Circle Adds the NURBS curve displaying in red to the drawing
Locus at center of Adds a 3D locus at the point where the curvature circle meets the NURBS curve, and
curvature another locus at the center of the circle
Create Tangent Curve Add the NURBS curve displaying in blue to the drawing
Length Specifies the length of the tangent curve
4. To add a curvature circle or tangent curve to the drawing, select the appropriate options and click OK. If you
select multiple items, they are created as a group.
1. Click the Analysis tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Interrogation from the Tool bar.
2. Click on the NURBS surface of interest and move the cursor along the surface to display the curvature circles (in
red) and normal curve (in blue) at the cursor position.
Original NURBS surface
Curvature circles
Normal curve
NURBS Surface-curve Interaction | 409
3. Click again to obtain surface properties at a specific location along the surface. The Surface Properties dialog box
opens, displaying curvature parameters for that location.
Option Description
Create Curvature Circles Adds the NURBS curve(s) displaying in red to the drawing
Loci at centers of curvature Adds a 3D locus at the point where the curvature circle(s) meet the NURBS
surface, and another locus at the center of each circle
Create Normal Curve Add the NURBS curve displaying in blue to the drawing
Length Specifies the length of the normal curve
4. To add curvature circle(s) or a normal curve to the drawing, select the appropriate options and click OK. If you
select multiple items, they are created as a group.
Parameter Description
Number of Points Specifies the number of points to use; for a NURBS curve, enter the number of points,
which must be at least 3
U Direction For a NURBS surface, enter the number of points to use along the U direction; this
number must be at least 3
V Direction For a NURBS surface, enter the number of points to use along the V direction; this
number must be at least 3
Keep Original Retains the original curve or surface, and adds a new, rebuilt curve or surface
Maximum Deviation After clicking Preview, displays the maximum deviation between the original and rebuilt
surface or curve
Preview Displays a preview of the new, rebuilt curve or surface
Mode Description
Split Splits a NURBS surface with a projection
Trim Trims a NURBS surface with a projection
Add Adds a projection to a NURBS surface
Add Upward In Add mode, adds the projection in the profile plane normal direction
Add Downward In Add mode, adds the projection in the opposite direction from the profile
plane normal direction
Add Both Directions In Add mode, adds the projection in both the profile plane normal direction
and the opposite direction
1. In the desired view, draw a 2D object or NURBS curve on top of a NURBS surface.
If the object to be projected is an open NURBS curve or open 2D object, both end points must be outside the
NURBS surface.
2. Click the Project tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Split from the Tool bar.
3. Click on the splitting object, and then click on the NURBS surface.
The splitting object is projected onto the NURBS surface, resulting in a group of NURBS surfaces.
1. In the desired view, draw a 2D object or NURBS curve on top of a NURBS surface.
412 | Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling
If the object to be projected is an open NURBS curve or an open 2D object, both end points must be outside the
NURBS surface.
2. Click the Project tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Trim from the Tool bar.
3. Click on the trimming object, and then click on the NURBS surface. The cursor changes into the pointing hand
cursor. Click on the side of the intersection to be trimmed away.
Select the project and trimming Select the NURBS surface Select the region to be trimmed
object
The trimming object is projected onto the NURBS surface, and the region selected to be trimmed away is removed
from the NURBS surface at the point of intersection, resulting in a group of NURBS surfaces.
1. In the desired view, draw a 2D object or NURBS curve on top of a NURBS surface.
3. Select Add from the Tool bar. Select the appropriate direction mode so that the projection direction intersects the
NURBS surface (Add Upward, Add Downward, or Add Both Directions).
The projection direction must intersect with the NURBS surface, or no projection is created.
4. Click on the object to add; the projection direction is indicated by a red arrow. Click on the NURBS surface.
The objects projection is added to the NURBS surface at the point of intersection, creating a generic solid.
Creating a Rib
The Add mode of the Project tool can be used to create ribs.
To create a rib:
The rib profile is projected until it meets the next surface it encounters. The profile is trimmed at the extremities
automatically.
Parameter Description
Select End Point/Edge Click the arrows to select the end point or edge to extend. The selected end point or
edge is displayed in red on the drawing.
Parameter Description
Preview Click to see a preview of the extension in red
3. Click Preview to check the extension, and then click OK to extend the NURBS curve or surface.
Creating Helix-Spirals
The Create Helix-Spiral command creates a helix-shaped or spiral-shaped 3D object from one or more path objects.
The paths can be 2D objects or NURBS curves.
To create a helix or spiral:
1. Select the object(s) to use as the path.
2. Select Model > 3D Power Pack > Create Helix-Spiral.
The Helix-Spiral Creation dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Use Turns Select to create a helix/spiral by a specified number of turns along the path
416 | Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling
Parameter Description
Turns Enter the total number of turns to be created along the path
Use Pitch Select to create a helix/spiral by pitch
Pitch Enter the pitch value (the distance between successive turns)
Start Radius Enter the radius of the perpendicular starting circle
End Radius Enter the radius of the perpendicular ending circle. To create a helix, enter a value matching
the start radius. To create a spiral, enter a different value.
Start Angle Enter the starting point of the twist on the starting circle
Reverse Direction Select to change the rotation direction of the helix/spiral from clockwise to
counter-clockwise or vice-versa
Flatten Select to flatten the helix/spiral into a 2D spiral. Use Pitch is not available with this option.
3. Click OK.
A helix or spiral is created.
A helix or spiral object can be used, without further conversion, as a path object for the Extrude Along Path
command.
Ungrouping a helix-spiral object results in a NURBS curve.
Creating Contours
Contours are intersections of a solid or surface with a plane passing through the line specified with the Create
Contours tool. This tool creates contours at specified intervals, which can then be used to create a loft surface in order
to re-create a solid shape.
To create contours:
1. Click the Create Contours tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Preferences on the Tool bar to
specify the contour interval.
Move Face
Mode Description
Extrude Face Selects the planar face of a solid, a 2D planar object, or NURBS curve, to add to or subtract
volume, creating perpendicular faces
Move Face Extends the planar face of a solid, adding or subtracting the face along with any geometry
present on the face
Sub-Face Selects a curve or group of curves to add to or subtract volume from a solid
To preserve the primitive profile geometry of an extrude, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the
extrude and select Edit from the context menu. See Object Editing Mode on page 16.
1. Click the Push/Pull tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Extrude Face from the Tool bar.
2. Click on the desired planar face, planar object, or NURBS curve.
If needed, the Select Face dialog box opens to help select the correct face, as described in Selecting the Edges and
Faces of a Solid on page 384. To select the back faces of solids, press the Alt key (Windows) or Option key
(Macintosh) while selecting. When the correct face is selected, click OK.
418 | Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling
3. The cursor changes to a double-headed arrow. Move the cursor to expand (Add mode) or decrease (Subtract
mode) the solid volume, or create an extrusion from the 2D planar object or NURBS curve. The cursor direction
determines whether volume is added or subtracted. The distance of the protrusion or cutout can also be specified
by entering a value in the Distance field on the Tool bar or floating data bar. The new solid is previewed on the
drawing.
1. Click the Push/Pull tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Move Face from the Tool bar.
2. Click on the desired planar face.
If needed, the Select Face dialog box opens to help select the correct face, as described in Selecting the Edges and
Faces of a Solid on page 384. To select the back faces of solids, press the Alt key (Windows) or Option key
(Macintosh) while selecting. When the correct face is selected, click OK.
3. The cursor changes to a double-headed arrow. Move the cursor to extend the face and its geometry. The distance
can also be specified by entering a value in the Distance field on the Tool bar or floating data bar. The new solid is
previewed on the drawing.
4. Click at the desired location to edit the solid.
Tapering Faces | 419
1. Click the Push/Pull tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Sub-Face from the Tool bar.
2. Select the NURBS curve or group of NURBS curves that will be used to create the protrusion or cutout, and then
select the solid.
3. The cursor changes to a double-headed arrow. When an open NURBS curve is coplanar with the solid face and
also splits the face of the solid, each split section can be moved individually. Move the cursor to expand (Add
mode) or decrease (Subtract mode) the solid volume. The cursor direction determines whether volume is added
or subtracted. The distance of the protrusion or cutout can also be specified by entering a value in the Distance
field on the Tool bar or floating data bar. The new solid is previewed on the drawing.
In Subtract mode, the distance value can exceed the solid perimeter; the cutout operation is only performed on the
selected solid.
Tapering Faces
The Taper Face tool tapers faces of solid objects to a specified angle, with respect to a selected reference plane. This
allows you to quickly and easily explore different solid shapes.
420 | Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling
Mode Description
Tangent Faces Tapers the picked face and any faces that are tangent to it, as a group; for solids with curved sides
Picked Face Tapers only the picked face
1. Click the Taper Face tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select a mode from the Tool bar.
2. Click to select an object or face of an object that will be used to determine the pivot point for the taper operation.
This can be a 2D object such as a rectangle, the planar face of a solid (including the solid being tapered), or a
planar NURBS curve or solid edge. Valid objects are highlighted when the cursor tracks over them.
Press the Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) key to select an object or face that is behind another object.
3. Next, move the cursor to highlight the face to taper, and click to select it. In Tangent Faces mode, both the clicked
face and the faces tangent to it are selected.
Press the Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) key to select a back face of an object.
4. Drag to display a preview of the taper. Or, to taper to a precise angle, press the Tab key and enter a negative or
positive number in the Data bar; press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) to display a preview of the taper.
5. Click, or press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) to complete the taper operation. The result is a generic
solid object.
1st click
The original object is an In Tangent Faces mode, all of the In Picked Faces mode, only
extruded NURBS curve side faces are tangent to each other, the front face is selected and
so they are tapered as a group tapered
Twisting Solids | 421
Twisting Solids
The Twist tool twists solid objects, NURBS surfaces, and faces of solid objects to a specified angle with respect to a
selected axis of rotation. This allows for easy exploration of sculptural shapes.
Mode Description
Solid Twists the selected solid(s) or NURBS surface(s) to a specified angle
Face Twists the selected face and the adjacent and tangent faces of a solid to a specified angle
In Solid mode, the entire solid In Face mode, only the selected
object is twisted face and the adjacent and
tangent faces are twisted
1. Click the Twist tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Solid mode.
2. As you move the mouse over 3D objects, they are highlighted to indicate they can be twisted. Click to select the
solid or NURBS surface to twist.
Shift-click to select more than one object to twist.
3. A protractor feedback graphic displays around the cursor. Position the protractor on the appropriate twist plane,
and click at the center point of the twist.
The protractor graphic displays only when an object is selected. To position the protractor as desired, you may
need to activate a specific plane using the Active Planes list on the View bar.
The center point of the twist can be located away from the object being twisted.
4. The protractor graphic remains at the click point, and the twist axis line appears. As you move the cursor, the
protractor rotates, and the twist reference line appears and previews the starting point for the twist. Click to place
the reference line.
422 | Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling
5. As you move the cursor, the twist angle line tracks the cursor, and a preview of the rotated object displays. Click to
set the twist angle.
Objects can be twisted more than 360 degrees.
The object is twisted to the new position and converted into a generic solid object.
3rd click
2nd click
1st click
4th click
1. Click the Twist tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Face mode. A protractor feedback graphic
displays around the cursor.
2. As you move the protractor over 3D objects, the faces to be twisted are highlighted. Position the protractor on the
appropriate face, and click at the center point of the twist.
The protractor is oriented according to the face normal. Face mode twists the selected face and all adjacent and
tangent faces as indicated by the highlight.
3. The protractor graphic remains at the click point, and the twist axis line appears. As you move the cursor, the
protractor rotates, and the twist reference line appears and previews the starting point for the twist. Click to place
the reference line.
4. As you move the cursor, the twist angle line tracks the cursor, and a preview of the rotated object displays. Click to
set the twist angle.
5. The faces are twisted to the new position and the object is converted into a generic solid object.
2nd click
3rd click
1st click
1. Click the Chamfer Edge tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Preferences on the Tool bar to
specify chamfer edge preferences.
Chamfering Solid Edges | 423
Parameter Description
Setback Specify the distance by which the faces are set back
Alternatively, enter a value in the Setback field on the Tool bar
Select Tangent Entities Choose this option to select tangentially connected edges and faces for chamfering
Select Faces Choose this option to select faces for chamfering
Select All Edges Selects all the edges of the solid for the chamfer operation
The Setback value for the chamfered edge can be edited through the Object Info palette.
Once the modification is complete, the edge set used to create the modification cannot be changed. The modified
edge can be ungrouped, and a new modification with different edges can be created.
If one modification has been created over another, the first modification cannot be edited in the Object Info palette
unless the last one is ungrouped (see Editing a Fillet/Chamfer or Shell Object on page 386).
A chamfer edge operation may fail due to:
complex surface geometry adjacent to an edge or corner involved in the modification;
an attempt to modify one edge in a sequence of tangential edges (select all the edges for a better chance of
success); or
an attempt to modify without selecting all the edges at a vertex.
424 | Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling
1. Click the Fillet Edge tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Preferences on the Tool bar to specify
fillet edge preferences.
The Fillet Edge Preferences dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Select Tangent Entities Choose this option to select tangentially connected edges and faces for filleting
Constant Radius Create a filleted surface based on a constant radius
Radius Indicate the radius of the fillet edge
Alternatively, enter a value in the Constant Radius field on the Tool bar
Select Faces Choose this option to select faces for filleting
Select All Edges Selects all the edges of the solid for the fillet operation
Variable Radius Create a filleted surface based on a variable radius
Length (%) Enter the length up to the point as a percentage of the total edge length (for example, 50)
Radius Enter the radius value at the corresponding percentage of length value (for example, 1)
Set Click to add a length/radius pair or modify the currently selected pair
Delete Click to delete the selected length/radius value
Reverse Reverses the order of the radius values; the radius values that were at the shortest
percentage length are switched to the longest percentage length, and vice versa
For tangent entity selections, select the tangentially connected edges and faces to be modified. For face selections,
select the faces to be modified. To select multiple edges or surfaces, hold the Shift key while selecting. To select
the back faces of solids, press the Alt key (Windows) or Option key (Macintosh).
See Selecting the Edges and Faces of a Solid on page 384 for information on selecting surfaces.
When Select All Edges is enabled, clicking on one of the highlighted edges selects all the edges for filleting.
3. Press Enter or click the check mark button on the Tool bar to perform the edge modification.
The Radius value for the filleted edge can be edited through the Object Info palette. For the fillet by variable radius,
press the Edit arrow buttons to highlight each point along the edge for editing.
Once the modification is complete, the edge set used to create the modification cannot be changed. The modified
edge can be ungrouped, and a new modification with different edges can be created.
If one modification has been created over another, the first modification cannot be edited in the Object Info palette
unless both are first ungrouped (see Editing a Fillet/Chamfer or Shell Object on page 386).
A fillet edge operation may fail due to:
complex surface geometry adjacent to an edge or corner involved in the modification;
a radius value that is too large;
an attempt to modify one edge in a sequence of tangential edges (select all the edges for a better chance of
success); or
an attempt to modify without selecting all the edges in a vertex.
1. Click Shell Solid from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Preferences on the Tool bar to specify the shell
solid preferences.
426 | Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling
The Shell Solid Preferences dialog box opens. Specify or edit the shell settings.
Parameter Description
Shell
Inside Creates an interior shell
Outside Creates an exterior shell
Thickness Enter the thickness of the shell wall
Alternatively, enter a value in the Thickness field on the Tool bar
Select Tangent Faces Selects a tangentially connected chain of faces
1. Click Shell Solid from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Preferences on the Tool bar to specify the shell
solid preferences.
Specify the desired shell settings as described in Shell from a Solid Object on page 425.
For NURBS surfaces, the Inside setting extends the shell solid in the opposite direction from the surfaces normal,
and the Outside setting extends the shell solid in the direction of the surfaces normal. (See Displaying Surface
Normals on page 386).
2. Click OK.
Click on the NURBS surface to thicken. To select multiple surfaces, hold the Shift key while selecting.
Stitching and Trimming Surfaces | 427
3. Press Enter or click the check mark button on the Tool bar to create the shell.
1. Click Shell Solid from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Preferences on the Tool bar to specify the shell
solid preferences.
Specify the desired shell settings as described in Shell from a Solid Object on page 425.
For planar objects, the Inside/Outside setting determines on which side of the plane the shell solid will be
extended; the direction depends on several factors related to the objects creation, geometry, and placement in the
document.
2. Click OK.
Click on the planar object to thicken. To select multiple objects, hold the Shift key while selecting.
3. Press Enter or click the check mark button on the Tool bar to create the shell.
Creating Floors
The Floor command can be used to create not only floors, but also decks, patios, stages, platforms, and lofts. The
command converts any 2D drawing object into a hybrid (2D/3D) object of any shape and thickness. The source object
must be flat and must also be parallel to the active layer plane.
In the Vectorworks Design Series products, the Floor command is located under a different menu.
Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Floor
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Architectural > Floor
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Architectural > Floor
To create a floor:
1. Select the 2D or flat hybrid object(s) to turn into a floor.
2. Select Model > AEC > Floor.
The Create Floor dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Bottom Z Specifies the distance above the active layer plane that the floor will begin (the
Bottom Z height). In most cases, use the default of 0, which starts the floor on the
active layer plane.
Thickness Sets the floor thickness
3. Click OK.
Creating Walls
Use the wall tools to draw both straight and round walls and to join those walls to other walls. Each wall segment is
treated as a separate object. Either automatically join walls together when drawing them, or join them after drawing by
using one of the joining options. Other wall options include the ability to add component lines and fills to walls, cap
and trim them, and insert symbols (such as doors and windows) into them. You can also add and delete peaks in a wall,
if the elevation changes from one end of the wall to the other.
Additional wall capabilities are available in the Vectorworks Architect product, and are cross-referenced to the
appropriate section in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide where applicable.
430 | Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements
There are four ways to position the wall in relation to the control line; the control line can be set relative to either the
wall or an optional core component. These modes are activated by the buttons on the Tool bar.
Right Control Line Wall Control Line Preferences
Left Control
Straight Walls Line
Mode Description
Left Control Line Walls are drawn along their left sides
Center Control Line Walls are drawn from the center
Right Control Line Walls are drawn along their right sides
Custom Control Line / Walls are drawn from an offset point specified in wall preferences; most effective when
Custom Wall Offset drawing walls containing components
Wall Control Line Sets the control line relative to the wall
Core Component Sets the control line relative to the wall component that has been designated as the core
Control Line component in the wall preferences
Preferences Sets the physical parameters of the wall; see Drawing Straight Walls on page 430
Arc Creation Controls Select the arc creation method to use when drawing round walls; for more information on
arc creation modes, see Creating Arcs on page 221
See Wall Direction on page 437 for details on how the starting point and direction in which the wall is drawn
determines the walls interior and exterior sides.
3D walls
Create walls by drawing them with the mouse, or by using a mouse-Data bar combination (see Using the Data Bar on
page 203). The following directions assume that the walls are drawn with the mouse.
Creating Walls | 431
Parameter Description
Wall Style In the Vectorworks Fundamentals product, all walls are unstyled.
(Vectorworks For information on wall styles, see Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect
Architect/Landmark and Landmark on page 114 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
required)
Save Preferences as See Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and Landmark on page 114 in
Wall Style the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide
(Vectorworks
Architect/Landmark
required)
Preview Displays a preview of the wall structure, including any defined components; the
preview wall is drawn from left to right, so the top of the preview, by default,
indicates the left part of the wall as it will be drawn (see Wall Direction on
page 437). The arrow shows the wall direction.
432 | Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements
Parameter Description
Overall Thickness Displays the thickness of the wall. If a wall contains no components, enter the
wall thickness.
The thickness of a wall with components is defined by the sum of the
component thicknesses. When components have been defined, this parameter
becomes read-only.
Edit Wall Attributes Opens the Wall Attributes dialog box, to specify the wall fill and pen settings
Components Lists the components that form the structure of the wall, in order from left to
right as displayed in the preview. To change the order of a component, click and
drag within the # column.
Core One of the wall components can optionally be designated as a core component
by clicking in the Core column. A check mark indicates that the component is
the core component. When the Auto join walls Vectorworks preference is
enabled, components also automatically join based on the core component
specified for each wall. See Automatically Joining Walls on page 437.
Other Component The remaining columns in the component list display the component thickness
settings and class setting
New Click to define the components of the wall; see Creating Wall Components on
page 438 for information on creating components
Edit Opens the Wall Component Attributes dialog box to edit the selected
components thickness and attributes (alternatively, double-click on a
component to open the Wall Component Attributes dialog box)
Delete Deletes the selected wall component; the wall thickness is adjusted accordingly
Parameter Description
Fill
Use Class Sets wall fill attributes by class rather than by the parameters in the Wall
Attributes Attributes dialog box
Style Specify the wall fill attributes, or select None for no fill. Selected hatch, gradient,
or image fills, if not already present in the file, are imported and added to the
Resource Browser (default content is automatically imported into the current file
at the point of use and displays in the Resource Browser). See Libraries on
page 155 and Fill Attributes on page 505.
Pen
Use Class Sets pen attributes by class rather than by the parameters in the Wall Attributes
Attributes dialog box
Style Specify the wall pen attributes, or select None for no pen; see Pen Attributes on
page 507
Line When a pen style has been selected, specify the line thickness; see Line
Thickness Attributes on page 509
Opacity
Use Class Sets wall opacity by class rather than by the parameters in the Wall Attributes
Opacity dialog box
Opacity Specifies the transparency of the wall; drag the slider to the left to increase the
transparency, or enter a percentage directly in the box to the right of the slider
Wall Caps
Use Wall Line Uses the attributes of the wall line for the wall caps
Attributes
Use Component Uses the attributes of the components (left line) for the wall caps
Line Attributes
5. Click OK to return to the Wall Preferences dialog box. If components are to be added to the wall, click New to
define each component (see Creating Wall Components on page 438). The Overall Thickness is then defined
by the thickness of the wall components.
434 | Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements
6. Click the Insertion Options tab to set the wall options and to select textures for the wall parts (Renderworks
required).
Parameter Description
Height
Height Directly sets the desired height of the wall. When the wall height is determined
manually by this method, the Top Bound property of the wall is automatically
set to Layer Elevation, and the Top Offset value is modified accordingly.
When the top of the wall is bound by the layer wall height value, the wall
height updates automatically.
Top Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the top of the wall.
The Layer Wall Height value is set by the design layer (see Setting Design
Layer Properties on page 97).
Additional options are available for the Vectorworks Architect product; see
Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and Landmark on page 114 in the
Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Top Offset Sets the offset of the top of the wall from its specified top bound height.
Bottom Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the bottom of the wall; Layer
Elevation is the only option available unless the Vectorworks Architect product
is installed
Bottom Offset For the bottom of the wall, sets the offset from the layer elevation
Caps Select whether a wall segment is capped at the start point, the end point, both
ends, or has no caps at all
Creating Walls | 435
Parameter Description
Class Specifies the default class for the walls
Control Offset If using the Custom Control Line wall mode, enter the offset value for the
control line (see Creating Walls on page 429)
Textures
(Renderworks
required)
Use Component Uses the textures defined for the wall components to texture the wall
Textures This option can also be selected for an existing wall from the Render tab of
the Object Info palette
Use Object Textures Uses the textures defined below for the wall parts
Part Applies the texture selected in Texture to the selected parts of the wall (see
Applying a Texture to an Object on page 620 for information on applying
textures to an object with parts)
Revert to Overall If a part was assigned a texture but it should inherit its texture from Overall
instead, select the part and click Revert to Overall. The part moves back below
the divider, and (from Overall) displays as its texture name.
Texture Applies the selected texture to the selected Part.
Textures can also be set from the Render tab of the Object Info palette. Textures
applied from the Object Info palette override the textures set here. Applying a
Texture to an Object on page 620
No Texture Does not apply a texture to the selected Part
Class Texture Uses the texture defined by the walls class. Any walls with that wall style use
class textures for that part of the wall (unless overridden). Class Texture can
also be chosen for a selected wall in the Render tab of the Object Info palette.
Choose Texture Choose a texture for the selected Part from the default content or the current
files content (see Libraries on page 155). Textures set here override the
object class textures.
The Vectorworks Architect/Landmark product is required to display the Data tab. See Creating Walls in
Vectorworks Architect and Landmark on page 114 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
7. Click OK when the wall preferences have been set.
8. Click at the starting point of the first wall section.
9. Click to end the first wall section.
To continue creating walls, click at the end of each additional wall section.
10. Double-click to finish the wall if the start point and end point are not at the same location; otherwise, click at the
starting location (a SmartCursor cue displays) to finish the wall.
436 | Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements
2nd 3rd
4th 5th
1st click
Walls drawn in Top/Plan view
4th
2nd
Walls drawn in a 3D view
3D view 2D view
Round walls preferences include all of the same parameters as straight walls.
1. Click the Round Wall tool from the Walls tool set.
2. Click the desired Offset mode button (see Creating Walls on page 429).
3. Click the Preferences mode button (the preferences are described in Drawing Straight Walls on page 430).
4. Click OK when the round wall preferences have been set.
5. Click to set the center point of the wall arc.
6. Click the mouse to begin drawing the wall, or use the Data bar to enter an angle. For more information on arc
creation modes, see Creating Arcs on page 221.
7. Click to end the wall.
Creating Walls | 437
1st click
2nd click
3rd click
Wall Direction
The starting point and the direction in which the wall is drawn determine a walls sides. Think of walking along the
top of the wallthe wall side on your left could be the exterior of a building or the interior, depending on which
direction you travel. The left side and right side designations are used when textures are applied to the walls.
In Top/Plan view, arrows indicate the current wall direction
To reverse the wall direction, click Reverse Sides from the Object Info palette.
Original walls Walls separated and Walls separated but When drawing walls with auto join on, connected
ends automatically ends not automatically walls are highlighted to show which walls will join
healed healed
When a core component has been set for walls with components, the components also automatically join. Core
components, as well as the other components, join uncapped if they have the same fill, and capped otherwise.
To set the Auto join walls preference:
1. Select Tools > Options > Vectorworks Preferences (see Edit Preferences on page 17).
2. On the Edit tab, select Auto join walls.
438 | Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements
3. Click OK.
The overall thickness of a wall is equal to the sum of its components. Component fill and pen style are only displayed
in Top/Plan view (except for section viewports in the Vectorworks Design Series products).
Use the Eyedropper tool to copy wall component settings from one wall to another (see Transferring Attributes on
page 502).
Additional wall capabilities are available in the Vectorworks Architect/Landmark product.
Wall components can be defined prior to drawing the wall in Wall Preferences mode, or after drawing the wall, from
the Object Info palette.
Wall components can also be edited from Wall Preferences mode. Editing a component from wall preferences
does not affect existing walls.
Parameter Description
Definition
Name Provide a name for the component, which displays in the Components list in
the Wall Preferences dialog box
Class Displays the component class; this setting can be changed in the Vectorworks
Architect/Landmark product (see Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect
and Landmark on page 114 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide).
The Vectorworks Fundamentals product can display classes set in a
Vectorworks Design Series product. <Object Class> indicates that the
component assumes the same class setting as that of the wall.
Thickness Specifies the components thickness; the thickness of a wall is the sum of its
components. A component must have a thickness greater than 0.
Offset from Wall Sets the offset distance for the component from the top of the wall
Top
Offset from Wall Sets the offset distance for the component from the bottom of the wall
Bottom
Follow Top Wall The component follows the wall peaks at the top of the wall
Peaks
Follow Bottom The component follows the wall peaks at the bottom of the wall
Wall Peaks
Fill
Use Class Sets component fill attributes by class rather than by the parameters in the Wall
Attributes Component Attributes dialog box. If the component class is changed later, the
component changes to use the attributes of the new class.
440 | Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements
Parameter Description
Style Specify the wall fill attributes, or select None for no fill. Selected fills, if not
already present in the file, are imported and added to the Resource Browser
(default content is automatically imported into the current file at the point of
use and displays in the Resource Browser). See Libraries on page 155 and
Fill Attributes on page 505.
Use a tile fill with Fit to Wall selected, to represent insulation fill. See
Defining Tiles on page 520.
Left Pen/Right Pen Class attributes can be used for the left and right pen parameters. Otherwise,
select a style and line thickness for the left and right sides of the component;
see Pen Attributes on page 507, and Line Thickness Attributes on
page 509.
Texture (Renderworks
required)
No Texture Does not apply a texture to the component
Class Texture Sets the component to use the texture specified by the components class. The
class texture is set from the Other tab in the Edit Classes dialog box; see
Setting Class Properties on page 109.
Choose Texture Select a texture for the component from the default content or the current files
content (see Libraries on page 155).
3. Click OK to create the component and return to the Wall Preferences dialog box.
The walls Overall Thickness value changes to be determined by its components. As components are defined,
they display in the preview. Click and drag a component in the # column to change its order.
Creating Walls | 441
4. Click OK.
Parameter Description
Preview Displays a preview of the wall structure, including the defined components; the
preview wall is drawn from left to right, so the top of the preview, by default,
indicates the left part of the wall as it will be drawn. The arrow shows the wall
direction.
Overall The thickness of a wall with components is defined by the sum of the component
Thickness thicknesses
Components Lists the components that form the structure of the wall, in order from left to right as
displayed in the preview. To change the order of a component, click and drag within
the # column.
Core One of the wall components can optionally be designated as a core component by
clicking in the Core column. A check mark indicates that the component is the core
component. When the Auto join walls Vectorworks preference is enabled,
components also automatically join based on the core component specified for each
wall. See Automatically Joining Walls on page 437.
New Click to define the components of the wall as described previously in this section
Edit Opens the Wall Component Attributes dialog box to edit the selected components
thickness and attributes (you can also double-click on a component to open the Wall
Component Attributes dialog box)
Delete Deletes the selected wall component; the wall thickness is adjusted accordingly
3. Click New or Edit, and define or edit the components as described previously.
4. Click OK to return to the Components dialog box.
5. Click OK. The new component definition is applied to the selected wall(s).
442 | Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements
Parameter Description
Wall position relative to Specifies whether the wall position should be centered on the polygon,
edge of poly inside the polygon, or outside the polygon
Use existing wall style Specifies whether to create the walls using the existing wall style
Use existing wall Specifies whether to create the walls using the existing wall thickness or
thickness specify a new Thickness value
Use existing wall height Specifies whether to create the walls using the existing wall height or specify
a new Height value
Assign to class Select the class into which the walls should be placed
Delete Source Poly Deletes the source polygon after the walls are created
3. Click OK.
The wall(s) are created based on the original polygon and the specified parameters.
Creating Walls | 443
Creating Pillars
The Pillar command converts any closed 2D shaperectangle, circle, oval, or polygoninto a pillar. In addition, use
it on open 2D shapes, such as lines and polylines, to create a flat, screen-like object. These objects include such things
as movie screens, room dividers, and moving walls. Once created, a pillar can be joined to a wall.
3D view 2D view
In the Vectorworks Design Series products, the Pillar command is located under a different menu.
Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Pillar
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Architectural > Pillar
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Architectural > Pillar
To create a pillar:
1. Click on the object to convert.
2. Select Model > AEC > Pillar.
The Pillar Preferences dialog box opens.
3D view 2D view
Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Create Polys from Walls
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Architectural > Create Polys from Walls
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Architectural > Create Polys from Walls
Parameter Description
Gross Area Polys Creates a polygon or polyline from the exterior perimeter of the selected walls
Net Area (Room) Creates a polygon or polyline from the interior perimeter of the selected walls
Polys
3. Click OK.
The polygon or polyline is created, leaving the original walls unchanged.
Editing Walls
Wall parameters can be edited from the Object Info palette. Vertices can be added, deleted, or moved, and walls can be
reshaped. In addition, wall breaks can be removed, walls can be joined in a variety of conformations, and symbols can
be added to the walls.
Wall Properties
The properties of selected straight or round walls and their components can be edited in the Object Info palette. Change
the wall attributes from the Attributes palette.
Parameter Description
Shape tab
Style In the Vectorworks Fundamentals product, all walls are unstyled. The
Vectorworks Architect or Landmark product is required to select other wall
styles; see Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and Landmark on page 114
in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Thickness
446 | Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements
Parameter Description
Thickness Displays the overall thickness of the wall; the thickness of a wall without
components is determined by the wall attributes. The thickness of a wall with
components is defined by the sum of the component thicknesses.
Vis Thick Displays the visible wall thickness, while accounting for component visibility
settings. Invisible components on the interior and exterior of the wall cause the
wall to appear thinner than its actual length, for display purposes.
Height
Height Directly sets the desired height of the wall. When the wall height is determined
manually by this method, the Top Bound property of the wall is automatically set
to Layer Elevation, and the Top Offset value is modified accordingly.
When the top of the wall is bound by the layer wall height value, the wall height
displays automatically.
Top Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the top of the wall.
The Layer Wall Height value is set by the design layer (see Setting Design
Layer Properties on page 97).
Additional options are available for the Vectorworks Architect product; see
Creating Walls in Vectorworks Architect and Landmark on page 114 in the
Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Top Offset Sets the offset of the top of the wall from its specified Top Bound height.
Bottom Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the bottom of the wall; Layer
Elevation is the only option available unless the Vectorworks Architect product
is installed
Bottom Offset For the bottom of the wall, sets the offset from the layer elevation
Caps Select whether a wall segment is capped at the start point, the end point, both
ends, or has no caps at all
Attr When the wall is capped, specifies whether the wall cap attributes comes from the
wall line attributes or the component line attributes
Components Edits the wall components of unstyled walls (see Creating Wall Components on
page 438)
Reverse Sides Reverses the direction of the wall sections (see Wall Direction on page 437)
Render tab
(Renderworks
required)
Mode Select whether to texture the wall according to textures defined for the wall (By
Object) or according to textures defined for the components (By Component).
See Applying a Texture to an Object on page 620, Applying Wall Textures
on page 634, and Creating Wall Components on page 438.
Reshaping Walls
Use the Reshape tool in a view other than Top/Plan to edit the wall height, change the elevation of wall peaks, add
vertices to create peaks in a wall, and delete vertices that have been added. Use the Selection tool to change the wall
length. Symbols remain where placed when a wall is reshaped.
Editing Walls | 447
In Top/Plan view, or when multiple walls are selected, or when a wall and other objects are selected, or when a marquee
has been drawn, the Reshape tool displays 2D Reshape modes; the vertices at either end of the wall can be moved,
changing the wall length and/or location. See 2D Reshape Modes on page 294.
In any 3D view, three modes are available for the Reshape tool when a single wall is selected.
Add 3D Wall Peaks
Mode Description
Reshape 3D Walls Adjusts the position of a selected wall vertex
Add 3D Wall Peaks Adds a vertex to a wall for reshaping purposes
Delete 3D Wall Peaks Deletes a wall vertex
With the Selection tool, drag the handle at the base of the wall to
lengthen or shorten the wall
Wall length can also be changed with the Reshape tool in Top/Plan view. In a 3D view, draw a marquee with the
Reshape tool to enclose the wall vertex in a marquee that is co-planar with the bottom wall elevation. Select the wall
with the Reshape tool. The available modes switch to the 2D reshape modes, and 2D reshape functionality is enabled
(see 2D Reshape Modes on page 294). This allows the wall length to be adjusted, even when in a 3D view.
2. Click the Reshape tool from the Basic palette, and select Reshape 3D Walls mode.
3. Position the cursor over one of the handles in the middle of the top or bottom of the wall, and click.
When the cursor is over a reshape handle, the standard arrow cursor changes into a double-headed, unfilled arrow.
4. Move the mouse to adjust the wall.
5. Click at the desired location.
In the Object Info palette, the height change displays as a top or bottom offset value.
With the 3D Reshape cursor, drag a handle on the end of the top
or bottom of the wall to reshape the wall
Changing the height of a wall peak does not change the height of the wall.
Editing Walls | 449
With the Add Peak cursor, click-click an end point to add a peak (Front The top of the wall is now flush with
view depicted) the bottom of the roof
To reshape a curved wall to match a planar surface, use the Subtract Solids or Intersect Solids command with an
object that matches the plane of the roof.
Wall with two unnecessary vertices With the Delete Peak cursor, click a Wall with two vertices removed
(Front view depicted) vertex to delete it
450 | Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements
Flip the round wall arc by dragging toward, and through, the arc center.
1. Click the Remove Wall Breaks tool from the Walls tool set.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the wall and select Remove Break from the
context menu.
2. Click and drag to create a marquee box around the wall break or end cap to remove.
The wall break or end cap is automatically removed.
2nd click
1st click
Joining Walls
The Wall Join tool joins straight or curved wall segments, not already connected using the Auto join walls preference.
(See Automatically Joining Walls on page 437 for information on Auto join walls.) There are three modes for
joining walls and two end cap modes.
L Join Uncapped Join
T Join
Mode Description
T Join Extends or shortens one wall segment until it intersects with a second wall
segment; creates Y joins by joining the first selected wall to two sections of an
existing L join
L Join Joins the closest ends of two walls to create a corner
X Join Joins two wall segments at the point where they intersect
Uncapped Join Applies an uncapped join to wall join operations
Capped Join Applies a capped join to wall join operations
To temporarily activate this tool, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a wall, and select Join from
the context menu.
T Wall Joins
The T Join mode extends or shortens the first wall segment until it intersects with a second wall segment. As only the
first wall is extended, this mode will not create corner type joins. (For those, use the L wall join mode. See L Wall
Joins on page 452 for more information.)
1. Click the Wall Join tool from the Walls tool set
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the wall and select Join from the context menu.
2. Click T Join from the Tool bar.
3. Select the wall segment to join.
4. Select the second wall segment to join.
To create a T join to an existing corner, join the wall segment to the perpendicular corner segment. This creates a
clean join between the walls.
B C
B C
In both cases, wall A and B are already corner joined; wall C is joined to wall A
452 | Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements
Y Wall Joins
Y wall joins are not automatically created when using the Auto join walls preference. (See Setting Vectorworks
Preferences on page 17 for information on Auto join walls.) Instead, the T Join mode is used to create Y wall joins.
1. Click the Wall Join tool from the Walls tool set.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the wall and select Join from the context menu.
2. Click T Join from the Tool bar.
3. Select the wall segment to join.
4. Select one of the two wall segments to join.
The wall segments are joined.
L Wall Joins
The L Join mode joins the closest ends of two walls to create a corner, or joins two walls end to end. Both wall lengths
are extended or shortened, as necessary, until they meet cleanly.
1. Click the Wall Join tool from the Walls tool set.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the wall and select Join from the context menu.
2. Click L Join from the Tool bar.
3. Select the first wall segment to join.
4. Select the second wall segment to join.
The wall lengths are resized, as necessary.
X Wall Joins
The X Join mode joins two wall segments at the point where they intersect.
Creating Roof Faces | 453
1. Click the Wall Join tool from the Walls tool set.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the wall and select Join from the context menu.
2. Click X Join from the Tool bar.
3. Select the first wall segment to join.
4. Select the second wall segment to join.
The first wall is split about the second wall to create the join.
The two wall segments must already intersect in order to use this mode, as neither segments length is altered.
Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Roof Face
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Architectural > Roof Face
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Architectural > Roof Face
Parameter Description
Roof Slope Indicates the roof slope creation method and criteria
Angle Creates a roof slope based on an angle; specify the Angle
Rise over Run Creates a roof slope based on rise over run values; specify the Rise and Run.
The rise is the distance along the Y axis the roof rises above the Z height, and
run is the distance along the X axis for the roof to reach that height.
2nd Click Height Creates a roof slope based on a mouse click position (this option only available
in Top/Plan view). Enter the Height for the second mouse click.
Edge Miter Indicates the miter type for the roof edge
Vertical Creates the roof edge perpendicular to the active layer plane
Horizontal Creates the roof edge parallel to the active layer plane
Double Creates the roof edge with a horizontal and vertical miter; specify the
Horizontal and Vertical lengths
Square Creates the lower edge of the roof face perpendicular to the roof surface,
regardless of the roof angle
Hole Miter Specifies miter options for a roof cutout
Vertical Cutout edges are perpendicular to the active layer plane
Creating Roof Faces | 455
Parameter Description
Splayed The bottom edge of a cutout is perpendicular to the active layer plane, and the
top edge of a cutout of is parallel to the active layer plane
Square Cutout edges are perpendicular to the roof surface
Axis Z Sets the roof height at the axis
Angle For angled roof slopes, indicates the roof slope angle
Rise/Run For rise over run roof slopes, specifies the rise and run values
Height Indicates the height of the second mouse click when the roof slope is specified
with that option
Thickness Specifies the roof thickness
Vertical/Horizontal For double miters, specifies the horizontal and vertical miter lengths
3. Click OK.
4. Click-drag the mouse across the 2D object to draw a line that defines the roof axis; click again to complete the
line. A black arrow displays on one side of the line, indicating which side of the object will be the high side of the
roof.
5. Point the mouse to the side of the roof that will be highest, and then click again. The roof axis line displays
selection handles, and the arrow pointing to the high side of the roof turns blue, indicating that the roof face is
complete.
2D view 3D view
Parameter Description
Dormer Settings When the roof face includes one or more dormers, their parameters can be set. Parameter
settings affect all dormers in the roof face.
Wall Thickness Sets the thickness of the walls in the dormer
Roof Thickness Sets the thickness of the dormer roof
1. Click the Connect/Combine tool from the Basic palette, and select either Single Object Connect or Dual Object
Connect from the Tool bar.
2. If the roof faces have different thicknesses, set the Use Vertical Thickness of Subject Roof Face option on the
Tool bar as appropriate.
To automatically adjust the roof face thickness of the second clicked roof face to match the vertical thickness
of the first clicked roof face, select Use Vertical Thickness of Subject Roof Face.
To connect the roof faces without adjusting the thickness, de-select the option.
3. Click the first, and then the second, roof face to connect.
The result of the operation depends on the mode selected, the positions of the roof faces, and the portion of the
roof faces clicked upon.
Single Object Connect mode
2nd click
1st click
1st click 2nd click
For non-intersecting faces, the first For intersecting faces, the first
clicked face is extended to meet the clicked face is trimmed to keep
second clicked face the clicked portion
Creating Roof Faces | 457
2nd click
1st click
1st click
2nd click
For non-intersecting faces, both faces For intersecting faces, both faces are
are extended or trimmed to join trimmed and the clicked parts of the
faces are kept
With Use Vertical Thickness of Subject Roof Face enabled, the thickness of the boundary face
(clicked second) changes to match the vertical thickness of the subject face (clicked first)
2nd click
1st click
2D view 3D view
The edges of the cutout are mitered according to the selections made in the Create Roof Face dialog box during the
creation of the roof face.
To add a cutout to a roof face:
1. Select the roof face.
2. Create an object with the dimensions for the cutout and place it where the cutout will be located.
3. Select both objects.
4. Select Modify > Clip Surface.
458 | Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements
This creates the cutout in the roof face, leaving behind the object used to make the cutout.
5. Select the object used to make the cutout and delete it.
3D view 2D view
In the Vectorworks Design Series products, the Create Roof command is located under a different menu.
Product Command
Vectorworks Architect AEC > Create Roof
Vectorworks Landmark Landmark > Architectural > Create Roof
Vectorworks Spotlight Spotlight > Architectural > Create Roof
Parameter Description
Eave Profile Select the roof edge appearance
Square: angled fascia, soffit edges
Vertical: vertical fascia, angled soffit edges
Horizontal: no fascia, horizontal soffit edges
Double: vertical fascia, horizontal soffit edges
(1) Vertical Specifies the vertical length for a double miter eave
(2) Horizontal Specifies the horizontal length for a double miter eave
(3) Thickness Specifies the roof thickness
(4) Bearing Inset Specifies how far the bearing wall cuts into the roof
(5) Roof Pitch Specifies the roof pitch as an angle or rise:run ratio; click Calculate for an automatic
calculation based on bearing height, eave height, and eave overhang
(6) Bearing Height Specifies the height of the rafter plate or top plate above the wall layer elevation where
the roof will be supported; click Calculate for an automatic calculation based on roof
pitch, eave height, and eave overhang
(7) Eave Height Specifies the height of the lowest portion of the roof; click Calculate for an automatic
calculation based on roof pitch, bearing height, and eave overhang
(8) Eave Overhang Specifies the distance that the roof extends beyond the bearing wall; click Calculate for
an automatic calculation based on roof pitch, bearing height, and eave height
Layer Assigns the roof object to a layer. By default, the roof is created in the active design layer.
To create the roof in a different layer, select an existing layer from the list, or select New
Layer to create a new layer.
Class Assigns the roof object to a class. The standard roof class, Roof-Main, is available as an
option and if it is selected, it is created in the file if it did not already exist. Alternatively,
select Class to create a new class.
Retain Original Objects Retains the source object(s) that formed the basis of the roof
3. Click OK.
460 | Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements
A hip roof is created over the selected object(s) using the criteria set in the Create Roof dialog box.
Parameter Description
Bearing Inset Specifies how far the bearing wall cuts into the roof
Thickness Specifies the roof thickness (normally, this is the perpendicular thickness; when a roof
has different slopes, the vertical thickness can be specified)
Applies To When a roof has different slopes, the vertical thickness can be specified to avoid
incorrect roof intersections. Select Vertical Thickness and enter the Thickness value
Eaves Specify the eave type
Vertical For Double Miter types, enter the vertical length of the eave
Gable Walls An alert displays if you change these settings; confirm that you want to override the
original settings
Show Walls When gable walls exist, specifies whether the gable wall shows or is invisible
Thickness When gable walls exist, specifies the gable wall thickness
Dutch Hip Walls An alert displays if you change these settings; confirm that you want to override the
original settings
Show Walls When Dutch hip walls exist, specifies whether the Dutch hip wall shows or is invisible
Thickness When Dutch hip walls exist, specifies the Dutch hip wall thickness
Parameter Description
Roof Edge Shape Select the basic shape of this roof edge: Eave, Gable, or Dutch Hip. The default is a
hip roof, with an Eave edge on all sides.
When this setting is changed, the available parameters and roof diagram reflect the
selected roof edge shape.
Wall Thickness Specifies the thickness of the wall created for gable and Dutch hip roof edges
(Gable and Dutch Hip only)
Show Wall Select this option to show the wall created for gable and Dutch hip roof edges; when
(Gable and Dutch Hip only) deselected, the wall is invisible
Gable Overhang Specifies how the gable wall on top of the Dutch hip face will be cut; enter zero for a
(Dutch Hip only) flat gable wall, or enter the number of inches the gable wall will be inset from the
gable roof edge
Gable Inset Specifies how far the gable wall on top of the Dutch hip face will be from the edge of
(Dutch Hip only) the hip face
Pitch Specifies the roof pitch as an angle or rise:run ratio; click the calculator for an
(Eave and Dutch Hip only) automatic calculation based on bearing height, eave height, and eave overhang
Bearing Height Specifies the height of the rafter plate or top plate above the wall layer elevation where
the roof will be supported; click the calculator for an automatic calculation based on
pitch, eave height, and eave overhang
Eave Height Specifies the height of the bottom-most portion of the roof; click the calculator for an
automatic calculation based on pitch, bearing height, and eave overhang
Eave Overhang Specifies the distance that the roof extends beyond the bearing wall, click the
calculator for an automatic calculation based on pitch, bearing height, and eave height
Entire Roof Select this option to apply the edited roof parameters to all available roof sections
(Eave and Dutch Hip only)
4. Change the parameters as described in Changing the Roof Edge Shape on page 460, and click OK.
A triangular wall is placed when the gable roof is created.
4. Specify a Gable Inset value to create the Dutch hip face, and change other settings as described in Changing the
Roof Edge Shape on page 460.
5. Click OK.
A triangular wall is placed when the Dutch hip roof is created.
Remove Vertex
Mode Description
Move Vertex Adjusts the position of a selected roof vertex, constrained horizontally or vertically in
combination with the Z-axis Constrain and XY Plane Constrain modes
Add Vertex Adds a peak (vertex) to a roof
Remove Vertex Deletes a roof peak (vertex)
XY Plane Constrain In 3D Reshape mode, reshapes the roof object horizontally, constrained along the X and/or Y
axes
Z-axis Constrain In 3D Reshape mode, reshapes the roof object along the Z axis to change the height of a roof
ridge or eave
The roof edge, ridge, or eave handle location can be changed. The handle movement is constrained along the X or
Y axis (the active layer plane); the height of the roof element cannot be changed in this mode.
Change the slope of a roof face by moving the ridge handle. If the reshape results in a roof slope that approaches
or exceeds 90 degrees, you are prompted to create a gable wall if desired.
Rendered View
The roof ridge or eave handle location can be changed. The handle movement is constrained along the Z axis
(vertically); only the height of the roof element can be changed in this mode.
5. Click when the handle is at the desired location.
466 | Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements
You can create a wide variety of dormer windows in roof objects and roof faces. There are five styles to select from:
trapezium, gable, shed, hip, and bat; each gable type has unique parameters. The editing parameters available in the
Edit Roof Element dialog box depend on the style of dormer chosen.
Dormer walls are always drawn in a clockwise direction for easy texture application.
To create a gable dormer window in a roof object or roof face:
1. Select View > Standard Views > Top/Plan.
2. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
3. Select a window symbol.
The window must be a symbol, not a plug-in object.
4. Select Make Active from the Resources menu. The Symbol Insertion tool is automatically activated from the
Basic palette.
5. Click to place the symbol in the roof object or roof face.
The Edit Roof Element dialog box opens.
Dormer styles
8. Click OK.
The gable dormer with window is created and placed according to the parameters specified. A hole is
automatically created in the roof where the dormer walls exist.
When a gable dormer is created on a roof face, the Object Info palette of a selected roof face object contains two
additional Dormer Settings parameters, Wall Thickness and Roof Thickness. These thickness values apply to the
dormer(s) in the roof face.
2. Position the cursor over the selection handle for the dormer and click.
The Edit Roof Element dialog box opens.
3. Select Edit Dormer and change the desired parameters as described in Creating Dormer Windows on page 467.
To remove the dormer completely, select Remove Object.
4. Click OK.
Creating Skylights
A similar process to creating dormer windows is used to place a full skylight, complete with a window symbol, in the
roof object or roof face.
470 | Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements
A 3D-only window symbol is required for creating a skylight. An existing hybrid symbol can be converted to a 3D
symbol; place the symbol in the drawing and set its parameters, and then switch to a 3D view. Select the symbol,
and then select Modify Convert > Convert to Group. Select the Convert all sub-objects option in the Convert
to Group Options dialog box. With the group selected, choose Modify > Create Symbol to create a 3D symbol
from the group, and select the On Edge option for Insert in Walls.
When creating your own skylight symbols, set the insertion point of the symbol at the back and center of the
symbol.
Insertion point
The insertion point of the symbol determines whether a skylight will be flush or surface-mounted.
Inserting a Skylight
To insert a skylight:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
2. Select a 3D symbol to use in the skylight. Hybrid and 2D window symbols will not work for skylights, though
hybrid symbols can be used to create a cutout.
3. Select Make Active from the Resources menu, or double-click on the symbol. The Symbol Insertion tool is
automatically activated from the Basic palette.
4. Switch to Top/Plan view.
5. Click to place the symbol in the desired location in the roof object or roof face.
The Edit Roof Element dialog box opens.
6. Click Edit Skylight.
The skylight parameters are displayed.
Adding Roof Elements to Roof Objects and Roof Faces | 471
Parameter Description
Offset from corner Specifies the distance from the edge of the roof to the center of the skylight symbol
Offset from building line Sets the distance from the edge of the building to the center of the skylight symbol
Do not insert symbol Select to create a cutout in the roof without inserting the window symbol
Remove object Deletes the skylight from the roof
Edit dormer Accesses the dormer parameters instead of the skylight parameters
2. Position the cursor over the selection handle for the skylight and click.
The Edit Roof Element dialog box opens, with the skylight parameters displayed.
3. Edit the parameters as described in Inserting a Skylight on page 470.
To remove the skylight completely, select Remove object.
4. Click OK.
The drawing area displays the specified changes for the selected skylight.
The skylight miter parameters can be changed from the Object Info palette.
472 | Chapter 11: Creating Building Elements
Splayed Cuts the roof horizontally at the top of the skylight, and vertically at the bottom
Square Cut Cuts the roof perpendicular to the roof at both the top and bottom of the skylight
Adding Building Elements 12
Structural Shapes and Details
Eight commonly used structural steel shapes are available as 2D objects. 3D equivalents of these objects are also
available in the Vectorworks Design Series products. Since the 2D and 3D parameters are nearly identical, all
parameters are documented with the 2D objects for convenience. Two additional 2D/3D structural shapes are also
available in the Vectorworks Design Series products: bulb flat and Z-section, as well as four additional series (ANZ,
BSI, DIN, and JIS); for information, see Creating Structural Shapes in Vectorworks Design Series on page 135 in the
Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
The Update Plug-in Objects command may need to be run on files containing structural shapes that were created
in an earlier version of Vectorworks software. This command converts the structural shapes to the latest format;
see Migrating from Previous Versions on page 49.
Angle
Thickness
Toe R. (Side A)
Length of
Side A Fillet
Radius Toe R.
(Side B)
Insertion
Point Length of Side B
Parameter Description
Series Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes
Size Select the angle size
Place Locus at Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D angle
Centroid
Length (Vectorworks Enter the length of the 3D angle
Design Series
required)
Custom Size Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom angle size
Length of Side A/ Displays the length of angle sides A and B, or if Custom Size is selected,
B allows entry of a custom value
474 | Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements
Parameter Description
Thickness Displays the thickness of the angle sides, or if Custom Size is selected, allows
entry of a custom value
Toe R. (Side A/B) Displays the toe radius value for sides A and B, or if Custom Size is selected,
allows entry of a custom value
Fillet Radius Displays the fillet radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Section Properties Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch
units for imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of
the units selected and Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)
Area Displays the angle area
About Axis X-X/Y-Y
Moment of Inertia Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Section Modulus Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Radius of Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
Gyration (Y-Y) centroidal axes
About Axis Z-Z
Radius of Displays the least radius of gyration about the principal (Z-Z) axis
Gyration
Tan (Alpha) Displays the tangent of the angle of the principal axis from the vertical
Channel
Insertion Flange
Point Width
Flange Angle
Toe Radius
Fillet
Radius
Web
Depth Thickness
Free
Height
Flange Thickness
Flange Width/2
Parameter Description
Series Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes
Size Select the channel size
Draw Free Height Select whether to draw the 2D channel with free height lines
Lines
Place Locus at Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D channel
Centroid
Length (Vectorworks Enter the length of the 3D channel
Design Series
required)
Custom Size Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom channel size
Depth Displays the depth between endpoints, or if Custom Size is selected, allows
entry of a custom value
Flange Width Displays the flange width, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Flange Thickness Displays the flange thickness, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Flange Angle Displays the flange angle degrees, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry
(Deg.) of a custom value
Web Thickness Displays the web thickness of the channel, or if Custom Size is selected,
allows entry of a custom value
Toe Radius Displays the toe radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Fillet Radius Displays the fillet radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Section Properties Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch
units for imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of
the units selected and Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)
Area Displays the channel area
About Axis X-X/Y-Y
Moment of Inertia Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Section Modulus Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Radius of Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
Gyration (Y-Y) centroidal axes
476 | Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements
I-beam
Insertion
Flange Point
Width
Web
Depth Thickness Free Height
Flange Angle
Flange Thickness
Flange Width/4
Parameter Description
Series Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes
Size Select the I-beam size
Length (Vectorworks Enter the length of the 3D I-beam
Design Series
required)
Draw Center Line Select whether to draw the 2D I-beam with center lines
Draw Free Height Select whether to draw the 2D I-beam with free height lines
Lines
Place Locus at Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D I-beam
Centroid
Custom Size Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom I-beam size
Depth Displays the depth between endpoints, or if Custom Size is selected, allows
entry of a custom value
Flange Width Displays the flange width, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Web Thickness Displays the web thickness of the flange, or if Custom Size is selected, allows
entry of a custom value
Structural Shapes and Details | 477
Parameter Description
Flange Thickness Displays the flange thickness, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Flange Angle Displays the flange angle in degrees, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry
(Deg.) of a custom value
Fillet Radius Displays the fillet radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Toe Radius Displays the toe radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Section Properties Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch
units for imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of
the units selected and Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)
Area Displays the I-beam area
About Axis X-X/Y-Y
Moment of Inertia Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Section Modulus Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Radius of Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
Gyration (Y-Y) centroidal axes
Rectangular Tubing
Height
Wall
Thickness
Insertion
Point
Width
Inside
Fillet
Radius
1. Click the Rectangular Tubing tool from the Detailing tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the rectangular properties and click OK.
Parameter Description
Series Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes
Size Select the rectangular tubing size
478 | Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements
Parameter Description
Length (Vectorworks Enter the length of the 3D rectangular tubing
Design Series
required)
Draw Center Lines Select whether to draw the 2D rectangular tubing with center lines
Place Locus at Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D rectangular tubing
Centroid
Custom Size Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom rectangular tubing
size
Width Displays the width of the tubing, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Height Displays the height of the tubing, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of
a custom value
Wall Thickness Displays the wall thickness of the tubing, or if Custom Size is selected, allows
entry of a custom value
Inside Fillet Displays the inside fillet radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows
Radius entry of a custom value
Section Properties Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch
units for imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of
the units selected and Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)
Area Displays the rectangular tubing area
About Axis X-X/
Y-Y
Moment of Inertia Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Section Modulus Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Radius of Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
Gyration (Y-Y) centroidal axes
Round Tubing
Outside Diameter
Wall
Thickness
Insertion
Point
1. Click the Round Tubing tool from the Detailing tool set.
Structural Shapes and Details | 479
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the round tubing properties and click OK.
Parameter Description
Series Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes
Size Select the round tubing size
Length (Vectorworks Enter the length of the 3D round tubing
Design Series
required)
Draw Center Lines Select whether to draw the 2D round tubing with center lines
Place Locus at Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D round tubing
Centroid
Custom Size Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom round tubing size
Outside Diameter Displays the outside diameter of the tubing, or if Custom Size is selected,
allows entry of a custom value
Wall Thickness Displays the wall thickness of the tubing, or if Custom Size is selected, allows
entry of a custom value
Section Properties Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch
units for imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of
the units selected and Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)
Area Displays the round tubing area
About Axis X-X/Y-Y
Moment of Inertia Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Section Modulus Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Radius of Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
Gyration (Y-Y) centroidal axes
Square Tubing
Width
Wall
Thickness
Insertion
Point
Width
Inside
Fillet R.
1. Click the Square Tubing tool from the Detailing tool set.
480 | Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the square tubing properties and click OK.
Parameter Description
Series Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes
Size Select the square tubing size
Length (Vectorworks Enter the length of the 3D square tubing
Design Series
required)
Place Locus at Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D square tubing
Centroid
Draw Center Lines Select whether to draw the 2D square tubing with center lines
Custom Size Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom square tubing size
Width Displays the width of the tubing, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of
a custom value
Wall Thickness Displays the wall thickness of the tubing, or if Custom Size is selected, allows
entry of a custom value
Inside Fillet R. Displays the inside fillet radius value of the tubing, or if Custom Size is
selected, allows entry of a custom value
Section Properties Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch
units for imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of
the units selected and Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)
Area Displays the square tubing area
About Axis X-X/Y-Y
Moment of Inertia Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Section Modulus Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Radius of Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
Gyration (Y-Y) centroidal axes
Structural Shapes and Details | 481
Tee
Flange Width
Flange
Insertion Width/4
Point Flange Thickness Flange
Scope
Depth/2 Flange
Fillet Radius
Radius
Parameter Description
Series Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes
Size Select the tee size
Length (Vectorworks Enter the length of the 3D tee
Design Series
required)
Draw Center Line Select whether to draw the 2D tee with center lines
Place Locus at Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D tee
Centroid
Custom Size Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom tee size
Depth Displays the depth between endpoints, or if Custom Size is selected, allows
entry of a custom value
Flange Width Displays the flange width, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Web Thickness Displays the web thickness, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Flange Thickness Displays the flange thickness, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
482 | Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements
Parameter Description
Web Slope (Deg.) Displays the web slope in degrees, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of
a custom value
Flange Slope Displays the flange slope in degrees, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry
(deg.) of a custom value
Toe Radius Displays the toe radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Flange Radius Displays the flange radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Fillet Radius Displays the fillet radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Section Properties Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch
units for imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of
the units selected and Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)
Area Displays the tee area
About Axis X-X/Y-Y
Moment of Inertia Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Section Modulus Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Radius of Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
Gyration (Y-Y) centroidal axes
Wide Flange
Flange Width (Top)
Insertion
Point
Flange Thickness
Fillet Radius
Flange Thickness
1. Click the Wide Flange tool from the Detailing tool set.
Structural Shapes and Details | 483
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the
object is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the wide flange properties and click OK.
Parameter Description
Series Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes
Size Select the wide flange size
Length (Vectorworks Enter the length of the 3D wide flange
Design Series
required)
Draw Center Line Select whether to draw the 2D wide flange with center lines
Draw Free Height Select whether to draw the 2D wide flange with free height lines
Lines
Place Locus at Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D wide flange
Centroid
Custom Size Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom wide flange size
Depth Displays the depth between endpoints, or if Custom Size is selected, allows
entry of a custom value
Flange Width Displays the top and bottom flange width of the wide flange, or if Custom Size
(Top) / (Bottom) is selected, allows entry of a custom value
Web Thickness Displays the web thickness, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Flange Thickness Displays the flange thickness, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Fillet Radius Displays the fillet radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value
Section Properties Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch
units for imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of
the units selected and Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)
Area Displays the wide flange area
About Axis X-X/Y-Y
Moment of Inertia Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Section Modulus Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
Radius of Gyration Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical
(Y-Y) centroidal axes
484 | Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements
Shaft Break
To insert a Shaft Break object:
1. Click the Shaft Break tool from the Detailing tool set.
2. Click to define the start point, click again to define the end point and rotation, and drag the cursor and click to set
the width.
Shaft Diameter
Wall Thickness
Width of Break
Parameter Description
Shaft Diameter Specify the diameter of the shaft break object
Width of Break Specify the width of the shaft break object
Configuration Select Solid or Hollow
Solid Hollow
Wall Thickness For hollow shaft break configurations, indicate the thickness of the shaft
wall
Slot
All workspaces contain the Slot object.
To insert a slot:
Parameter Description
Width Specify the width of the slot object
Length Specify the width of the slot object
Show Center Line When selected, draws the slot with center line(s)
Batt Insulation
The Batt Insulation tool draws a planar insulation fill along a line. This tool is useful for creating custom details. The
insulation can be placed within a wall, where it automatically adjusts to the length of the wall.
A better method of creating insulation fills, especially for walls, is to use a tile fill, which scales and rotates within
walls and slab and wall components. See Defining Tiles on page 520.
1. Click the Batt Insulation tool from the Detailing tool set.
2. Click to mark the beginning of the insulation fill and then click again to mark the end of the object. If this is the
first time the tool is used in this session, the Properties dialog box opens. Specify the preferences to use for this
tool during this session, and then click OK. The parameters can be changed later in the Object Info palette.
3. The created batt insulation can be dragged into an existing wall.
Click
Click Set Position for a Batt Insulation in Wall object, to fit the
insulation to the wall; Size to Wall Length must be enabled
Parameter Description
Insert When inserted in walls, aligns the insertion point of the batt insulation with
the containing walls center line or left or right edge
Break When inserted in walls, select the type of wall break for the batt insulation
Height When inserted in walls, sets the height of the insulation from the bottom of
the wall
Flip When inserted in walls, flips the orientation of the batt insulation
Set Position When inserted in walls and with Size to Wall Length selected, sets the
insulation to fit along the length of the wall. The Move By Points tool is
activated automatically; if Size to Wall Length is deselected, set the offset of
the batt insulation along the wall as described in Moving Symbols in Walls
with the Reference Point Mode on page 493.
Length Specifies the length of the batt insulation, when Size to Wall Length is
deselected
486 | Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements
Parameter Description
Thickness Sets the width of the batt insulation
Offset Sets the offset of the batt insulation from its insertion point
Folds/Unit Thk. Sets the thickness of the insulation folds
Size to Wall Length When inserted in walls, automatically sets the length of the batt insulation to
match the wall length
Add to Start/End Specifies an offset from the start or end of the wall, when the batt insulation is
sized to fit the wall length
Solid Fill Applies a solid fill to the background of the batt insulation; set the fill color
from the Attributes palette
Standard
Flip
Preferences
Mode Description
Flip Flips the symbol during placement (for example, changes the direction that a door
opens)
Standard Places the symbol using the orientation at creation
Preferences Specifies symbol placement information
Parameter Description
Start To set the first symbol position with the mouse, select Next Click; to set the first symbol
Offset position by a specified distance from a wall end, select the button next to the text box and
enter a distance from the wall end
Spacing To place successive symbols by mouse click, select Next Click; to place successive
symbols a specified distance apart, select the button next to the text box and enter a
distance between symbols
Copies If selected, enter the specific number of symbol copies to insert into the wall
7. Click OK.
8. Click on the wall to indicate where the first symbol should be inserted. A preview of the symbols are shown along
the wall to aid in placement. If inserting the first symbol by an offset value, click anywhere on the wall and the
first symbol preview displays at the proper offset distance.
9. If spacing symbols by the next mouse click, move the mouse along the wall to set the spacing between symbols,
and click again to insert the duplicate symbols. If spacing symbols by a specified distance, click again to insert the
duplicate symbols. If a number of copies was specified, that number of symbols is automatically inserted.
Move the mouse to the opposite side of the wall to flip the symbol direction.
Duplicate Array dialog box for Duplicate Array dialog box for
straight walls round walls
Parameter Description
Direction The preview window shows the direction the duplicate symbols will be
placed in the wall. To reverse the direction of the duplication, click the
button to the left of the window.
Number of Duplicates Specify the number of copies of the original object to create
Offset Between Specify how far apart to place the duplicate symbols. For straight walls,
Duplicates enter the distance from the center of each symbol to the center of the next
symbol in the wall. For round walls, specify either the distance or the angle
between the duplicates. Distance is measured along the outer arc of the
round wall. Angle is the angle between the center of each symbol to the
center of the next symbol in the wall.
Z Offset Between Optionally, specify a difference in height on the wall between each symbol
Duplicates
3. Click OK, and the array of duplicate symbols is placed into the wall.
Action Description
Select one or more symbols inserted Inserted symbols can be dragged out of the wall (and into another
in a wall, with Wall Insertion mode wall if desired)
on
Select one or more symbols not Selected symbols can be inserted into a wall by dragging them
inserted in a wall, with Wall over the wall
Insertion mode on
Select one or more symbols inserted The symbols are moved within the wall. When one of the objects
in a wall, with Wall Insertion mode in the selection reaches the end of the wall, none of the objects
off can be moved farther in that direction.
The Move Selection dialog box opens. The fields available depend on whether the wall that contains the selected
symbol(s) is straight or round.
Parameter Description
Direction The preview window shows the direction the symbol(s) will be moved in the wall. To
reverse the direction of the move, click the button to the left of the window.
Offset For straight walls, specify the distance along the wall to move the object(s). For round
walls, specify either the Distance or the Angle between the old and new locations.
The distance is measured along the outer arc of the round wall.
Move
Mode Description
Move Moves and duplicates selected symbols according to the distance and direction
specified by two mouse clicks
Distribute Moves and distributes duplicate symbols between the points specified by two mouse
clicks
492 | Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements
Mode Description
Reference Moves selected symbols according to a clicked reference point and a specified offset
Point distance from that point; the Preferences settings are not applicable when this mode
is selected
Object Keeps the original symbols; this is the same as selecting the Retain option in the tool
Retention preferences
1. Select the symbol(s) in a wall to move and/or duplicate; if multiple symbols are selected, they must be in the same
wall.
2. Click the Move by Points tool from the Basic palette and click Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Move by Points Settings dialog box opens. Select the desired settings and click OK.
Parameter Description
Number of Specifies the number of copies of the original object(s) to create (must be at least
Duplicates one); same as the Number of Duplicates field on the Tool bar
Original Object
Retain Keeps the original symbol(s); this option performs the same function as
selecting the Object Retention button on the Tool bar
Leave Selected Keeps the original symbol(s) selected for further action
To select additional symbols or to change the currently selected symbol to move, duplicate, or distribute, press and
hold the Alt key (Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) while shift-clicking additional objects or click-dragging the
mouse around them to marquee select them; the Selection tool is activated in boomerang mode while the Alt or
Cmd is being pressed.
3. Select either the Move or Distribute mode, depending on the desired outcome.
4. Click once to indicate the vector start point, and click again to indicate the vector end point.
Symbols are duplicated or moved within the wall, in the direction and distance specified. If the wall is not long
enough to accommodate the specified duplicates and spacing, the number of symbols and the distance between
them is adjusted automatically.
Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall | 493
1. Select the symbol(s) to move; if multiple symbols are selected, they must be in the same wall.
2. Click the Move by Points tool from the Basic palette, and select the Reference Point mode from the Tool bar.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the symbol and select Set Position from the
context menu. The Move by Points tool is automatically selected, in Reference Point mode.
To select additional symbols or to change the currently selected symbol to move, press and hold the Alt key
(Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) while shift-clicking additional objects or click-dragging the mouse around
them to marquee select them; the Selection tool is activated in boomerang mode while the Alt or Cmd is being
pressed.
3. Click to indicate either the reference point, or a point on the selected symbol.
The Enter Offset dialog box opens, displaying the distance between the clicked points. The fields available depend
on whether the wall is straight or round.
Enter Offset dialog box for Enter Offset dialog box for
straight walls round walls
4. For round walls, select whether to offset the symbol by Distance or by the Angle along the arc of the wall.
5. Change the offset distance or angle.
6. Select whether the first click made was the reference point or a point on the symbol to be moved.
7. Click OK. The selected symbol is moved along the wall as specified.
8. The setting for how the first click is interpreted remains set until it is changed.
The Object Info palette displays the symbols information. If several symbols are selected, only the common
information can be changed.
3. Change the symbols settings as necessary.
Parameter Description
Insert Changes the insertion point location in relation to the symbol position
Break Changes the wall break style where the symbol is inserted
Height Changes the height of the symbol in the wall
Flip Click to flip through a series of four rotations until the desired orientation is reached.
A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Exit Wall Hole
Component command becomes available from the Modify menu, and the Exit Wall Hole Component button is
visible in the top right corner of the drawing window.
2. Any solid shape(s) can be drawn to define the hole shape. The geometry must intersect the wall.
Select the 2D Polygon tool or Polyline tool from the Basic palette and trace the symbol outline to define the hole
shape. Select Model > Extrude to create a 3D wall hole shape. Alternatively, create 3D wall hole geometry
directly using 3D modeling tools. The wall hole geometry has a red pen style; this can be changed from the
Attributes palette if desired.
Other drawing objects display, and can be snapped to, while in the editing mode (the Vectorworks display
preference Show other objects while in editing modes must be enabled). The symbol being edited is displayed
with its pen style attributes, to distinguish it from the rest of drawing.
3. Click Exit Wall Hole Component to return to the design layer.
Since the wall hole component was added to the symbol definition, all instances of the symbol will cut holes in
walls according to the geometry drawn.
Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click In the editing mode, draw the The 3D geometry creates the hole of
(Macintosh) and select Edit 3D Wall Hole geometry to create the 3D wall hole, the desired shape in the wall
Component from the context menu to and extrude it to create the wall hole
enter wall hole component editing mode shape
Texture Result
Part
Holes Applies the texture specified for the walls Holes part to the wall faces created by the
cutting object
Wall Left Applies the texture specified for the walls Left part to the wall faces created by the
cutting object
Wall Right Applies the texture specified for the walls Right part to the wall faces created by the
cutting object
Each wall hole component can only have one texture part defined. Therefore, up to three different cutting objects
would be necessary to apply three different texture parts to the wall hole faces.
Creating Columns
Use the Column tool to place a column in the drawing.
Capital
Shaft
Base
Additional column capabilities are available in the Vectorworks Architect product (see Creating Columns and
Pilasters in Vectorworks Architect on page 139 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide).
Parameter Description
Use Center Marks Select this option to size the cross at the column insertion point and enter the
Center Mark Size
Creating Columns | 497
Parameter Description
Height Directly sets the desired height of the column, including base and capital (if
any). When the column height is determined manually by this method, the Top
Bound property of the column is automatically set to Layer Elevation, and the
Top Offset value is modified accordingly.
When the top of the column is bound by the layer wall height value, the wall
height updates automatically.
Top Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the top of the column.
The Layer Wall Height value is set by the design layer (see Setting Design
Layer Properties on page 97)
Additional options are available for the Vectorworks Architect product; see
Creating Columns and Pilasters in Vectorworks Architect on page 139 in the
Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Top Offset Sets the offset of the top of the column from its specified top bound height. If
setting the boundary of the top of the column to the layer elevation, enter the
columns height for the Top Offset; if setting the height of the top of the
column to the default wall height, specify any offset above or below the layers
default wall height.
Bot Bound Sets the vertical reference that determines the bottom of the column; Layer
Elevation is the only option available unless the Vectorworks Architect
product is installed
Bot Offset For the bottom of the column, sets the offset from the layer elevation
Shaft Type Select to draw the column with an oval or rectangular shaft type
Shaft Width Enter the shaft width
Shaft Depth Enter the shaft depth
Shaft Corner Radius For rectangular shaft type, enter the corner radius of the shaft
Shaft Taper Select whether to draw the column with a classic or straight taper, or no taper
Taper Width For a straight or classic taper, enter the taper width
Taper Depth For a straight or classic taper, enter the taper depth
Use Capital Select whether to add a capital to the column
Capital Type Select to draw the column with an oval, oval mushroom, rectangular, or
rectangular mushroom capital
Capital Width Enter the capital width
Capital Depth Enter the capital depth
Capital Height Enter the capital height
Capital Corner For rectangular capital type, enter the corner radius of the capital
Radius
Use Base Select whether to add a base to the column
Base Type Select an oval or rectangular base type
Base Width Enter the base width
Base Depth Enter the base depth
498 | Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements
Parameter Description
Base Height Enter the base height
Base Corner Radius For rectangular base type, enter the base corner radius
Base Divisions Enter the number of divisions for the base
Divider Depth/ For more than one base division, enter the depth and height for each divider
Height
Get Finishes/Classes Click to open the Get Finishes/Classes dialog box to select the class to use for
rendering the 3D shaft, capital, and base of the column
Shaft Finish Displays the class to use for rendering the 3D shaft (selected in the Get
Finishes/Classes dialog box)
Capital Finish If Use Capital is selected, displays the class to use for rendering the 3D capital
(selected in the Get Finishes/Classes dialog box)
Base Finish If Use Base is selected, displays the class to use for rendering the 3D base
(selected in the Get Finishes/Classes dialog box)
4. Click OK.
A column with the specified parameters is placed on the drawing. The object parameters can be modified in the
Object Info palette.
1. Click the Simple Stair tool from the Walls tool set.
2. Click to place the simple stair in the drawing, and click again to set the stairs rotation. If this is the first time a
stair is placed in the drawing, the stair object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently
created stairs.
The stair parameters can be edited from the Object Info palette.
Parameter Description
Style Select the stair style: standard, indented, open riser, or masonry
Width Specifies the width of the staircase
Flr-Flr Height Specifies the height of the staircase from floor to floor
Max Riser Indicates the horizontal maximum thickness of the riser
Tread Depth/Height Sets the tread depth (front to back) and the tread height
Nosing Depth Specifies the nosing depth
Config Select the stair configuration: straight, straight with a landing, left and right
landings, and left and right double-back stairs with landings (even and
irregular)
Creating Simple Stairs | 499
Parameter Description
Landing Tread Indicates how many steps occur before the landing (does not apply to even
double back stairs)
Separation For double back style stairs, sets the separation distance between the flights
Offset 1/2 For stairs with landings, indicates the distance to offset the landing from the
stairs on each side of the landing
Curved Landing Creates curved landings; the radius matches the stair width
Stringer Width/Offset Sets the stringer width (thickness) on each side of the stair, and specifies the
distance between the outside of the stair tread to the outside of the stringers
Draw Lower Stair Hides a portion of the stair with a stair break, so that the lower portion of the
Break stair can be displayed in 2D
Show Data Select to display the number of risers and riser height along with the
path-of-travel arrow; an Up or Down arrow must be selected in Arrows for
stair data to be displayed
Draw Top Tread Specify whether the stair should include a tread at the same level as the upper
floor it serves
Create 3D Creates a 3D version of the stair to display in views other than Top/Plan
Left/Right Rail Adds handrails to the left and right of the staircase
Rail Height/Width Sets the height and width for the railing(s)
Arrows Select whether to display the path-of-travel arrow, and in which direction
Step/Rail/Stringer Select the Class to assign to the steps, railing(s), and stringers
Finish
500 | Chapter 12: Adding Building Elements
Applying Object Attributes 13
Attributes are characteristics that can be applied to 2D planar and screen objects in a drawing, including fill style, pen
style, opacity, line thickness, and line end markers. Fill styles include solid colors, patterns (including foreground and
background colors), hatches, tiles, gradients, and images. Pen styles include solid colors, patterns (including
foreground and background colors), and line types.
There are various ways to apply attributes to objects:
Use the Attributes palette to apply attributes to a selected object.
Use the Attributes palette to set default attributes that will be applied as objects are created.
Use the Eyedropper tool to transfer attributes from one object to another.
Set up a class to use certain attributes when objects are created in that class or when the class is assigned to an
existing object.
The attributes available on the Attributes palette can be customized. Fill and line patterns, line thickness, and line end
marker style attributes can all be adjusted as needed; to reuse the custom attributes in other files, save them to a
template file. Attributes that are resources (hatches, tiles, gradients, images, and line types) are even more flexible; they
can easily be created, edited, reused in other files, and shared with coworkers. In addition, hatches, tiles, gradients, and
images can be mapped to suit a specific object.
Fill Style
Fill Color
Pen Style
Pen Color
Opacity
Line Thickness
Marker controls
Attributes can be applied to most 2D planar and screen objects, with a few exceptions. Line end markers can only be
applied to open objects, such as lines, arcs, and polylines. Only pen color and opacity can be applied to text; however, a
fill can be applied to the text box (the background behind the text).
If you are using the same attribute settings for several objects, create a class for those objects and apply the class
attributes at creation. Class attributes can also be set for selected objects; see Setting Class Attributes on page 112.
Most of the attribute types (fill, pen, opacity, line thickness, and marker) are specified directly from the Attributes
palette. Some of the settings available on the palette can be customized; fill and line patterns, line thickness, and line
end marker styles can all be adjusted as needed.
Line types, and hatch, tile, gradient, and image fills are resources; you can select them from the default content in the
Attributes palette (see Libraries on page 155), or you can create or import custom resources and apply them from the
Resource Browser.
In Vectorworks Design Series products, the Attributes palette has a utility menu that sets default and global attributes.
See Setting Global and Default Attributes on page 606 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
502 | Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes
Transferring Attributes
The Eyedropper tool transfers attributes from one object to another in a single step, including fill, pen, line, text, wall,
and other attributes.
Mode Description
Pick up Attributes Selects an objects attributes
Apply Attributes Transfers selected attributes to another object
Preferences Sets the default parameters to be used for the tool
Settings menu Sets the group of parameters to be used for the tool-either the currently active settings,
or a selection from the list of saved settings
Press the Option (Macintosh) or Ctrl (Windows) key to switch between the Pick Up and Apply modes.
Transferring Attributes | 503
Parameter Description
Saved Settings Options
Settings Select <Active Settings> to use the attributes currently selected in the dialog box; to use
a set of saved attributes, select them from the pull-down list
Save Opens a dialog box to name and save the currently selected attributes so that they can
quickly be selected as a set
Manage Opens the Saved Settings dialog box to rename or delete sets of saved tool attributes
(see Managing Saved Settings on page 505)
All Checked box: All attributes in the group are selected; click to deselect all attributes
in the group.
Empty box: No attributes in the group are selected; click to select all attributes in the
group for transfer.
Box displays (Windows) or (Macintosh): One or more attributes in the
group are not selected; click to select all attributes in the group for transfer.
Fill Attributes Transfers fill attributes, including foreground and background colors, style (pattern,
hatch, tile, gradient, or image fill), and texture
Pen Attributes Transfers pen foreground and background colors and style (solid, pattern, or line type)
Line Attributes Transfers line weight (thickness), presence of markers, and marker attributes
504 | Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes
Parameter Description
Text Attributes Transfers text attributes to another text object, dimension, or plug-in object, including
font, size, font style, alignment and spacing. Alignment and spacing are transferred to
text objects only.
Wall Attributes Transfers wall thickness and component settings for walls and round walls; components
define wall thickness, so components cannot be transferred without also transferring the
thickness parameter
Viewport Attributes Transfers viewport attributes to another viewport, including class and layer visibility
settings and attribute overrides. Other Properties refers to the remaining viewport
options such as view, render mode, projection, and advanced properties. Viewport
attributes can be transferred between files; class, layer, and other resources specified in
an attribute override are resolved by the name of the class, layer, or resource,
respectively.
Other Attributes
Record Transfers the database record attributes
Plug-in Parameters Transfers plug-in parameters between plug-in objects, including objects inserted in
walls
Class Selects the class for transfer (makes the target object the same class as the source object)
IFC Data (Vectorworks Transfers IFC data to another object, while preserving unique IFC identifiers. If the
Architect/Landmark object receiving the data does not yet have a unique identifier, it is automatically
required) created.
Pick Up Sets Defaults Changes the default Attributes palette settings to match those of the source object;
objects created from then on use the attributes of the source object
Use Class Attributes Transfers the by-class settings of the source object, provided the target object is in the
same class as the source object
Object Opacity Transfers an objects opacity setting
3. Specify the attributes to be selected and applied by the Eyedropper tool, and click OK.
4. Click Pick Up Attributes from the Tool bar.
The cursor changes to an eyedropper.
5. Click the object that is the source of the attributes.
6. Click Apply Attributes from the Tool bar.
The cursor changes from an eyedropper to a paint bucket.
7. Click the target object for the attributes.
The attributes are transferred to the object.
Click source object for Click target object for The attributes are
attributes attributes transferred
To transfer attributes between files, the target objects, classes, records, textures, and other attributes must already
be present in the target file. The Eyedropper tool does not create objects or attributes.
Fill Attributes | 505
1. Select the Eyedropper tool from the Basic tool palette, and then click Preferences on the Tool bar. The
Eyedropper Preferences dialog box opens.
2. Click Manage.
The Saved Settings dialog box opens. Select the set of saved attributes to change.
Parameter Description
Rename Select and enter a new name for the set of attributes. If the entered name is already assigned to
another set of attributes, you are prompted to confirm that you want to replace the existing set
with the set being saved.
Delete Select to delete the set of attributes. You are prompted to confirm that you want to delete the
saved settings.
3. Click OK to close the Saved Settings dialog box. Click OK again to close the Eyedropper Preferences dialog box.
Fill Attributes
Objects can be filled with a solid color, pattern (with foreground and background colors), hatch, tile, gradient, or image.
Alternatively, set the object fill to None to create transparent objects with no fill.
Hatch, tile, gradient, and image fills can be customized to suit the object to which they are applied. The Attributes
palette displays a button for each of these fills to open a settings dialog box for customizing the fill. In addition, you can
use the Attribute Mapping tool to edit the size, position, and angle of an associative hatch, tile, gradient, or image fill
that has been applied to an object (see Mapping Fills with the Attribute Mapping Tool on page 531).
Parameter Description
Pattern Select a pattern to edit from the Pattern list, and then click in the editing box on the left to add and
delete pixels; the edits display in the preview window to the right of the editing box
Revert Restores the pattern to its original settings (you must click this before you select another pattern or
click OK)
2. When all edits are complete, click OK to save the customized patterns. The edited patterns are available from the
Fill Pattern and Pen Pattern boxes on the Attributes dialog box, for the current file only.
Pen Attributes
Pen attributes apply to object outlines, and can be a solid or pattern line of any thickness and color. Alternatively, apply
a standard or custom line type, to add graphic elements to a line. Line types are resources that can include dashes, text,
or any 2D object.
To apply color to text objects, select the Solid pen style, and set the appropriate color.
For more information about using color boxes in the Attributes palette, see Applying Colors on page 540.
Opacity Attributes
In addition to the overall layer opacity settings described in Setting the Design Layer Opacity on page 100, an
opacity setting is available for individual objects. Opacity can be applied to any type of 2D object, including planar
objects, 2D walls, text, worksheet backgrounds, and plug-in objects that include a 2D object.
If layer opacity is set in addition to object opacity, the results are additive; for example, a layer opacity of 50% and
an object opacity of 50% will display the object at 25% opacity. Similarly, the opacity settings of nested and
container objects are combined.
The Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging Vectorworks preference must be enabled to apply and display the
opacity attribute. See Display Preferences on page 18.
To set the opacity of a 2D object:
1. Select the object(s) and click the Opacity button on the Attributes palette to open the Set Opacity dialog box.
2. Drag the Opacity slider to the left to increase the transparency, or enter an opacity percentage (0-100) in the box
to the right of the slider. Alternatively, select Use Class Opacity to use the opacity value set by the objects class.
If Use at Creation is enabled for the objects class, the objects opacity is automatically set by the class. If Use at
Creation is disabled for the class, the object only takes on the class style when the Use Class Opacity option is
selected. (See Setting Class Attributes on page 112.) Class opacity can be overridden in viewports.
3. If desired, click Preview to view the results of the opacity setting.
4. Click OK to apply the opacity setting.
The opacity setting applies to 2D objects only. For a similar effect in 3D, a transparency shader can be applied with the
Renderworks product (see Creating Textures on page 591).
Line Thickness Attributes | 509
Select a
line thickness
Parameter Description
Units Select the Units to be used for the thickness of the edited line
New Enter the new thickness value to replace the current thickness value listed to its left
2. When all edits are complete, click OK to save the customized set of line thicknesses.
Marker Attributes
You can apply line start and line end markers to open objects, including lines, arcs, polylines, 2D polygons, and
freehand lines. You can also apply line end markers to the leader lines on callout and dimension objects. Dimensions
have other default markers assigned as part of the dimension standard setup, but these cannot be applied or removed
through the Attributes palette.
In the Attributes palette, click the Line Start Marker Toggle button, the Line End Marker Toggle button, or both
buttons to specify the end(s) to receive the displayed marker. When a marker is applied to an object, the toggle button is
highlighted. To always use the same style for both ends of the object, also click the Marker Link Toggle button;
whenever the marker style of one end is changed, the other ends marker style automatically changes to match.
To switch to a different marker style, click Line Startpoint Style or Line Endpoint Style. Select a marker style from
the list, or click Edit Marker List to create a new style. See Editing the Marker List on page 511 for more
information.
Select Class Style to use the marker attributes set by the objects class.
If Use at Creation is enabled for the objects class, the objects marker style is automatically set by the class.
If Use at Creation is disabled for the class, the object only takes on the class style when the Class Style option is
selected.
See Setting Class Attributes on page 112.
Marker Attributes | 511
Parameter Description
Current Marker Lists the marker types that are available for selection when drawing; change the list order by
Types clicking and dragging in the # column
New Creates a new marker type; see Creating or Editing Marker Types on page 512
Edit Edits the currently selected marker type; see Creating or Editing Marker Types on page 512
Delete Deletes the currently selected marker
Parameter Description
Preview Displays a preview of the markers appearance
General Options Specifies the markers shape and style
Root Type Specifies the general shape of the marker
Fill For closed root types, specifies the type of fill
Base For triangular root types, specifies the shape of the base
Angle For triangular and hexagonal root types, indicates the angle of the root
Length Indicates the length of the marker, from base to tip
Using Hatch Fills | 513
Parameter Description
Width Specifies the marker width, for marker types that have a width
Half Tick For marker types except cone and lasso, displays half the marker on the indicated side
Tail For markers which can be reversed, flips the marker direction to create a tail marker
Thickness Options Specifies the marker pen thickness
Use Line Thickness Uses the same thickness as that of the associated line, adjusting automatically along
with any line thickness changes
Use Dimension Slash Uses the same thickness as the dimension slash, set on the Dimensions tab of the
Thickness document preferences (see Dimension Preferences on page 32)
Use Custom Thickness Specifies a custom marker thickness and unit (mils, points, or millimeters)
Associative Hatches
Associative hatch fills are resources; you can select them from the default content in the Attributes palette (see
Libraries on page 155), or you can create or import custom resources and apply them from the Resource Browser
(see Accessing Existing Resources on page 162).
There are two ways to customize the hatch to suit the object to which it is applied; use either the Fill Hatch Settings
button in the Attributes palette, or use the Attribute Mapping tool to move, rotate, or scale the hatch (see Mapping
Hatch and Tile Fills on page 531).
Associative hatches can be specified as a default class attribute (see Setting Class Properties on page 109).
Non-associative Hatches
Non-associative hatches are placed on objects or areas of the drawing with the Hatch command. They obtain most of
their attributes from hatch pattern definitions, but they do not use the color definitions for the lines that make up the
hatch. Non-associative hatches obtain the color definitions from the current default attributes. They do not use any
background definitions, and therefore have no background color. A non-associative hatch is similar to a screen that
displays over other objects; the spaces between the lines are empty, and display portions of any objects behind the
hatch.
Non-associative hatches are placed inside an area that is defined by selected objects or lines. The start point of the
hatch is set with the Hatch command. Unlike associative hatches, non-associative hatches can be moved to another
area or object. However, unless the new area is the same shape and size as the previous one, the pattern will not fit.
Non-associative hatches are groups that are not associated with an object. They do not rotate with the object or act like
a fill. They can be broken down into their individual elements with the Ungroup command. For a non-associative
hatch to become part of an object, it must be grouped with the object.
514 | Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes
Defining Hatches
Both associative and non-associative hatches must be defined. A hatch definition is a repetition of the elements in a
series of lines in all directions from the beginning point. Specify where the hatch line begins (the Start Point), where it
stops (the Dash Factor), where it begins to repeat (the Repeat), and the distance separating the line from a neighboring
line (the Offset); the pattern is repeated in all directions.
A hatch can consist of several levels, or layers, of pattern definitions. Each level is edited individually to create the
overall hatch. (Hatch layers are named hatch levels in order to distinguish them from the layers in the drawing area.)
A new hatch can be created by editing an existing hatch; see Editing Hatch Definitions on page 519.
To create a new hatch pattern definition:
1. Open the Resource Browser by selecting Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
2. From the Resources menu, select New Resource to display the New Resource menu.
3. Select Hatch.
The Edit Hatch dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Name Enter a name for the hatch; this name identifies the hatch in the Resource Browser and in the
Select Hatch dialog box (Modify > Hatch)
Active Select the active hatch level from the list. A level can also be selected by clicking on one of its
pattern lines, or by using the keyboard right and left arrow keys. Levels are numbered in the order
of creation.
Cursor Switches between the pointer and pan functions. The pointer adjusts the four control handles in
the hatch window. The pan moves the elements of the hatch around the preview window.
Zoom Zooms in and out by a factor of two. The center of the view remains at its current coordinates.
The current zoom ratio is also displayed. The initial zoom setting when the dialog box opens
corresponds to the best setting for editing Level 1.
Using Hatch Fills | 515
Parameter Description
View Select whether to view All Levels or only the Active Level; click Center to center the start point
of the active level
Units Switches between Page and World settings for the hatch. Page is absolute in screen coordinates,
where one inch in the hatch equals one inch on the screen (at 100% zoom). World sets the hatch
to use the unit values for the layer where the hatch will be placed; for example, one inch in the
hatch equals one inch in the drawing area as defined by the rulers (this may not equal one inch on
the screen depending on the unit setting). When switching between Page and World, the hatch
settings are adjusted for all levels to preserve the hatch appearance.
Rotate Select whether to rotate the hatch to match the orientation of any symbols or walls where it will
be placed
Snap Radius Set the snap radius for snapping to the end points and mid points of pattern lines when moving a
line by dragging
Pen color Sets the color for the active level hatch lines; click the color box to select a color. Click Unique
Colors to set a unique color for each level; click Same Color to apply the active level color
selection to all levels.
Pen line weight Sets the hatch line weight for the current level. Click the line to select a weight from the list.
Create a custom weight by selecting Set Thickness. The Set Thickness dialog box opens. Enter
the Thickness Value and Thickness Units. Click Same Thickness to apply the active level line
thickness to all levels.
Start Point Controls the location of the start of the first hatch line in relation to the hatch origin for the active
level. The default mode uses polar coordinates (L = distance, A = angle). Enter values or move
the Start Point handle in the preview window.
Repeat Sets the distance, for the active level, between the beginning of a segment and the beginning of
the next collinear segment. Repeat directly relates to the Dash Factor, with the two determining
if the line is dashed or solid, as well as the length of the dashes and line segments. The default
mode uses polar coordinates (L = distance, A = angle). Enter values or move the Repeat handle in
the preview window.
Dash Factor Represents, for the active level, the percentage of the distance between the Start Point and the
Repeat that is shown as a line. Set to 1 to create a solid line. Enter a value or move the Dash
Factor handle in the preview window.
Offset Determines the distance and direction between lines for the active level. The values entered are
relative to the Start Point. The default mode uses polar coordinates (L = distance, A = angle).
Enter values or move the Offset handle in the preview window.
Sketch Style For Vectorworks Design Series products, specifies a hatch sketch style; see Applying Sketch
Styles to Hatches on page 677 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide
Background Select to use a background color and click the color box to select a color; background color
Fill applies only to associative hatches
Add/Remove Click Add Level to create an offset duplicate of the active level. Alternatively, create a duplicate
Level level by clicking and dragging the Start Point handle with the Option (Macintosh) or Alt
(Windows) key. Click Remove Level to remove the active level.
Scale Opens the Scale Hatch Definition dialog box. Enter a Scaling Factor to change the hatch
definitions for the active level (except for the Dash Factor value, which remains unchanged).
Select Apply to All Levels to change the scale factor for all levels.
Undo The last five actions can be undone by clicking Undo
516 | Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes
Parameter Description
Redo Click to redo the last action that was undone. Must be clicked directly after an action was undone.
Appears dimmed when there are no actions to undo.
Revert Returns the hatch definition to its status at the time the Edit Hatch dialog box was opened
The Start Point, Repeat, Dash Factor, and Offset functions correspond to the four control handles in the preview
window. When a handle is moved, the corresponding functions values change to reflect the move. The Shift key
constrains the drag when using the control handles, affecting each of the four functions differently.
For the Start Point, Repeat, and Offset parameters, enter values according to either the polar coordinate system
or the Cartesian system. The text box labels for these four controls change to correspond to the selection of
Cartesian or polar.
4. Click OK. The new hatch definition is saved under the specified name.
Attributes can also be applied by class settings (see Setting Class Attributes on page 112) or transferred with the
Eyedropper tool (see Transferring Attributes on page 502).
3. To specify the settings for the current hatch, click the Fill Hatch Settings button next to the Fill Hatch list.
The Hatch Settings dialog box opens.
Hatch selector
Parameter Description
Hatch selector Select a hatch resource from either the default content or the current files content
Use Local Mapping Select to enable entry in the mapping fields, to customize the fill for this object; deselect to
return to the default fill mapping.
The Attribute Mapping tool is an alternate way to create a local mapping; if an objects fill
is edited with the Attribute Mapping tool, the changes are reflected on this dialog box.
Conversely, edits made on this dialog box are reflected in the position, size, and rotation of
the mapping tools editing object.
By default, a hatch fill does not rotate with the filled object; select Use Local Mapping to
keep the fills orientation relative to the object.
X/Y Offset Indicates the fill starting point coordinates relative to the center of the selection bounding
box (in the files current units)
518 | Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes
Parameter Description
I/J Length Specifies the distance in the I/J direction for a single instance of the fill (in the files current
units).
To maintain the aspect ratio of the fill when one length is changed, click the link button; the
other length value changes automatically.
Rotation Specifies the angle of the fill
Flip Horizontally/ Select to flip the fill orientation horizontally, vertically, or both
Flip Vertically
Parameter Description
Hatches list Lists the available hatches from the default content, the current files content, or from a
referenced file (referenced hatches display in italics)
Hatch preview Displays a preview of the selected hatch at 100% zoom
New Opens the Edit Hatch dialog box, for creating a new hatch (see Defining Hatches on page 514)
Edit Opens the Edit Hatch dialog box, for editing or renaming an existing hatch
Using Tile Fills | 519
Parameter Description
Duplicate Creates a copy of the selected hatch (button is disabled if referenced hatches are present)
Delete Deletes the selected hatch
Select the object After selecting the hatch, click the cursor Click again to place the
at the desired insertion point. The hatch hatch once it is oriented
can be rotated during insertion.
Defining Tiles
A tile is a set of 2D geometric elements that repeats in all directions from a center point. The geometric elements can
have color or fill (but not a tile fill), and the tile can also have a background color.
To create a tile definition:
1. Open the Resource Browser by selecting Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
2. From the Resources menu, select New Resource to display the New Resource menu.
3. Select Tile.
The New Tile dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Name Specifies a name for the tile resource; this name is displayed in the Resource Browser and
Attributes palette
Units Specifies the units for the tile when it is used in a drawing:
Page sets the tile size according to the page dimensions. When applied, the tile automatically
scales relative to the page environment. This is useful for annotation objects that should
always remain the same size on the page, regardless of the layer scale.
World sets the tile size according to world dimensions; its size varies depending on the layer
scale.
Rotate Rotates the tile fill according to the axis of any wall or symbol to which it is applied
Using Tile Fills | 521
Parameter Description
In Wall Matches the tile rotation to the wall axis; select Fit to Wall to scale the tile fill to match the
thickness of a wall, wall component, or slab component.
Enable the Fit to Wall option for insulation fills in walls, and wall or slab components.
4. Click OK to open a tile editing window. Draw the tile geometry with the desired colors and fills. When you create
an object, eight partially transparent repetitions of the object display around it. You can add multiple objects to the
pattern.
5. To adjust the tile pattern and spacing, click one of the repetitions and drag it as needed; click again to set the new
position. To hide the tile repetitions during editing, Ctrl-click (Macintosh) or right-click (Windows) on an empty
area of the editing window, and deselect the Display Tile Repetitions option on the context menu.
6. When you are done drawing the tile, click Exit Tile. The tile resource is saved with the specified name.
Tiles are saved in Vectorworks drawing files. If the file is not saved and the tile is not default content, the tile is
lost when you exit the program.
522 | Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes
Applying Tiles
Apply tiles to specific objects using either the Attributes palette or the Resource Browser. Some objects have the ability
to apply tile settings while setting the object attributes.
Attributes can also be applied by class settings (see Setting Class Attributes on page 112) or transferred with the
Eyedropper tool (see Transferring Attributes on page 502).
3. To specify the settings for the current tile fill, click the Fill Tile Settings button next to the Fill Tile list.
The Tile Settings dialog box opens.
Tile selector
Parameter Description
Tile selector Select a tile resource from either the default content or the current files content
Use Local Mapping Select to enable entry in the mapping fields, to customize the fill for this object; deselect to
return to the default mapping.
The Attribute Mapping tool is an alternate way to create a local mapping; if an objects
fill is edited with the Attribute Mapping tool, the changes are reflected on this dialog box.
Conversely, edits made on this dialog box are reflected in the position, size, and rotation of
the mapping tools editing object.
By default, a tile fill does not rotate with the filled object; select Use Local Mapping to
keep the fills orientation relative to the object.
Using Gradient Fills | 523
Parameter Description
X/Y Offset Indicates the fill starting point coordinates relative to the center of the selection bounding
box (in the files current units)
I/J Length Specifies the distance in the I/J direction for a single instance of the fill (in the files current
units).
To maintain the aspect ratio of the fill when one length is changed, click the link button; the
other length value changes automatically.
Rotation Specifies the angle of the fill
Flip Horizontally/ Select to flip the fill orientation horizontally, vertically, or both
Flip Vertically
Defining Gradients
A gradient is a set of two or more colors that blend smoothly into one another. Gradients are defined and stored in the
Resource Browser.
Gradient
segment
Midpoint
Gradient preview
Color spot
Color spot area
Parameter Description
Name Specifies a name for the gradient resource; this name is displayed in the Resource Browser and
Attributes palette
Midpoint Point between two colors where each color is of equal intensity
Gradient Preview Displays the gradient in a preview bar
Using Gradient Fills | 525
Parameter Description
Color Spot Specifies the starting or ending color of each gradient segment. To specify the color,
double-click on a color spot, or select a color spot and click Color. To add a new gradient
segment, click in an empty location in the color spot area. A new color spot and midpoint are
created. Drag a color spot to a new location in the color spot area; its associated color is
retained. Remove a color spot and its associated midpoint by selecting the color spot dragging
it from the color spot area.
Color Specifies the color of the selected color spot; click to select the color
Position Indicates the position (0.0 1.0) of the selected color spot or midpoint; the midpoint position
is relative to its location between two adjacent color spots
Applying Gradients
Gradient settings are specified through the Attributes palette and applied to 2D planar and screen objects through the
Resource Browser or the Attributes palette. In addition, a gradient fill can be specified as a default class attribute (see
Setting Class Properties on page 109). Some objects have the ability to apply gradient settings while setting the
object attributes.
2. Specify the settings for the current gradient by clicking the Fill Gradient Settings button next to the gradient
preview box.
The Gradient Settings dialog box opens.
Gradient selector
526 | Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes
Parameter Description
Gradient selector Select a gradient resource from either the default content or the current files content
Repeat Select to repeat the gradient segment(s) over the object; deselect to apply a single instance of
the gradient segment(s) to the object
No repeat Repeat
Apply To Select Each Object to apply the gradient to each selected object individually; choose
Selection to apply the gradient across the selected objects, spanning the objects.
When applying a gradient across several selected objects, group the objects to retain the effect.
Type Select the gradient type from the list
Linear Applies the gradient to the selection with linear geometry
Parameter Description
Angular Applies the gradient to the selection in a counterclockwise direction from the specified starting
point
X/Y Offset Indicates the gradient starting point coordinates relative to the center of the selection bounding
box (in the files current units)
Length Specifies the length of a single gradient segment (in the files current units)
Rotation Specifies the rotation of the gradient fill
Reverse Select to draw the colors in reverse order from the order specified in the Gradient Editor dialog
box
Parameter Description
Import an Image File Imports a new image; click OK and proceed to Step 5.
Reuse an Image from Reuses a previously imported image; select the resource that contains the image. Click
Another Resource OK and proceed to Step 6.
5. The Open dialog box is displayed. Select the image file to use as an image resource, and click Open.
6. If the image is in JPEG format, it is imported immediately. For images not in JPEG format, the Image Import
Options dialog box opens. Specify the imported image options.
The current image information is displayed at the top, along with the images uncompressed size. Two
compression methods are available; depending on the graphic, one of the methods may be more suitable. The
compression method which produces the smallest file size is selected by default. Select the desired balance
between compression and detail display. The resulting file size for each type of compression is displayed to help
with the selection.
If the selected option results in a file size larger than the uncompressed size, the image is imported uncompressed.
Using Image Fills | 529
7. Click OK to import the image with the selected compression type. The image resource is saved, by default, with
the name of the original image file.
Image resources imported into the file that are not in JPEG format can be compressed by JPEG with the Compress
Images command. See Compressing Images on page 285.
2. Specify the settings for the current image by clicking the Fill Image Settings button next to the image preview
box.
The Image Settings dialog box opens.
530 | Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes
Image selector
Parameter Description
Image selector Select an image resource from either the default content or the current files content
Repeat Select to repeat the image over the object; deselect to apply a single instance of the image
to the object
No repeat
Repeat
Apply To Select Each Object to apply the image to each selected object individually; choose
Selection to apply the image across the selected objects, spanning the objects.
When applying an image across several selected objects, group the objects to maintain the
image.
X/Y Offset Indicates the image starting point coordinates relative to the center of the selection
bounding box (in the files current units)
I/J Length Specifies the distance in the I/J direction for a single instance of the image fill (in the files
current units).
To maintain the aspect ratio of the image when one length is changed, click the link button;
the other length value changes automatically.
Rotation Specifies the angle of the image fill
Flip Horizontally/ Select to flip the image orientation horizontally, vertically, or both
Flip Vertically
Image
X/Y offset
coordinates
Center of
selected object
1. Click the Attribute Mapping tool from the Basic or Visualization tool set.
2. Click on an object containing a tile or associative hatch fill. Only one object at a time can be edited.
3. An editing object with eight handles is placed over the fill. The fill origin is at the lower left corner of the editing
object, where the red and green lines meet.
Hatch origin
4. Use the editing object to set the fill location, scale, and rotation angle. The fill can also be nudged.
532 | Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes
Action Description
Edit the fill location Click in the editing object (anywhere except on a selection handle) and drag it to the desired
location. Click to set.
To precisely locate the origin, click close to the lower left handle, and move the editing object
as needed.
Edit the fill scale Click on one of the corner selection handles, and drag to set the editing object to a new scale
(or press the Tab key and enter a Scale value in the Data bar). Click to set.
Scale: 1.073
Edit the fill rotation Click on one of the middle selection handles, and drag to rotate the editing object to the
desired angle (or press the Tab key and enter a Rotation value in the Data bar); click to set the
rotation.
By default, the editing object rotates about the handle opposite the handle that was clicked
on.
To rotate about the fill origin, press the Shift key while rotating.
To rotate about the center of the editing object, press the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command
key (Macintosh) while rotating.
Rotation:-30.0
5. In the Attributes palette, the name of the fill is highlighted in blue, and (local map) is appended to the name.
1. Click the Attribute Mapping tool from the Basic or Visualization tool set.
2. Click on an object containing a gradient fill. Only one object at a time can be edited.
3. An editing object with two handles is placed over the gradient.
4. Use the editing object to set the gradient origin location, i-axis length, and rotation angle. Hold down the Shift key
to constrain the editing object line; the fill can also be nudged.
Action Description
Edit the location of the Click and drag the entire editing object, moving it to the desired location. Click to set.
fill (gradient origin)
Edit the gradient i-axis Click on a handle at the end of the editing object, and drag to set the editing object to a
location new length. Click to set.
534 | Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes
Action Description
Edit the gradient Click on a handle at the end of the editing object, and move to create a fulcrum line;
rotation click to set the rotation.
1. Click the Attribute Mapping tool from the Basic palette or the Visualization tool set.
2. Click on an object containing an image fill. Only one object at a time can be edited.
3. An editing object with eight handles is placed over the image.
4. Use the editing object to set the image origin location, i-axis and j-axis lengths, and rotation angle. The fill can
also be nudged.
Action Description
Edit the location of the fill Click and drag the entire editing object, moving it to the desired location.
(image origin)
Mapping Fills with the Attribute Mapping Tool | 535
Action Description
Edit the image i-axis and Click on a corner handle (the resize cursor displays) and drag the handle to the new
j-axis location size; holding the Shift key during this operation constrains the image aspect ratio.
Click to set.
Edit the image rotation Click on a side handle (the rotate cursor displays) and drag the handle to the new
rotation angle (or press the Tab key and enter a Rotation value in the Data bar). Click
to set. Press the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command key (Macintosh) while rotating to
rotate about the image center.
536 | Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes
Action Description
Flip the image Click and drag a corner of the editing object past another corner of the editing object;
horizontally or vertically click again to redraw the image within the new drawing area. Drag horizontally or
vertically to flip the image in that direction; drag diagonally to flip the image both
horizontally and vertically.
Options in the Image Settings dialog box (accessed from the Attributes palette) also affect image attribute
mapping. When the link button between the I Length and J Length fields is selected, the image cannot be flipped
or mirrored by dragging the editing objects handles vertically or horizontally; only diagonal dragging is allowed.
Use the Flip Horizontally or Flip Vertically options in this dialog box to change the fill image orientation
without moving or resizing the image.
The color and thickness of the lines in a line type are not part of the resource definition. Once a line type is applied to
an object, use the Attributes palette to set the color and thickness of the lines for that object. This allows more
flexibility, so that you can have multiple objects that use the same line type, but use different colors, for example.
To create a line type definition:
1. Open the Resource Browser by selecting Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
2. From the Resources menu, select New Resource to display the New Resource menu.
3. Select Line Type.
The New Line Type dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Name Specifies a name for the line type resource; this name is displayed in the Resource Browser
and Attributes palette
Simple Select this option to create a custom dashed line; you can either drag levers on the graph, or
enter a specific line length and gap length for each dash section
Dash graph Levers indicate the distance (in page inches or page millimeters) between dash sections; a
section consists of a line and a gap. To add a dash section, drag a new lever from the right
edge of the dash graph; to delete a section, drag a lever from the rightmost section all the
way to the right. A dash line type can have up to five sections.
<< or >> Selects a highlighted section for editing; alternatively, click a section to highlight it
Line Length Specifies the length of the line, in page units, for the highlighted dash section
Gap Length Specifies the length of the gap, in page units, for the highlighted dash section
Scale with line Maintains the proportion between the line type and the line thickness
thickness
Complex Select this option to create a line type with 2D graphic elements
538 | Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes
Parameter Description
Page Based/World Specifies the units for the line type when it is used in a drawing:
Based Units Page sets the line type size according to the page dimensions. When applied, the line
type automatically scales relative to the page environment. This is useful for annotation
objects that should always remain the same size on the page, regardless of the layer
scale.
World sets the line type size according to world dimensions; its size varies depending on
the layer scale.
7. When you are done drawing the complex line type geometry, click Exit Line Type. The line type resource is
saved with the specified name.
Line types are saved in Vectorworks drawing files. If the file is not saved and the line type is not default content,
the line type is lost when you exit the program.
Using Line Types | 539
Pen color
3. Adjust the pen color and line thickness for the selected object(s) as needed.
4. If a complex line type is selected, customize it by clicking the Line Type Settings button next to the Line Type
list. The Line Type Local Mapping Settings dialog box opens.
540 | Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes
Parameter Description
Line type selector Select a line type resource from either the default content or the current files content
Use Local Mapping Select to enable entry in the mapping fields, to customize the line type for this object;
deselect to return to the default mapping.
Segment Length Specifies the distance for a single instance of the line type (in the files current units).
Objects in the line type will scale symmetrically when this is changed; for example, if the
segment length is halved, each segment becomes half as long and half as tall.
Flip Horizontally/ Select to flip the line type orientation horizontally, vertically, or both
Flip Vertically
5. If desired, click Preview to view the results of the line type settings.
6. Click OK to apply the line type settings.
Applying Colors
The Color Palette set provides colors for selection and specifies which colors are available in a Vectorworks file. To
access the Color Palette set from the Attributes palette, click on one of the Fill color boxes (select either a Solid or
Pattern fill style) or on one of the Pen color boxes (select any Pen style).
Applying Colors | 541
A similar interface is available from other areas in the application where colors are specified, although the Color By
Class option is only available when accessed from the Attributes palette.
See Setting Default Colors and Palettes on page 541 for information on how to set up and activate color palettes.
Active palettes
Select an active color palette, and then select the color to apply. To easily find a named color, begin typing; the letters
display in the named color display area and the closest color match is selected. Press the Tab key to cycle through the
closest matches; pause for several seconds to start the search over.
Select Color By Class to use the color attributes set by the objects class.
If Use at Creation is enabled for the objects class, the objects color is automatically set by the class.
If Use at Creation is disabled for the class, the object only takes on the class color when the Color By Class
option is selected.
See Setting Class Attributes on page 112.
Utility Menu
Color Palette set in a new file, showing the Color Palette set in a file with active color
default active color palettes palettes
Parameter Description
Color by Class When using the Color Palette set to specify an objects color, causes the object to take on
the color attribute set by the objects class; see Applying Colors on page 540
Standard Color Picker Opens the operating systems color picker for selecting individual colors; see Selecting
Standard Operating System Colors on page 543
Pick Color Opens the Pick Color dialog box, for selecting a color from available color palettes; see
Selecting a Color from a Color Palette on page 543
Color Palette Manager Opens the Color Palette Manager dialog box, for managing available color palettes and
activating additional palettes; see Managing Color Palettes on page 544
Named color display Displays any color name information associated with the selected color.
area This area also serves to find a named color in the active color palette. To easily find a
named color, begin typing; the letters display in the named color display area and the
closest color match is selected. Press the Tab key to cycle through the closest matches;
pause for several seconds to start the search over.
Colors in active palette Displays the selected active palettes available colors in either Grid or List view; these
colors are available for use in the file
Active palettes Lists palettes which have been made active for the file with the Color Palette Manager;
click on a palette name to display its colors for use
Utility Menu Opens a utility menu to control the color palette sorting and display
2. Either select a color from one of the files color palettes, or click off of the Color Palette set (in the drawing
window, for example) to close the color window and set the files available colors.
Utility Menu
The options selected from the color palette Utility Menu button at the bottom of the main Color Palette set indicate the
color sorting and display.
Applying Colors | 543
Menu/Command Action
View Color Palette as Select to view the colors in the Color Palette set as a grid of colored squares, or a list of
colors and associated names. (In either view, color names are always shown in the display
area above the colors as the mouse moves over the colors.)
Sort Color Palette by Specify the sorting method for the active color palette; select Color to sort by hue (HSV
values), Manual to sort according to the order set in the Color Palette Manager, or
Alphabetical to sort in ascending or descending order by color name
Place Color Palettes at Select whether to display active color palettes at the top or bottom of the Color Palette set
Shrink Grid to Fit In Grid view, color lists of less than 16 rows can be displayed with a Color Palette set
option that shrinks to fit the available colors
2. Select a utility command to change the color palette display or sorting option.
1. From the Color Palette set, click the Standard Color Picker button.
The Colors (Macintosh) or Color (Windows) dialog box opens.
2. Select a color from among the standard operating system colors, and click OK.
3. The color is added to the active document color palette, and becomes available for use in the file.
1. From the Color Palette set, click the Pick Color button.
544 | Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes
The Pick Color dialog box opens, listing the color palettes available. The Colors in Active Document palette is
always available. Other palettes in the list either ship with the Vectorworks software, or have been added with the
Color Palette Manager. The Vectorworks Fundamentals product ships with Classic Vectorworks Colors and
Standard Vectorworks Colors palettes; many other palettes are available with Vectorworks Design Series products.
Parameter Description
Color Palette list Lists the color palettes from which colors can be selected. Click on the header to sort the
palettes in ascending/descending alphabetical order. Select a palette to display its colors on
the right.
Color List Lists the colors in the selected palette; click on the header to sort by color or by color name.
Select a color to add it to the Colors in the Active Document palette.
Color Grid Displays the colors in the selected palette as a grid; select a color to add it to the Colors in
Active Document palette
Color Information Displays the color information of the selected color, including Name; Red, Green, Blue
(RGB); Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black (CMYK); and Hue, Saturation, and Value
(HSV). This information also displays on a tooltip when the cursor hovers over a color.
2. Select a color palette from the left, and then select the color from the list or grid of colors on the right.
3. Click OK to add the color to the active document palette, and make it available for use in the file.
1. From the Color Palette set, click the Color Palette Manager button.
Applying Colors | 545
The Color Palette Manager dialog box opens. The palettes available here are located in the Color Palettes library
of the default content; see Libraries on page 155. The Vectorworks Fundamentals product ships with Classic
Vectorworks Colors and Standard Vectorworks Colors palettes; many other palettes are available with
Vectorworks Design Series products.
Parameter Description
Color palette list Lists the files available color palettes. Click on a header to sort the palettes by active
status or color palette name. Click in the Active column of a selected palette to activate
the palette and add it to the available palettes in the main Color Palette set.
Color List Lists the colors in the selected palette; click on the header to sort by color or by color
name
Color Grid Displays the colors in the selected palette as a grid
New Opens the New Palette dialog box, for creating a custom color palette or importing a color
palette file; see Creating or Editing Custom Color Palettes on page 545
Edit Opens the Edit Palette dialog box, for editing the selected custom palette; see Creating or
Editing Custom Color Palettes on page 545
Duplicate Copies the selected color palette and appends an incrementing number to the copy name
(change or rename the copied palette by clicking Edit)
Delete Deletes the currently selected color palette; only custom palettes can be deleted, but not
the Colors in Active Document or standard color palettes
Purge Unused When the Colors in Active Document palette is selected, removes any colors that are not
in use in the file from the Colors in Active Document palette.
Referenced colors remain in the active document color palette, even from an object
that has been removed. Purging allows accumulated colors to be trimmed.
2. When the list of color palettes and active color palettes is set, click OK.
Parameter Description
Name Specifies a name for a new color palette, or edits the name of a custom color palette
Color List Lists the colors in the custom palette; click on the header to sort by number in the list,
color, or color name. To change the order of the colors, click in the # column and drag the
selected color up or down in the list. (Select Manual from the color palette utility menu to
sort the colors in the main Color Palette set in this order; see Utility Menu on page 542)
Color Grid Displays the colors in the custom palette as a grid
New Opens the New Color dialog box, for adding a new color from the operating systems
color picker
Edit Opens the Edit Color dialog box, for editing the selected color using the operating
systems color picker
Delete Deletes the currently selected color(s) from the custom color palette
Get Opens the Pick Color dialog box, for adding one or more colors selected from the
available color palettes (see Selecting a Color from a Color Palette on page 543)
Lighten Incrementally lightens the selected color
Darken Incrementally darkens the selected color
RGB Blend Blends two selected colors according to their Red, Green, Blue (RGB) values, to create
the specified number of new colors (up to 1000)
HSV Blend Blends two selected colors according to their Hue, Saturation, and Lightness (HSV)
values, to create the specified number of new colors (up to 1000)
Import Imports all the colors from the Colors in Active Document palette of another current
version Vectorworks file
Applying Colors | 547
3. When the colors have been edited or added to the custom color palette, click OK.
The custom color palette is listed in the Color Palette Manager. By default, custom color palettes are saved in the
user folder (see User Folders Preferences on page 27).
The index numbers are internal to the color palette and always remain in the same order.
548 | Chapter 13: Applying Object Attributes
Viewing the Drawing 14
The Vectorworks program has many tools and features that change the drawing view. For example, change the
orientation from a top view to a left isometric view, or interactively fly over or walk through a 3D model. View a
model as stacked layers in a unified view, or work inside the model within the clip cube. Change the visibility of
objects based on their layer or class assignment. The working plane palette and tools manipulate the orientation of the
layers 3D plane, facilitating modeling and working in 3D.
Category Description
2D View Select the Top/Plan command to view the drawing in 2D; use this for annotations,
title blocks, and 2D illustrations. Rotated Top/Plan view (Vectorworks Design Series
required) is only available from the View bar when a rotated top/plan view exists.
3D Elevations Use the Top, Front, Right, Bottom, Back, and Left commands to view 3D elevations
3D Representations Above Use the Right Isometric, Left Isometric, Right Rear Isometric, and Left Rear
the Active Layer Plane Isometric commands to view 3D representations above the active layer plane
3D Representations Below Use the Lower Right Isometric, Lower Left Isometric, Lower Right Rear
the Active Layer Plane Isometric, and Lower Left Rear Isometric commands to view 3D representations
below the active layer plane
550 | Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing
Right Isometric Left Isometric Right Rear Isometric Left Rear Isometric
Lower Right Isometric Lower Left Isometric Lower Right Rear Isometric Lower Left Rear Isometric
When a rotated top/plan view exists (Vectorworks Design Series required), the keypad number 0 invokes the
Rotated Top/Plan view instead of standard, unrotated Top/Plan view. Press the 0 key a second time to toggle to the
standard unrotated Top/Plan view.
The View bar also provides quick access to the standard view commands. Click the Current View and select a
standard view from the list that displays. If the view is something other than a standard view, Custom View
displays as the current view.
Projection
The projection commands alter the way the program displays the 3D geometry of the drawing on a 2D screen. In
addition to the standard 2D Plan projection, there are six 3D projection modes.
To switch projection modes:
Select View > Projection, and then select a projection.
OpenGL and the Renderworks product do not support the Oblique projections. To render Oblique projections, use
one of the Polygon render modes, or use Hidden Line mode.
Perspective
The perspective commands distort the display of objects in the drawing. The distortion of objects that are away from
the center of the view is different from the distortion of objects in the center of the view, which gives the impression of
3D perspective. To change the view, select from normal, narrow, or wide distances, or create a custom perspective.
The Translate View tool can also be used to move through a model and interactively adjust the perspective distortion
while in a perspective projection; see Translate View on page 557.
Perspective Description
Set Distance Set a custom perspective numerically
Narrow Distance Similar to a telephoto lens
Normal Distance Similar to a portrait lens
Wide Distance Similar to a wide angle or fisheye lens
Cropped Toggles the rectangular frame around perspective views on and off, switching
between a cropped presentation perspective view and an uncropped perspective
view for modeling
Simulating Movement
Several tools simulate movement over and through the drawing.
When you use these tools, a rendered model may display with OpenGL rendering temporarily, even when set to render
with a different render mode. When the movement stops, the program renders the new view of the model. Additionally,
for a highly complex drawing, the program may temporarily remove some of the detail to speed up the movement.
When the movement stops, the detail returns.
These tools have certain Tool bar buttons that are true modes, and others that act as command buttons. When some of
these tools are in use, the Data bar provides display-only information to help orient the view.
Flyover
The Flyover tool simulates movement over and around a real-world model.
To control the movements of the Flyover tool, drag the mouse around a selected center of rotation. The Tool bar
buttons set the center of rotation.
Object Center Active Layer Plane Origin
Mode Description
Interactive Origin Sets the center of rotation with a mouse click
Object Center Sets the center of rotation to the center of the selected objects; if no objects are
selected, sets the center of rotation to the center of the visible objects
Active Layer Plane Sets the center of rotation to the center of the active layer plane
Origin
Working Plane Sets the center of rotation to the origin of the current working plane
Origin
1. Click the Flyover tool from the Basic palette, or from the 3D Modeling or Visualization tool set.
2. Select the mode from the Tool bar.
3. In Interactive Origin mode, click to specify the center of rotation for the flyover movement.
4. The center of rotation is indicated by dashed axis lines.
To fly over the drawing, click on the drawing and drag in the direction of movement while you hold the mouse
button. To stop the movement, release the mouse button. Alternatively, use shortcuts on the keyboard to fly over
the drawing.
Walkthrough
The Walkthrough tool simulates movement through a 3D model.
The tool operates in perspective projection. Three modes, the Viewer Height parameter, and various modifier keys
provide flexibility to manipulate the viewer position and view angle before and during the walkthrough.
Look Around
Elevator
Mode Description
Walk Moves the viewer through the drawing
556 | Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing
Mode Description
Look Around Changes the view angle up, down, right, and left while the viewer remains
stationary
Elevator Raises and lowers the viewer height
Viewer Height Specify the viewer height above the ground plane.
This value updates automatically after Elevator mode is used; it also
reflects the viewer height as set by any other viewing tool.
When the Walkthrough tool is in use, the Data bar displays the following information to help orient the view.
1. Click the Walkthrough tool from the Visualization tool set and click Walk from the Tool bar.
The projection automatically switches to perspective.
2. Click on the drawing and hold the mouse button to perform the walkthrough.
The first mouse click inside the drawing, indicated by a small cross, establishes the control point of the
walkthrough. The control point lets you manage the pace of the walkthrough. The farther away from the control
point the mouse moves, the faster the walkthrough. Return the mouse to the control point to slow or pause the
movement. To stop the walkthrough, release the mouse button.
3. Move the mouse up (forward), down (backward), left, and right to walk through the drawing.
The Data bar provides real-time information about the walkthrough.
To change the viewing angle or viewer height as desired during the walkthrough, combine the movement with a
modifier key.
1. Click the Walkthrough tool from the Visualization tool set and click Look Around from the Tool bar.
The projection automatically switches to perspective.
2. Click on the drawing and hold the mouse button to look around.
The first mouse click inside the drawing, indicated by a small cross, establishes the control point of the look
around. The control point lets you manage the pace of the look around. The farther away from the control point the
mouse moves, the faster the movement. Return the mouse to the control point to slow or pause the movement. To
stop the look around, release the mouse button.
3. Move the mouse in the direction you want to look.
The Data bar provides real-time information while looking around.
To change the viewer height while looking around, if desired, press the Shift key and move the mouse up or down.
1. Click the Walkthrough tool from the Visualization tool set and click Elevator from the Tool bar.
The projection automatically switches to perspective.
2. Click on the drawing and hold the mouse button while you move the mouse up or down. The Data bar provides
real-time information about the viewer height.
The first mouse click inside the drawing, indicated by a small cross, establishes the control point of the movement.
The control point lets you manage the pace of the movement. The farther away from the control point the mouse
moves, the faster the movement. Return the mouse to the control point to slow or pause the movement. To stop the
operation, release the mouse button.
Alternatively, if you know the desired viewer height, set the value in Viewer Height on the Tool bar. This field
can be edited in any mode.
Translate View
The Translate View tool changes the view of a 3D model, especially when in a perspective projection.
Mode Description
Translate View Moves the drawing along the screen X axis when the cursor moves left or
right, and along the screen Y axis when the cursor moves up or down
Perspective Move In perspective projection, drag the mouse up and down to move the view
In-Out forward (closer) or backward (farther away) along the current sightline
Perspective In perspective projection, adjusts the distortion by moving the mouse up
Adjustment (more distorted) or down (less distorted); similar to creating a custom
perspective view by selecting View > Perspective > Set Distance
1. Click the Translate View tool from the Visualization tool set.
2. Depending on the selected mode, click on the drawing and drag while you hold the mouse button to translate the
drawing from side to side or up and down, move in and out of the drawing, or adjust the perspective. To stop the
movement, release the mouse button.
Press the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command key (Macintosh) to draw selected objects in full detail, and hide
deselected objects (so that the redraws are faster).
When the Translate View tool is in use, the Data bar displays the following information to help orient the view.
1. Click the Rotate View tool from the Visualization tool set.
2. Select the mode from the Tool bar.
Mode Description
Rotate Around Object Center Uses the center of selected objects as the rotation center
Rotate Around Active Layer Plane Uses the center of the active layer plane as the rotation center
Center
Rotate Around Working Plane Center Uses the origin of the current working plane as the rotation
center
3. To rotate the view, click on the drawing and drag while holding the mouse button. Move the cursor to rotate the
view in the direction of the mouse movement. Release the mouse to stop the rotation. Alternatively, use the two
Tool bar buttons.
When the Rotate View tool is in use, the Data bar displays the following information to help orient the view.
Rotating Precisely
The Rotate 3D View command provides a precise way to rotate the 3D view. Enter rotation values directly, or rotate
the view in increments. A preview displays the rotation movements before the actual view is rotated.
To rotate the 3D view:
1. Select View > Rotate 3D View.
The Rotate 3D View dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Parameters are Starts the view rotation from a top (absolute) view
absolute
Parameters are Starts the view rotation from the current view
relative
Interactive Rotation
+, - X/Y/Z buttons The plus and minus buttons for each axis rotate the view by the increment
specified
Angle Increment Specifies the rotation increment (in degrees) for the interactive rotation buttons
Rotation by Value
Rotation on X/Y/Z Specifies the rotation value (in degrees, minutes, and seconds) for the X, Y, and/
or Z axes
2. Specify the rotation criteria, and then click OK to rotate the 3D view as specified.
The effects of the SpaceNavigator mouse on the view depend on the current view and projection, as well as the selected
mode.
For best results while navigating, render the drawing with OpenGL rendering.
Cycle through the SpaceNavigator modes for various types of navigation.
Parameter Description
Display Screen Objects Displays screen plane objects from all visible objects in the unified view, and
allows access to 2D tools
Only on Active Layer Only displays screen plane objects for the active layer
Restore Original Views when Returns layers to their original view status and Renderworks background
exiting Unified View mode when turning off unified view. When deselected, the layer views remain
aligned when turning off unified view, and the current layers Renderworks
background applies to all layers.
Ignore Layers with Different Scale Does not include layers with a scale that is different from the active layer in
the view; select this option to hide annotation or detail layers
Show only Layers belonging to Displays only layers that belong to stories in the unified view; select this
Stories option to exclude layers, such as detail layers, from the view
Center View on Activated Layer When selected, centers the view on the active layer in unified view; the view
does not shift when switching to another layer
2. Click OK.
Unified View
To enable unified view:
1. Select View > Unified View. Alternatively, click the Unified View button on the View bar.
2. To return to a normal layer view, select View > Unified View again.
(A check mark next to the Unified View command indicates that the feature is activated.)
Setting a 3D View | 563
In normal layer view, the active layer is in a rotated view; other The Unified View command aligns all visible
inactive layers are in Top and Left Isometric views layers to the active layers rotated view
Setting a 3D View
The Set 3D View command sets a precise 3D view at a specified viewing angle, height, and perspective. Normally, the
command is executed from 2D Top/Plan view; however, the command can also set a 3D view from any of the 3D
views.
To set a 3D view:
1. Select View > Set 3D View.
2. Click and draw a line to indicate the view direction; the line starting point indicates the viewer position and the
line end point indicates the point the viewer is looking towards (look toward point).
564 | Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing
Parameter Description
Viewer Height Specifies the height of the viewer at the start point of the drawn line
Look Toward Height Specifies the height of the view destination at the end point of the drawn
line
Perspective Select the desired perspective, or use the current setting to keep the
perspective unchanged
Action Description
To adjust the cube Similar to the Push/Pull tool, a face of the cube becomes highlighted when the cursor is over
dimensions it. Click a highlighted face and drag it as needed; click again to set to the new location.
Viewing a Model with the Clip Cube | 565
Action Description
To rotate the cube Click one of the four rotation handles on the edges of the editing frame on the bottom face of
the clip cube. Drag to rotate the cube, and then click to set the new location.
To move the cube Click the move handle in the center of the editing frame. Drag to move the cube, and then
click to set the new location.
5. Edit the objects within the clip cube as needed. Keep in mind the following:
If you edit a symbol, the clip cube will be reset to the symbol boundary; when you exit the symbol editing
mode, the cube returns to its original boundary.
While the clip cube feature is enabled, you can create a different cube on each design layer. However, if the
unified view feature is enabled (Vectorworks Design Series required), only one clip cube can be created.
6. To save the current clip cube view for later use, select View > Save View, and select the option to Save View
Orientation (see Creating Saved Views on page 115).
7. Select the Clip Cube command again to disable the clip cube and return to a full model view on all design layers.
(A check mark next to the Clip Cube command indicates that the feature is activated.)
If you hold down the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command key (Macintosh) the next time you select the Clip Cube
command, the last clip cube you had on this design layer is restored.
Right-click (Windows)
or Ctrl-click (Macintosh)
a highlighted face and
select Create Section
Viewport from the
context menu
Mode Description
Classes Affects the visibility of the objects class
Layers Affects the visibility of the objects layer
Changing an Objects Class or Layer Visibility | 567
Mode Description
Visible Sets the objects class or layer to visible
Invisible Hides the objects class or layer
Greyed Sets the objects class or layer to gray
Preferences Specifies the double-click behavior for the Visibility tool; see Global Visibility Changes on
page 568
With the Visibility tool set to make the class gray, press the Click an object in the Furniture class
V key to temporarily show all classes, including those that
are currently invisible
The layer and class options control the visibility of objects in the inactive layers and classes. For example, if
the layer options are set to gray objects in inactive layers, grayed objects do not become fully visible when
clicked with the Visibility tool. (See Setting Class and Design Layer Options on page 114.) An alert displays
in this situation.
The Visibility tool cannot hide or gray the active class or layer immediately, since the active class or layer is
always set to visible. An alert displays in this situation.
A container object (such as a symbol or a group) and its component parts can belong to different classes, and
their visibilities can be set differently. For example, if the classes of the individual objects that make up a
symbol are set to invisible or gray, they do not become visible when the symbols class is made visible.
6. The objects class or layer is set to visible, invisible, or gray, and the Message bar shows the change that occurred.
The Navigation palette (Vectorworks Design Series required) updates to display the new visibility status.
1. To make changes to the class or layer visibility of selected objects, select the objects first.
The objects do not need to be in the same class or layer.
2. Click the Visibility tool from the Basic palette.
The Visibility tool is available in the workspaces of all Vectorworks Design Series products; for the Vectorworks
Fundamentals product, the workspace can be edited to add the Visibility tool.
3. Select Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Visibility Tool Preferences dialog box opens. Specify the effect to occur when the Visibility tool is
double-clicked.
Parameter Description
Makes all classes visible All classes in the file are set to visible
Makes all layers visible All layers in the file are set to visible
Makes only the classes of the selected objects The class(es) of selected objects remain visible; other classes are
visible set to invisible
Makes only the layers of the selected objects The layer(s) of selected objects remain visible; other layers are set
visible to invisible
Setting a Camera View in Renderworks | 569
1. Select the Renderworks Camera tool from the Visualization tool set (Renderworks required).
2. Click in the design layer to specify the camera location. Click again to indicate the camera look-to point.
If this is the first time a camera object has been inserted in this session, the Renderworks Camera Object
Properties dialog box opens. Click OK.
3. Click Display Camera View in the Object Info palette, or simply double-click on the camera, to switch to the 3D
camera view. To return to Top/Plan view, click Top/Plan View in the Object Info palette.
570 | Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing
Parameter Description
Camera Height Sets the camera height; at placement, the camera is set to a default height of 1500 mm
or 50. If a Z value is also specified for the camera object, the total camera height is the
sum of the Z height and the Camera Height.
Look To Height Sets the height of the camera look-to point; at placement, the look-to height is set to a
default height of 1500 mm or 50. If a Z value is also specified for the camera object,
the total look-to height is the sum of the Z height and the Look To Height.
Top/Plan View Switches to a Top/Plan view of the camera
Display Camera View Switches to display the 3D camera view (double-clicking on the camera in a 2D view
also switches to camera view)
Fine Tune Camera View Opens the Perspective View Controls dialog box, for making fine adjustments to the
camera view controls (see Adjusting the Camera View on page 571)
Projection Select Perspective or Orthogonal projection for the camera view; Perspective creates a
cropped or uncropped perspective view of the model from the camera view, while
Orthogonal is useful for an elevation view (for example, a skewed elevation view of a
building which is not in a standard view). Available parameters depend on the selected
projection.
Render Mode Selects a render mode for the 3D camera view
Aspect Ratio Sets the aspect ratio of the perspective clipping window; the clipping window can also
be set to the page size or to a custom aspect ratio
Custom Aspect When a custom Aspect Ratio is selected, enter the custom ratio
For Film Size of Specifies the camera film size, and determines the focal length of the camera (has no
effect on the camera view)
Focal Length is Displays the camera focal length, based on film size
Field of View Specifies the view angle; set to a default angle of 65 degrees. Use the control point to
set the view angle on the 2D camera with the mouse.
For DPI of Calculates the pixel size when exporting the camera view (has no effect on the camera
view)
Pixel Size is Displays the pixel size based on the DPI setting
Crop Frame Scale % Scales the size of the clipping window frame, when in a cropped perspective projection,
and also scales the perspective distance. As a result, both the crop frame and the
drawing appear scaled.
Setting a Camera View in Renderworks | 571
Parameter Description
Left/Right Tilt Angle Tilts the camera to the left or right, for more accurate perspective matching
Camera Name Specifies a name for the camera, which can be displayed or hidden in 2D view; move
the camera name text control point to adjust the position of the name
Camera Display Select a camera display mode; the camera name only displays in 2D
None: Hides the camera in 2D and 3D views, and hides the camera name
2D: Displays the camera in 2D view, but hides the camera name, and hides the
camera in a 3D view
3D: Displays the cameras perspective clipping window bounding box in 2D view,
displays the camera in 3D view, and hides the camera name
2D + 3D: Shows the camera in 2D and 3D views, but hides the camera name
2D + Name: Shows the camera and camera name in 2D view, but hides the camera in
3D views
3D + Name: Shows the camera in 3D view, shows the camera name in 2D view, but
hides the camera in 2D view (displays a locus instead)
2D + 3D + Name: Shows the camera and camera name in 2D view, and shows the
camera in 3D views
The 3D camera view displays the bounding box of the camera view, the view line, and
the look-to end point. Displaying a camera in a 3D view allows it to be easily selected
during design development, and it can be hidden later for final presentation
Auto Update 3D View When selected, automatically updates the 3D camera view with every parameter
change; for complex models, deselect when making several parameter changes, and
then either re-select Auto Update 3D View or click Display Camera View to update
the camera view with any parameter changes
Auto Center 3D View Automatically centers the view when Display Camera View is clicked, or the camera
is double-clicked
Parameter Description
Camera Height Moves the camera vertically
Look To Height Sets the height of the look-to point, which effectively tilts the camera vertically
Camera Pan Pans the camera, rotating it about its axis within a +/- 20 degree range, as if it were
on a tripod
Camera Move Rotates the camera about the look-to point, within a +/- 20 degree range
Left/Right
Camera Moves the camera towards or away from the look-to point
Distance
Focal Length Acts like a zoom lens; sets the lens focal length, from 10 to 200 mm and changes the
(zoom) field of view angle
Perspective Increases or decreases the perspective effect, making the perspective lines vanish
more or less steeply about the look-to point; works most effectively when the look-to
point is at the center of the scene or object being viewed
Crop Frame Sets the aspect of the perspective crop window; use in conjunction with the Crop
Aspect Ratio Frame Size to obtain the desired window size
Crop Frame Sets the scale of the perspective crop window; use in conjunction with the Crop
Size Frame Aspect Ratio to obtain the desired window size
Render Mode Selects a render mode for the 3D camera view
Setting a Camera View in Renderworks | 573
2. A camera object can be copied to insert additional camera views. In addition, the 2D camera display attributes can
be set by fill and pen foreground and background colors in the Attributes palette. Control points adjust the field of
view angle, the look-to point, and the camera name location.
Apparent field of view
The divergence between the apparent field of view angle and the lens field of view angle increases as the
difference between the camera and look-to heights increases. When the camera and look-to heights are equal, the
lens field of view angle line (dashed gray line by default) is not visible.
The viewport is created on the specified sheet layer, with its view, projection, and perspective distance set to that
of the Renderworks camera. In the Object Info palette, the RW Camera status changes to Yes.
The camera becomes part of the viewport and can be edited (or deleted), changing the viewports view parameters,
by editing the camera through the viewport. An existing sheet layer viewport can also be linked to a Renderworks
camera. See Editing a Linked Renderworks Camera on page 748.
Fit to Objects
The Fit to Objects command provides an easy way to zoom in and out of a drawing. There are two options: fit the
window around all the objects in the drawing, or fit the window around a particular object or set of objects.
When in an uncropped perspective projection, the view direction is preserved, and the viewpoint is adjusted to fit the
model or object within the drawing window.
To fit the drawing window around all visible objects in the drawing:
1. Ensure that the current layer contains the object(s) to view, and that no objects are selected.
2. Select View > Zoom > Fit to Objects. Alternatively, click the Fit to Objects button on the View bar.
The program zooms in or out so that all the objects in the drawing display in the drawing area.
Select View > Zoom > Fit to Page Area. Alternatively, click the Fit to Page Area button on the View bar.
The program zooms in or out to display all pages in the print area.
Viewing History
The program automatically records a history of the last ten changes in drawing view, including projection, perspective
and zoom changes. Click the Previous View and Next View buttons on the View bar to move through the change
history stack.
On a Windows system with a five-button mouse, buttons 4 and 5 on the mouse (which invoke the Back and Forward
commands in web browsers) invoke Previous View and Next View, respectively.
Working plane
Active layer
plane
Every object created in the drawing is placed in relation to the active layer plane for that layer, whether it is placed
directly on that plane or placed above or below it. The working plane helps to easily create and position objects in 3D
space. It allows you to draw while in an isometric view and position objects exactly where they are needed. When
changing the location of the working plane, the active layer plane remains displayed, providing a constant frame of
reference while adjusting the working plane.
For example, for a drawing of a complex machine, with numerous gears, cams, rollers, and other parts that intersect on
multiple planes, the working plane can be changed to different locations and angles in relation to the active layer plane.
Creating or locating objects according to the working plane allows highly accurate positioning of the objects in 3D
space.
Hybrid symbols can only be inserted on a working plane that is parallel to the active layer plane. When inserting a
hybrid symbol, if the working plane is not parallel to the active layer plane, the working plane is moved to, and
aligned with, the active layer plane.
Using Working Planes | 577
In addition, some tools require a vector or plane. The 3D viewing tools can use the working plane to define their center
and/or axis of rotation, while the Mirror tool can mirror the selected 3D objects across the working plane. The location
of 3D tools in 3D space is taken from the point on the working plane directly behind the cursor, or from a snap point if
they are snapped to an object.
To assist with drawing in 3D with certain drawing tools, an automatic working plane appears on suitable object
surfaces as the cursor moves over drawing objects with the tool selected. The automatic working plane is a temporary
working plane that does not need to be explicitly set. Objects created on the automatic working plane are drawn planar
to the automatic working plane, rather than on the layer plane. This facilitates drawing planar objects without the need
to create or save a working plane. The color and opacity of the automatic working plane can also be customized; see
Configuring Interactive Display on page 68.
Automatic working
plane
If there is no suitable surface under the cursor, the automatic working plane aligns to the layer plane.
When the automatic working plane is in effect, Automatic displays in the Active Planes list located on the View bar.
When drawing on a specific working plane that was established by the Set Working Plane tool, the automatic working
plane should be turned off. Select a different plane from the list, such as a saved working plane, or press the \ key
(backslash) to toggle the automatic working plane on and off. (This key can be customized in the Workspace Editor;
see Modifying Snapping and Mode Shortcuts on page 876.) When using a working plane tool such as the Set
Working Plane tool, the automatic working plane defaults to off.
Plane Description
Automatic The active working plane changes as the cursor moves over the drawing area
in a 3D view. The automatic plane is a temporary working plane that does not
need to be set; over suitable surfaces and with certain drawing tools, the
automatic plane is planar to the surface. Otherwise, the automatic plane aligns
to the layer plane.
Layer Plane The active working plane is planar to the current plane of the active layer
Custom Plane The active working plane is planar to a saved working plane position;
selecting a working plane cancels the automatic working plane.
Screen Plane The active working plane is aligned to the screen plane (planar to the
computer screen)
Options Opens the Document Preferences dialog box, for setting the plane mode
options; see Plane Mode Preferences on page 34
Simply click on an axis with the Set Working Plane tool to select and display the working plane and its grip handles.
When the working plane is selected, it displays with colored grips around each axis, as well as a move grip, for
manipulating the plane.
Using Working Planes | 579
The working plane can be moved, but not rotated, when in rotated top/plan view (Vectorworks Design Series required).
See Rotating the Plan on page 721 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
When grid snapping is enabled, the working plane displays with dots; when grid snapping is off, the dots do not
display. The working plane displays slightly darker, and with a double line frame, when it is viewed from below.
When the working plane and the active layer plane are coincident, the active layer plane displays with grid lines.
Otherwise, when the planes are not coincident, the grid lines do not display on the active layer plane.
Dashed gray lines represent the intersection of the active layer plane and working planes. The active layer plane does
not display in a rendered view.
Working plane with grid snapping Working plane seen from below Active layer plane and working plane
enabled coincident, and working plane selected; Z axis
display enabled
If the active layer plane grid lines are not visible, select Show Grid in the SmartCursor Settings dialog box (see
Grid Snapping on page 135).
Mode Description
Three Point Defines the working plane by three, 3D points, or according to the surface of a
rendered object
Planar Face Aligns the working plane to a planar face; or, for a NURBS curve, aligns the
working plane perpendicular to that point's tangent on the curve
Once the working plane location has been set, Custom Plane displays in the Active Planes list on the View bar. The
location can be saved; see Working Plane Commands on page 583.
The working plane can be quickly set based on the automatic working plane location. Right-click (Windows) or
Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the automatic working plane, and select Set Working Plane from the context menu (or
select Modify > Working Plane > Set Working Plane). The working plane is set to match the automatic working
plane, and the working plane is active.
With the automatic working plane in The working plane is active, set to
the desired location, select Set match the automatic plane
Working Plane
1. In a 3D view, click the Set Working Plane tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Three Point from
the Tool bar.
2. Click to set the first point.
This becomes the origin of the working plane.
3. Click to set the second point.
This sets the working plane X axis.
4. Select the third point.
This sets the Y axis for the working plane. Once the third point is defined, the working plane location is set.
Using Working Planes | 581
2nd click
3rd click
1st click
1. In a 3D view, select a rendering mode of Unshaded Polygon, Shaded Polygon, Shaded Polygon No Lines, or Final
Shaded Polygon.
2. Click the Set Working Plane tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Three Point from the Tool bar.
The cursor changes to a pointing hand when over the surface of a rendered object.
3. Click on the surface that defines the working plane location.
The working plane location is set to the selected surface.
1. In a 3D view, click the Set Working Plane tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Planar Face from
the Tool bar.
2. As the cursor moves over the underlying geometry, a preview of the working plane displays. Click to set the
working plane location. The click location becomes the origin of the working plane.
The working plane is aligned to the selected face and remains selected for manipulation. The working plane is
deselected when the Set Working Plane tool is no longer active.
582 | Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing
Action Description
Rotate the working Click on one of the axis grips. The rotate cursor displays. Move the
plane cursor to rotate the plane about the selected axis, and click to set.
Move the working Click on the center grip. The move cursor displays. Move the cursor
plane to move the plane, and click to set.
Using Working Planes | 583
4. Once the working plane has been positioned, press the Esc key, or click off of the working plane. The position can
be saved with working plane commands or in the Working Planes palette.
Use the grips in combination with SmartCursor cues for accurate manipulation in relation to other objects.
The working plane can be moved, but not rotated, when in rotated plan view (Vectorworks Design Series required). See
Rotating the Plan on page 721 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Command Description
Select Working Plane Selects the working plane (alternatively, click on the plane with the
Selection tool or select Edit > Select Working Plane)
Look at Working Plane Changes the view to be perpendicular to the working plane; similar to the
Top view under the View menu, in that you are looking straight at the
working plane. This command is also available from the View menu, the
View bar, and the Working Planes palette.
Save Working Plane Opens the Assign Name dialog box. Enter a name to save the working
plane position. This command is also available by clicking Add from the
Working Planes palette. Once a working plane position has been saved, it
can be accessed through the Working Planes palette and the Active Planes
list on the View bar.
Next Working Plane Cycles through the next ten unsaved palette positions
Previous Working Plane Cycles through the last ten unsaved palette positions
Set Working Plane If selected while the automatic working plane is highlighted, sets the
working plane to match the automatic working plane. Otherwise, sets the
working plane to the next clicked planar face, similar to the Planar Face
mode of the Set Working Plane tool (see Setting the Working Plane to a
Planar Face on page 581)
584 | Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing
Command Description
Align Working Plane X Rotates the working plane coordinates about the Z axis until the X axis is
Axis with Layer Plane parallel to the active layer plane and the Y axis is pointing up. The working
plane origin is unchanged.
Align Working Plane Aligns all working plane axes to the corresponding active layer plane axes.
with Layer Plane The working plane origin is unchanged.
Align Working Plane Aligns the working plane Z axis toward the viewer; the X axis is aligned
with Current View horizontally and the Y axis vertically, on the screen. The working plane
origin is unchanged.
Rotate About X Left 90 Rotates the working plane to the left about its X axis by 90 degrees
Rotate About X Right Rotates the working plane to the right about its X axis by 90 degrees
90
Rotate About Y Left 90 Rotates the working plane to the left about its Y axis by 90 degrees
Rotate About Y Right Rotates the working plane to the right about its Y axis by 90 degrees
90
Rotate About Z Left 90 Rotates the working plane to the left about its Z axis by 90 degrees
Rotate About Z Right Rotates the working plane to the right about its Z axis by 90 degrees
90
Flip X Flips the working plane about its X axis
Flip Y Flips the working plane about its Y axis
Flip Z Flips the working plane about its Z axis
When using the rotate commands, left indicates counterclockwise when viewing the working plane origin from the
positive X axis.
The current working plane position, if it has not yet been saved, displays as Custom Plane. The name of the
currently selected working plane position displays in bold.
The selected working plane position displays.
Accessing Working Plane Positions from the Current Drawing Session
To access unsaved working plane positions:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Working Planes.
The Working Planes palette opens.
2. Click the left and right arrow buttons to cycle through the last ten unsaved positions from the current drawing
session. These positions are not permanently saved with the drawing.
Alternatively, select the Next Working Plane and Previous Working Plane commands from the Modify >
Working Plane menu.
Once it has been saved, a working plane position can no longer be accessed with the left and right arrows.
Saving and Accessing Working Plane Positions
The working plane position can be permanently saved with the drawing and accessed later from the Working Planes
palette. Once named, the plane position is no longer included in the list of the working planes accessed by the left and
right arrows on the Working Planes palette.
To permanently save a working plane position:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Working Planes.
The Working Planes palette opens.
2. Select the working plane position to save.
The left and right arrows cycle the drawing area through the most recent working plane positions.
3. Click Add. (Alternatively, select Modify > Working Plane > Save Working Plane.)
The Assign Name dialog box opens.
4. Enter a name for the working plane position.
586 | Chapter 14: Viewing the Drawing
5. Click OK. Saved working plane positions are displayed in alphabetical order in the palette. To access a saved
working plane position, double-click its name in the Working Planes palette or select it from the Active Planes list
on the View bar.
Button Description
Look At Working Plane Changes the view to be perpendicular to the working plane; similar to the
Top view under the View menu in that you are looking straight at the
working plane
Active Layer Plane Sets the active layer plane as the reference for tools such as the Flyover
Views tool, Walkthrough tool, and other viewing tools; used with the Flyover
tools rotation center mode
Using Working Planes | 587
Button Description
Working Plane Views Sets the working plane as the reference for tools such as the Flyover tool,
Walkthrough tool, and other viewing tools; used with the Flyover tools
rotation center mode
Third click
Second click
First click
Item Description
Render Bitmap tool Renders a selected area with a specified rendering mode, creating a
bitmap object
RenderWorks Camera tool Creates a camera view based on specific parameters
Attribute Mapping tool Adds the ability to move, rotate, and resize a texture on a 3D object
surface
VBvisual Plant tool Places high-quality 3D plants in the drawing
Object Info palette Maps textures onto object surfaces using the options on the Render
tab, and allows textures to be created and/or edited
Visualization palette Accesses lights and cameras for quick editing, selection, and
management
Resource Browser Creates new styles, textures, and background resources, imports
resources, and edits styles, textures, and backgrounds; drag a texture
to an object to apply it
Rendering modes Fast Renderworks, Final Quality Renderworks, Custom
Renderworks, and Artistic Renderworks
Batch Rendering Sets up batch rendering options and executes batch rendering
Additional light sources and Adds area lights, line lights, and custom lights, and adds accurate
parameters lighting parameters to point, directional and spot lights
Edit Class(es) dialog box Specifies texture information for classes
Edit Layers dialog box Specifies the background resource to apply to a layer
Renderworks Style command Applies the selected Renderworks style
Purge Unused Objects Purges unused textures from a drawing file
command
Create Image Prop command Creates image props from image files
Convert to Area Light Creates an area light
command
Convert to Line Light Creates a linear light
command
Set Renderworks Background Specifies the Renderworks background resource to apply to the layer
command (Vectorworks Design
Series required)
Export High Dynamic Range Creates an HDR file
Image (HDRI) command
Export QuickTime VR Object Creates a QuickTime Virtual Reality Object file
command
590 | Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures
Item Description
Export QuickTime VR Creates a QuickTime Virtual Reality Panorama file
Panorama command
Export COLLADA (3D only) Exports 3D objects in the unified view or active layer
command
Export FBX (3D only) Exports 3D objects in the unified view or active layer
command
Import Arroway Textures Adds or updates high-resolution Arroway textures to the current file
command (command must be added to the workspace)
Shader Function
Color Defines surface color; this can be a plain, uniform color, or a complex pattern like
wood or marble
Reflectivity Defines amount of light reflected by surface; it is dependent on surface texture
properties and any light sources
Transparency Defines surface transparency or opacity
Bump Defines surface irregularities which give the texture a bumpy appearance
Creating Textures
Textures are created and displayed in the Resource Browser and are saved with the file (default content is automatically
imported into the file at the point of use, and displays in the Resource Browser); see Libraries on page 155 and
Using the Resource Browser on page 157. Textures are created by defining the shaders that make up the texture.
Apply textures to an object from the Resource Browser or from the Render tab of the Object Info palette. See
Applying and Mapping Textures on page 616 for more information.
Parameter Description
Name Specifies the name of the texture resource
592 | Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures
Parameter Description
Shaders Sets the type of shader or combination of shaders to use, and specifies the shader
parameters.
Color Color shaders apply a color or pattern to the surface of an object. Select a color
shader from the list, or choose Object Attribute to apply the objects fill color
attribute. Image-based shaders require the selection of an image file (see
Creating Image-based Shaders on page 594). After selecting the shader, click
Edit to edit the shader properties.
Reflectivity Reflectivity shaders control how much light is reflected from a surface. Select a
reflectivity shader from the list (or select None to exclude this type of shader
from the texture). Image-based shaders require the selection of an image file (see
Creating Image-based Shaders on page 594). After selecting the shader, click
Edit to edit the shader properties.
Transparency Transparency shaders control surface transparency or opacity. Select a
transparency shader from the list (or select None to exclude this type of shader
from the texture). Image-based shaders require the selection of an image file (see
Creating Image-based Shaders on page 594). Mask-based transparency
shaders create a transparent mask from an image based on specified settings.
After selecting the shader, click Edit to edit the shader properties.
Bump Bump shaders apply a texture with bumps or dimples to an object surface. Select
a bump shader from the list (or select None to exclude this type of shader from
the texture). Image-based shaders require the selection of an image file (see
Creating Image-based Shaders on page 594). After selecting the shader, click
Edit to edit the shader properties.
Size Sets the real-world size for each repetition of the texture
If applying a brick shader, specify whether to adjust the brick dimensions
proportionally to match the change to the texture size.
Set By Image For image-based textures, opens the Set Image Size dialog box, to set the texture
size using the image (see Setting the Texture Size by Image on page 593)
Shadows
Cast Allows objects with this texture to cast shadows
Receive Allows objects with this texture to receive shadows
Preview Options The Preview window displays the effects of shader and size selections on a
preview object
Preview Controls Adjusts the preview position and magnification. Click Pan and drag the preview
to the desired location. Click Zoom In or Zoom Out and then click and drag to
create a marquee; this zooms in or out on a particular section of the preview.
Click Fit to fit the preview to the window (according to Obj Size).
Obj Type Select the type of preview object from the list; for procedural (non image-based)
shaders, the Flat object type is automatically used to create a preview for
OpenGL rendering to approximate the look of the solid shader
Obj Size Specifies the preview object size
Shader check Select to preview the associated shader; deselect to exclude the shader
boxes component from the texture preview
Creating Textures | 593
Parameter Description
Indirect Lighting Opens the Indirect Lighting Texture Options dialog box, to set any overrides for
Options the texture when rendering with indirect lighting (see Setting Indirect Lighting
Options on page 593)
Revert Returns the texture parameters to the original settings, undoing any changes
4. Click OK to create a texture with the name and properties specified in the Edit Texture dialog box. The texture
displays in the Resource Browser and is saved with the file (the texture preview in the Resource Browser uses the
Flat preview object at twice the texture size for ease of identification).
If you are modeling a glass object (glass reflectivity shader) with a 3D polygon or other sheet-like 3D object,
duplicate and offset the 3D polygon by a small amount so that rays are traced through the glass with both an
entering and exiting surface.
3. Specify the image length to use for sizing the texture by dragging the line segment into position, and then dragging
the ends of the line segment. If necessary, use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom into and out of the image, or click
and hold the mouse wheel button to pan.
When the line is indicating the desired real-world length, specify the real-world size for the line segment in
Feature Size.
4. Click OK to exit the Set Image Size dialog box and update the Size value.
Parameter Description
Override Indirect Lighting Sets whether the texture should participate in indirect lighting calculations.
Emit Light Select this option if the texture should both receive and emit light
Receive Light Select this option if the texture should receive light but not emit it
2. Click OK.
Parameter Description
Import an Image File Imports a new image; click OK and proceed to Step 4.
Reuse an Image from Reuses a previously imported image; select the resource or other shader type that
Another Resource contains the image. Click OK and proceed to Step 5.
4. Select the desired image file in the Import QuickTime Image Document dialog box. Click Open.
5. The next dialog box that opens depends on the type of shader. Refer to the section that applies to the shader.
Shader Section
Color Importing Images for Color Shaders on page 595
Reflectivity Importing Images for Reflectivity Shaders on page 596
Transparency Importing Images for Transparency Shaders on page 598
Bump Importing Images for Bump Shaders on page 601
Edit Texture
dialog box
Image already No image previously
imported in file imported
Color shader -
image color
Reuse image
Image appears in
Preview window
596 | Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures
Parameter Description
Image preview Edits to the image are displayed in the image preview
Tile Image Repeats the image in the horizontal, vertical, or horizontal and vertical
directions; deselect for no tiling
Filter Color
No filter Does not change the image with a filter color
Use Object Fill Filters the color of the image by the fill color selected for the object (can
be different for each object that is textured by this texture)
Use Chosen Color Tints the image with the selected color; click the color box to choose a
filter color for the image
Change Image Selects a different image for import
Flip H/V Flips the image horizontally or vertically
Rotate Rotates the image 90 counter-clockwise
Invert Produces a negative of the image
Edit Texture
dialog box
Image already No image previously
imported in file imported
Reflectivity
image-based shader
Reuse image
Image appears in
Preview window
Parameter Description
Image preview Edits to the image are displayed in the image preview
Change Image Selects a different image for import
Flip H/V Flips the image horizontally or vertically
Rotate Rotates the image 90 counter-clockwise
Invert Produces a negative of the image
Reflection (%) Sets the amount of reflection. Generally, white pixels are the most reflective, while
colored pixels reflect in their color.
Blurriness (%) Sets how blurry the reflection appears. A range of 0 40% is typical.
598 | Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures
Edit Texture
dialog box
Image already No image previously
imported in file imported
Image Transparency
shader
Reuse image
Image appears in
Preview window
Parameter Description
Image preview Edits to the image are displayed in the image preview
Index of Refraction As light moves through a medium, the index measures the change in the
direction of the lights rays. An index of 1.0 indicates none; a typical
value for water and ice is 1.3, and for glass use 1.5 1.6.
Blurriness (%) Sets image blurring when rendered in Final Quality or Custom
Renderworks (with Blurriness selected)
Creating Textures | 599
Parameter Description
Absorption Color Click the color box to select a color that the object may absorb differently,
making it appear tinted by that color
Absorption Distance Defines the distance rays of light have to travel before Absorption Color
replaces the image color. The lower the value, the more intense the
Absorption Color is.
Change Image Selects a different image for import
Flip H/V Flips the image horizontally or vertically
Rotate Rotates the image 90 counter-clockwise
Invert Produces a negative of the image
See Transparency Shaders on page 909 for more details about transparency parameters.
Mask Transparency
The process of selecting a mask transparency shader is illustrated by the following flow chart.
Edit Texture
dialog box
Image already No image previously
imported in file imported
Image Mask
Transparency shader
Reuse image
Parameter Description
Horizontal/ Specifies the number of repetitions of the mask shader in the horizontal and
Vertical vertical direction
Repetitions
Single The mask shader does not repeat; it is only shown once (this is the typical setting,
especially for decals)
Infinite The mask shader repeats infinitely in the horizontal and/or vertical direction
Custom The mask shader repeats the specified number of times
Anti-Aliased Select to smooth the edges of the image mask
Change Image Selects a different image for import
Transparent Edits the transparent color mask settings
Color Mask
Flip H/V Flips the image horizontally or vertically
Rotate Rotates the image 90 counter-clockwise
Invert Produces a negative of the image; useful for swapping the opaque and transparent
areas of a grayscale mask
3. To use the image as a mask, click Transparent Color Mask; the Create Transparent Color Mask dialog box
opens. Select the mask properties and click OK.
The source image must be more than eight-bit color to create a transparent color mask. Images with a
monochrome background are easiest to use when creating a mask transparency.
Creating Textures | 601
Parameter Description
Source Image Displays the imported image. Select the transparent color by clicking a color in the
image; the resulting mask is displayed in the Transparent Color Mask preview. If
necessary, use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom into and out of the image, or click
and hold the mouse wheel button to pan.
Transparent Displays the current transparent color. Either click on the source image to
Color designate the transparent color, or select the color by clicking the color box.
Transparent Displays a preview of the mask based on the current transparent color selection
Color Mask and settings
Color Matching Adjusts the transparency tolerance; drag the slider to the right to increase the
Tolerance tolerance level. This allows a wider range of pixels similar to the transparent color
to be considered transparent.
Mask Contrast Adjusts the mask edge contrast; increase the edge contrast sharpness by dragging
the slider to the right. Soften the contrast by dragging the slider to the left.
4. Click OK. The mask is previewed in the Edit Image Mask dialog box.
5. Click OK again. The imported mask transparency is previewed in the Edit Texture dialog box.
Edit Texture
dialog box
Image already No image previously
imported in file imported
Bump image-based
shader
Reuse image
Image appears in
Preview window
Parameter Description
Image preview Edits to the image are displayed in the image preview
Change Image Selects a different image for import
Flip H/V Flips the image horizontally or vertically
Rotate Rotates the image 90 counter-clockwise
Invert Produces a negative of the image; useful for reversing the high and low pixels for a
bump image
Editing Textures and Shaders | 603
Parameter Description
Bump Strength (%) Sets the amplitude of the bump shader. Positive and negative values can be entered. A
value of 10% would result in a mild bumpy appearance.
Displacement Mapping For realistic bump textures, displacement mapping creates texture and bumpy details
with a rendering technique that appears embossed, projecting the geometry outward
from the surface.
This mapping applies only to Final Quality and Custom Renderworks, when
Displacement Mapping is enabled in the render options. Rendering can be
significantly slower with displacement mapping.
If the image bump does not provide the desired results, try a noise bump shader.
Height Specify a non-zero height to enable displacement mapping; large height values may
result in longer render times
Detail Sets the level of detail for displacement mapping; requirements and results vary
depending on the texture and the surfaces face size. Textures without too much bump
detail and a large face size, such as boards or stones, render with less detail and can be
set with a lower level of detail; fine, faceted textures like grass or leaves may require a
high level of detail, which also requires more rendering time. Conversely, very large
surfaces, like a ground plane, may need higher levels of detail to see the displacement.
Self-Shadowing Adds shadows to the displaced geometry, increasing realism as well as rendering time
When you use the monochromatic textures provided with the Vectorworks program, the Bump Strength
parameter may require careful adjustment depending on the viewing distance from the model.
Due to compression artifacts, JPG images generally do not work well as bump images. PNG and TIF compression
works well for bump images; when importing images, select PNG rather than JPG as the compression method.
Default content is automatically imported into the current file at the point of use and displays in the Resource Browser;
see Libraries on page 155. Arroway textures are easily identified because they contain Arroway in the texture
name.
If your file contains low-resolution Arroway textures and you want to update them to their high-resolution equivalents,
or if you have purchased high-resolution Arroway textures and would like to use them in a Vectorworks file, the
Import Arroway Textures command accomplishes this automatically. This command is not available by default, but
must be added to the workspace.
To update low-resolution Arroway textures or import new Arroway textures:
1. Purchase the required high-resolution textures from Arroway and place them in a folder. Organize the purchased
textures so that the ones to be imported or updated are contained in a folder, and optionally in subfolders.
2. Add the Import Arroway Textures command to a new or existing workspace (see Modifying Menus and
Commands on page 870). The command can be found among the Import/Export items on the Menus tab of the
Workspace Editor.
3. Select Import Arroway Textures from the custom location in the workspace.
The Import Arroway Textures dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Create New Textures Creates new image-based textures from the Arroway
high-resolution textures in the specified folder(s)
Update Existing Updates any low-resolution Arroway textures in the current file
Textures with their high-resolution equivalent
Max Pixel Dimension Specifies the maximum dimension for the imported textures;
choose the lowest practical pixel dimension to avoid memory
issues, particularly when several textures are used
4. Click Import.
The Import Arroway Textures Folder dialog box opens.
5. Select the folder containing the high-resolution Arroway textures you have purchased.
Using several very large images may affect performance.
6. Click Select Folder to import or upgrade the Arroway textures from the selected folder and any subfolders.
Renderworks textures are automatically created or updated in the current file.
Editing Textures and Shaders | 605
To avoid making unwanted permanent changes to a texture resource that is used by several objects, select
Duplicate (Texture Name) Resource and Edit and work on a copy of the texture resource instead of the original.
Changes made to a copy of the texture only apply to the current selection.
Parameter Description
Shaders Select a different or additional shader, or edit the shader parameters, as
described in Creating Textures on page 591
606 | Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures
Parameter Description
Size Sets the real-world size for each repetition of the texture
Set By Image For image-based shaders, click to set the real-world size in relation to a
segment of the image (if several image-based shaders are used, select the
shader in the Choose Image dialog box first). In the Set Image Size dialog
box, specify the texture length to use for sizing by dragging the ends of
the line segment. Then, specify the real-world size for the line segment in
Feature Size. Click OK to exit the Set Image Size dialog box and update
the Size value.
The size should reflect the file setup. For example, if the layer scale is 1/
4 and feet and inches are being used, the size should be in feet, not
inches.
Shadows
Cast Allows objects with this texture to cast shadows (for rendering modes that
display shadows)
Receive Allows objects with this texture to receive shadows (for rendering modes
that display shadows)
Indirect Lighting Options Opens the Indirect Lighting Texture Options dialog box, to set any
overrides for the texture when rendering with indirect lighting (see
Setting Indirect Lighting Options on page 593).
Preview Options
Render Mode Select a rendering mode for the preview window; this does not change the
drawing rendering mode
Update When Values Select to render the preview with the selected Render Mode as
Change parameters change; if deselected, the drawing is not updated until the
dialog box is closed
Render Selected Object Select to render only the selected object as parameters change; deselect to
Only render objects within the preview window as parameters change
(Texture Name) is Used by Indicates the number of objects in the file with the current texture applied
2. Click Edit to edit one of the shaders that make up the texture. The dialog box that opens depends on the shader.
Descriptions of all the possible parameters are presented in alphabetical order in Shader Types on page 891.
608 | Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures
Parameter Description
Import an Image File Imports a new image; click OK and proceed to Step 3.
Reuse an Image from Another Reuses a previously imported image; select the resource that
Resource contains the image. Click OK and proceed to Step 4.
3. Select the desired image file in the Open (Windows) or Import QuickTime Image Document (Macintosh) dialog
box. Click Open.
4. The Image Prop Options dialog box opens. Specify the parameters for the image prop.
Creating Image Prop Objects | 609
Parameter Description
Name Specify a name for the image prop (used for the texture and symbol
name)
Dimensions Specifies the image props height and width values
Lock Aspect Ratio Maintains the images aspect ratio when selected; editing one
dimension automatically changes the other
Mask Options
No Mask Specifies that no image masking is to be used for the imported image
Use Mask Specifies that image masking is to be used; click Create Mask to
specify the mask image and properties as described in Mask
Transparency on page 599
Crossed Planes Creates the illusion of object fullness by creating two image planes at a
90 degree angle to each other
Constant Reflectivity Excludes the prop from the effects of light objects placed in the
drawing; this is useful for images that already contain shadowed areas
Create Plug-In Object Creates a plug-in object out of the prop; this allows the prop to be
resized and automatically rotated
Auto Rotate to Viewer Adjusts the plug-in object so that it is always rendered facing the
viewer
610 | Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures
Parameter Description
Create Symbol Creates a symbol from the image prop; the image prop name is
automatically assigned as the symbol name. Generating the image prop
as a symbol allows the image prop to be easily re-inserted in the
drawing.
Select Auto Rotate to Viewer for crossed plane images, so that the crossed planes cannot be detected.
5. Click OK to create the image prop.
The image prop symbol parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette. In the Resource Browser, the image
prop is listed as a symbol/plug-in object, if selected at creation. In addition, a texture is created for use by the
image prop. Both the texture and, if created, the symbol/plug-in object, are assigned the name provided in the
Image Prop Options dialog box.
Adding 3D Plants
Many designs have a need for plants that render quickly and appear more realistic than image prop objects. The
Renderworks product includes several high-quality 3D plants from VBvisual, makers of 3D content for rendering
packages. These plants look authentic in all views and cast realistic shadows, without adding excessively to rendering
times or file size. The Renderworks product includes three free plants; more plants can be purchased to add to the
library of 3D plants.
To place a 3D plant:
1. Click the VBvisual Plant tool from the Visualization tool set.
2. Select the plant to insert from the VBvisual Plant list on the Tool bar.
3. Click to insert the selected plant into the drawing.
Creating Layer Backgrounds | 611
When applicable, the low resolution, summer version of the plant is inserted by default. The plant includes a 3D
locus so it can be easily moved; in addition, the plant can be sent to the surface of a site model (see Sending
Objects to the Site Model Surface on page 306 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide). In plan view, a
2D version of the plant displays.
The object properties can be edited from the Object Info palette. The options available depend on the selected plant
type.
Parameter Description
Name Select the plant species from the list of included or purchased plants, or click
More Plants to purchase additional plants
Height Select the plant height from the list of available heights for the selected plant
Resolution Certain plants include both a low- and high-resolution version. Selecting a
high resolution provides the best appearance, but takes longer to render.
Season Select the season for the plant to display
More plants are available for purchase in Vectorworks file format from VBvisual. Purchased plants must be placed in
the default content library folder named VBvisual Plant (see Libraries on page 155).
Renderworks backgrounds are resources that are created and displayed in the Resource Browser and are saved with the
file (default content is automatically imported into the file at the point of use, and displays in the Resource Browser);
see Libraries on page 155. Several Renderworks styles make use of backgrounds.
Creating a Background
To create a background:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser to open the Resource Browser.
2. From the Resources menu, select New Resource to display the New Resource menu.
3. Select Renderworks Background.
612 | Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures
4. Enter the name of the new background and select the type of background to create. Click Options to set specific
background parameters.
Parameter Description
None Select this option when creating a lit fog effect without an additional
background
Clouds Specifies a sky background with a background color and clouds
Scale Specifies the cloud scale (1 10); enter a larger value for larger cloud sizes
Background Color Select a background color for the sky
Cloud Color Select a cloud color
Detail Specifies the level of cloud resolution; drag the slider to the right to specify
a greater level of detail (requires longer rendering times)
One Color Specifies a background with one color; click Options to select the color
Two Color Specifies a background with two colors which blend to form a gradient;
click Options to select the colors
Top Color Select the color for the start of the color gradient at the top of the page
Bottom Color Select the color for the end of the color gradient at the bottom of the page
Image Uses a specified image for the background (see Creating Image
Backgrounds on page 613)
Image Environment Uses a panoramic High Dynamic Range Image (HDRI) file for the
(HDRI) background (see Creating HDRI Backgrounds on page 614)
Physical Sky Uses environment lighting to realistically simulate various sky conditions
(see Creating Physical Sky Backgrounds on page 616)
Lit Fog Creates volumetric lighting effects, such as a shaft or cone of scattered
light in fog, haze, or smoke. A point or spot light object must be inserted in
the drawing, and Lit Fog must be selected in the Object Info palette for the
light source object.
Lit fog cannot be applied to directional, area, or line lights.
Fog Density (%) Specifies the fog density; enter a larger value to increase the density of the
effect
Fog Consistency Creates either a smooth or uneven fog effect
Creating Layer Backgrounds | 613
Parameter Description
Receive Shadows Allows the effect to be blocked by solid objects, creating shadows; for
example, when blocking a shaft of light by a table, so that light does not
display under the table
Use Shadows must also be selected in the rendering options.
OpenGL render mode only displays One Color, Two Color, and Image backgrounds.
5. Click OK from the Create Renderworks Background dialog box to create the background resource.
The new background resource is listed in the Resource Browser. It is available in the Edit Design Layers dialog
box (see Applying Renderworks Backgrounds on page 636 for information).
A Renderworks background can be quickly edited by pressing Ctrl (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) and
double-clicking on the resource in the Resource Browser.
Backgrounds and lit fog effects can be used together.
Textures and backgrounds that are not used in the drawing file should be purged to reduce file size. See Purging
Items from a File on page 260.
Parameter Description
Width Sets the width of the image in page units (inches or millimeters); width
edits also automatically change the height, to maintain the image aspect
ratio
Height Sets the height of the image in page units (inches or millimeters); height
edits also automatically change the width, to maintain the image aspect
ratio
Change Image Selects a different image for import
Flip H/V Flips the image horizontally or vertically
Rotate Rotates the image 90 counter-clockwise
Invert Produces a negative of the image
By default, an image environment background renders as both a background and a light source. However, it is possible
to use one HDRI background resource as an environment background, and another for environment lighting; see
Setting Lighting Options on page 641. Several Renderworks styles incorporate the use of an HDRI background.
HDRI backgrounds render best in Perspective projection. In Orthogonal projection, HDRI backgrounds are
suitable for lighting and reflections, but appear as a single background color because of the narrow field of view.
If the HDRI background includes a sun in its image, and the drawing also contains directional lights, the light
directions may not match, creating multiple shadows.
To create an HDRI background:
1. Create the background resource as described in Creating Layer Backgrounds on page 611.
2. Select Image Environment (HDRI) from the Background list.
3. Select the .hdr image file to use. The image is automatically converted to Lat/Long format. An OpenEXR file can
also be used; it must be in Lat/Long format.
The Edit Image Environment (HDRI) Background dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Preview Displays a preview of the selected image
Rotation Rotates the image clockwise about the Z axis, changing the light orientation
and visible portion of the image (range: -180 to 180 degrees; positive angles
are rotated clockwise)
Change Image Imports a different image to use as the HDRI background
Brightness (%) Specifies the brightness for environment lighting; enter a percentage or drag
the slider to change the brightness. A value over 100% can be entered.
Saturation (%) Specifies the color saturation for environment lighting; enter a percentage or
drag the slider to change the saturation. A value over 100% can be entered.
Quality Specifies the sampling value of the rendered image; higher-quality sampling
results in better image resolution, but longer rendering times. Select From
Render Mode to use the Soft Shadows quality specified in the render options
(see Custom Renderworks Options on page 673).
616 | Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures
Parameter Description
Preview Displays a preview of the sky condition
Sky Condition Select the amount of cloud cover for the sky background
Brightness (%) Specifies the brightness of the sky background; enter a percentage or drag the
slider to change the brightness. A value over 100% can be entered.
Saturation (%) Specifies the color saturation of the sky background; enter a percentage or
drag the slider to change the saturation. A value over 100% can be entered.
different from those applied to the Sides. For some mapping types, you can then use the Attribute Mapping tool to
adjust the texture mapping directly.
Decals are special textures that are applied over other textures. They are created from imported images or existing
texture resources.
Finally, a Renderworks background can be applied to add impact and realism to the design.
Texture frame
(showing the first
repetition of the
texture)
Mapping surface
(a plane parallel
to a face of the
object)
Radius control
Texture frame
(showing the first
repetition of the
texture)
Mapping surface
representation (a
cross-section of
the cylinder)
Texture frame
(showing the first
repetition of the
texture)
Editing a cylinder map with the
Attribute Mapping tool
Sphere and Cylinder maps have seams that are more apparent with wrapped and image-based shaders
Applying and Mapping Textures | 619
Roof Wraps the texture across the perimeter of the roof object (Attribute Mapping tool not
supported)
The available map types vary based on the object type being mapped.
Left (exterior)
Right
Left (interior)
If the texture(s) is incorrectly applied to a wall, with the wall selected, click Reverse Sides on the Shape tab of the
Object Info palette. This flips the direction of the wall, switching the texture(s) to the opposite side(s).
Parameter Description
Part Some objects can have different textures (including decals) applied to different parts.
For extrudes, sweeps, slabs, floors, and roof faces, apply textures to the top, bottom, and
sides.
For slabs (Vectorworks Architect required), the Mode selection determines whether to
apply textures from the slab components or from the slab. If you select By Component
mode, the textures set for the slab components also determine the slab textures (see
Creating Slab Components on page 109 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide).
If you select By Object mode, apply textures to the top, bottom, and sides.
For walls and round walls, the Mode selection determines whether to apply textures from
the wall components or from the wall. If you select By Component mode, the textures set
for the wall components also determine the wall textures (see Creating Wall Components
on page 438). If you select By Object mode, apply textures to the left, right, top, bottom,
start cap, end cap, and holes. Left and right wall texture parts can only be applied to wall
holes when editing the wall hole component; see Adding a 3D Wall Hole Component to a
Symbol Definition on page 494.
For roof objects, apply textures to the top, bottom, sides, and dormer walls, and if
Vectorworks Design Series products are installed, fascia, attic, and soffit. The Part option is
not available for objects without distinct parts.
The texture or decal applied to each part displays in parentheses next to the part. To apply a
texture to Overall or to a part, select it and then select a texture to apply from the texture list.
Overall indicates that the same texture applies to all parts of the object. Parts that have been
assigned a texture different from Overall display above the divider, and parts with the same
texture as Overall display below the divider.
The Overall texture is Glass Clear, and the sides of the object are
inheriting the Overall texture. The top and bottom of the object have
unique textures different from the Overall texture.
Parameter Description
Map Type Select how the texture is applied to the 3D object; see Map Types on page 617
Reset to Default Removes any changes made by the Attribute Mapping tool or in the Object Info palette,
Mapping restoring the texture to its original location, scale, and rotation.
Scale Determines the texture size when projected onto the object. For example, a value of 2 doubles
the size of the texture projection. Either enter a scale value or use the slider to change the
scale.
Rotation Sets the angle of texture rotation. Either enter a rotation value from 0 to 360 degrees or use the
slider to change the rotation angle.
Parameter Description
Flip Horizontally Flips the texture horizontally, along the vertical axis
Flip Vertically Flips the texture vertically, along the horizontal axis
Radius For sphere and cylinder map types, sets the texture radius; the default radius is the same as the
3D object radius. Increasing this value reduces the size of the texture on the object.
Follow Longest Aligns the textures U axis with the long edge of a face, for simpler mapping when the
Edge auto-align plane map type is selected. When deselected, the texture aligns horizontally in
object space.
Use World Z For Sets the textures Z origin to be relative to the world Z origin, rather than to object space. This
Origin allows seamless texture application across multiple layers for all mapping types. Multiple
objects with this parameter enabled render seamlessly along the Z axis.
Align Selected For plane, cylinder, and sphere map types, aligns the texture mapping of multiple selected
Mappings objects, giving them the appearance of a shared texture. Multiple objects with this parameter
enabled use the mapping parameters of the first selected object, and the texture appears
seamless across all selected objects. The shared mapping depends on the objects currently
selected and can change with a different selection of objects.
This parameter is not available for auto-align plane, perimeter, or roof map types.
Update Updates the drawing display
The texture can also be applied to objects from the Resource Browser. Click the texture and drag it to the desired
object, or select the desired object(s), and double-click on the texture to apply. Alternatively, select the object(s),
right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the texture, and select Apply from the context menu.
However, when a texture is applied in this way, mapping options cannot be accessed directly. Click on the Render
tab of the Object Info palette to edit the texture mapping.
6. The texture is applied to the selected object(s).
Scale/Rotate by Corner
Mode Description
Non-Repeating For repeating textures, displays a single repetition of the texture for easier texture editing
Original Repeat For repeating textures, restores the repeating pattern of the texture
Scale/Rotate by For resizing or rotating textures with the handles on the texture frame; the texture frame scales
Corner from or rotates about the handle opposite to the handle that was clicked on
624 | Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures
Mode Description
Scale/Rotate by For resizing or rotating textures with the handles on the texture frame; the texture frame scales
Center from or rotates about its center
Part menu For textured objects with more than one textureable part, such as walls and roofs, allows a
different part of the object to be selected for texture editing; allows decals to be selected for
mapping adjustments
The Attribute Mapping tool also edits hatch, tile, gradient, and image fills. See Mapping Fills with the Attribute
Mapping Tool on page 531.
Action Description
To move the texture 2D mapping mode: Click inside the editing frame and drag the texture to the
desired location on the object surface
3D mapping mode: Click the center diamond-shaped handle at the origin, and
drag the texture to the desired location on the object surface. The texture plane
moves with the image, allowing you to snap the image to a snap point on the
object.
To resize the texture (2D Click on a corner handle of the editing frame (the resize cursor displays), and
mapping only) drag to set the editing object to a new scale. Click to set.
Applying and Mapping Textures | 625
Action Description
To rotate the texture 2D mapping mode: Click on a side handle of the editing frame (the rotate
cursor displays) and drag the handle to the new rotation angle. Click to set.
3D mapping mode: Click on one of the handles along the axis to rotate about.
The rotate cursor displays, and a dashed preview indicates the rotation space.
Move the cursor to rotate the texture, and click to set it.
To set the texture to a face Click the hand cursor to set the texture mapping to the surface of the indicated
(plane map type only) face. The texture plane is positioned tangent to the surface at the click point, with
the origin of the texture plane at the click point.
To change the radius of the Click on one of the four radius control handles around the edge of the circle that
texture projection (sphere and represents the mapping surface, and drag the handle to the new radius length.
cylinder map types, 2D Click to set.
mapping only)
7. To edit the mapping of another part of a textured object, select the next part to edit from the Part list and repeat the
process.
626 | Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures
Click a side
handle to rotate
the texture
2D mapping mode
3D mapping mode
Decals must be rendered in a Renderworks mode. The Cartoon Artistic Renderworks mode cannot display decals.
Applying and Mapping Textures | 627
Parameter Description
Import an Image File Imports a new image; select the desired image file in the Open (Windows) or Import
QuickTime Image Document (Macintosh) dialog box. Click Open.
Reuse an Existing Image Reuses a previously imported image; select the resource that contains the image
Select a Texture Applies the texture over the objects base texture; no further settings are required
4. If the decal consists of an imported or reused image, the Decal Options dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Name Provide a name for the decal texture
Size Sets the real-world size for each repetition of the texture; by default, decal textures show
only one repetition horizontally and vertically
Mask Options Indicates the type of masking for the image decal
628 | Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures
Parameter Description
Rectangular Mask Creates a rectangular mask around the decal; no further settings are required
Image Mask Masks the decal image per pixel using an image mask to determine which areas of the
image are transparent or opaque
Choose Image Opens the Choose Decal Mask Image dialog box, for selecting the image mask
5. If creating a rectangular mask decal, proceed to step 9. Otherwise, if creating an image mask, click Choose
Image.
The Choose Decal Mask Image dialog box opens; select the image mask to use. A new image can be imported for
masking, or an existing image resource from the current file can be selected (including the current image).
6. Click OK.
The Create Mask dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Grayscale Pixels Creates a mask from the images pixel brightness values; brighter pixels are more opaque
Transparent Color Creates a mask with a selected transparent color and mask parameters
Alpha Channel Uses the alpha channel of a source image as the mask (image must contain valid alpha
channel information)
For Grayscale Pixel and Alpha Channel masks, click OK. Proceed to Step 9.
7. If Transparent Color was selected, the Create Transparent Color Mask dialog box opens. Select the mask
properties and click OK.
The source image must be more than eight-bit color to create a transparent color mask. Images with a
monochrome background are easiest to use when creating a mask transparency.
Applying and Mapping Textures | 629
Parameter Description
Source Image Displays the imported image. Select the transparent color by clicking a color in the image; the
resulting mask is displayed in the Transparent Color Mask preview. If necessary, use the mouse
scroll wheel to zoom into and out of the image, or click and hold the mouse wheel button to pan.
Transparent Displays the current transparent color. Instead of clicking on the source image to designate the
Color transparent color, the color can be selected by clicking the color box.
Transparent Displays a preview of the mask based on the current transparent color selection and settings
Color Mask
Color Matching Adjusts the transparency tolerance; drag the slider to the right to increase the tolerance level.
Tolerance This allows a wider range of pixels similar to the transparent color to be considered transparent.
Mask Contrast Adjusts the mask edge contrast; increase the contrast sharpness by dragging the slider to the
right. Soften the contrast by dragging the slider to the left.
To adjust the mapping of the decal texture with the Attribute Mapping tool:
If the selected part has an unsupported texture underlying the decal (with an auto-align plane, perimeter, or roof
mapping type), an alert displays. Select another map type and click Yes to continue.
4. If applicable, select how to scale or rotate the texture from the Tool bar. To adjust the texture about a corner of the
editing frame, click Scale/Rotate by Corner mode; to adjust the texture about the center of the editing frame,
click Scale/Rotate by Center mode.
5. An editing frame in 2D mapping mode is placed over the decal texture. Set the decal position and rotate or resize
the decal as needed.
Click a corner
handle to resize
the texture
Click a side
handle to rotate
the texture
Action Description
To move the decal Click inside of the editing frame and drag the texture to the desired location on the base
texture
To resize the decal Click on a corner handle of the editing frame; the resize cursor displays. Drag to set the
editing object to a new scale. Click to set.
To rotate the decal Click on a side handle of the editing frame (the rotate cursor displays) and drag the handle to
the new rotation angle. Click to set.
Multiple decals applied to an object add to the Part list and also add buttons that allow the decal stacking order to
change.
Parameter Description
Part Some objects can have different textures (including decals) applied to different parts; Overall
indicates that the same texture applies to all different parts of the object.
The texture or decal applied to each part displays in parentheses next to the part. To apply a
decal to Overall or to a part, select it and then select Add Decal.
For more information, see Applying a Texture to an Object on page 620.
Remove Decal Removes the decal from the currently selected Part; clicking Revert to Overall also removes
all decals along with the base texture
Add Decal Adds a decal to the currently selected Part
Move Up/Down Decals are stacked in order as they are applied. When more than one decal has been applied to
a selected Part, click to move the selected decal up or down in the stacking order.
Texture Select the texture to apply from either the default content or the current files content
Thumbnail view Displays a thumbnail view of the selected decal
Reset Mapping Removes any changes made by the Attribute Mapping tool or in the Object Info palette,
restoring the decal to its original location, scale, and rotation
Scale Determines the texture size when projected onto the object. For example, entering a scale
factor of two doubles the size of the texture projection.
Either enter a scale value or use the slider to change the scale.
Offset H/V Sets the start location of the texture horizontally and vertically
Rotation Sets the angle of texture rotation. Either enter a rotation value from 0 to 360 degrees or use the
slider to change the rotation angle.
Update Updates the drawing display
Roof faces, extrudes, sweeps, and floors contain additional textureable parts, but the Edit Class(es) dialog box
does not make this distinction. Textures are applied by class like any other 3D object; see Applying Object
Textures by Class on page 632. Apply textures to the individual parts of these objects with the Object Info palette
and not by class; see Applying a Texture to an Object on page 620.
Textures cannot be assigned to individual symbols directly through the Object Info palette. Textures must be applied to
the separate components of the symbol. This can be done using the Edit Symbol command or by assigning textures to
the classes that make up the symbol; complex objects can contain more than one class. Texture changes affect all
instances of that symbol.
5. Select any fill Style other than None (otherwise the texture will not render).
6. The texture properties of the class are set in the bottom section of the dialog box. Click the Other tab.
7. Select the desired Texture from either the default content or the current files content (see Libraries on
page 155). Select Use Textures At Creation to apply the texture to objects as they are created.
8. Click OK to exit the Edit Class(es) dialog box.
The class displays on the Classes tab of the Organization dialog box.
9. If the object has not yet been drawn, click the blank area to the left of the Class Name to make the class active.
Applying Textures to Symbols, Walls, and Roofs | 633
If the object already exists, apply the class to it. For some object types, the class name is specified in its settings or
in the Object Info palette.
10. Click OK to exit the Organization dialog box.
11. Create the desired object(s). Objects are created with the specified texture for that class.
5. Select any fill Style other than None (otherwise the texture will not render).
6. The texture properties of the class are set in the bottom section of the dialog box. Click the Walls tab.
7. Select the desired Right, Center, and Left wall surface texture from either the default content or the current files
content (see Libraries on page 155). Select Use Textures At Creation to apply the texture at wall creation. See
Texture Projection and Orientation on page 617 to understand how textures are applied to wall faces.
8. Click OK to exit the Edit Class(es) dialog box.
The new walls class displays on the Classes tab of the Organization dialog box.
9. Click the blank area to the left of the Class Name to make the new class active.
10. Click OK to exit the Organization dialog box.
11. Create the wall(s); see Creating Walls on page 429.
The walls are created with the specified texture for that class. Existing wall(s) can be assigned the texture through
the Object Info palette. Select the part of the wall to texture from the Part list and then Class Texture from the
texture list on the Render tab.
Applying Textures to Symbols, Walls, and Roofs | 635
5. Select any fill Style other than None (otherwise the texture will not render).
6. The texture properties of the class are set in the bottom section of the dialog box. Click the Roofs tab.
7. Assign a Top Texture, and if being used, a Dormer Texture from either the default content or the current files
content (see Libraries on page 155). Select Use Textures At Creation to apply the texture at creation.
8. Click OK to exit the Edit Class(es) dialog box. The class displays on the Classes tab of the Organization dialog
box.
9. Click the blank area to the left of the Class Name to make the new class active.
10. Click OK to exit the Organization dialog box.
11. Create a roof with the Create Roof command (see Creating Roof Objects on page 458).
The roof is created with the specified texture for that class. Existing roofs can be assigned the texture through the
Object Info palette. Select the part of the roof to texture from the Part list and then Class Texture from the texture
list on the Render tab.
636 | Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures
5. Select the Renderworks Background for the layer from either the default content or the current files content (see
Libraries on page 155).
If the Renderworks Background choices are not available, the background selection is controlled by the
Renderworks style in effect. Set the background in the Renderworks style instead; see Renderworks Styles on
page 669.
6. Click OK to exit the Edit Design Layers dialog box.
7. Click OK to exit the Organization dialog box.
When the drawing is rendered in a Renderworks mode, the background displays. OpenGL can display One Color,
Two Color, and Image backgrounds.
Applying Renderworks Backgrounds | 637
3. Select the Renderworks background for the current layer from either the default content or the current files
content (see Libraries on page 155).
4. Click OK.
When the drawing is rendered in a Renderworks mode, the background displays. OpenGL can display One Color,
Two Color, and Image backgrounds.
When in unified view mode, the background selected here displays for all layers, overriding any background
selected for individual layers in the layer properties. To retain the layer background upon exiting unified view,
select Restore Original Views when exiting Unified View mode in the Unified View Options dialog box. See
Setting Unified View Options on page 561.
638 | Chapter 15: Creating and Mapping Textures
Rendering the Drawing 16
Rendering Overview
Rendering gives a solid appearance to 3D objects. Solid objects can cast shadows and occlude (hide) objects that are
behind them.
The Vectorworks Fundamentals product provides a quick rendering solution using OpenGL (see Rendering with
Vectorworks on page 660). OpenGL performs lighting calculations for fast, interactive rendering and medium-quality
render previews, but it cannot create reflections. For final-quality output, use the Renderworks product; it provides
additional light sources, and it can cast shadows, create reflections, add indirect lighting effects, and produce much
better rendering results through intensive lighting calculations. Render settings can be saved as a Renderworks style for
re-use, and styles can be shared among files. The Renderworks product includes the Visualization palette for easily
accessing all lights and cameras in the file. Another benefit of using the Renderworks product is that an image can be
rendered in any mode from a specified portion of the drawing.
Change rendering options temporarily to test a rendered look. For OpenGL options, disable Use Anti-Aliasing
(Macintosh only). In the Custom Renderworks options (Renderworks required), set the Quality levels to low and
turn Anti-Aliasing, and even Shadows, off. Render with Fast Renderworks to evaluate before switching to Final
Quality or Custom Renderworks.
Shadows add to rendering time. Shadows can also be turned off for light objects that do not cast obvious shadows.
In Renderworks, individual textures can be set not to cast or receive shadows (Shadows options in the Edit
Texture dialog box). A clear glass texture, for example, has very slight shadows and does not cast shadows on
other objects. In addition, enable soft shadows only for light sources that create prominent shadows in an image
(for example, a directional light that represents the sun).
When using indirect lighting (Renderworks required), use the fewest number of bounces needed (as specified in
the Lighting Options dialog box) and adjust the quality in the Final Quality or Custom Renderworks settings.
Individual textures can have their own indirect lighting setting overrides to reduce the rendering time required;
disable indirect lighting for these textures.
Area and line lights (Renderworks required) contribute significantly to rendering time. Use these light sources
sparingly, and adjust the Quality of each in the Object Info palette. Only enable Soft Shadows for these lights if
their shadows are prominent in the image.
Reflective, blurry reflective, blurry transparent, and glow shaders add to rendering time (Renderworks required).
Use these effects sparingly. Blurriness is faster at less than 15% and should not be set to more than 40% (for wide,
shiny highlights, consider using a plastic or metallic reflectivity shader rather than a blurry reflection). Glowing
objects need to be sampled more accurately and therefore, they take more time. Use the glow shader for a few,
large objects; use the backlit shader for several small fixtures with simple light sources.
In Renderworks, glass adds to render times because it has reflective, refractive, and transparent shadow
components.
Very clear glass can be set to not cast shadows in the Edit Texture dialog box to save render time. Indirect
lighting can be disabled for glass textures in the Edit Texture dialog box, as well, to save time when calculating
indirect lighting.
For thin panes, like windows, the refractive qualities of glass are not significant, so the index of refraction
parameter for the glass can be set to a low value (just above 1).
Often, buildings use glass with a metallic/mirrored energy efficient coating; in that case, a combination of
mirror reflectivity and plain transparency can produce a glass effect that renders faster.
Glass absorption color can be used for very accurate close-ups of items like glassware, but this effect takes
longer to render.
Blurry (frosted) glass, in particular, can be slow; use blurry glass in a strictly controlled way. Lower blur values
render faster.
Adding Light
Once one or more light sources have been added to the drawing, it can be rendered to mimic the effect of light on the
drawing surfaces.
Default lighting is automatically added to a drawing for basic visibility of rendered objects. The default lighting is
fixed to the camera so that it always lights an object appropriately. However, rendering a complex scene usually
requires the addition of light sources; the addition of a visible light automatically hides the default lighting.
Light added to a Vectorworks drawing can be ambient or diffused. Ambient light affects all surfaces equally. Diffused
lighting affects surfaces differently depending on the angle of the light source and position of the surfaces.
Adding Light | 641
Parameter Description
Indirect Lighting Indirect lighting models the transfer of light energy among drawing
(Renderworks required) objects and materials, as the light bounces around and affects the
surroundings. The more bounces specified, the more realistic the
rendering, but also the more time required to render.
Select the level of indirect lighting to use for rendering:
None: Direct lighting only, for quick rendering
Exterior, 1 Bounce: One bounce of lighting is often enough to
enhance exterior views
Normal, 2 Bounces: Two bounces of indirect lighting is
appropriate for exterior scenes and well-lit interiors
Interior, 4 Bounces: Using four bounces of indirect lighting is
suited for darkened or partially-lit interior scenes, or very detailed
and complete indirect lighting
Individual textures can have their own indirect lighting setting overrides
to enhance a scene while reducing the rendering time required.
When rendering with Fast Renderworks, indirect lighting is rendered at
a Low quality; Final Quality Renderworks uses a High quality
setting for indirect lighting, and Custom Renderworks allows the quality
setting to be selected.
Ambient Info
On/Off Activates or deactivates the ambient light settings for the layer
Brightness Specifies the ambient light brightness; enter a percentage or drag the
slider bar
Color Specifies a default color associated with the ambient light; click the
color box to select the color
Emitter Options
(Renderworks required)
Emitter Brightness (%) Adjusts the brightness of all light objects with Use Emitter selected
White Color Select a color temperature that will be balanced to appear white. Lower
Temperature temperatures, which might otherwise have an orange cast, or higher
temperatures, which might otherwise appear with a blue tint, are
adjusted to appear white. Select Custom to specify a temperature to be
white balanced.
Custom (K) If a Custom Color Temperature is specified, enter the temperature in
Kelvin
Environment Lighting When an HDRI layer background has been selected for the layer or
(HDRI) (Renderworks viewport, specifies how to control its lighting contribution to the
required) rendering (see Creating HDRI Backgrounds on page 614)
From Current Uses the image environment background set for the layer as both a
Background background and a light source
Adding Light | 643
Parameter Description
From Selected Lights the model with the colors from the HDRI background selected
Background here
None Uses the image environment background set for the layer or viewport as
a background only. The background does not contribute to lighting.
3. Click OK.
Adding Sunlight
Sunlight in a Vectorworks drawing is created by projecting parallel rays from a directional light.
The Vectorworks Design Series products have expanded capabilities with the Heliodon tool; see Conducting
Solar Studies with the Heliodon Object on page 680 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
To set the sun position:
1. Select View > Lighting > Set Sun Position.
The Set Sun Position dialog box opens. Enter the sun position information.
Parameter Description
Site Specifies the sites latitude and longitude
Time Zone Specifies the sites time zone; one hour of difference is equal to 15 of longitude
Meridian
Page North Normally, the drawing is oriented to page north (true north, not magnetic north),
and true north matches the top of the page, with no compensation required for
proper sun position. If the drawing was not created with this orientation, specify
an angular offset in degrees from page north. The North indicator should match
true north in the drawing.
Date Specifies the time of year
Time Specifies the time of day
644 | Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing
Parameter Description
Daylight Savings Select if Daylight Saving time is in effect
Results Based on the settings made, displays the Azimuth (South at zero degrees,
without Page North rotation), Azimuth N. Relative (North at zero degrees,
without Page North rotation), Elevation (degrees above the horizon), and True
Solar Time (takes into account daylight savings time, site longitude and time
zone, and the earths orbit and tilt)
2. Click OK and verify the results. If a directional light was selected before choosing the Set Sun Position
command, the command modifies the angles of light to the new azimuth and elevation. If no light was selected,
the tool inserts a new directional light at the specified sun position.
A shadow analysis can be performed for a site by inserting several light sources with identical parameters except
for time of day. The Renderworks product must be installed to conduct a shadow analysis. See Shadow Analysis
on page 644.
Shadow Analysis
A shadow analysis can help determine the areas of the drawing that will receive less sunlight or remain in a shadow
during a particular time of the year. By inserting several directional light sources, each representing a different time of
day, an overlapping range of shadows is created which indicates the amount of time a particular area is in the shade
over the course of the day.
The Renderworks product is required to conduct a shadow analysis.
To perform a shadow analysis:
1. Add the objects to the drawing that will cast a shadow on the site (a house, for example).
2. Orient the drawing to page north. If the drawing was not created with this orientation, this can be compensated
through the Set Sun Position dialog box described in the next step.
3. Insert each directional light source by selecting View > Lighting > Set Sun Position. Inserting one light source
provides shadow information for that time of day only; several light sources set to different times of day yield an
actual shadow analysis with overlapping shadows.
The Set Sun Position dialog box opens. See Adding Sunlight on page 643
For each light source inserted with this command, specify the same parameters except for time of day. At a
minimum, a light source for morning, noon, afternoon, and evening should be inserted.
4. Verify the parameters of each directional light source in the Object Info palette. Ensure that Cast Shadows is
selected, and decrease the Brightness so that the combination of lights is not too harsh.
5. Render the drawing with the Fast Renderworks, Custom Renderworks, or Final Quality Renderworks option.
Use the Render Bitmap tool to render a portion of the image for presentations.
See Rendering a Selected Area on page 680 for more information on the Render Bitmap tool.
Adding Light | 645
9 AM
June 21st
5 PM 3 PM 12 PM
Top view Shadow analysis
When the Renderworks product is installed, additional parameters and light source types are available. These
additions are described in this section and in Advanced Renderworks Lighting on page 653.
Mode Description
Directional Projects light with parallel rays, like the sun
Light
Point Light Radiates light in all directions, like a bare light bulb
Spot Light Projects light in a specific direction, aimed at a specific object, like a flashlight or
conventional spotlight
Mode Description
Preferences Sets the preferred light parameters
Parameter Description
On/Off Shows or hides the light produced by the light source
Color Specifies a color associated with the light source; click the color box to
select the color. This parameter is not available if Use Emitter is selected
and a Color Temperature is specified (Renderworks required).
Cast Shadows Select to create shadows
(Renderworks required)
Soft Shadows Creates more realistic shadows by decreasing hard edges; shadows appear
(Renderworks softer the farther they travel, as in reality. Rendering is slower when this
required) option is enabled.
Brightness Specifies the light source brightness; enter a percentage or drag the slider
bar. A value over 100% can be entered. This parameter is not available if
Use Emitter is selected (Renderworks required).
Adding Light | 647
Parameter Description
Use Emitter For accuracy, specifies the lights actual brightness and color temperature;
(Renderworks leave deselected to use the light as a simple light source
required)
Get Brightness From Specifies the luminous quantity of a light
(Renderworks required)
User Input Specifies the brightness as an accurate number in Lux, Lumens,
(Renderworks Footcandles, or Candelas; the units vary depending on the light source
required)
Distribution File Does not apply to directional, point, or spot lights (see Advanced
(Renderworks Renderworks Lighting on page 653)
required)
Color Temperature Specifies the light color temperature in Kelvin. This refers to an ideal black
(Renderworks required) body emitter, glowing red hot or white hot. A lower temperature
generates an orange color; the hotter the temperature, the closer to white the
color of the light is.
Specifying this parameter is optional. If not specified, the default
temperature is 0, meaning that the final emission color for the light is
entirely controlled by the selection in Color.
When the temperature is specified, Color cannot be changed. The final
emission color is set by the Color Temperature.
Color temperature settings can be white-balanced on a per-layer basis; see
Setting Lighting Options on page 641.
Directional, Spot, or Click to set additional specifications for the light source
Point Light Specs
3. Click Directional Light Specs, Spot Light Specs, or Point Light Specs, for the selected light source type, to
specify additional parameters.
Parameter Description
Directional Light
Direction Specifies the lights direction by either specifying the light angle or vector
648 | Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing
Parameter Description
Angle Sets the lights angle by azimuth and elevation. The azimuth angle is set based
on an angle of 0 degrees at the negative Y axis, and is positive in a
counter-clockwise direction; the elevation angle is the angle above (positive) or
below (negative) the horizon.
Vector Indicates the direction of the light by specifying the coordinates of its X, Y, and
Z vectors
Point Light
Dist Falloff Select the distance falloff function (rate of intensity change while moving
along the beam away from the light source):
None: Brightness does not change
Smooth: Brightness decreases according to a linear falloff
Realistic: Light is brightest near the light source, and falls away according
to the square of the distance, as in reality. This falloff selection is the most
natural in appearance.
Spot Lights
Spread/Beam Drag the handles on the diagram to set the spot light Spread and Beam angles,
diagram or enter the values in the fields below the diagram
Spread Beam
Spread Specifies the spread angle of the spot light (light cones maximum angle)
Beam Specifies the beam angle of the spot light (cone of light that does not change
intensity up to the spread angle)
Dist Falloff Select the distance falloff function (rate of intensity change while moving
along the beam away from the light source):
None: Brightness does not change
Smooth: Brightness decreases according to a linear falloff
Realistic: Light is brightest near the light source, and falls away according
to the square of the distance, as in reality. This falloff selection is the most
natural in appearance.
4. Click OK to return to the Light Preferences dialog box. Click OK to return to the drawing.
5. Click to place a light object with the parameters specified in the Light Preferences dialog box.
If placing a directional light, click to specify the light position in Default Direction mode. In Set Direction mode,
click once to specify the light target or direction, and then click a second time to specify the light position.
Adding Light | 649
2nd click
1st click
If placing a spot light, click to place the light, and then drag to specify the light direction and target. The spot light
can be aimed at any object. Click again to set the spot light. The target Z height can be adjusted precisely with the
Look To Height parameter of the Object Info palette.
The spot light target handle and projection line only display when the spot light is selected. Use the Selection tool
to move the light. The target handle aims the spot light and can be adjusted with the Selection tool once the spot
light has been created. Use the Reshape tool to move the target handle constrained about an axis selected in the
Tool bar.
1st click
2nd click
Parameter Description
Kind Indicates the type of light source; change to a different type by selecting a
different kind from the displayed list
A custom, area, or line light requires that the Renderworks product be installed.
On/Off Shows or hides the light produced by the light source. This setting can also be
accessed from the light context menu: right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click
(Macintosh) on the light, and select Turn On or Turn Off.
Auto Update Automatically renders the drawing when rendering-related parameters change
650 | Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing
Parameter Description
Update When Auto Update is deselected, click to render the drawing when
rendering-related parameters change
Cast Shadows Select to create shadows
(Renderworks
required)
Soft Shadows Creates more realistic shadows by decreasing hard edges; rendering is slower
(Renderworks when this option is enabled
required)
Lit Fog Creates a special volumetric lighting effect for point lights and spot lights when
(Renderworks used in combination with the Lit Fog Renderworks background weather effect
required) (see Creating a Background on page 611)
Use Emitter For accuracy, specifies the lights actual brightness and color temperature; leave
(Renderworks deselected to use the light as a simple light source. Required for a custom, area,
required) or line light. The emitter brightness of all light objects in a scene with Use
Emitter selected can be controlled in Lighting Options; see Setting Lighting
Options on page 641.
Brightness Specifies the light source brightness; enter a percentage or drag the slider bar. A
value over 100% can be entered. This parameter is not available for custom,
area, and line lights, or if Use Emitter is selected (Renderworks required).
Brightness From Specifies the location of the light intensity data for a custom light (either user
(Renderworks input or distribution file); the distribution file can be specified by clicking Load
required) Distribution
Brightness Value Specifies the brightness as an accurate number
(Renderworks
required)
Brightness Unit Select Lux, Lumens, Footcandles, or Candelas for the unit of Brightness; the
(Renderworks available units depend on the light type
required)
Dimmer Dims the light source brightness (intensity); enter a percentage or drag the
(Renderworks slider bar. Only the brightness of the light source is affected; the color
required) temperature is not changed.
Light Rotation Angle Specifies the rotation angle of a custom light source around an axis connecting
(Renderworks the light location to the light target; this angle defines the plane for the intensity
required) distribution curve, and is displayed in red on the custom light object
Use Distribution File Specifies whether to use the attached emission profile data file for the custom
(Renderworks light
required)
Distribution File For a custom light, displays the distribution file name when a valid distribution
(Renderworks file has been selected, or None if a valid distribution file has not been
required) designated (click Load Distribution to specify a file)
Load Distribution For a custom light, loads light emission profile data from a standard file. The
(Renderworks brightness value is obtained using the integral of the raw emission data
required) provided with the file. The file must be a text file with industry standard
intensity distribution data in .ies format.
Adding Light | 651
Parameter Description
Color Temperature Specifies the light color temperature in Kelvin. This refers to an ideal black
(Renderworks body emitter, glowing red hot or white hot. A lower temperature generates
required) an orange color; the hotter the temperature, the closer to white the color of the
light is (see Correlated Color Temperature on page 887 for typical light
source color temperature ranges).
Specifying this parameter is optional. If not specified, the default temperature is
0, meaning that the final emission color for the light is entirely controlled by the
selection in Color.
When the temperature is specified, Color cannot be changed. The final
emission color is set by the Color Temperature.
Color temperature settings can be white-balanced on a per-layer basis; see
Setting Lighting Options on page 641.
Color Specifies a color associated with the light source; click the color box to select
the color. This parameter is not available if Use Emitter is selected and a Color
Temperature is specified (Renderworks required).
Dist Fall Indicates the distance falloff function for a point, spot, custom, area, or line
light (specifies the rate of intensity change while moving along the beam away
from the light source)
Quality For area and line lights, specifies the sampling quality of the light; select From
(Renderworks Render Mode to use the settings specified for Soft Shadows quality in the
required) rendering options
Render Geometry For area and line lights, renders the light object geometry
(Renderworks
required)
Spread/Beam Drag the handles on the diagram to set the spot light Spread and Beam angles,
diagram or enter the values in the fields below the diagram
Spread Beam
Spread Specifies the spread angle of the spot light (light cones maximum angle)
Beam Specifies the beam angle of the spot light (cone of light that does not change
intensity up to the spread angle)
X/Y/Z or X/Y/Z Specifies the location of the light source in relation to the active layer plane or
working plane
Look To Height For spot lights, sets the Z height above the active layer plane of the spot light
target handle
Azimuth Indicates the azimuth for a directional light (South at zero degrees); enter new
values or drag the slider bar to set
Elevation Indicates the elevation (degrees above the horizon) for a directional light; enter
new values or drag the slider bar to set
652 | Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing
Parameter Description
Pan/Tilt Click the top button to display the spot light or custom light beam pan and tilt
angles; enter new values or drag the slider bar to set
X/Y/Z Click the bottom button to display the light beam direction in terms of its X, Y,
and Z components
Set Light to View Sets the orientation of the directional, spot, or custom light to that of the current
view. This setting can also be accessed from the light context menu: right-click
(Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the light, and select Set Light to View.
Set View to Light Sets the orientation of the current view to that of the directional, spot, or custom
light. This setting can also be accessed from the light context menu: right-click
(Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the light, and select Set View to Light.
A symbol that contains a light object can be copied to reproduce identical lights. Change the light intensity for
each symbol in the Object Info palette.
Once a light has been placed on the drawing, the Selection tool can be used to change its location, and, depending on
the light type, beam parameters.
Advanced Renderworks Lighting | 653
Spot Target direction Click on the handle with the Selection tool to change the
spot light target direction; drag to the new target and
click to set
Click
Directional Beam direction Click and drag with the hand cursor to change the beam
direction
Click
The Vectorworks Fundamentals product provides three light types: directional, point, and spot. With the Renderworks
product, additional parameters are provided for these light types, and additional light source types are included.
Renderworks product rendering modes must be used for the Renderworks lighting options.
For information on the lighting types and parameters in the Vectorworks Fundamentals product, see Adding Light on
page 640.
Select more than one object to create several line or area lights at the same time.
Curved surfaces used for an area light require more rendering time than planar surfaces.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to Area Light or Modify > Convert > Convert to Line Light.
The Light Preferences dialog box opens; indicate the area or line light parameters. Specify light intensity by
entering a Get Brightness From value.
Parameter Description
On/Off Shows or hides the light produced by the light source
Color Specifies a color associated with the light source; click the color box to select
the color. This parameter is not available if a Color Temperature is specified.
Cast Shadows Creates shadows
Soft Shadows Creates more realistic shadows by decreasing hard edges; rendering is slower
when this option is enabled
Dimmer (%) Dims the light source brightness (intensity); enter a percentage or drag the
slider bar. Only the brightness of the light source is affected; the color
temperature is not changed.
Use Emitter An area or line lights actual brightness and color temperature must be
specified, so this setting is not optional
Get Brightness From Specifies the luminous quantity of the area or line light
User Input Manually specifies the luminous quantity of an area light as an accurate
number; the units of a line light are always Lumens
Distribution File For custom lights only; does not apply to area or line lights
656 | Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing
Parameter Description
Color Temperature Specifies the light color temperature in Kelvin. This refers to an ideal black
body emitter, glowing red hot or white hot. A lower temperature generates
an orange color; the hotter the temperature, the closer to white the color of the
light is (see Correlated Color Temperature on page 887 for typical light
source color temperature ranges).
Specifying this parameter is optional. If not specified, the default temperature
is 0, meaning that the final emission color for the light is entirely controlled by
the selection in Color.
When the temperature is specified, Color cannot be changed. The final
emission color is set by the Color Temperature.
Color temperature settings can be white-balanced on a per-layer basis; see
Setting Lighting Options on page 641.
Area or Line Light Sets specific area or line light options
Specs
3. Click Area Light Specs or Line Light Specs to set additional parameters.
The Area Light Data or Line Light Data dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Dist Falloff Select the distance falloff function (rate of intensity change while moving along
the beam away from the light source)
Quality For area and line lights, specifies the sampling quality of the light; select From
Render Mode to use the settings specified for Soft Shadows quality in the
rendering options
Render Geometry Renders the light object geometry; deselect to hide the original geometry when
rendering
If a line light with Cast Shadows enabled is not casting light as expected, the center of the line lights bounds may
be inside another object, which prevents shadow calculations. If this occurs, either deselect Cast Shadows, use
several line lights, or split the line light geometry into segments with their bounding centers located outside of
another object.
1. Select the Light tool from the Visualization tool set, and then select Custom Light from the Tool bar.
2. Specify the custom light parameters by selecting Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Custom Light Data dialog box opens. Click Load Distribution and specify the location of the custom light
distribution file, and then specify any additional custom light parameters.
658 | Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing
Parameter Description
Light Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the light source around an axis connecting the light
Angle location to the light target; this angle defines the reference plane for the intensity
distribution curve
Distribution File Displays the distribution file name when a valid distribution file has been selected,
or None if a valid distribution file has not been designated (click Load
Distribution to specify a file)
Load Distribution Loads light emission profile data from a standard file. The brightness value is
obtained using the integral of the raw emission data provided with the file. The
file must be a text file with industry standard intensity distribution data in .ies
format.
Dist Falloff Select the distance falloff function (rate of intensity change while moving along
the beam away from the light source)
Direction Specifies the lights direction by either specifying the light angle or vector
Angle Sets the lights angle by pan and tilt. The pan angle is based on an angle of 0
degrees at the positive Y axis, and is positive in a counter-clockwise direction; the
tilt angle is equal to 0 at the horizontal plane, positive when pointing below the
plane, and negative when pointing above the plane.
Vector Indicates the direction of the light by specifying the coordinates of its X, Y, and Z
vectors
3. Click OK.
The Light Preferences - Custom Light dialog box opens. Specify additional custom light parameters. Emitter
parameters are specified by the distribution file, and cannot be changed.
Parameter Description
On/Off Shows or hides the light produced by the light source
Color Specifies a color associated with the light source; click the color box to select the
color. This parameter is not available if a Color Temperature is specified.
Advanced Renderworks Lighting | 659
Parameter Description
Cast Shadows Creates shadows
Dimmer Dims the light source brightness (intensity); enter a percentage or drag the slider
bar. Only the brightness of the light source is affected; the color temperature is not
changed.
Use Emitter A custom lights actual brightness and color temperature must be specified, so this
setting is not optional
Get Brightness Specifies the luminous quantity of the area or line light as a manually entered value
From or from a loaded distribution file
User Input Manually specifies the brightness in Lux or Lumens
Distribution Sets intensity distribution data with a standard file specified in Custom Light
File Specs. The brightness value is obtained using the integral of the raw emission data
provided with the file.
Color Specifies the light color temperature in Kelvin. This refers to an ideal black body
Temperature emitter, glowing red hot or white hot. A lower temperature generates an orange
color; the hotter the temperature, the closer to white the color of the light is (see
Correlated Color Temperature on page 887 for typical light source color
temperature ranges).
Specifying this parameter is optional. If not specified, the default temperature is 0,
meaning that the final emission color for the light is entirely controlled by the
selection in Color.
When the temperature is specified, Color cannot be changed. The final emission
color is set by the Color Temperature.
Color temperature settings can be white-balanced on a per-layer basis; see
Setting Lighting Options on page 641.
Custom Light Specifies additional custom light options and loads a distribution file
Specs
The custom light object is represented by a pair of perpendicular arrow-head vectors and two perpendicular
circles. The black vector points to the target location; its axis line (the light axis) connects the light source location
to the target. The red vector starts at the light source location, pointing to a reference point on the equator of the
polar intensity distribution. Also known as the zero angle line, it represents the origin for measuring the
intensity on the light curve.
The two vectors form the black circle, and the red circle is perpendicular to it. The black circle represents the
original plane where the light curves are located. The red circle constrains the movement of the zero angle line.
660 | Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing
After a custom light has been placed, the light parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette; see Light Source
Properties on page 649.
Preparing to Render
Once the drawing is complete or near completion, any textures have been applied, and the desired lighting has been
added, select one of the standard views (see Using Standard Views on page 549), and use the Flyover,
Walkthrough, Translate View, or Rotate View tools to orient the drawing. For presentation purposes, it is often easier
to create sheet layer viewports and render the sheet layers, or create render bitmaps; both sheet layer viewports and
render bitmaps can render in the background (Renderworks required) while drawing processes can continue.
Dashed Hidden Line Edge lines of objects that are behind other objects display as
dashed lines
Unshaded Polygon Displays objects as solids, and displays attributes such as colors
Final Shaded Polygon A Hidden Line rendering on top of a Shaded Polygon - No Lines
rendering; edges and curved surfaces are cleaner than those in a
Shaded Polygon rendering
662 | Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing
Wireframe Options
Planar objects with solid fills are drawn in stacking order. In a 3D wireframe view, objects may overlap, obscuring
objects lower in the stacking order. The wireframe options control whether fills should be visible for planar objects in
3D views, and if they are visible, sets the fill opacity of filled planar objects.
To set wireframe options:
1. Select View > Rendering > Wireframe Options.
The Wireframe Options dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Show fills in planar Displays fills for 2D planar objects in 3D views
objects in 3D views
Fill opacity Sets the opacity of filled 2D planar objects for situations where objects
overlap
Ignore perspective When selected, draws quick orthographic representations of PDFs, images,
and image fills (including tile definitions which contain images or image
fills); deselect to draw more accurate perspective-projected representations of
PDFs, images, and image fills, which may take more time
Ignore perspective in When selected, draws quick orthographic representations of text in 3D views;
text deselect to draw accurate perspective-projected text, which may take more
time to represent
OpenGL
Use the OpenGL render mode to create good-quality rendering previews that are fast and interactive. (For final-quality
output, use the Renderworks product; see Renderworks Rendering Modes on page 666.)
The Vectorworks program has a default lighting scheme, so that a basic rendering does not require an added light
source. However, the addition of a light source is usually necessary for a more realistic rendering (see Adding Light
Sources on page 645). The addition of a light source automatically hides the default lighting scheme, so that the scene
is not too bright.
OpenGL renders up to eight lights in a drawing; additional ambient light, directional, point, or spot lights have no
effect. Custom, area, and linear lights can be added (Renderworks required).
To get the best performance from OpenGL, use a video card that supports hardware-accelerated OpenGL. There are
significant compatibility issues with some cards; see www.vectorworks.net for a list of video cards that are compatible
Rendering with Vectorworks | 663
with the Vectorworks program. If a model is too complex to render the design layer successfully, an alert message
displays, informing you that the render mode has been switched to wireframe.
The power-saving video settings of some laptops may cause out-of-memory issues or other display issues that can
easily be solved by turning off the power-saving video features.
Parameter Description
Detail Specifies the level of detail for renderings; a low setting renders faster
Use Textures Renders object textures; this provides better detail and is usually enabled, but it takes
(Renderworks longer to render
required)
Use Anti-Aliasing Filters the rendering and reduces pixellated edges; this option is only available if the
graphics card supports the feature
Draw Edges Renders objects with lines drawn around the edges, similar to the lines in the Hidden
(Renderworks Line render mode. Edges are drawn where objects meet; break up an object into
required) multiple objects if more edges are needed.
Use Shadows Objects in the drawing cast shadows on other objects (but not on the active layer
(Renderworks plane)
required)
664 | Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing
Parameter Description
On Ground Only If Use Shadows is selected, select this option for drawing objects to cast shadows on
(Renderworks a plane at the lowest point in the drawing which is usually the active layer plane
required) but not on other objects
Quality If Use Shadows is selected, select the level of quality for the shadow edges (a low
(Renderworks setting uses less memory and renders faster)
required)
Use Planar Attributes In OpenGL rendered views, displays 2D planar objects with their object fill
attributes; deselect to hide the attributes
2. Select the OpenGL render options, and click OK to change the settings for the file.
Renderworks Features for OpenGL
If the Renderworks product is installed, the OpenGL render mode has additional features that help you to preview and
adjust a scene before it is rendered with Renderworks product render modes.
Turn on the Draw Edges feature to outline objects more clearly in the rendered drawing; these edges are similar to
those in the Hidden Line render mode.
Turn on the interactive Use Shadows feature to see how the shadows fall with different types of lighting and
adjust the lights. When the system hardware and video card are sufficiently powerful, enhanced, highly accurate
shadows are used for the OpenGL rendering. This option can be turned off if quality or instability problems are
encountered; see 3D Preferences on page 23.
OpenGL can display three types of Renderworks backgrounds: One Color, Two Color, and Image. It cannot
display Cloud, HDRI, or physical sky backgrounds. (See Creating Layer Backgrounds on page 611 for details.)
OpenGL is used during viewing operations such as flyovers and walkthroughs when a Renderworks mode is in
effect. OpenGL also previews a rendered scene before a Renderworks render has completed.
Parameter Description
Dash Style Select the dash style for hidden lines when the Dashed Hidden Line mode
is selected.
Dash Shade Adjust the slider to select how hidden lines are shaded when the Dashed
Hidden Line mode is selected
Preview Displays a preview of the selected parameters
Smoothing Angle Sets the angle to reduce facet lines when the Hidden Line, Dashed
Hidden Line, or Final Shaded Polygon mode is selected; if the value is
greater than zero, facet lines will be removed between any two faces of
an object that are within that angle of each other
A Dashed Hidden Line rendering with A Dashed Hidden Line rendering with
the Smoothing Angle set to 0 the Smoothing Angle set to 15
666 | Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing
Parameter Description
Generate Intersecting Lines Generates lines where surfaces in the drawing intersect each other when
the Hidden Line, Dashed Hidden Line, or Final Shaded Polygon mode is
selected; for large files with a lot of curved surfaces, this option can make
rendering slower
A Hidden Line rendering with Generate A Hidden Line rendering with Generate
Intersecting Lines disabled Intersecting Lines enabled
Sketch Hidden Line Results Specifies whether to apply sketch effects to lines when the Hidden Line,
(Vectorworks Design Series Dashed Hidden Line, or Final Shaded Polygon mode is selected; see
required) Sketch Rendering on page 672 in the Vectorworks Design Series
Users Guide
Document Default Sketch Sets the default sketch style for lines when the Hidden Line, Dashed
Style Hidden Line, or Final Shaded Polygon mode is selected; see Setting the
(Vectorworks Design Series Default Sketch Style on page 672 in the Vectorworks Design Series
required) Users Guide. Click Edit to open the Sketch Style Editor dialog box for
additional sketch style modification.
2. Select the line render options, and click OK to change the settings for the file.
Save files in wireframe mode rather than in a rendered mode, so that files draw more quickly when opened.
Rendered viewports are saved in a rendered state when Save viewport cache is selected in the Display tab of
document preferences.
Rendering with Renderworks | 667
Background Rendering
Sheet layer viewports and bitmaps created with the Render Bitmap tool can render in the background for
Renderworks render modes, while you continue working. A sheet layer that requires updating because it is out of date
displays with a striped border (see Updating Sheet Layer Viewports on page 753 and Status of a Sheet Layer
Viewport on page 741). The viewport renders with the render mode and settings specified for the foreground and
background render in the Object Info palette. A render bitmap renders with the tool preference settings in effect when it
is created (see Rendering a Selected Area on page 680).
Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the viewport, and select Update from the context menu.
With one or more sheet layer viewports selected from the Viewports tab of the Navigation palette (Vectorworks
Design Series required), select Update from the Navigation menu. See The Navigation Palette on page 599 in
the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
When rendering begins, the Vectorworks program processes the drawing geometry first, as indicated in the message
bar. If multiple viewports are selected, the geometry of each one is processed first before background rendering starts.
During this time, actions other than canceling the render are blocked. Once the geometry has been processed,
background rendering begins and the Vectorworks program is available once again.
If edits occur to a design layer that affect a current or queued background render of a sheet layer viewport, the
render continues, but the viewport will be out of date when the render is complete.
An animated icon at the bottom right of the drawing window indicates that background rendering is queued or is in
progress. This icon displays even when you switch to another layer, as a reminder that background rendering is
occurring. Another icon, in the bottom right corner of the viewport or render bitmap, indicates the individual status of
each viewport or bitmap. The Viewports tab of the Navigation palette (Vectorworks Design Series required) and
message bar also display information about the rendering status. During background rendering, the rendering viewports
and bitmaps are locked, and only the Cancel Update option is available from the Object Info palette; however, all other
drawing processes are available, including switching to another layer, editing objects, and even moving render bitmaps
to another layer. Printing, saving, exporting images, or closing the Vectorworks program when background rendering is
in process will generate an alert message with the option to proceed with, or cancel, the rendering.
Sheet layer viewport is Sheet layer viewport Render bitmap is in Render bitmap rendering
in rendering queue rendering is in progress rendering queue is in progress
The message bar indicates the name of each sheet layer viewport as it is rendered.When the individual and overall
background render is complete, the icon no longer displays.
With one or more sheet layer viewports selected from the Viewports tab of the Navigation palette (Vectorworks
Design Series required), select Cancel Update from the Navigation menu. See The Navigation Palette on
page 599 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Renderworks Styles
Several elements combine to create a satisfactory rendering: the selected render mode, the render mode options, the
lighting options, and the selected Renderworks background. A Renderworks style saves the settings for these
parameters as a resource that can be re-applied later and shared between files.
The Renderworks product includes several default styles to quickly obtain a variety of looks, with no parameter
adjustment or rendering knowledge required.
Realistic Exterior Night Final Realistic Colors White Artistic Taper Thick Black
Parameter Description
Name Specify the name of the Renderworks Style resource
Type Select either Realistic or Artistic; different options are available depending on
the desired look
Realistic Creates a Renderworks style based on Custom Renderworks options
Options
Anti-Aliasing Select for smoother edges on objects and textures; deselect for faster
rendering with rougher edges
Shadows Render shadows for a higher degree of realism
Blurriness Select to render textures with blurred reflectivity and/or blurred transparency
(this can add significant rendering time)
Textures Renders the textures assigned to objects; deselect for faster rendering
Displacement Renders with displacement mapping when a textures bump shader setting
Mapping has a displacement height set; select the displacement mapping quality on the
Quality tab. Deselect for faster rendering.
Colors When selected, renders colors, and textures with colors; deselect to render
colors as white
Image Exposure Adjusts the exposure brightness of the rendered image; enter a value to
(%) increase the brightness (above 100%) or to decrease the brightness (below
100%)
Rendering with Renderworks | 671
Parameter Description
Quality For each parameter, select the quality level. Higher quality results in better
resolution of rendered images, with better texture detail and softer shadows,
but takes more time.
Quality Levels Conveniently sets the quality level of all the options at one time. Custom
indicates that some options have different quality levels set.
Curved Geometry Select the quality level for faceting of curved geometry (such as NURBS
surfaces)
Anti-Aliasing Select the quality level for anti-aliasing (smoothing) of edges on objects and
textures
Indirect Lighting Select the quality level for indirect lighting effects (see Setting Lighting
Options on page 641)
Soft Shadows Sets the quality level of shadows for light objects that have Soft Shadows
enabled. For area and line lights, specifies the sampling quality of the light.
Blurriness Select the quality level of textures with blurry reflectivity and/or transparency
Environment Select the sampling quality level for environment (HDRI) background
Lighting lighting. This option has no effect when indirect lighting is enabled for the
lighting options.
Displacement When enabled on the Options tab and set for a bump shader, select the quality
Mapping of the displacement mapping. Higher quality is more realistic for fine
displacement bumps, but will require longer rendering times.
Rendering can be significantly slower with displacement mapping.
Max Reflections Enter the number of levels of reflection among shiny surfaces; a higher value
slows rendering, but can yield a more realistic image for scenes with many
inter-reflecting objects
Lighting
Apply Lighting Controls whether the Renderworks style changes the current lighting options
Options when it is applied. Select the option to apply the styles lighting options to the
layer or viewport when the Renderworks style is applied. Deselect the option
to leave the current lighting options unchanged when the Renderworks style
is applied.
Lighting Options Sets the lighting options; see Setting Lighting Options on page 641
Edit Resource Opens the Edit Renderworks Background dialog box, to conveniently change
background and environment lighting options that affect the rendering
Background
Apply Controls whether the Renderworks Background changes the current
Renderworks background options when it is applied. Select the option to apply the styles
Background background to the layer or viewport when the Renderworks style is applied.
Deselect the option to leave the current background unchanged when the
Renderworks style is applied.
Renderworks Sets the Renderworks Background options; see Creating a Background on
Background page 611
Artistic Creates a Renderworks style based on Artistic Renderworks options
672 | Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing
Parameter Description
Artistic Style Select an Artistic Renderworks style and set any options; see Artistic
Renderworks Options on page 675
Background
Apply Controls whether the Renderworks Background changes the current
Renderworks background options when it is applied. Select the option to apply the styles
Background background to the layer or viewport when the Renderworks style is applied.
Deselect the option to leave the current background unchanged when the
Renderworks style is applied.
Renderworks Sets the Renderworks Background options; see Creating a Background on
Background page 611
4. Click OK to create a Renderworks Style resource with the name and properties specified in the Edit Renderworks
Style dialog box. The Renderworks style displays in the Resource Browser and is saved with the file. It is added to
the list of available Renderworks styles in the View > Renderworks Style menu.
To edit a Renderworks Style resource after it has been created, select the Renderworks style from the Resource
Browser and select Edit from the Resources menu. See Working with Resources on page 167.
Place a heliodon object in the drawing with the Heliodon tool. Click Solar Animation to interactively adjust the
date and time (see Conducting Solar Studies with the Heliodon Object on page 680 in the Vectorworks Design
Series Users Guide). This is particularly effective with physical sky Renderworks backgrounds.
For exteriors, select the Realistic Exterior Fast or Realistic Exterior Final Renderworks style; for interiors,
select either Realistic Interior Fast or Realistic Interior Final. The heliodon creates a strong sun light with
soft-edged shadows, while the Renderworks style provides soft sky lighting from the included HDRI
backgrounds.
Parameter Description
Options Enabling the options allows for better quality, higher detailed rendering, but
takes longer to render
674 | Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing
Parameter Description
Anti-Aliasing Select for smoother edges on objects and textures; deselect for faster
rendering with rougher edges
Shadows Render shadows for a higher degree of realism
Blurriness Select to render textures with blurred reflectivity and/or blurred transparency
(this can add significant rendering time)
Textures Renders the textures assigned to objects; deselect for faster rendering
Displacement Renders with displacement mapping when a textures bump shader setting
Mapping has a displacement height set; select the displacement mapping quality
below. Deselect for faster rendering.
Colors When selected, renders colors, and textures with colors; deselect to render
colors as white
Lighting Options Click Layer Lighting Options (from a design layer) or Viewport Lighting
Options (from a viewport) to quickly access the associated lighting options
dialog box. See Setting Lighting Options on page 641 for more
information.
Image Exposure (%) Adjusts the exposure brightness of the rendered image; enter a value to
increase the brightness (above 100%) or to decrease the brightness (below
100%)
Quality For each parameter, select the quality level. Higher quality results in better
resolution of rendered images, with better texture detail and softer shadows,
but takes more time.
Quality Levels Conveniently sets the quality level of all the options at one time. Custom
indicates that some options have different quality levels set.
Curved Geometry Select the quality level for faceting of curved geometry (such as NURBS
surfaces)
Anti-Aliasing Select the quality level for anti-aliasing (smoothing) of edges on objects and
textures
Indirect Lighting Select the quality level for indirect lighting effects (see Setting Lighting
Options on page 641)
Soft Shadows Sets the quality level of shadows for light objects that have Soft Shadows
enabled. For area and line lights, specifies the sampling quality of the light.
Blurriness Select the quality level of textures with blurry reflectivity and/or
transparency
Environment Lighting Select the sampling quality level for environment (HDRI) background
lighting. This option has no effect when indirect lighting is enabled for the
lighting options.
Displacement Mapping When enabled in the Options and set for a bump shader, select the quality of
the displacement mapping. Higher quality is more realistic for fine
displacement bumps, but will require longer rendering times.
Rendering can be significantly slower with displacement mapping.
Rendering with Renderworks | 675
Parameter Description
Max Reflections Enter the number of levels of reflection among shiny surfaces; a higher value
slows rendering, but can yield a more realistic image for scenes with many
inter-reflecting objects
When testing a rendering, set the Quality levels to low and turn Anti-Aliasing and even Shadows off. Lower
rendering quality is offset by faster rendering times.
To create a white card or white model rendering, turn off textures and colors.
2. Click OK to set the Custom Render options.
3. Select the Style from the list, and then click Options to set specific style parameters. The preview image displays
the resulting effect.
676 | Chapter 16: Rendering the Drawing
Most Artistic Renderworks styles use hidden line rendering (except for Art and Hatch). These styles may require
longer rendering times for drawings with many facets (polygons). A style that does not use hidden line rendering
is recommended for extremely complex drawings.
The Artistic Renderworks styles allow the layers Renderworks background to show through, if one has been
defined and applied (see Applying Renderworks Backgrounds on page 636).
Many of the artistic styles share the parameters of edge color and edge thickness. Some parameters are uniquely
available to certain styles.
Lines and Shadow Traces a border around the edges of objects and
displays shadows
Pen (Thick and Thin) Simulates a hand-drawn pen drawing with uneven
pressure on the pen nib
Pen (Thin Distance) Simulates a hand-drawn pen drawing with lines that
get thinner as the line retreats
Brush (Watercolor) Draws as with a thin watercolor brush, with ink that
soaks into the paper
Brush (Watercolor Light) Similar to Brush (Watercolor), but with less pressure
applied
1. Select the Render Bitmap tool from the Visualization tool set.
2. Click the Preferences Tool bar button.
The Render Bitmap Settings dialog box opens. Specify the rendering mode and any options.
Batch Rendering | 681
Parameter Description
Render Mode Select the rendering mode for the image; if the mode has additional settings, click
Options to make any changes (changes are also made to the design layer settings)
Resolution Specify the resolution for the bitmap in dots per inch, relative to the page; lower
(DPI) resolution values reduce file size
3. Click OK.
4. Click and drag to create a marquee box around the desired area.
The area is rendered (using background rendering for any Renderworks modes). Cancel the rendering by clicking
Cancel Rendering from the Shape tab of the Object Info palette. When complete, a bitmap image of the rendered
area is placed on top of the original area.
5. Move the new image to the desired location.
After rendering, the rendered bitmap image can be cut from the Vectorworks drawing and pasted into any image
editing program for further manipulation.
Batch Rendering
Batch rendering allows several images to be rendered while the computer is unattended. Each batch job retains its own
view, rendering mode, resolution, and export settings.
Parameter Description
Name Specifies the rendering job name for creating the batch
Render Mode Select the rendering mode from the list
Options For OpenGL and Custom Renderworks rendering modes, the default file settings
are in effect; to change the settings, click Options. These changes apply to the
current job only.
For more information on OpenGL settings, see Rendering with Vectorworks on
page 660. For Custom Renderworks settings, see Custom Renderworks Options on
page 673.
Set Export Opens the Export Image File dialog box for specifying the rendered image file
Image File settings, including export area and format
Options
The Marquee export area option in the Export Image File dialog box is not available for batch rendering jobs.
3. Create additional batch rendering jobs as required.
Batch jobs can be renamed, edited, or deleted from the Start Batch Render dialog box.
Parameter Description
Available Jobs Lists the current batch render jobs in order of job creation; the jobs are displayed
with the image file extension to be generated according to the job settings
Chosen Jobs Lists the currently selected render jobs in order of execution; the most recently
added job is placed at the end of the list
Choose All Moves all Available Jobs to the Chosen Jobs list
>> button Moves the selected job from the Available Jobs list to the end of the Chosen Jobs
list
<< button Moves the selected job from the Chosen Jobs list to the end of the Available Jobs
list
Duplicate Copies the selected available job and adds it to the end of the Available Jobs list;
specify a new name for the job in the Assign Name dialog box
Edit Opens the Edit Batch Render Job dialog box, for changing the parameters of the
selected job
Delete Removes the selected job from the list of available render jobs (no undo)
Browse Specifies the Parent Folder location, where all batch rendering resulting files will
(Windows)/ be located. By default, this is the application folder. The result subfolder name is
Choose also displayed (this subfolder is named according to the current date and time).
(Macintosh)
Design layer Visualization palette options Sheet layer Visualization palette options
Parameter Description
Lights tab The Lights tab accesses the parameters of sheet layer viewports or all lights in
the file
Current Scene Displays only the lights which affect the current view (lights from the current
layer and in visible classes)
Selected Viewport(s) Displays only the lights which affect the currently selected sheet layer
viewport(s); in this mode, lights can be edited to override the lighting of the
selected viewports only. (Other Visualization palette light management
commands are not available.) Select Revert Override to return the viewport
to its original lighting.
All Lists all the lights in the file
On Click to toggle the light on or off; a check mark indicates that the light is on
(Cast Shadows) Click to toggle the ability of the lights to cast shadows on or off; a red x
indicates that shadows are off
(Override State) For lights in selected viewport(s), indicates whether the light has an override.
Uses design layer definition : the light parameters are the same in both
the design layer and the viewport(s).
Uses viewport override definition : the light parameters have been
edited for the selected viewport(s), creating a viewport lighting override.
Name Displays the name of the light (as shown on the Data tab of the Object Info
palette)
Type Indicates the type of light:
Parameter Description
Edit Opens the Properties dialog box, to edit the parameters of the currently
selected light(s); when more than one light is selected, only common
properties can be edited
Revert Override Restores the original light parameters for the viewport(s), when the lights in
selected sheet layer viewport(s) have been edited
Duplicate Copies the currently selected light(s), placing the copy or copies on the same
layer and in the same class as the original(s). Lights in symbols or plug-in
objects cannot be duplicated.
Delete Deletes the currently selected light(s). Lights in symbols or plug-in objects
cannot be deleted.
Select On Selects the current light(s), and automatically centers the view on the light, or
Document its container (alternatively, double-click on a light in the Visualization palette,
if the light is in the active class or layer.) The light properties can then be
edited in the Object Info palette or by clicking Edit from the Visualization
palette menu. The selection and editing of multiple lights at once is
supported.
If the light is not in the active class or layer, use the Force Select
command instead.
The Vectorworks Display preference must be set to show lights.
Force Select If the light is in a different class or layer, activates the layer or class, and
automatically centers the view on the light, or its container group or symbol.
The light properties can then be edited in the Object Info palette or by
clicking Edit from the Visualization palette menu. Multiple lights cannot be
selected by this method.
Cameras tab The Cameras tab accesses the parameters of the camera objects in the
drawing
Name Displays the name of the camera (as shown on the Data tab of the Object Info
palette)
Class/Layer Displays the cameras class and layer
Menu commands The Visualization palette menu commands manage and select camera objects
New Activates the RenderWorks Camera tool; click to place a camera object
Edit Opens the Properties dialog box, to edit the parameters of the currently
selected camera(s)
Duplicate Copies the currently selected camera(s), placing the copy or copies on the
same layer and in the same class as the original(s)
Delete Deletes the currently selected camera(s)
Activate Selects the current camera, and automatically changes the view to that of the
camera (alternatively, double-click on a camera in the Visualization palette)
Dimensioning and Constraints 17
The Vectorworks program provides automated tools for dimensioning and constraining drawing objects.
Dimensioning
Use the various dimensioning tools to measure 2D and 3D objects, and to add dimensioning lines with the
measurements to the drawing. Dimensions can be created on a design layer, or in the annotation space of a sheet layer
viewport (see Creating Annotations for Sheet Layer Viewports on page 747).
There are also Tape Measure and Protractor tools to measure distances and angles, and a Center Mark tool to mark
the center of circles, ovals, and rectangles.
When you add a new dimension, the dimension standard set in the document preferences is used by default (see
Dimension Preferences on page 32). In addition, when a dimension tool is active, the default dimension standard can
be set from the Tool bar. Select any of the built-in dimension standards, or create a custom standard specifically for the
drawing. If the default dimension standard for the document is changed, any new dimension that is added will use the
new standard; no existing dimensions are affected.
Function Description
New Opens the Assign Name dialog box, to create a new custom dimension standard; see Creating a
Custom Dimension Standard on page 688
Delete Deletes the selected custom dimension standard and replaces it with the standard you specify; see
Deleting a Custom Dimension Standard on page 690
688 | Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints
Function Description
Edit Opens the Custom Dimension dialog box, to edit the selected custom dimension standard; see Editing
a Custom Dimension Standard on page 689
Rename Opens the Assign Name dialog box, to rename the selected custom dimension standard; see
Renaming a Custom Dimension Standard on page 690
Import Opens a file and imports the custom dimension standard you specify; see Importing a Custom
Dimension Standard on page 690
Replace Opens the Replace Dimension Standards dialog box, to specify which dimension standard to replace,
and which standard to replace it with; see Replacing a Dimension Standard on page 691
Parameter Description
Dimension line distances Specifies the dimension line distances for linear, radial, and ordinate dimensions
Note: Distances are in Displays the drawing units currently in use for the file
Dimensioning | 689
Parameter Description
Witness Lines Applies witness lines to dimensions; when deselected, witness lines are hidden
Fixed Witness Line Length Select to use a fixed length for the witness lines rather than a fixed offset from the
dimensioned object (the default). When selected, the field for setting the witness line
length is enabled on the top part of the dialog box.
To change the length of a particular witness line, use the Override option in the
Object Info palette; see Editing Dimension Properties on page 706
Dimensions Always Inside Sets dimension values to always display between the witness lines
Linear Markers Select the marker attributes for use with linear dimension markers (see Marker
Attributes on page 510)
Other Markers Select the marker attributes for use with other dimension markers
Leader Line Markers Select the marker attributes for use with dimension leader lines.
The marker is only visible if you first use the Object Info palette to add a leader
line to the dimension (see Editing Dimension Properties on page 706), and then
use the Attributes palette to add an end marker to the leader line (see Marker
Attributes on page 510).
SIA Format Numbers Sets all numbers to use the SIA format; not available when a dual layout is selected
Tolerance Size Sets the size of the tolerance in relation to the dimension text
Text Rotation Sets how text is handled when a dimension is rotated; text can be horizontal, aligned,
or horizontal/vertical
Align Vertical Text Left When a dimension is placed vertically, keeps the text to the left of the dimension line
Layout Sets whether dimensions display as single values, dual - side by side, or dual - stacked
Dual view If a dual layout is selected, specify whether both dimensions are shown, primary only,
or secondary only
Text Style Assigns a text style to the dimension text; see Using Text Styles on page 353
5. Enter the desired values for the display of dimensions, and then click OK. Click OK again to close the Custom
Dimensions dialog box.
6. To set the new standard as the default for the document, select the new standard from the Dimension Standard
list, and then click OK.
3. Select a new dimension standard to replace the standard being deleted, and then click OK.
Any existing dimensions that used the deleted standard are changed to the replacement standard.
3. Select the dimension standard to be replaced in the Replace list and select the standard to replace it with in the
with list. Click OK.
Any existing dimensions that used the previous standard are changed to the replacement standard.
Associative Dimensioning
In document preferences, the Associate dimensions option is selected by default. This automatically links dimensions
to 2D objects, as well as walls and wall components. For linear dimensions to be associated, the dimension must be
applied between two vertex points.
A dimension is linked to its associated object with coincident constraints. This means that, when a linear, radial, or
diametrical dimension is associated with an object, if the dimension is resized or moved, the associated object is resized
or moved also, and vice versa.
The association of any dimension with an object can be removed manually. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click
(Macintosh) on the dimension, and select Disassociate from the context menu. Alternatively, select Modify > Edit
Constraints and use the Edit Constraints dialog box to delete the constraints.
If an angular associative dimension is resized or moved, the association with the object is broken. To maintain the
association, move the dimensioned object instead.
Associative dimensions can exist across layers of the same scale. To apply an associative dimension across layers,
Layer Options must be set to Show/Snap/Modify Others. Associative dimensions can be created on viewports in
annotation edit mode (see Creating Annotations for Sheet Layer Viewports on page 747).
If an associative dimension is used across layers, the association is broken if the scale of one of the layers changes.
Associative dimensions can only be placed in the plane defined by the object or objects being dimensioned; when
multiple objects are dimensioned, they must be co-planar to create the association. The associated dimension of an
object changes planes with the object, if the object changes its plane.
If a drawing has overlapping objects, it may be unclear which object should be associated with a dimension. When you
dimension objects that have a shared endpoint, the Auto associate document preference controls whether the
association is made automatically or manually. (See Dimension Preferences on page 32.)
To always automatically associate a dimension with the top-most object, enable the Auto associate option.
To manually select the object with which to associate the dimension, disable the Auto associate option; when you
dimension an object that shares an endpoint with another object, the Select Object to Associate dialog box opens.
Mode Description
Unconstrained Linear Creates a dimension line with a single measurement
Unconstrained Chain Creates a continuous chain of dimension lines
Unconstrained Baseline Creates a series of connected dimension lines, starting from an initial base point
Preferences For Unconstrained Chain mode, specifies whether dimensions are created as a single
unconstrained chain object, or as individual dimension objects; also enables collision
control, which automatically spaces text blocks so that they do not overlap
Dimension Standards To change the dimension standard for new dimensions created in the document, select a
standard from the list; select Custom Standards to create or manage custom dimensions
(see Using Custom Dimension Standards on page 687)
The dimension text can be moved as needed. See Modifying Dimensions on page 706.
1. Click the Unconstrained Linear Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Unconstrained
Linear mode.
2. Click to set the measurement start point.
3. Click to end the measurement.
4. Move the cursor away from the object to the desired offset location.
In a 3D view, the first two clicks determine the X axis of the plane where the dimension will be placed; move the
cursor to rotate the dimension plane as desired. The dimension plane can be horizontal or vertical to the layer
plane, or aligned to adjacent faces of a 3D object being dimensioned.
5. Click to place the dimension line.
2nd click
3rd click
1st click
1. Click the Unconstrained Linear Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Unconstrained Chain
mode.
2. Click Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Chain Dimension Preferences dialog box opens. Select whether to Create smart chain dimension objects or
to Create individual dimension objects adjacent to each other. Also select whether to use collision control to
automatically space text blocks so that they do not overlap. Click OK.
3. Click to set the measurement start point.
4. Click to end the measurement of the first segment.
5. Move the cursor away from the object to the desired offset location.
In a 3D view, the first two clicks determine the X axis of the plane where the dimension will be placed; move the
cursor to rotate the dimension plane as desired. The dimension plane can be horizontal or vertical to the layer
plane, or aligned to adjacent faces of a 3D object being dimensioned.
6. Click to place the first dimension line.
7. Move the cursor to the end of the next segment and click to set its endpoint.
8. Continue setting segments.
9. Double-click to end the chain.
1st click
1. Click the Unconstrained Linear Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Unconstrained
Baseline mode.
2. Click to set the measurement start point.
3. Click to end the measurement of the first segment.
4. Move the cursor away from the object to the desired offset location.
Dimensioning | 695
In a 3D view, the first two clicks determine the X axis of the plane where the dimension will be placed; move the
cursor to rotate the dimension plane as desired. The dimension plane can be horizontal or vertical to the layer
plane, or aligned to adjacent faces of a 3D object being dimensioned.
5. Click to place the dimension line.
6. Move the cursor to the end of the next segment and click to set its endpoint.
7. Continue setting segments.
8. Double-click to end the baseline.
1st click
Constrained Linear
Mode Description
Constrained Linear Creates a constrained dimension line with a single measurement
Constrained Chain Creates a continuous chain of constrained dimension lines
Constrained Baseline Creates a series of connected constrained dimension lines, starting from an initial base point
Ordinate Creates a series of constrained ordinate dimensions, starting from an initial base point
Selected Objects Creates a constrained dimension line for the greatest span of a selected object or group of
objects
Preferences For Constrained Chain mode, specifies whether dimensions are created as a single chain
object, or as individual dimension objects; also enables collision control, which
automatically spaces text blocks so that they do not overlap
696 | Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints
Mode Description
Dimension Standards To change the dimension standard for new dimensions created in the document, select a
standard from the list; select Custom Standards to create or manage custom dimensions (see
Using Custom Dimension Standards on page 687)
The dimension text can be moved as needed. See Modifying Dimensions on page 706.
1. Click the Constrained Linear Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Constrained Linear
mode.
2. Click to set the measurement start point.
3. Click to set the end of the measurement.
4. Move the cursor away from the object to the desired offset location.
In a 2D view, the dimension line preview is constrained to be parallel to either the X or Y axis of the layer plane.
In a 3D view, the first two clicks determine the X axis of the plane where the dimension will be placed; move the
cursor to rotate the dimension plane as desired. The dimension plane can be horizontal or vertical to the layer
plane, or aligned to adjacent faces of a 3D object being dimensioned.
5. Click to place the dimension line.
2nd click 3rd click
1st click
1. Click the Constrained Linear Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Constrained Chain
mode.
2. Click Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Chain Dimension Preferences dialog box opens.
Select whether to Create smart chain dimension objects or to Create individual dimension objects adjacent
to each other. Also select whether to use collision control to automatically space text blocks so that they do not
overlap. Click OK.
3. Click to set the measurement start point.
Dimensioning | 697
3rd click
2nd click
1st click
4th click
5th click
Double-click
1. Click the Constrained Linear Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Constrained Baseline
mode.
2. Click to set the measurement start point.
3. Click to set the end of the first measurement.
4. Move the cursor away from the object to the desired offset location.
In a 2D view, the dimension line preview is constrained to be parallel to either the X or Y axis of the layer plane.
In a 3D view, the first two clicks determine the X axis of the plane where the dimension will be placed; move the
cursor to rotate the dimension plane as desired. The dimension plane can be horizontal or vertical to the layer
plane, or aligned to adjacent faces of a 3D object being dimensioned.
5. Click to place the first dimension line.
6. Move the cursor to the end of the next segment and click to set its endpoint.
7. Continue setting segments.
8. Double-click to end the baseline.
698 | Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints
Ordinate Dimensions
The Ordinate mode measures and dimensions a series of either horizontal or vertical distances from one fixed point.
This mode of the Constrained Linear Dimension tool always creates dimensions on the active plane.
1. Click the Constrained Linear Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Ordinate mode.
2. Click to set the measurement start point; the first segment is always considered the fixed point and is labeled 0.
3. Click to set the length of the first segment.
4. Move the cursor horizontally or vertically to the first location to be measured from the initial segment; click to set
the segment.
5. Continue creating segments.
6. Double-click to complete the dimension.
2nd click
1st click
Double-click
3rd click
1st click
Dual Dimensioning
Dual dimensioning displays two sets of values, such as inches and millimeters, within a single dimension. These values
have independent unit settings and attributes. Dual dimensions can be displayed side by side or stacked.
Dimensioning | 699
Control the units for each dimension through File > Document Settings > Units. The primary dimension uses the
Units set on the General Display and Dimensions tab of the Units dialog box (see Units on page 75). The settings on
the Dual Dimensions tab provide full control of the unit of measurement, unit marks, rounding, and formatting used for
the secondary dimension.
Once a dual dimension is placed on the drawing, adjust the individual attributes for both the primary and secondary
dimension from the Object Info palette. The Dual View and Prim/Sec attributes apply to dual dimensions (see
Modifying Dimensions on page 706).
Radial Dimensioning
The Radial Dimension tool measures and marks either radius or diameter dimensions for arcs and circles. This tool
does not work on ovals or objects with rounded corners.
The Radial Dimension tool can place the dimension lines and measurements either inside or outside of the circle/arc.
This tool always creates the dimension on the same plane with the arc or circle that is being dimensioned.
External Diametrical External Radial Right-Hand Shoulder
Internal Diametrical
Mode Description
Internal Diametrical Measures and dimensions the diameter of a circle or arc, placing the dimension inside the
object
External Diametrical Measures and dimensions the diameter of a circle or arc, placing the dimension outside
the object
Interior Radial Measures and dimensions the radius of a circle or arc, placing the dimension inside the
object
External Radial Measures and dimensions the radius of a circle or arc, placing the dimension outside the
object
Left-Hand Shoulder Places an exterior measurement with the dimension text to the left of the dimension
leader shoulder
Right-Hand Shoulder Places an exterior measurement with the dimension text to the right of the dimension
leader shoulder
Dimension Standards To change the dimension standard for new dimensions created in the document, select a
standard from the list; select Custom Standards to create or manage custom dimensions
(see Using Custom Dimension Standards on page 687)
To dimension the diameter of a circle or arc and place the dimension inside the object:
1. Click the Radial Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Internal Diametrical mode.
2. Click on or within the arc or circle to dimension.
3. Move the cursor to preview the dimension line location.
4. Click to place the dimension.
To dimension the diameter of a circle or arc and place the dimension outside the object:
1. Click the Radial Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select External Diametrical mode.
2. Specify the side of the dimension line to place the measurement.
To place it to the right of the line, click Right-Hand Shoulder mode button. To place it to the left of the line, click
the Left-Hand Shoulder mode button.
3. Click on or within the arc or circle to dimension.
4. Move the cursor to preview the dimension line location.
5. Click to place the dimension.
To dimension the radius of a circle or arc and place the dimension inside the object:
1. Click the Radial Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Interior Radial mode.
2. Click on or within the arc or circle to dimension.
3. Move the cursor to preview the dimension line location.
Marking Object Centers | 701
To dimension the radius of a circle or arc and place the dimension outside the object:
1. Click the Radial Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select External Radial mode.
2. Specify the side of the dimension line to place the measurement.
To place it to the right of the line, click the Right-Hand Shoulder mode button. To place it to the left of the line,
click the Left-Hand Shoulder mode button.
3. Click on or within the arc or circle to dimension.
4. Move the cursor to preview the dimension line location.
5. Click to place the dimension.
1. Click the Center Mark tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the object to mark.
The center is marked by the intersection of two lines.
702 | Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints
Click anywhere
on the object
1. Click the Center Mark tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. While pressing Option (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows), move the cursor over the rounded rectangle corner to mark.
3. Click to place the center mark.
The center is marked by the intersection of two lines.
Angular Dimensioning
The Angular Dimension tool measures and dimensions angles. Dimension the angle between two object edges,
between two sides of a single object, between a single object and a reference line, or between two reference lines.
This tool works with all objects with linear or planar sides, including rounded and rotated rectangles, lines, polylines,
polygons, and solids. It does not, however, work with circles, ovals, or arcs. In addition, it cannot dimension between
parallel lines or lines on different planes.
Edges
If the Snap to Working Plane option on the Snapping palette is enabled, the face of the object being dimensioned
must be parallel to the working plane.
Mode Description
Edges Dimensions the angle between two object edges or faces
Reference Line and Edge Dimensions the angle between an object and a reference line
Reference Lines Dimensions the angle between two reference lines
Dimension Standards To change the dimension standard for new dimensions created in the document,
select a standard from the list; select Custom Standards to create or manage custom
dimensions (see Using Custom Dimension Standards on page 687)
Angular Dimensioning | 703
1. Click the Angular Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select the Edges mode.
2. Click the edge or face of the first object.
A preview line displays.
3. Click the edge or face of the second object.
An angular dimension preview displays.
To select a different anglefor example, spanning the opposite directionmove the cursor until the preview
displays the desired angle.
4. Click a third time to define the radius of the dimension.
1. Click the Angular Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select the Reference Line and Edge mode.
2. Click to set the start of the reference line.
A reference line preview displays.
3. Click again to set the end of the reference line.
The cursor changes to a pointing hand.
4. Click on the edge of the object (and, therefore, angle) to dimension.
An angular dimension preview displays.
To select a different anglefor example, spanning the opposite directionmove the cursor until the preview
displays the desired angle.
5. When the preview displays the desired angle, click again to draw the reference line and to define the angle of the
dimension.
4th click
2nd click
704 | Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints
1. Click the Angular Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select the Reference Lines mode.
2. Click to set the start of the first reference line.
A reference preview line displays.
3. Click again to set the end of the first reference line.
4. A second reference line preview displays.
5. Click a third time to set the end of the second reference line.
An angular dimension preview displays.
To select a different anglefor example, spanning the opposite directionmove the cursor until the preview
displays the desired angle.
6. When the preview displays the desired angle, click again to define the angle of the dimension.
1st click 2nd click
4th click
3rd click
Mode Description
Witness Lines Perpendicular to Chord Dimensions the arc with witness lines that would be perpendicular to a
chord drawn across the arc
Witness Lines Perpendicular to Tangent Dimensions the arc with witness lines that would be perpendicular to a
line drawn tangent to the arc
Arc Indicator Visible Displays an arc graphic over the dimension measurement
Arc Indicator Invisible Uses a dimension measurement with no arc graphic
Converting Objects to Dimensions | 705
Mode Description
Dimension Standards To change the dimension standard for new dimensions created in the
document, select a standard from the list; select Custom Standards to
create or manage custom dimensions (see Using Custom Dimension
Standards on page 687)
1. Click the Arc Length Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Select the desired mode for the display of the witness lines and whether to use the arc indicator over the dimension
measurement.
3. Click to set the measurement start point.
4. Click to set the end of the measurement.
5. Move the cursor away from the object.
This specifies how far the dimension line is offset from the measured object.
6. Click to place the dimension line.
3rd click
3rd click
Modifying Dimensions
Modify dimensions by adjusting parameters in the Object Info palette or the Properties dialog box. Use commands on
the object context menu to format dimension text, to delete and edit individual dimensions within a chain, to add a
dimension to a single or chain linear dimension, and to disassociate dimensions from the objects to which they are
linked. You can also make many common adjustments by manipulating dimensions directly with the Selection tool; see
Editing Dimensions with the Mouse on page 709.
To change adjoining dimensions into a single chain dimension object, select them, and then select Modify >
Compose. Similarly, to change a chain object into multiple dimensions, select the chain, and then select Modify >
Decompose.
Parameter Description
Length For linear and baseline dimensions, and for individual dimensions within a chain, this sets
the length of the dimension. For associative dimensions, this also changes the length of the
associated object.
Use the segment position selector to the left of the field label to specify which segment of
the dimension (either endpoint, or the center point) will remain fixed when the dimension is
resized. This fixed point is a global setting for all editing of linear and baseline dimension
lengths.
Radius For radial and diametrical dimensions, this sets the length of the dimension (without moving
the center point of the dimension). For associative dimensions, this also changes the radius
of the associated object.
Dim Std Selects the dimension standard type; this selection determines which fields display in the
Object Info palette or Properties dialog box.
Dim Off Sets the distance that the dimension line is offset from the dimensioned object
Modifying Dimensions | 707
Parameter Description
Arrows Inside Sets whether arrows display inside witness lines or are flipped outside
Interior Arc Sets the angular dimension inside the witness lines; deselect to move the dimension outside
of the witness lines at the opposite angle
Leader to Left Switches the radial dimension leader from the right to the left side of the object
Witness Lines
Visible For linear and arc dimensions, this sets whether the witness line displays on both ends of the
dimension line, only the start, only the end, or not at all. For chain dimension objects, this
sets whether all or none of the witness lines display.
Wit Ang For arc dimensions, sets whether the witness lines are perpendicular to a chord on the arc or
to a tangent to the arc
Override For linear and arc dimensions, this displays additional fields for you to enter override values
for the length of one or both witness lines, or for the distance that one or both witness lines
are offset from the dimensioned object.
For chain dimension objects, by default there is only a single override value for the length or
offset distance for all witness lines. To set an override for a particular dimension, right-click
(Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the dimension, and select Edit Dimension from the
context menu.
Text
Text Off Sets the distance that the dimension text is offset from the dimension line. For non-aligned
text, the offset is measured from the closest (left or right) edge of the text box. A positive
value places the text to the left of a vertical dimension line, and above the dimension line in
all other cases.
Depending on the type of dimension, and the Text Rot setting, the Text Off field may or
may not be applicable.
Linear dimensions: text can be offset for any Text Rot setting
Arc and angle dimensions: only aligned text can be offset
Radial dimensions: aligned text can be offset whether inside or outside the circle;
non-aligned text can only be offset when it is outside the circle
Text Rot Sets the orientation of the dimension text to the dimension line, even when the dimension
text is moved.
Horizontal: keeps the text horizontal
Aligned: keeps the text aligned parallel to the dimension line
Horiz/Vert: keeps the text vertical for a vertical linear dimension, and horizontal in all
other cases
Auto Position Automatically aligns the dimension text to the center of the dimension line; deselect to
Text allow manual control of the text location
Flip Text Mirrors the dimension text to the opposite side of the dimension line.
Box Text Places a box around the dimension text
Arc Indicator Displays an arc graphic over the dimension measurement
708 | Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints
Parameter Description
Leader Line For linear, chain, and arc dimensions, draws a leader line from the dimension text to the
dimension line. If desired, use the Attributes palette to add an end marker to the leader line
(see Marker Attributes on page 510); the end marker defaults to the style specified for the
current dimension standard, but it can be changed.
Dual View Selects which dimensions to display, when a dual-dimension standard is selected. This
parameter is not available for chain dimension objects.
Prim/Sec Toggles between settings for primary and secondary dimensions, when a dual-dimension
standard is selected. This parameter is not available for chain dimension objects.
Prec Sets the dimension precision with up to ten digits of accuracy
Show Dim Value Shows or hides the dimension text
Leader Enter text to display before the dimension text
Trailer Enter text to display after the dimension text
Tol When a single-dimension standard is selected, sets whether a dimension displays a single,
double, limited, or no tolerance value
Top/Bottom/ When a tolerance display is selected, sets the tolerance values and how they display
Display as Typed
Action Description
Change the length of a For linear dimensions, click on the endpoint of a witness line with the Selection tool
dimension graphically and drag it parallel to the dimension line; in chain dimension objects, the size of any
adjoining dimension is adjusted automatically.
For angular, arc length, radial, or diametrical dimensions, click on the endpoint of a
witness line with the Selection tool and drag it in the desired direction.
For associative dimensions, a change to the length of a radial or diametrical dimension
also changes the size of the associated object.
To enter a specific value, use the Length field on the Object Info palette (see Editing
Dimension Properties on page 706).
The dimension has a Click the right endpoint of The circles diameter is
constraint marker, so it is the dimension and drag it to reduced from the right; the
associative the left left endpoint remains fixed
710 | Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints
Action Description
Enter the length of a Double-click anywhere on the dimension to enter a text editing mode. Enter the
dimension on the drawing desired length, and then use the segment position selector to specify which segment
(linear and chain will remain fixed when the dimension is resized.
dimensions) Alternatively, select the Text tool, and then click the dimension text to enter the
text editing mode.
For associative dimensions, a change to the length of a linear dimension also changes
the size of the associated object.
Segment selector
The dimension has Double-click the dimension The triangles top side is
constraint markers, to edit it; enter the new expanded from the right;
so it is associative length, and click the left the dimensions left
segment selector endpoint remains fixed
Change the rotation of a Click anywhere on the witness line with the Selection tool and drag it in the desired
radial or diametrical direction
dimension
Modifying Dimensions | 711
Action Description
Change the position of the Click on the text with the Selection tool and drag it to the desired location. The text for
dimension text an angular dimension can only be moved along the curve of the dimension itself; the
text for other dimensions can be moved in any direction.
For linear and arc length dimensions, press and hold the Shift key while dragging the
text to maintain the same offset distance from the dimension line.
To enter a specific value for the text offset from the dimension line, use the Text Off
field on the Object Info palette. For linear, arc length, and chain dimensions, you can
add a leader line from the text to the dimension line if necessary. See Editing
Dimension Properties on page 706.
Action Description
Change the offset of the With the Selection tool, click on the gray dashed line at the endpoints of the witness
witness lines from the lines and drag it to the desired location. The dimension line remains stationary, and the
dimensioned object witness line length is adjusted accordingly.
(linear, chain, and arc If the dimension standard does not have a fixed witness line length, the Object Info
dimensions) palette shows that the witness lines have an offset override.
If the dimension standard has a fixed witness line length, the Object Info palette
shows that the witness lines have a length override.
To enter specific values for the offset or length of the witness lines, use the Override
setting on the Object Info palette (see Editing Dimension Properties on page 706).
If the dimension has multiple override values for offset or length, each witness line has
its own dashed line for editing.
Modify the offsets of With the Selection tool, select the dimensions to modify. Drag one of the dimension
several dimension lines or lines to the desired location; all selected dimension lines move the same distance. Drag
witness lines at once one of the dashed gray lines that indicate the witness line offset to the desired location;
(linear and chain the endpoints of all selected witness lines move the same distance.
dimensions)
Measuring Distance | 713
Measuring Distance
Distance can be measured without actually being recorded. This can be useful for placing objects or for reference.
Measuring in Units
The Tape Measure tool measures the distance between two or more points in the drawing area or in a sheet layer
viewport, and temporarily displays the length in the Data bar. The tool shows the measurement between one click and
the next, and it also keeps track of the cumulative length from the very first click.
Measurements display in the Data bar until the mouse is double-clicked. Note the measurements before the display
clears.
To measure a distance:
1. Click the Tape Measure tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click where the first measurement is to start.
3. Move the cursor along the distance to measure.
The Data bar displays the following information:
4. To continue measuring in a different direction or area, click to set the next starting point.
The L measurement changes to zero.
5. Move the cursor to measure the next distance.
The Data bar reflects the length from the previous point and the total cumulative length.
1st click
2nd click
First click to start
the measurement
Measuring in Degrees
The Protractor tool measures angles in the drawing, and temporarily displays the degrees measurement in the Data
bar. There are two modes for the tool.
714 | Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints
Mode Description
Angle from Two Calculates the angle between two objects or object sides that are linearrectangles
Segments (including rounded and rotated), lines, polylines, and polygons. This mode cannot,
however, measure circles, ovals, or arcs. In addition, it cannot measure between parallel
lines.
Angle from Three Points Measures an angle between three points in the drawing area
1. Click the Protractor tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Angle from Two Segments mode.
2. Move the selection arrow over the first side of the angle to measure.
3. Click to select the side, and then move the cursor to the other angle side.
The angle displays in the Data bar.
1. Click the Protractor tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Angle from Three Points mode.
2. Click to set the first point.
3. Click to set the second point.
4. Move the cursor to the third angle point.
2nd click
1st click
Parametric Constraints
Parametric constraints ensure that a drawing maintains its original precision. Parametric constraints maintain
relationships between an object and world space, between two objects, or within the object itself. There are two types
of parametric constraints: dimensional and geometric. Dimensional constraints maintain a measurable relationship by
limiting the objects geometry to a particular value. Geometric constraints maintain a physical relationship by limiting
the allowed orientation of objects.
Parametric constraints can be placed on all 2D objects. They cannot be placed on 3D objects except for walls, symbols,
and plug-in objects that have 2D components. Multiple constraints can be applied to an object. Parametric constraints
can be placed across layers as long as both layers are of the same scale, and Layer Options are set to Show/Snap/
Modify Others.
Constraints must always be placed in the plane defined by the object or objects being constrained; when multiple
objects are constrained, they must be co-planar to create the constraint. The constraint on an object or objects changes
planes with the object, if the object changes its plane.
Constraints attached to a single object move along with the object even if the object is copied or cut and pasted. When
only one of a pair of constrained objects is duplicated or copied or cut and pasted, the constraint is removed.
When a parametric constraint is placed, green constraint indicators are drawn for the object(s) involved. To hide
indicators, deselect Show parametric constraints in the Display tab of the Vectorworks preferences. Alternatively,
select View > Show > Show or Hide Constraints; the command toggles between displaying or hiding constraints, as
appropriate.
Dimensional Constraints
Dimensional constraints maintain a measurable relationship. They resemble standard dimensions when placed.
Constrain Angle
Constrain the angular relationship between separate objects or line segments of a single object. If one object or segment
is rotated, the object or segment it is constrained to adjusts to maintain the angle.
1. Click the Constrain Angle tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on one of the two objects or line segments to be constrained.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the second object or line segment to be constrained.
A green angle constraint is drawn between the two objects or line segments.
716 | Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints
1st click
Object
2nd click
Constrain Radius
Constrain the radius of a single arc or circle. If the arc or circle is accidentally resized, the constraint prevents the
operation, preserving the radius.
1. Click the Constrain Radius tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the arc or circle to be constrained.
A green radius constraint is drawn on the object.
Click on the
object
1. Click the Constrain Horiz Distance tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the object to be constrained.
A green horizontal distance constraint is drawn on the object.
1. Click the Constrain Vertical Distance tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the object to be constrained.
A green vertical distance constraint is drawn on the object.
1. Click the Constrain Vertical Distance tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the first point to be constrained.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the second point to be constrained.
A green vertical distance constraint is drawn between the two points.
718 | Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints
1st click
2nd click
Constrain Distance
Constrain the distance of an edge of an object, line segment, or between two points regardless of the angle. If an object
is accidentally resized, the constraint prevents the operation, preserving the original distance. When the constraint is on
two different objects, if one object is modified, the object to which it is constrained moves to remain at the same
constrained distance.
1. Click the Constrain Distance tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the object to be constrained.
A green horizontal distance constraint is drawn on the object.
Object
1. Click the Constrain Distance tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the first point to be constrained.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the second point to be constrained.
A green distance constraint is drawn between the two points.
Point
1st click
2nd click
Parametric Constraints | 719
Geometric Constraints
Geometric constraints preserve the geometric properties of objects.
Constrain Horizontal-Vertical
Constrain a linear object to remain horizontal or vertical. Once constrained, the object cannot be rotated to any other
position. The object can be resized in length, but it always remains horizontal or vertical.
1. Click the Constrain Horiz-Vertical tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the linear object to be constrained.
A green horizontal-vertical constraint is drawn on the object.
If the object is diagonal when the constraint is placed, it rotates to become vertical or horizontal, depending on
which angle it is closest to.
Constrain Parallel
Constrain linear objects or line segments to be parallel to one another. If one object is rotated, the object constrained to
it rotates to remain parallel to the first object. Lines do not need to be parallel when placing the constraints; the first line
rotates to match the angle of the second line.
1. Click the Constrain Parallel tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the line to constrain.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the line to be constrained.
Green parallel constraint indicators are drawn around the two lines.
1st click
Object
2nd click
720 | Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints
Constrain Perpendicular
Constrain linear objects or line segments to be perpendicular to one another. If one line is rotated, the line it is
constrained to adjusts to remain perpendicular to the first line. Lines do not need to be perpendicular when placing the
constraints; the first line rotates to become perpendicular to the second line.
1. Click the Constrain Perpendicular tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the line to constrain.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the line to be constrained.
A green perpendicular constraint is drawn, connecting the two lines.
1st click
2nd click
Constrain Collinear
Constrain the collinearity between two linear objects. If one line is moved, the line it is constrained to adjusts to remain
aligned. Lines do not need to be aligned when placing the constraints; the first line moves to become collinear to the
second line.
1. Click the Constrain Collinear tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the line to constrain.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the line to be constrained.
Green collinear constraint indicators are drawn on the two lines.
2nd click
1st click
Parametric Constraints | 721
Constrain Coincident
Constrain two selected points to remain attached. If one object is moved, the object it is constrained to adjusts to
maintain the connection. The first point stretches to connect to the second point, if necessary.
1. Click the Constrain Coincident tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the point to constrain.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the point to be constrained.
A green coincident constraint is drawn where the two points touch.
1st click
2nd click
Constrain Concentric
Constrain circles and arcs concentrically. If a circle or arc is moved, the circle or arc it is constrained to moves so that
their centers remain aligned. Circles and arcs do not need to be concentric when placing the constraints; the first object
moves so that its center aligns to the second objects center.
1. Click the Constrain Concentric tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the object to constrain.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the object to be constrained.
A green concentric constraint is drawn at the center of the two objects.
2nd click
1st click
Constrain Tangent
Constrain a circle, arc or line to be tangent to another circle or arc. If one object is moved, the other object it is
constrained to adjusts to maintain the tangency. Objects do not need to be tangent to one another when placing the
constraints; the first object moves to become tangent to the second.
722 | Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints
1. Click the Constrain Tangent tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the circle or arc to constrain.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the circle, arc or line to be constrained.
A green tangent constraint is drawn at the tangent point of the two objects.
1st click
2nd click
3. In the Dimensional Constraint Value field, enter the new dimension, and click OK.
The dimensional value is updated and the object or objects are adjusted.
Parameter Description
No Continues with the editing operation, removing the conflicting constraints
Yes Cancels the editing operation, preserving constraints
Preview Opens the Unsolvable Constraints dialog box, listing the problem constraints and
allowing a preview of each constraint
2. Select Preview constraints that will be selected, and then click Yes to preview the unsolvable constraints.
The Unsolvable Constraints dialog box opens.
Parametric Constraints | 725
3. Double-click on an unsolvable constraint to preview it in the drawing. The unsolvable constraint displays with a
different color.
4. Click OK to remove the constraints and perform the editing operation. Click Cancel to retain the constraints and
cancel the editing operation.
726 | Chapter 17: Dimensioning and Constraints
Presenting Vectorworks Drawings 18
The Vectorworks program provides several ways to present a completed drawing. Guide your customer through an
animated walkthrough of your design by creating a QuickTime movie. Present many croppable views of the drawing
on a single layer with viewports. Finally, the layer link feature creates linked views of the design layers in the drawing.
Animating Drawings
Two types of animations can be createdOrbit Point and Move Along Path. The Orbit Point animator rotates by a
specified number of degrees around a 3D object or selected point in the drawing. The Move Along Path animator
moves through the 3D drawing, following a specified path.
In Perspective view, only the portion of the model within the perspective frame (see Perspective on page 552) is
visible in the animation.
2. To specify an object or objects as the center of rotation, select the object or group of objects.
3. Select Model > Create Animation.
The Create Animation dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Active layer Specifies the center of the active layer plane (0X, 0Y, 0Z) as the center of rotation for
plane the animation
Working plane Specifies the center of the working plane (0I, 0J, 0K) as the center of rotation for the
animation
Selection Specifies the center of the selected object(s) as the center of rotation for the
animation
Rotation angle Specifies the amount of rotation (in degrees) for the animation; for example, to
complete an orbit around the selected center of animation, enter 360
QuickTime is a complex program which offers great flexibility in selecting settings. Consult the online QuickTime
Player help (available from the QuickTime Help menu) for more information about QuickTime parameters and
compression settings.
7. Specify the remaining parameter settings in the Create Animation dialog box.
Parameter Description
Duration (Sec) Sets the total length of time of the animation
Time Scale Specifies the animation rate; a value between 0.1 and 0.99 creates a slow motion
effect, while a value between 1.01 and 10.00 speeds up the animation. Leave the
default value of 1.00 for a normal time scale.
8. Click Preview to check the animation before saving it. Depending on the rendering setting, the preview may be
shown in Wireframe mode.
To preview only a selected portion of the animation, press Command (Macintosh) or Ctrl (Windows) when
clicking Preview. The Preview Duration dialog box opens.
Specify the animation starting and ending time (in seconds) and click Preview.
To stop showing a preview, simultaneously press Command + Period (Macintosh) or Esc (Windows).
9. When satisfied with the preview, click Save Movie to save the animation.
The Save As dialog box opens.
10. Enter the name for the QuickTime Movie file and specify its location. Click Save. The progress of movie creation
is displayed.
To see the completed animation, see Viewing QuickTime Animations on page 734.
6. Click New.
The New Animation Name dialog box opens.
Enter a name for this animation and then click Create to return to the Select Animation dialog box.
7. Select the name of the new animation and click Edit.
Animating Drawings with QuickTime | 731
The Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons under the graph change the magnification level of the animation graph.
A new path animation uses the default length from the setting in the main QuickTime options dialog box. To
specify a different animation length, double-click the arrow to the far right of the timeline.
Double-click the arrow to access the
Set Animation Length dialog box
8. From the list of views on the left, drag the starting view name to the animation graph.
The first view is placed at the graphs origin0 seconds, 0 drawing units/second.
9. Select the next view to use and drag it to the animation graph.
A bar with a bead is added to the graph. Drag the bar and bead to change the animation settings (time elapsed
between view changes and velocity of camera movement).
The distance between bars is the time in seconds that it takes to move from one view to the next.
Move the bead up and down to determine the slope of the line between bars. This slope indicates the velocity of
the movement between views (the number of drawing units/second that the camera moves). In general, the slope
should form a steady curve. An uneven curve will cause a choppy camera movement, speeding up and slowing
down in a jolting manner. The slope cannot dip below the X axisthis would create a negative velocity.
bar
bead
732 | Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings
Parameter Description
Look towards Specifies what direction the view should look toward
Current view Sets the view to the current beads saved view
Working plane Sets the view to the working plane origin
origin
Center of currently Sets the view to the X, Y, Z center of the currently selected object(s) bounding
selected object box
Center of following Sets the view to look at the center of a named 3D object. Click Select a
named object different named object to open the Look At Named Object dialog box. Select
the object to set the view toward (named objects in walls or layer links cannot
be selected).
Following point Sets the view to the specified X, Y, Z coordinates
To create a pause, place the same view twice in the animation graph.
Ensure that there is no slope between the repeated views.
Parameter Description
Duration (Sec) Sets the total length of time of the animation
Time Scale Specifies the animation rate; a value between 0.1 and 0.99 creates a slow motion
effect, while a value between 1.01 and 10.00 speeds up the animation. Leave the
default value of 1.00 for a normal time scale.
15. Click Preview to check the animation before saving it. Depending on the rendering setting, the preview may be
shown in Wireframe mode. Specify the animation starting and ending time (in seconds) and click Preview.
To preview only a selected portion of the animation, press Command (Macintosh) or Ctrl (Windows) when
clicking Preview. The Preview Duration dialog box opens.
To stop showing a preview, simultaneously press Command + Period (Macintosh) or Esc (Windows).
16. When satisfied with the preview, click Save Movie to save the animation.
The Save As dialog box opens.
17. Enter the name for the QuickTime movie file and specify its location. Click Save. The movie creation progress
displays.
To see the completed animation, see Viewing QuickTime Animations on page 734.
734 | Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings
1. Double-click the file name or QuickTime Movie icon for the desired movie. Alternatively, open the QuickTime
application and select the file from the Open menu.
2. Click the Play button to play the movie.
Users Guide.
A sheet layer can contain many viewports. Sheet layers retain their own print settings, including print area, resolution,
and printer setup parameters. For more information on sheet layers, see Managing Layers on page 94.
Parameter Description
Viewport Name Specifies the viewport name; this name must be unique in the document
Drawing Title Specifies a descriptive title for the sheet layer viewport. This name displays as the
drawing title for any annotation objects (drawing labels, section markers, and sheet
borders) that are added to the viewport. The drawing title name is limited to 63
characters.
Create on Layer Select the sheet layer where the viewport will be created, or select New Sheet Layer to
create a sheet layer. If there are no sheet layers present and a new one is not created now,
you will be prompted to create a sheet layer after clicking OK.
Layers Specifies which design layers will be visible in the viewport
Display Planar Objects Select to display 2D planar objects, when the viewports view is other than Top/Plan
Project Screen Objects Select to display 2D objects associated with the screen plane, when the viewports view is
other than Top/Plan
Classes Specifies which classes will be visible in the viewport
Scale Specifies the viewport scale relative to the page; select a scale or choose Custom and
enter the scale value in Custom Scale
Custom Scale When a custom scale is selected, enter the scale value
View Specifies the orientation of the design layers displayed in the viewport; select a cardinal
view or choose Custom and then click Set View to specify the view
Set View When a custom view is selected, click Set View to open the 3D Rotation dialog box for
the entry of custom view parameters (see Rotating Precisely on page 560 for more
information)
Rendering Specifies the render mode for the viewport.
The following modes enable the Render Settings button to specify rendering parameters:
Sketch (Vectorworks Design Series required)
OpenGL
Custom Renderworks (Renderworks required)
Artistic Renderworks (Renderworks required)
Hidden Line
Dashed Hidden Line
Final Shaded Polygon
Render Settings Certain render modes require parameters to be set; click this button to specify them. See
the following:
Hidden Line Render settings: Line Render Options on page 664
OpenGL and Final Shaded Polygon settings: Rendering with Vectorworks on
page 660
Artistic Renderworks settings: Artistic Renderworks Options on page 675
Custom Renderworks settings: Custom Renderworks Options on page 673
RW Background Select a Renderworks background from either the default content or the current files
(Renderworks required) content to use as a background for the viewport; see Libraries on page 155
Projection Select the projection type for the viewport (see Projection on page 551)
Perspective Type For Perspective projection, select the type of perspective, or choose Custom and specify
the perspective distance
Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports | 737
Parameter Description
Perspective Dist For custom perspectives, enter the perspective distance
3. Click OK.
4. If a sheet layer does not already exist in the file, the New Sheet Layer dialog box opens automatically to create
one. Click OK.
The viewport is created on the designated sheet layer, and the sheet layer becomes active.
3. If the cropped viewport is being created from a design layer, select the 2D object. If the cropped viewport is being
created from a sheet layer, select both the 2D object and the uncropped viewport.
4. Select View > Create Viewport.
5. An alert dialog box asks whether the object should be used as the viewports crop. Select Yes (click Always do the
selected action to always use a selected 2D object as a crop object when creating viewports).
6. The Create Viewport dialog box opens. Enter a viewport name and drawing title, and select the sheet layer to place
it on. The remaining viewport parameters are initially set to be the same as the design layer properties (for design
layers) or selected viewport (for sheet layers). Change the parameters as needed (see Creating a Sheet Layer
Viewport from a Design Layer on page 735).
738 | Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings
7. Click OK.
The viewport, cropped by the selected 2D object, is created on the specified sheet layer.
8. By default, the crop object is not visible. To change the visibility of the crop object, select the viewport and select
the Crop Visible setting in the Object Info palette.
Cropped viewport
Parameter Description
Rotation Sets the viewport rotation; if the viewport was created from a rotated plan view
(Vectorworks Design Series required), this parameter can be used to reset the viewport
to the world coordinate system
Crop Indicates whether the selected viewport has been cropped (see Cropping Sheet Layer
Viewports on page 746)
Crop Visible If the viewport has been cropped, select to display the crop object
Update Click to update the viewport to reflect any changes that have occurred since the viewport
was created or last updated (see Status of a Sheet Layer Viewport on page 741 and
Updating Sheet Layer Viewports on page 753)
Drawing Title Specifies a descriptive title for the sheet layer viewport. This name displays as the
drawing title for any annotation objects (drawing labels and sheet borders) that are
added to the viewport. The drawing title name is limited to 63 characters.
If Use Automatic Drawing Coordination is selected in document preferences
(Vectorworks Design Series required), a change to this field for the viewport
automatically changes the field for the viewports drawing label, and vice versa.
Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports | 739
Parameter Description
Layers Specifies which design layers are visible in the viewport and allows changes to some of
the layer properties in the viewport; see Changing the Layer Properties of Sheet Layer
Viewports on page 749
Display Planar Objects Select to display 2D planar objects, when the viewports view is other than Top/Plan
Project Screen Objects Select to display 2D objects associated with the screen plane, when the viewports view
is other than Top/Plan
Classes Specifies which classes are visible in the viewport and allows changes to some of the
class properties in the viewport, including changes to the properties for annotation
objects. Class visibilities can be overridden for a selected viewport; see Changing the
Class Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports on page 751.
Scale Specifies the viewport scale relative to the page; select a scale, or choose Custom and
enter a Custom Scale value
Custom Scale When a custom Scale is selected, enter the scale value
RW Camera Indicates whether the viewport is linked to a Renderworks camera (see Linking the
(Renderworks required) Camera View to a Sheet Layer Viewport on page 573)
View Specifies the orientation of the design layers displayed in the viewport; select a cardinal
view or choose Custom and then click Set View to specify the view
The standard view of a selected viewport can be changed with the numeric keypad
shortcut keys (see Using Standard Views on page 549).
Set View When a custom view is selected, click Set View to open the 3D Rotation dialog box for
the entry of custom view parameters (see Rotating Precisely on page 560 for more
information)
Background/Foreground Specifies the render mode(s) for the viewport. Select a background mode and specify the
Render render settings, if any. For a composite effect, also select an optional foreground mode
and specify any settings (Wireframe, Sketch, Hidden Line, or Dashed Hidden Line are
the only render modes available for foreground rendering).
Background / Certain render modes require parameters to be set; click the appropriate Render
Foreground Render Settings button to specify them. See the following:
Settings OpenGL and Final Shaded Polygon settings: Rendering with Vectorworks on
page 660
Custom Renderworks settings (Renderworks required): Custom Renderworks
Options on page 673
Artistic Renderworks settings (Renderworks required): Artistic Renderworks
Options on page 675
Hidden Line Render settings: Line Render Options on page 664
RW Background Select a Renderworks background from either the default content or the current files
(Renderworks required) content to use as a background for the viewport; see Libraries on page 155
If the Renderworks Background choices are not available, the background selection
is controlled by the Renderworks style in effect. Set the background in the
Renderworks style instead; see Renderworks Styles on page 669.
Projection Select the projection type for the viewport (see Projection on page 551)
740 | Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings
Parameter Description
Perspective Type For Perspective projection, select the type of perspective, or choose Custom and specify
the perspective distance
Perspective Dist For custom perspectives, enter the perspective distance
Lighting Options Click to change the ambient light parameters described in Setting Lighting Options on
page 641.
By default, a viewports ambient light is set according to the ambient light settings of the
first visible design layer in the viewport. If there are no visible layers, the ambient light
is set to on, with a color of white and a brightness of 35% (similar to the default ambient
lighting for a design layer).
If the lighting options are controlled by a Renderworks style that is currently in
effect (Renderworks required), the Edit Renderworks Style dialog box opens
instead; see Renderworks Styles on page 669.
Advanced Properties Opens the Advanced Viewport Properties dialog box; see Advanced Sheet Layer
Viewport Properties on page 740
Parameter Description
Line Weight Scale Enter a value larger than 1.0 to increase the viewport line weights, or a value below 1.0
(but larger than 0) to decrease the line weights
Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports | 741
Parameter Description
Marker Scale Enter a value larger than 1.0 to increase the viewport marker size, or a value below 1.0 (but
larger than 0) to decrease the marker size
Line Type Scale Enter a value larger than 1.0 to increase the length and spacing of viewport line type
segments, or a value below 1.0 (but larger than 0) to decrease the length and spacing of line
type segments
Hatch Line Scale Enter a value larger than 1.0 to increase the spacing between viewport hatch lines, or a
value below 1.0 (but larger than 0) to decrease the spacing between hatch lines
Text Scale Enter a value larger than 1.0 to increase the text size in viewports, or a value below 1.0 (but
larger than 0) to decrease the text size; only associated viewport text is affected. Graphic
objects that are part of the text item, such as a reference marker container or callout bubble,
are scaled with the text.
Dimensional objects inside plug-in objects, such as dimensions within a bubble grid
object, are not scaled. Plug-in objects, such as a North arrow object, are not scaled if
they have been placed while editing the viewport in Edit Annotation mode.
Page Symbol Scaling These settings affect page-based symbols in the viewport (see Symbol Types on
page 170)
Symbol Scale Sets a scale factor for page-based symbols; a scale factor of less than one decreases the size
of the symbol relative to its definition at a 1:1 scale, while a factor of more than one
increases its size
Attribute Scaling These settings affect the attributes (such as line weight) of page-based symbols in the
viewport
Use Symbol Factor Uses the Symbol Scale factor to scale the attributes
Use Individual Uses the other, individual scale factors in the Advanced Properties dialog box, such as the
Factors Line Weight Scale, to scale the page-based symbol attributes
Show Wall Displays or hides wall and slab components in Top/Plan view, regardless of the document
Components preferences detail display setting (see Display Preferences on page 30)
Render Gray Layers Design layers with a visibility set to Gray are rendered as transparent, similar to the
Transparent transparent effect achieved with the Unified View command (see Unified Layer View on
page 561)
Black and white only Changes all colors in the viewport to black or white; this is useful for displaying two
viewport copies on the same sheet layer, with one in color and the other in black and white.
However, if the document preferences display setting is black and white, viewports will
also display as black and white.
Adjust Flipped Text Re-orients rotated and flipped text in the viewport so that it is always readable (regardless
of the Vectorworks flipped text preference; see Display Preferences on page 18)
Preview Displays the viewport with a preview of the advanced settings
Out of date When the objects in a viewport have changed since the viewport was created or last
updated, the viewport becomes out of date. An out-of-date viewport is indicated by
red text on the Update button on the viewports Object Info palette. Optionally, an
out-of-date viewport also displays with a red and white striped border around the
viewport (see Display Preferences on page 30).
Empty A viewport displays as a red X when the associated design layer contains no
objects or the objects are hidden, or when the associated design layer is set to
invisible
Use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands to copy or paste a viewport on its original sheet layer or another sheet
layer. Use the Selection tool to drag a viewport to a new position (or edit the X- and Y-axis positions in the Object
Info palette). Press the Delete key to delete a selected viewport.
Use the Move and Rotate commands and the Rotate and Mirror tools to move, rotate, or mirror a viewport. The
viewport can be split by the Split tool (in Line Split mode), and clipped with the Clip tool.
Use the Scale Objects command to scale a viewport. Any crop objects in the viewport are also scaled, as are
annotations and dimensions. Viewport text, however, is not scaled unless Scale Text is selected in the Scale
Objects dialog box.
Use the Modify > Lock and Modify > Unlock commands to lock and unlock viewports.
Use the Eyedropper tool to transfer attributes from one viewport to another; see Transferring Attributes on
page 502.
Use 2D drawing tools on sheet layers to create borders, title blocks, and so on.
A viewport can be copied and pasted into an image-editing application. The dpi setting of the sheet layer affects
the resolution of the pasted image. Depending on the platform and the image-editing application, the resolution of
the pasted image may still not be optimal; in this case, the File > Export Image File command offers control over
the exported area, dimensions, resolution, and file type.
Parameter Description
Annotations Creates or edits viewport annotations and dimensions (see Creating Annotations for
Sheet Layer Viewports on page 747)
Crop Creates or edits a cropped viewport (see Cropping Sheet Layer Viewports on
page 746), and optionally displays the viewport outside of the crop area when in Edit
Crop mode
Display Viewport Displays the viewport outside of the crop with wireframe rendering; objects outside of
Outside Crop the crop can be snapped to when creating or editing a crop shape.
This option is only available when the Crop edit mode is selected.
Gray Outside Crop If Display Viewport Outside Crop is selected, displays the area outside of the crop in
gray.
This option is only available when the Crop edit mode is selected.
Design Layer Navigates to the selected design layer to edit objects contained in the viewport
Display using Viewport Changes the files view parameters and layer and class visibilities to match those of
Attributes the viewport.
If the Navigate Back to Viewport option is also selected, the files layer and class
visibilities return to their original status when you return to the viewport; otherwise,
the files attributes remain the same as the viewports.
This option is only available when the Design Layer edit mode is selected.
Add Reference Crop When a viewport has been cropped, this option displays the crop on the design layer so
Object that edits can be made to the design layer while knowing the position of the crop
object.
This option is only available when the Design Layer edit mode is selected.
Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports | 745
Parameter Description
Navigate Back to Temporarily adds a Return to Viewport button to the design layer that returns you to
Viewport the viewport when the edit to the design layer is complete (similar to an Edit Group
operation).
This option is only available when the Design Layer edit mode is selected.
To exit to the design layer instead of exiting to the viewport from design layer
editing mode, press Shift + Esc. Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click
(Macintosh) in the drawing area, and select Exit Viewport from the context
menu.
Display with Clip Cube If you are editing a section viewport, and Navigate Back to Viewport is selected, this
(Vectorworks Design option displays the design layer with a clip cube whose dimensions match the length,
Series required) depth, and height ranges set for the viewport. Portions of the design layer outside the
clip cube are not visible during editing.
You can adjust the faces and orientation of the clip cube as needed, and then either
create a new section viewport, or update the current viewport. See Viewing a Model
with the Clip Cube on page 564 for details.
This option is only available when the Design Layer edit mode is selected.
Camera (Renderworks Edits a Renderworks camera that is linked to the viewport view. The camera view can
required) be changed or the camera can be deleted. See Editing a Linked Renderworks
Camera on page 748.
If no Renderworks camera is linked to the viewport, select a camera to be linked.
Alternatively, the view can be manipulated with the standard view tools (such as the
Flyover tool, zoom level, and View menu commands), changing the viewport view
upon exit.
Display Viewport Cache If the viewport is currently in a render mode other than Wireframe, select Display
Viewport Cache to display a cache image of the rendered viewport during editing;
deselect to display a Wireframe view of the viewport.
This option is only available when the Annotations or Crop edit mode is selected.
Keep the Edit View on Exit When you return to the viewport after an edit, this setting maintains any view changes
(zoom and view location) made during edits to the viewport annotation or the crop
object. Deselect this option to return to the original viewport view settings after
editing.
This option is only available when the Annotations or Crop edit mode is selected.
Double Click Sets the future behavior when a viewport is double-clicked, eliminating the display of
this dialog box if desired. If the Edits the Design Layer option is selected, a
double-click activates the design layer of the double-clicked object. If the object does
not belong to a design layer, the Edit Viewport dialog box opens to select a design
layer to edit.
If Displays this Dialog is not selected, you can still open the dialog box: select
Modify > Edit Viewport, or right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the
viewport and select Edit from the context menu.
3. Click Design Layer and select the design layer to edit from the list.
746 | Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a viewport and select Edit Design Layer from
the context menu to activate the design layer of the right-clicked object (if the right-clicked object does not belong
to a design layer, the Edit Viewport dialog box opens).
4. Select the editing options:
Select Display using Viewport Attributes to view the design layer with the viewport attributes (orientation,
projection, render mode, and layer and class visibilities). A rendered viewport displays the original design
layer with the viewports render mode; however, the design layers render mode options for that mode are used.
Select Add Reference Crop Object to view the crop object on the design layer during editing. However,
because the crop object is added to the design layer, it could become visible in other viewports that reference
that area of the design layer.
Select Navigate Back to Viewport to easily return to the viewport when you are finished with the design layer
edits. A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Return to
Viewport button is visible in the top right corner of the drawing window.
If this is a section viewport, select Display with Clip Cube to use a clip cube while editing the design layer.
5. Click OK to activate the selected design layer.
6. If you selected Navigate Back to Viewport, a colored border displays around the drawing window. Do one of the
following when your edits are complete:
Click Return to Viewport to return to the viewport. This saves changes to drawing objects, but it does not
save clip cube edits.
Press Shift + Esc to exit to the design layer instead of exiting to the viewport. Alternatively, right-click
(Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) in the drawing area, and select Exit Viewport from the context menu.
If the viewport has a clip cube, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the cube face where the section
line is located; select Update Section Viewport to save the clip cube edits. Then either click Return to
Viewport, or select Exit Viewport from the context menu to exit editing mode.
If the viewport has a clip cube, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) any vertical cube face other
than where the section line is located; select Create Section Viewport to create a new section viewport with its
section line located at that cube face.
A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Exit Viewport Crop
command becomes available from the Modify menu, and the Exit Viewport Crop button is visible in the top right
corner of the drawing window.
5. Create a 2D object such as a rectangle, circle, or polyline. The 2D object must define an area; for example, a 2D
line cannot be used. Position the 2D object to delimit the new viewport display area. The fill of a viewport
cropping object is always None; however, the pen style can be set from the Attributes palette while in Edit Crop
mode. Move and resize the 2D object as needed.
Use the Flyover tool to adjust the view as necessary (see Flyover on page 553).
The bounding box of the crop object is also the perspective clip rectangle, if the viewport is in Perspective
projection. Reshaping the crop object changes the perspective clip rectangle as well.
7. The cropped viewport displays; in the Object Info palette, the Crop status changes to Yes.
8. To change, replace, or delete the crop object, select the viewport and then select Modify > Edit Viewport to
re-enter Edit Crop mode. Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) and select Edit from the
context menu.
To change the visibility of the crop object, change the Crop Visible setting in the Object Info palette.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a viewport and select Edit Annotations from
the context menu.
A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Exit Viewport
command becomes available from the Modify menu, and the Exit Viewport Annotation button is visible in the
top right corner of the drawing window.
4. Use the various dimension tools from the Dims/Notes tool set to add dimensions to the viewport (see
Dimensioning on page 687). The dimension tools snap to the objects in the viewport as if you were
dimensioning the design layer. The dimensions are automatically updated if the design layer object changes.
Annotations are 2D objects that are placed on the screen plane. Therefore, a 2D object in the viewport must be
dimensioned in Top/Plan view. A 3D object can be dimensioned in any view, but you must align the face that is to
be dimensioned with the screen plane to get an accurate measurement.
To view other objects on the sheet layer while in Edit Annotation mode, select Show other objects while in
editing modes on the Display tab of the Vectorworks preferences (see Display Preferences on page 18).
Text, callouts, and other annotations, as well as 2D objects, can be added to the viewport. The Vectorworks Design
Series products contain additional annotation objects.
The stacking order of selected annotations can be changed with the Modify > Send commands. To add graphical
annotations to a viewport rendered with Hidden Line, use the inner or outer boundary mode of the 2D Polygon
tool (see 2D Polygon Tool on page 233).
Annotations are in viewport scale, not sheet layer scale.
5. Click Exit Viewport Annotation to exit Edit Annotation mode and return to the sheet layer.
6. To change, replace, or delete the viewport annotations, select the viewport and then select Modify > Edit
Viewport to re-enter Edit Annotation mode.
To change the visibility of the crop object, change the Crop Visible setting in the Object Info palette.
3. Click Camera.
4. An alert dialog box opens. Click OK to enter Edit Renderworks Camera mode.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a viewport and select Edit Camera from the
context menu.
A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Exit Renderworks
Camera command becomes available from the Modify menu, and the Return to Viewport button is visible in the
top right corner of the drawing window.
5. The design layer that was active when the viewport was created is active, and the linked Renderworks camera
object is selected. Edit the camera view as described in Adjusting the Camera View on page 571.
The camera can be deleted. The view and projection parameters are controlled by the viewport if the camera is
deleted.
If no Renderworks camera is linked to the viewport, select a camera to be linked. Alternatively, the view can be
manipulated with the standard view tools (such as the Flyover tool, zoom level, and View menu commands),
changing the viewport view upon exit.
6. Click Return to Viewport to return to the viewport once the Renderworks camera has been edited or deleted. The
viewports view, projection, and perspective distance are updated.
Parameter Description
Layer list Lists the viewport layers and their visibility, edited status, layer color use
status, and stacking order. Click the triangle in the heading of an active
column to toggle between ascending and descending sort order based on that
column parameter.
Visibility Click in a layer visibility column to change the layer visibility for this
viewport.
Column 1: Visible (displays objects in this layer)
Column 2: Invisible (hides objects in this layer)
Column 3: Gray (displays objects in this layer as dimmed)
(Source) Column 4 indicates whether the layer definition is the same as the source
layer, or the layer definition has overrides in this viewport. When a layer is
edited with the Edit button, the override icon displays automatically. Click
the Revert button to revert to the original settings.
The layer definition is from the Layer overrides exist in this viewport
viewports source layer
(Layer Colors) Click to apply the viewport layer colors set in the Edit Viewport Design
Layers dialog box (click Edit to set the colors, as described in the next step),
overriding the design layer colors. This setting is independent of the Use
layer colors document preference.
# (Stacking Order) Displays the layer stacking order; drag a layer within the # column to change
its stacking order. This column displays only when the viewport is in Top/
Plan view.
Edit Opens the Edit Viewport Design Layers dialog box, to override the properties
of the selected layer
Revert Returns the settings in the Edit Viewport Design Layers dialog box to their
default values and removes the override icon in the Source column
Stacking Override Indicates whether the layer stacking order in the viewport is different from
the design layer stacking order. Click Revert Stacking Order to return to the
original design layer stacking order.
Use embedded design Layer overrides: If the sheet layer viewport contains a non-referenced
layer viewport settings design layer viewport for which layer overrides have been set, this option
for uses the design layer viewport overrides, ignoring any layer overrides that
(Vectorworks Design may be set here for the sheet layer viewport.
Series required) Layer visibilities: If the sheet layer viewport contains a non-referenced
design layer viewport for which layer visibilities have been set, this option
uses the design layer viewport visibilities, ignoring any layer visibilities
that may be set here for the sheet layer viewport.
Referenced design layer viewports are not affected by either of these
settings.
Preview Click to preview the layer property settings in the selected viewport
3. To override the layer properties (for viewport display), select one or more viewport layers and click Edit.
Alternatively, double-click on a viewport layer to edit it.
Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports | 751
4. The same parameters apply when you create a design layer (see Setting Design Layer Properties on page 97);
for viewport layers, only the stacking order, transfer mode or opacity, and colors can be edited. These edits apply
to the current viewport only, though they can be transferred to other viewports with the Eyedropper tool.
The viewport layer colors can be controlled separately from the design layer colors, for flexible presentation
output. Click Colors to override the fill and pen colors for the selected viewport layer. To see the effects of the
color override, Use Layer Colors must be selected in the Viewport Layer Properties dialog box for the selected
viewport. This is similar to the way that Use Layer Colors must be selected in document preferences to see the
layer color settings for a design layer, as described in Setting the Design Layer Color on page 102.
5. Click OK to return to the Viewport Layer Properties dialog box.
Click Preview to evaluate the results of the property changes.
6. Click OK to return to the sheet layer.
Parameter Description
Class list Lists the viewport classes and their visibility and edited status; click in a class
visibility column to change the class visibility for this viewport. Click the
triangle in an active column to toggle between ascending and descending sort
order based on that column parameter.
Visibility Click in a class visibility column to change the class visibility for this
viewport.
Column 1: Visible (displays objects in this class)
Column 2: Invisible (hides objects in this class)
Column 3: Gray (displays objects in this class as dimmed)
(Source) Column 4 indicates whether the class definition is the same as the source
class, or the class definition has overrides specific to this viewport. When a
class is edited with the Edit button, the viewport-specific icon displays
automatically. Click the Revert button to revert to the original settings.
The class definition is The class definition is
from the source class specific to this viewport
Edit Opens the Edit Class(es) dialog box, to make overrides to the selected class
that only apply to the current viewport (see Setting Class Properties on
page 109); drawing objects class setting should be By class to take
advantage of class overrides
Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports | 753
Parameter Description
Import Opens the Import Attributes dialog box, to import the class attribute settings
from the file. The attributes can be imported for the classes selected in the
Viewport Class Properties dialog box, from corresponding classes, or from a
specified class in the file.
Click OK to import the class attributes into the selected viewport. (The
Eyedropper tool can also transfer class override attributes between
viewports.)
Revert Sets the selected class back to its original document attributes, undoing any
class overrides; also removes the override icon in the Source column
Use embedded design Class overrides: If the sheet layer viewport contains a design layer
layer viewport settings viewport for which class overrides have been set, this option uses the
for design layer viewport overrides, ignoring any class overrides that may be
(Vectorworks Design set here for the sheet layer viewport.
Series required) Class visibilities: If the sheet layer viewport contains a design layer
viewport for which class visibilities have been set, this option uses the
design layer viewport visibilities, ignoring any class visibilities that may be
set here for the sheet layer viewport
Preview Click to preview the class visibility and attribute settings in the selected
viewport
3. Click OK to apply the class visibility and attribute changes to the selected viewport.
Cutting Sections
The cutting section commands define a section line through a 3D model, placing the cut section on a new layer and
leaving the original model intact.
The Cut 2D Section command creates a cross-section, or 2D contour, on the cutting plane. The contour is created by
the intersection of the model with an infinite plane passing though the section line. Only the elements that actually
intersect the section line are shown.
The Cut 3D Section command creates a section with all the 3D geometry that remains on the indicated side of the
infinite plane passing through the section line. The elements that intersect the section line, as well as the 3D geometry
that exists beyond the line, are shown.
Place a 2D section, along with a bold line, on top of a 3D section, to show the cutting plane with the section behind
it.
Cutting 3D Sections
The Cut 3D Section command cuts a 3D section, or slice, through a 3D model while leaving the model intact. The slice
is placed on a new design layer.
To cut a 3D section from a 3D model:
1. Select the 3D model to section.
2. Select Model > Cut 3D Section.
The cursor changes to cross-hairs.
3. Click to set the start of the section. Draw a line across the object to define the section, and then click to set the end
of the section.
When cutting a section while the drawing is in a Plan projection, the cutting plane (and the cut edge of the object)
is perpendicular to the active layer plane.
Layer Linking | 755
When cutting a section while in a 3D projection, the cutting plane is perpendicular to the working plane.
4. Click on one side of the line to indicate the portion of the model to keep.
The Vectorworks program automatically creates a new design layer and places the cut 3D section on it. The
original layer remains intact. The new 3D section behaves like any other Vectorworks 3D object.
Select the object(s) and select Model > Cut 3D The 3D section (rotated and rendered) is
Section; set the section line and click on either side created on a new design layer; the original
of it to specify the section to keep object(s) are left intact
Dimensions and text are 2D objects; therefore, they do not rotate with the cut 3D section.
Cutting 2D Sections
The Cut 2D Section command cuts a 2D section, or a slice, from a 3D model without affecting the model. The slice is
then placed on a new design layer. For example, to show the profile or a 2D cutaway section of an object in a
mechanical 3D drawing, use this command to create the cutaway section in 2D quickly and easily, without affecting the
original object.
To cut a 2D section from a 3D model:
1. Select the 3D model to section.
2. Select Model > Cut 2D Section.
The cursor changes to cross-hairs.
3. Click to set the start of the section. Draw a line across the object to define the section, and then click to set the end
of the section.
When cutting a section while the drawing is in a Plan projection, the cutting plane (and the cut edge of the object)
is perpendicular to the active layer plane.
When cutting a section while in a 3D projection, the cutting plane is perpendicular to the working plane.
4. Click on one side of the line to indicate the portion of the model to keep.
The Vectorworks program automatically creates a new design layer and places the cut 2D section on it. The
original layer remains intact.
Layer Linking
Creating Layer Links
Layers are independent of each other. Each design layer has its own scale, view, and render status. In the Vectorworks
Fundamentals product, however, a layer link can be created that combines the geometry of several design layers,
including referenced layers, onto a single design layer. The linked objects on this design layer display in the same view
and scale, and share the same render status. This can then be used to give an accurate depiction of how objects in each
756 | Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings
layer work together. For example, the various floors of a building can be drawn on separate layers and then linked
together into a new layer to form an entire building.
In the Vectorworks Fundamentals product, consider using viewports instead of layer links, as they provide a better
and easier way to present drawings.
In the Vectorworks Design Series products, layer links are being superseded by design layer viewports. For
backward compatibility, the Create Layer Link command can still be added to any of the Vectorworks Design
Series workspaces, and existing layer links can still be viewed and edited. For information on design layer
viewports, see Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports on page 723 in the Vectorworks Design
Series Users Guide.
The layer link is created on a new design layer that contains links to the existing design layers of the drawing. 3D
objects on selected layers are automatically linked; 2D planar or screen objects can be displayed in the layer link. Once
the layer link is created, updates to the design layers are automatically reflected on the linked layer when a screen
redraw occurs. However, this updating occurs only in one direction; any new objects or details added to the linked layer
will not appear in any other layers. Linked objects cannot be edited on the linked layer; they must be edited on their
source layer.
To create a layer link:
1. Create a new layer, and then make it the active layer.
This layer shows objects on all linked layers and any changes made to them.
2. Select View > Create Layer Link.
The Create Layer Link dialog box opens; the layer being linked to (the currently active layer) is not listed.
Parameter Description
Layers list Lists the existing design layers; sheet layers and the active design layer are not displayed.
Referenced layers display in italics.
Display Planar Objects Select to display 2D planar objects, when the layer link is in a view other than Top/Plan
Project Screen Objects Select to display 2D objects associated with the screen plane, when the layer link is in a
view other than Top/Plan
3. Select the design layers to be linked from the list of existing layers.
4. Click OK.
Layer Linking | 757
Linked layers are locked objects. To unlock a linked layer, select Modify > Unlock. Double-click on an item in the
layer link to return to its source layer and edit it.
To project 2D planar or screen objects after a layer link has been created, select and then unlock the layer link
object. Select the options in the Object Info palette.
5. Click Exit Layer Link Crop, or select Modify > Exit Layer Link to return to the drawing.
The cropped layer link is displayed. In the Object Info palette, the crop status has changed to Yes.
By increasing the scale of the layer with the layer link, and making other layers visible, a floor plan can be
displayed (original design layer) along with a detailed view of the floor plan (zoomed in, cropped layer link).
758 | Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings
To change, replace, or delete the layer link crop, select the cropped layer link and then select Edit Crop from the
Object Info palette to re-enter crop mode. Click Exit Layer Link Crop, or select Modify > Exit Layer Link to
return to the drawing.
The entire layer link is displayed if a viewport of a cropped layer link is created.
Active layer
Aligning Layer Views | 759
760 | Chapter 18: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings
Importing and Exporting Files 19
The Vectorworks program has the ability to import and export to a variety of file formats. Your work may require you
to import drawings from colleagues that use previous versions of Vectorworks or other programs. You may also have to
export your drawings for those colleagues. The import and export functionality provides the means to incorporate
Vectorworks files with other programs files, including other CAD programs, worksheet, and word processing
programs.
Importing Files
The Import command imports files from a number of different file formats. This command opens drawings produced
in other software programs in the Vectorworks program, where the drawing objects and data can then be manipulated.
The original file remains unchanged.
Additional import options are available in the Vectorworks Design Series products. See Importing and Exporting
Files on page 773 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
To import a file:
1. Select File > Import.
2. Select the import option to use.
3. Select a file from the Open dialog box.
4. Click Open.
Special considerations apply for DXF/DWG and DWF files. See DXF/DWG and DWF File Import on
page 779.
If Vectorworks Design Series products are installed, an option to reference the imported image displays on the
dialog box. See Referencing Imported Images on page 815 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide for
details.
3. Click OK to import the image. The Object Info palette displays the image information.
If Vectorworks Landmark is installed, and the image was georeferenced, a message displays that the image has
been translated according to the associated world file. See World File Support on page 804 in the Vectorworks
Design Series Users Guide for more information.
4. Imported images are planar objects and may be assigned to 3D planes. They can be scaled, rotated, and cropped.
See Cropping Imported Images on page 763 for more information about cropping.
The Trim, Clip, and Shear tools cannot be used on an imported image.
Images imported into the file that are not already in JPEG format can be compressed by JPEG with the Compress
Images command. See Compressing Images on page 285.
4. The cropped image displays; in the Object Info palette, the Crop status changes to Yes.
To change the visibility of the crop object, change the Crop Visible setting in the Object Info palette. The crop
object can be a visible frame for the bitmap in the drawing, or it can be invisible.
To permanently delete the part of the image that lies outside the crop object, click Delete Outside Crop on the
Object Info palette. When prompted, click Yes to confirm the deletion. The Object Info palette displays the new
image file size.
To change, replace, or delete the crop object, select the image and then select Modify > Edit Crop to re-enter Edit
Crop mode. Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) and select Edit Crop from the context
menu.
If the image file is referenced, another alert message displays that the action will break the reference; click OK to
confirm the deletion.
Exporting Files
The Export command exports Vectorworks files into several different file formats, including previous versions of the
Vectorworks program. The exported files can then be imported into another software program. The Vectorworks
program exports to a new file, leaving the original file intact.
Additional export options are available in the Vectorworks Design Series products. See Importing and Exporting
Files on page 773 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
To export a file:
1. Select File > Export.
2. Select the export file format.
Specify the export options, along with the file name and destination.
3. Click Save.
Special considerations apply for exports to DXF/DWG format. See DXF/DWG and DWF File Export on
page 794.
Parameter Description
Preview Options
No Preview The file does not display a preview when opened or imported by an application that
supports the .eps file format
Monochrome Preview Previews the file in monochrome
8-Bit Color Preview Previews the file in 8-bit color
Preview Format When a preview is selected, specifies the format for the Macintosh resource fork
(Macintosh only)
PICT Resource Appends a PICT format preview
TIFF Appends a TIFF format preview
Byte Order
Macintosh Saves the TIFF preview, when selected, with a Macintosh byte order
PC Saves the TIFF preview, when selected, with a IBM PC byte order
5. If any of the objects in the drawing are outside of the print area, a dialog box opens to ask if the print area should
be used as the bounds of the EPSF export. If the print area is used as the bounds of the EPSF export, any objects
outside of the print area are not included in the export.
Parameter Description
Export Area
All Visible Objects Exports an image that includes all visible objects (objects do not have to be currently
on screen to be considered visible)
Current View Exports an image that is exactly as it displays on the current screen
All Pages as Single Image Saves all pages in the print area as one image. By default, the image dimensions are
set to match the print area specifications in the Page Setup dialog box. The image
dimensions can be changed, but must remain proportional to the print area aspect
ratio.
Each Page as Separate Saves each page in the print area as separate images. By default, the image
Image dimensions are set to match the page size specifications in the Page Setup dialog
box. The image dimensions can be changed, but must remain proportional to the
page size aspect ratio.
Marquee Exports an image within a user-created marquee. Select this option and then click
Draw Marquee to temporarily close the dialog box. Click and drag to specify the
area for export; the marquee dimensions are displayed on the Data bar. Click to set
the export area and return to the Export Image File dialog box. The Pixel
Dimensions of the image are automatically set to the marquee dimensions.
Dimensions
Lock Aspect Ratio Select to maintain the image aspect ratio when specifying dimensions
Exporting Files | 769
Parameter Description
Resolution Specifies the printed image resolution in pixels over inches
Pixel Dimensions
Width/Height Specifies the exported image dimensions; if Lock Aspect Ratio is selected, changes
to one dimension will update the other to maintain the aspect ratio
Print Size
Width/Height Specifies the printed image dimensions in the selected Unit; if Lock Aspect Ratio is
selected, changes to one dimension will update the other to maintain the aspect ratio
Units Select a unit to apply to the Print Size parameters
Preview Displays a rendered or wireframe preview according to the current settings
Render Updates the preview with a rendered view using the currently set rendering option
Wireframe Updates the preview with a wireframe view
Memory Required/ Estimates the amount of memory required for the export and the approximate file
Estimated File Size size of the exported file, based on the current settings
Update Updates the estimated memory and file size requirements
Format
File Type Select the file format for the exported image, and indicate specific compression
settings, if any
Compression Specifies compression settings according to the selected File Type.
QuickTime offers great flexibility when specifying compression settings for the
various file types. Consult QuickTime documentation for information on these
settings.
Update visible out of date Automatically updates any visible, out-of-date viewports before exporting
viewports prior to exporting
Reset all plug-in objects that Automatically resets plug-in objects that require an update (such as data stamps)
require a reset prior to before exporting
exporting
Export Georeferencing File Available only if the current design layer is georeferenced. Along with the image
(Vectorworks Architect or file, exports a worldfile that describes the exported images location, scale, and
Landmark required) rotation in the geographic coordinate system. If multiple georeferenced layers are
visible, the worldfile will be written according to the topmost layer. See GIS and
Georeferencing on page 620 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide for
more information.
2. Click Save.
In the dialog box which opens, provide a name for the file; the program adds the file extension according to the
file format selected. If the Each Page as a Separate Image was selected for export, the program automatically
appends an incremental number to each file name.
3. Click Save.
A new file is created without changing the original drawing file. This new file can then be opened in other
applications or imported into another software program.
770 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files
2. Select Export Solid as Trimmed Surfaces to export a solid as several different bodies (for example, a cube
exports as six bodies); otherwise, a solid is exported as a single body.
3. Click OK.
4. Specify the file name and destination.
5. Click Save.
2. Select ASCII or Binary for the file type. Using the slider control, adjust the coarseness of the polygonal
representation for the export quality.
3. Click OK.
4. Specify the file name and destination, and then click Save.
2. Select Export Solid as Trimmed Surfaces to export a solid as several different bodies (for example, a cube
exports as six bodies); otherwise, a solid is exported as a single body.
3. Click OK.
4. Specify the file name and destination.
5. Click Save.
Parameter Description
Export
Selected Objects on Active Layer Exports only selected 3D objects from the active layer; if no objects are
selected, all 3D objects from the active layer are exported
All Visible Objects on Active Exports all visible 3D objects from the active layer
Layer
All Visible Objects on All Layers Exports all visible 3D objects from all layers in the Vectorworks file
Parasolid Version Specify the Parasolid version for export; if the exported file cannot be
opened, try exporting to a lower version of Parasolid
3. Click OK.
4. Specify the file name and destination.
5. Click Save.
Parameter Description
Export Area
All Visible Objects Exports an image that includes all visible objects (objects do not have to be
currently on screen to be considered visible)
Current View Exports an image that is exactly as it displays on the current screen
All Pages as Single Image Not applicable for HDRI export
Each Page as Separate Image Not applicable for HDRI export
Marquee Exports the portion of the image specified with a marquee box. Select this option
and then click Draw Marquee to temporarily close the dialog box. Click, and
then drag to specify the area for export; the marquee dimensions are displayed
on the Data bar. Click to set the export area and return to the Export Image File
dialog box. The Pixel Dimensions of the image are automatically set to the
marquee dimensions.
Dimensions
Lock Aspect Ratio Select to maintain the image aspect ratio when specifying dimensions
Resolution Specifies the printed image resolution in pixels per inch
774 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files
Parameter Description
Pixel Dimensions
Width/Height Specifies the exported image dimensions; if Lock Aspect Ratio is selected,
changes to one dimension will update the other to maintain the aspect ratio
Print Size
Width/Height Specifies the printed image dimensions in the selected Unit; if Lock Aspect
Ratio is selected, changes to one dimension will update the other to maintain the
aspect ratio
Units Select a unit to apply to the Print Size parameters
Preview Displays a rendered or wireframe preview according to the current settings
Render Updates the preview with a rendered view using the currently set rendering
option
Wireframe Updates the preview with a wireframe view
Memory Required/Estimated Not applicable for HDRI export
File Size
Update Not applicable for HDRI export
Format
File Type Not applicable for HDRI export (always HDR format)
Compression Not applicable for HDRI export
Update visible out of date Automatically updates any visible, out-of-date viewports before exporting
viewports prior to exporting
Reset all plug-in objects that Automatically resets plug-in objects that require an update (such as data stamps)
require a reset prior to exporting before exporting
Export Georeferencing File Available only if the current design layer is georeferenced. Along with the image
(Vectorworks Architect or file, exports a worldfile that describes the exported images location, scale, and
Landmark required) rotation in the geographic coordinate system. If multiple georeferenced layers
are visible, the worldfile will be written according to the topmost layer. See GIS
and Georeferencing on page 620 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users
Guide for more information.
3. Click Save.
The Export OpenHDR File dialog box opens. Enter the name and location for saving the HDR format file. Click
Save to export the file. The file is created and saved in the location specified.
QuickTime must be installed to view or create QuickTime movies. It is a separate program available with the
Vectorworks software installation. QuickTime includes a viewer for opening several different file types.
To export an object as a QuickTime VR object:
1. Render the drawing with a Renderworks rendering mode, which is also used for the movie.
Due to a limitation, Renderworks backgrounds cannot be exported.
2. Select the object to export.
3. Select File > Export > Export QuickTime VR Object.
The QTVR Object Options dialog box opens.
4. Select the number of frames and spin options for creating the VR object file, and then click OK.
Parameter Description
Frames Specify how many frames to create in the file; more frames take longer, but increase the quality
of the exported file. Total Frames displays how many frames will be created based on the
horizontal and vertical frames specified.
Horizontal Specifies the number of horizontal frames to create
Vertical Specifies the number of vertical frames to create
Spin Specify the angular sweep desired, relative to the front view of the object
Left Indicates the left pan angle (0 to 180 degrees)
Right Indicates the right pan angle (0 to 180 degrees)
Above Indicates the angle above the horizon (0 to 90 degrees)
Below Indicates the angle below the horizon (0 to 90 degrees)
5. Specify the .mov file name and location, and click Save to generate the QuickTime movie. For information on
playing the QuickTime movie, see Viewing QuickTime Animations on page 734.
pivot point for the QTVR panorama view, as if the view was rotated to be flat, and then oriented towards the positive Y
axis.
QuickTime must be installed to view or create QuickTime movies. It is a separate program available with the
Vectorworks software installation. QuickTime includes a viewer for opening several different file types.
To export a drawing as a QuickTime panorama:
1. Render the drawing in Perspective projection with a Renderworks render mode, which is also used for the movie.
Due to a limitation, Renderworks backgrounds cannot be exported.
2. Select File > Export > Export QuickTime VR Panorama.
3. Specify the .mov file name and location, and click Save to generate the QuickTime movie. For information on
playing the QuickTime movie, see Viewing QuickTime Animations on page 734.
Item Description
Units Version 2000 DXF/DWG and later supports the concept of units, so the files unit settings
can be imported (if it includes units). Previous versions of DXF/DWG do not support units,
and some version 2000 and later files may be unitless. There is no way for the Vectorworks
program to tell whether these unitless drawings were made in meters, feet and inches, or
microns. Communicate with the person providing the file to determine this information.
Unitless DXF/DWG files do have five units settings (such as Architectural and
Engineering) which are used to guess the original units, but the guess may need to be
adjusted.
Line Weights The Vectorworks program allows line weights and colors to be specified independently.
AutoCAD has recently gained the ability to do so, but most AutoCAD users still use colors
to map to line weights. Version 14 and earlier DXF/DWG files do not support true line
weights at all. If you choose to export with line weights mapped to colors, then original
object colors will be lost.
Colors and Fills The Vectorworks program is more graphically rich than DXF/DWG can currently support.
In all cases, the Vectorworks program chooses the closest possible translation given the
limitations inherent in DXF/DWG. The default version in the export dialog box will always
give the best results possible, assuming the recipients software can read all of the
information.
DXF/DWG versions prior to 2004 have a fixed color palette (which changes slightly
depending on whether the background is black or white) and all objects have just one solid
color associated with them. Objects such as circles in DXF have no fill color (just a line
color). A few objects can have a fill color, but they have no separate line color.
DXF/DWG version 14 and above supports a solid hatch, which is a separate object that
can be associated with objects such as circles to make them look like they have a color fill.
These hatches cannot be the same color as the background color (such as a white rectangle
on a white background to mask objects underneath). Since these solid hatches can be
associative, the Vectorworks program can import them and set the associated objects fill
color instead of having two separate objects for frame and fill.
DXF/DWG version 2000 supports wipeout entities, which are essentially polygonal
images filled with the background color. Some AutoCAD users may not want to receive
files with wipeouts. DXF/DWG export includes an option to exclude solid fills (which
includes both wipeouts and solid hatches). Since wipeouts can only be polygons and are
not associative, if a white circle on a white background is exported and then re-imported
into a Vectorworks file, the result is an unfilled circle and a polygon with a white fill and
no pen inside the circle. The smoothness of the polygon (number of facets) depends on the
2D conversion resolution preference when it was exported.
Objects with pattern fills export as a plain solid color.
778 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files
Item Description
Layers and Classes Each Vectorworks design layer is similar to a DXF/DWG model space. A Vectorworks
drawing can have many design layers visible at the same time, with different scales and
views for each design layer, but only one model space is allowed in a DXF/DWG file.
Therefore, the Vectorworks program has to merge the multiple design layers, and some
information can be lost. The drawing should generally look and print the same after the
export, but independent layer scales, object coordinates, and invisible objects can be lost.
Groups and Symbols The Vectorworks program uses symbols, which are objects that can be inserted multiple
times without greatly increasing the file size, and which need only one edit to update all
copies. It also has groups, which are objects that are grouped together and act as one
object. The DXF/DWG equivalent of a Vectorworks symbol is called a block. The
closest DXF/DWG equivalent to a Vectorworks group is an anonymous block, which is
like a symbol without a name. Unlike anonymous blocks, named blocks can be edited
easily in AutoCAD, and new instances of the blocks can be inserted into the drawing.
However, named blocks re-import into Vectorworks files as symbols, which may not be
desirable. Therefore, the Vectorworks program has an option to export groups as
anonymous blocks, if named blocks cause a problem.
Attributes and Linked DXF/DWG does not have database records that correspond to Vectorworks record formats.
Text It does have objects called attribute definitions (attdefs) which, when placed in blocks/
symbols, behave somewhat like linked text in a Vectorworks file. The correspondence is
very loose and as a result translation of these objects is not always smooth. DXF/DWG
block attributes are created for things exporting as blocks (symbols, groups, plug-in
objects, or layer links) that have record formats attached. Because only DXF/DWG blocks
can have attributes attached, the record format information is not exported for other object
types, such as lines or circles.
Names When exporting to DXF/DWG version 2000 and later, the characters in layer and block
names will not change. Accurate translation of lower case text, spaces and other Unicode
characters is supported (except for the following illegal characters, which are converted
during export: < > " `, / \ : ? * | = ). Export to previous versions converts all name
characters to uppercase; all spaces and special characters are converted to underscores.
DXF/DWG attribute tag names cannot have spaces in any version; any spaces found in
record field names are converted to an underscore.
Styled Multiline text Multiline formatted text includes various sized fonts that are bold, underlined, or italicized,
and that wrap to the next line. This type of text is supported for DXF/DWG versions 13
and up. For earlier versions, wrapped text is split into separate lines.
Layer Transfer Mode / DXF/DWG does not support layer transfer modes or transparency, so use only paint
Transparency transfer mode (100 percent opaque under Quartz and GDI+ imaging)
Dimensions The Vectorworks and AutoCAD programs handle dimensions, units, and dimension
standards very differently. Dimensions exported to DXF/DWG look exactly the same when
opened in AutoCAD, but they may change appearance slightly if edited. The Vectorworks
program also creates appropriate dimension styles for all dimension standards that are used
in the file, so even if the recipient modifies the dimensions or creates new ones, they
should not look significantly different. During import, the dimension styles from the DXF/
DWG file will be created as custom dimension standards in the Vectorworks file, to
preserve the original look.
DXF/DWG and DWF File Import | 779
Preparing to Import
The Vectorworks program imports versions 2.5 through 2014 of DWG and text and binary DXF. Additionally, DWF
files of the format .dwf (3D DWF), .dwfx (DWFx), and .w2d (DWF 2D sheet) can be imported. Before import, the
following steps are recommended to enhance the likelihood of a satisfactory translation:
1. Read Information Lost in Translation on page 777 for more information about the differences between the DXF/
DWG and DWF formats and Vectorworks file formats.
2. It is not necessary to explode the entire drawing in AutoCAD before importing. If a file is not importing correctly,
try exploding individual problem objects before import.
780 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files
3. If possible, communicate with the file originator. Determine the intended units, page size, and scale of the file,
along with the intended color-to-line weight mapping, if any.
Parameter Description
Source
One or More Files Imports only one file or only certain files within a folder. Click Choose Files and choose
one or more DXF/DWG or DWF files to import. The number of files selected and their
location is displayed.
All ___ Files in Imports all files of the selected type (DXF only, DWG only, DXF and DWG, or DWF
Folder only) from a specified folder. Click Choose Folder and choose the source folder.
Include Subfolders If All Files in Folder is selected, includes all files of the selected type in all subfolders
Destination
Current File Imports the selected file(s) into the current file. If several files are selected, a new layer is
created for each imported model space.
Symbols in Current Imports the selected file(s) into the current file. Each file creates a separate symbol. This
File is convenient when importing part catalogs, for example. Paper space is not imported.
New Files in Folder Converts the selected file(s) into new, separate Vectorworks files in the selected folder.
Click Choose Folder to choose the location. This is the best option when converting
many files.
Use Document If New Files in Folder is selected, select a template to use for each new file, or select
Template Blank Document. The template can be useful for specifying the page size to use for model
space objects (which can also affect dash scales and conversion of polyline widths). It also
allows specification of default color to line weight mappings, and in some cases, units.
References
Bind External Imports the selected master DXF/DWG file and all its external references into the current
References file
782 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files
Parameter Description
Ignore External Imports the selected master DXF/DWG file without its external references
References
Use Design Layer If New Files in Folder is selected, imports the selected master DXF/DWG file and all its
Viewports external references into separate Vectorworks documents; the external documents are
(Vectorworks Design referenced from the master Vectorworks document using design layer viewports
Series required)
Use Layer Import If New Files in Folder is selected, imports the selected master DXF/DWG file and all its
external references into separate Vectorworks documents; the external documents are
referenced from the master Vectorworks document using layer importing
Architectural Objects
2D View Imports AEC objects created with AutoCAD Architecture (such as walls, doors, and
windows) in 2D view; only 2D graphics are imported
3D View Imports AEC objects in 3D view; only 3D graphics are imported
Import Options
Use Settings Select a set of import options to apply to the imported files. If several files will be
imported, it is recommended that Units Setting In File be set to Determine
Automatically.
The Default options are those that ship with the Vectorworks software, and they cannot
be changed.
To select custom options and save them as a set, select <Active Settings> or a set name,
and then click Set Custom Options to open the DXF DWG Import Options dialog box
(see DXF/DWG and DWF Import Options on page 783).
To use custom import options that have been saved, select the set name from the list.
4. Click Details to open the results log file. The log text file, named DXF_DWF Import Log, is placed in the
specified destination folder if it exists, or in the Vectorworks application folder. New log information is appended
to any existing log file. The report provides a summary of the import, including the import settings that were used,
and a list of which files succeeded, and which failed.
Import into an existing Vectorworks drawing is not recommended, because it can produce unexpected results. For
example, the class attributes for existing objects in the drawing may be overwritten. Workgroup referencing may
give better results in these cases.
2. Select File > Import > Import Single DXF/DWG (or Import Single DWF).
The Import DXF/DWG Files (or Import DWF Files) dialog box opens. Select the file to import; the progress of the
initial import is displayed.
3. During the import, the import options dialog box opens.
Select appropriate import options as described in DXF/DWG and DWF Import Options on page 783.
4. Click OK to continue importing the file. A progress bar displays, along with the number of objects processed and
free memory available.
5. If the file being imported has one or more complex hatches with multiple boundaries, the import may have
performance problems. An alert displays to allow you to choose how to process the hatches. Select an option and
click Continue. If you select the option to convert hatches to groups of lines, solid type hatches will be skipped
rather than imported.
For batch imports, no alert displays; the last option you selected from this dialog box for single file import is used
by default.
6. A results dialog box displays to notify you whether the import succeeded or failed.
7. Click Details to open the results log file. The log text file, named DXF_DWF Import Log, is placed in the
specified destination folder if it exists, or in the Vectorworks application folder. New log information is appended
to any existing log file. The report provides a summary of the import, including the import settings that were used,
and a list of which files succeeded, and which failed.
8. Check the imported file.
Parameter Description
Saved Settings Options
Settings Select <Active Settings> to use the import options currently selected in the dialog box;
to use a set of saved import options, select them from the list
Save Opens a dialog box to name and save the currently selected import options so that they
can quickly be selected as a set
Manage Opens the Saved Settings dialog box to rename or delete sets of saved import options
see Managing Saved Import Options on page 793
Model Space Units Version 2000 and later DXF/DWG or DWF files support true units. When importing a
file with true units, the Vectorworks program determines and sets the units
automatically. If the imported file does not contain true units information, the program
tries to guess the units setting; however, it may still require adjusting (see Setting
Units Manually on page 787).
DXF/DWG and DWF File Import | 785
Parameter Description
Units Setting In File The Vectorworks program tries to determine the imported files unit settings, and
displays the information to the right of Units Setting in File, along with the unit
format (such as Architectural), and the scaling factor that will be assumed (such as 1
DXF/DWG Units = 1).
To use the displayed unit settings in the Vectorworks file, select Determine
Automatically from the list, and also select Set Vectorworks Units to Match.
To use another unit type (such as Centimeters), select it from the list, and also select
Set Vectorworks Units to Match.
To use a custom unit type, or to change the defaulted scaling factor, select Custom
from the list, and then specify the units in the text boxes. Enter the unitless DXF/
DWG number in the first box, and a number with units in the second box. (For
example, 15 DXF Units = 1 in the Vectorworks drawing.) The units displayed in the
second box are the same as the current Vectorworks document settings, but other
units can be entered as long as the appropriate units suffix is included, such as 3 cm.
Also select Set Vectorworks Units to Match.
To use the units currently set in the Vectorworks file, select Use Vectorworks
Document Units. The Vectorworks program assumes that 1 DXF unit = 1 current
document unit when importing objects.
Set Vectorworks Units Changes the Vectorworks document units and units format to match the DXF/DWG or
to Match DWF file being imported; the physical sizes of imported objects will not be affected.
This option is disabled when Use Vectorworks Document Units is selected from the
Units Setting In File list.
2D/3D Conversion
Convert Objects To Specify whether objects should be imported as 3D, 2D, or a mixture of 2D and 3D.
Generally, select the 2D and 3D option, which converts objects that appear to be 2D
(planar objects parallel to or in the active layer plane) to Vectorworks 2D objects. The
remaining objects are imported as 3D.
To import 3D versions of AutoCAD Architecture objects such as walls and doors,
select the 3D View setting for Architectural Objects on the DXF/DWG or DWF Import
dialog box, and select a 3D conversion option. To import both 2D and 3D versions of
the objects, import them twice from the DXF/DWG file: once with 3D View selected,
and once with 2D View selected.
Because the Vectorworks program does not have 3D text, selecting 2D and 3D can
cause text in 3D symbols to be deleted. When the active plane is set to Layer, text in
3D symbols is imported; when the active plane is set to Screen Plane, text in 3D
symbols is not imported.
In addition, objects parallel to the active layer plane that have a thickness are imported
as 3D even though the originator of the file may not have intended for them to be 3D. If
problems occur, import all objects as 2D by selecting All 2D. A warning displays if
selecting this option will distort any objects, such as 3D symbols with 3D rotation.
If the file contains only a 3D model, select the All 3D option. Otherwise, parts of a
large object composed of several entities could be converted to 2D.
Occasionally, none of the choices is appropriate for all the objects. In this case, select
the option that best converts most of the objects.
786 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files
Parameter Description
2D/3D Conversion Res Specify the resolution that will be used to import both 2D and 3D objects. By default,
the 2D and 3D resolutions set in the Vectorworks Preferences are used (see Edit
Preferences on page 17 and 3D Preferences on page 23). Higher resolutions can
have an adverse effect on drawing performance.
Model Space Once the units have been determined, specify the scale to display the imported file.
Choosing the model space scale is important. The scale affects the dash length scaling
and the conversion of polylines with widths (world-space line weights) to Vectorworks
line weights. If the scale or drawing size are set incorrectly, some polylines may seem
to have the wrong line weight and some dashes may be too long or too short.
Fit to Page The Vectorworks program estimates a scale based on the bounds of all of the objects in
model space; the scale fits those objects on the page. Select this option to use the
estimated value.
This Scale To import at a different scale, set the scale manually. Click Scale to open the standard
Layer Scale dialog box, and select the desired scale. (All Layers and Scale Text do not
apply to DXF/DWG files.) Click OK to return to the Primary Settings tab, and the
selected scale displays.
Center After Import Select this option to center imported objects on the page in the Vectorworks document.
The origin is moved so that the most recent import has correct coordinates. In other
words, if all the imported objects are shifted to be centered on the page, then the user
origin shifts by the same amount. Only objects from the current import are moved
though, so previously imported objects do not get centered and thus are no longer at the
same location relative to the user origin.
Deselect this option to position imported objects according to either the user origin
currently set in the Vectorworks document, or the internal world origin (a constant),
depending on the Use World Origin Instead of User Origin setting. Deselecting
Center After Import keeps origins aligned for multiple file imports. Note that some
imported objects may display off of the page if Center After Import is not selected.
Use World Origin If Center After Import is not selected, select this option to position imported objects
Instead of User Origin in the Vectorworks file according to the world origin (a constant value in all
Vectorworks documents).
Deselect this option to position imported objects according to the user origin currently
set in the Vectorworks document.
Reference References the original DXF/DWG or DWF file (master file), so that the imported
objects can be updated when the master file changes. See DXF/DWG and DWF
References on page 791 for more information about referencing.
This option is unavailable if multiple files are being imported.
Absolute path Stores the absolute file path of the master file. Select this option when the location of
the master file will not change in the future, or if the master file is on another volume.
Path relative to current Stores the file path of the master file relative to the target Vectorworks file; this option
document is available only if the master file is on the same volume as the target file. Select this
option if the target file and the master file may be moved to another volume in the
future.
DXF/DWG and DWF File Import | 787
Parameter Description
Save referenced cache Saves a copy of the referenced data with the target Vectorworks file. When this option
to disk is deselected, a copy of the referenced data is not saved, which means that the target
file size is smaller; the referenced data is updated when the target file is opened
Automatically update Updates the reference each time the target Vectorworks file is opened; when
out of date reference deselected, the reference is updated only when Update is clicked from the References
during file open tab of the Organization dialog box.
Sometimes DXF/DWG or DWF drawings are split up into pieces and saved as separate files, such as different areas of
a large city map. When multiple files like this are imported into one file, they need to have their coordinates aligned,
and their layer scale set the same. The recommended workflow is to import the first file with the default Fit to Page
scale, and with Center After Import turned on. For subsequent files, manually set the scale to the same scale defaulted
for the first file, and turn off the centering option.
The Primary Settings tab covers the basic requirements for importing a DXF/DWG or DWF file. If the results are not
satisfactory, explore the options on the Graphic Attributes and Objects tabs.
Setting Units Manually
If objects seem to be the wrong physical size after import, ensure that the units chosen are correct. (Model Space Scale
only affects the display, but Units Setting in File affects the actual measured size of the objects.) DXF/DWG or DWF
files do not always have the true units set, and sometimes have incorrect units set.
The Vectorworks program guesses the units based on the information available, and indicates what it found in the
dynamic text at the top of the pane. If the guess is wrong, set the units manually.
If you do not know the correct units, but you know the true length of one of the objects in the drawing, determine
the true units as follows.
Import the file and choose Custom units, setting the edit boxes to something like 1 DXF Units = 1". After import,
measure the size of the object that you know the true length of. Close the document and redo the import, but this
time set the units to Custom with these values in the edit boxes: (measured length) DXF Units = (true length). For
example, if the true length is 1", but the measured length is 2.54", enter 2.54 DXF Units = 1". (Do not include
units in the first box, and if in feet and inches mode, just use the total measured length in inches.)
If the Vectorworks program finds an exact match for that ratio, it will change the Custom choice to the correct
units. (In the example above, it changes it to Centimeters.) If the measurements and the ratio are not exact (for
example, 2.539 instead of 2.54), manually adjust it to a standard ratio. Common ratios have values such as 1, 12,
2.54, and powers of 10. Examples: 1/12, 12/10, 2.54/0.01, etc.
If you do not know any true lengths, but the document contains dimension objects that show lengths, follow the
steps just described with the following change: Select Convert Dimensions to Groups (see Objects Tab on
page 789), import, and use the value in the imported dimension object as the true length.
Normally the Vectorworks program leaves the document units setting unchanged after an import. If a DXF/DWG or
DWF file is set to meters, but the Vectorworks document is set to feet and inches, then a dimension object that shows 1
meter in the original file will show as 3'3.37" in the imported file. If you want the imported drawing to be the same as
the original, select the Set Vectorworks Units to Match option. You can also import with the option to convert
dimensions to groups (see Objects Tab on page 789) if you want the document to stay in the current units, but you
want the dimensions to look the same as in the original.
Parameter Description
Color and Line Most DXF/DWG or DWF files do not use true line weights, although that is starting to change.
Weights Color is traditionally used to indicate line weights. There are some standards that specify
mappings between colors and line weights, but those standards are often ignored. The
Vectorworks program automatically chooses the standard mappings when exporting, if the
document does not already have a hidden record left over from a previous export or import that
specifies the mappings. When importing, the Vectorworks program does not choose the standard
mappings, but rather defaults to a reasonable line weight for all colors, implicitly alerting the user
that they should determine the true mappings that are desired.
If desired, specify mappings by selecting Map Colors to Line Weights. Select the desired color
mapping during the import process; if necessary, communicate with the file originator to
determine the correct line weights.
The colored lines can be changed to black (or white if the background is black). Select Set Colors
to Black and White. Note that most DXF/DWG or DWF files are created with a black
background, and the colors may not show up well on a white background.
Version 2000 and later uses .ctb files to store color mapping information, but it also supports line
weights, so these options may or may not be needed.
If no .ctb file is detected during import, and true line weights are present, Map Colors to Line
Weights is deselected automatically, and the line weights import exactly.
If no .ctb file is detected, and true line weights are not present, Map Colors to Line Weights is
selected automatically. The Map Colors to Line Weights dialog box displays to allow manual
mapping (by default, all colors are mapped to the same line weight, or to the last mapping used
during the current session).
DXF/DWG and DWF File Import | 789
Parameter Description
If a .ctb file is detected, Map Colors to Line Weights is selected automatically, and the
Vectorworks program reads the file to determine how colors should map to line weights. A dialog
box displays to allow manual mapping (values are pre-set by the mapping file; duplicate
mappings are indicated by italics).
If you used a set of saved import options, the .ctb file overrides any color mappings in your
saved settings. Remove the .ctb file from the DXF/DWG or DWF file folder to use the saved
settings instead.
Dash Patterns In some files, dash lengths may import at an inappropriate scale. Change the dash length scale by
selecting Manually Scale All Dash Lengths by and entering a scale value. A suggested scale
value is displayed. The scaling does not affect line thickness. The Vectorworks program converts
any dash patterns that are extremely small to solid lines to avoid unacceptable slowdowns during
file display and printing.
Classes/Layers DXF/DWG and DWF layers correspond more closely to Vectorworks classes than they do to
Vectorworks layers. Normally, import DXF/DWG and DWF layers as Vectorworks classes.
There is no equivalent to Vectorworks layers in a DXF/DWG or DWF file. When DXF/DWG or
DWF layers are mapped to Vectorworks layers, a warning displays if some of the objects in
symbols or groups would leave their original layers and take on the layer of the symbol or group.
For simple files without blocks, or files with objects inside the block that are set to by block
attributes, importing layers as Vectorworks layers should pose no problems.
To group imported DXF layers in Vectorworks class and layer lists for easy identification, select
Add Prefix to Imported DXF/DWG Layers. Enter the custom prefix to use in the field to the
right of the check box. If Import DXF/DWG Layers As Classes is selected, the prefix and a
hyphen is added to the beginning of the class name when imported into a Vectorworks file.
Similarly, if Import DXF/DWG Layers As Layers is selected, the prefix and a hyphen is added
to the beginning of the layer name when imported into a Vectorworks file.
Rays and Xlines (or construction lines) are DXF/DWG or DWF objects that are similar to
Vectorworks guides. A ray starts at a point and goes off to infinity, while a construction line is
anchored at a point and goes off to infinity in both directions. Select Rays and XLines Use
Guides Class to convert Rays and Construction Lines into lines in the Guides class, which are of
finite length.
Objects Tab
The Objects tab contains settings for advanced users to customize the import process. In particular, decisions about
preserving object visibility and record field links are available.
790 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files
Parameter Description
Points DXF/DWG or DWF Points act either like a locus in a Vectorworks file (a drawing aid that is
not printed), or like a symbol that is visible and can be printed. Select whether to import
points as Loci or as Symbols. The default behavior is to import as symbols if the point style
has specified a real world size (that is, it is zoom invariant and always prints the same), or as
loci if the point style is specified as a percentage of the pixel size of the drawing window
(that is, it varies with the zoom level). Select Use Guides Class to import points as Symbols
in the Vectorworks Guides Class; this allows them to be hidden. In the Vectorworks program,
use the Show/Hide Guides commands to toggle their display.
Block Attributes Attributes in a DXF/DWG or DWF file are similar to linked text in a Vectorworks file.
Select how to handle attribute conversion into Vectorworks symbol linked text. Regardless
of the selection, record formats will be created based on the attributes found during import,
and imported blocks with attributes will have record formats attached.
Choose a Linked Text Handling method from the list. Depending on the file to be imported,
not all options are available.
Preserve Look This option should be selected when available. The attributes will display as they did in the
and Links DXF/DWG or DWF file, and they will be converted to symbol linked text.
If the file contains invisible attributes or attributes that override the attribute definitions, this
option is not available.
Preserve Look This is the next best option. The attributes will look and print as they did in the DXF/DWG
or DWF file, but some symbol text may become unlinked, if necessary, to preserve the look.
Symbol record field updates are not reflected in unlinked text. With this option, an individual
symbol could have a mixture of linked and unlinked text.
Preserve Visible This option is available when the DXF/DWG or DWF file contains attributes marked as
Links invisible. This type of attribute is converted in to a record format attached to a symbol, but
is not converted to linked text. The look of the drawing should be preserved, but minor
changes to visibility are possible. The advantage of this method is that linked text is
preserved for all visible attributes.
DXF/DWG and DWF File Import | 791
Parameter Description
Preserve All The link between record fields and symbol text is preserved with this option. Any invisible
Links attributes will become visible. The look of the DXF/DWG or DWF file may not be
preserved, but the symbol text will not be unlinked.
Hide All All attribute text is hidden upon import. The information is still attached to the object in
record format, but it is not visible.
Group Record Each block attribute imports as a record format field. Select Group Record Fields to group
Fields those fields into a single record format. The Vectorworks program groups sets of attributes
into record formats if they have the same set of field names. For example, if two blocks
(symbols) have attributes with field names of color and part number, both blocks are
converted with the same record format. If one of the blocks has color, part number, and
price, while the other only has two of those, then the blocks are converted with different
record formats. When grouped, the record format name is created from the names of the first
few fields in the record format.
Deselect Group Record Fields to create one record format per field, with no grouping.
Without grouping, the record format uses the same name as the record field.
MultiLines Multilines (or mlines) are similar in some ways to walls in a Vectorworks file, in that they
can have breaks that are healed and can be connected to other multilines. There are several
significant differences between multilines and walls, but an option is provided to import
multilines as walls. Do not select this option unless all multilines in the DXF/DWG or DWF
file are intended to be walls.
When you import multilines as walls, the wall heights may need to be adjusted. To do
so, select Tools > Custom Selection, select all walls, and change their height in the
Object Info palette.
Blocks
Ignore Block Select Ignore Block Clipping to import a clipped block as a cropped design layer viewport
Clipping (if Vectorworks Design Series is installed) or as a cropped layer link. This can create many
layers in the Vectorworks file, and the created objects cannot be manipulated easily.
Deselect Ignore Block Clipping to import a clipped block as a normal scaled or unscaled
Vectorworks symbol, which may look very different from the original image.
Dimensions
Convert By default, the import process automatically creates custom dimension standards to match
Dimensions to the dimension styles in the DXF/DWG or DWF file. If a dimension was customized in the
Groups DXF/DWG or DWF file after the style was applied, the converted dimensions may not
match the originals; select Convert Dimensions to Groups to convert the dimensions into
groups instead.
This type of reference is similar to the type of reference that you can create to a design layer in another Vectorworks
file. You can import from the referenced file into a design layer, or into a design layer viewport (if Vectorworks Design
Series is installed). The import method is set in the Organization dialog box.
After the reference is created, you may need to edit it. To edit references from the Organization dialog box, select the
reference and click Edit. The Edit Reference dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Source File Displays the path and file name of the referenced master file; click Browse to edit
the file location
Save reference location as Maintains either an absolute or relative file path reference from the current file to
the referenced file. Use the absolute path when the location of the referenced file
with respect to the current file is not going to change. Use the relative path when the
files might be moved to another computer or platform; as long as the relative path
between the files remains the same, the reference can be found. Both files must be
saved on the same volume to select this option.
The Source File path displays either an absolute or relative path, depending on the
selection.
Save referenced cache to Saves a copy of the referenced data with the target file. When this option is
disk deselected, a copy of the referenced data is not saved, which means that the target
file size is smaller; the referenced data is updated when the target file is opened.
Automatically update out of Updates the reference each time the target file is opened; when deselected, the
date reference during file reference is updated only when Update is clicked from the References tab of the
open Organization dialog box
Import Settings Opens the Import Options dialog box, to adjust the settings as needed. The next time
the reference is updated, the new import settings will be used.
If the reference is a design layer viewport, you can also edit the viewport as follows (also see Modifying Design Layer
Viewports on page 732 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide):
From the Object Info palette, edit the classes and layers shown in the viewport.
Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl+click (Macintosh) the viewport and select the Edit Crop command to edit the
viewport crop.
DXF/DWG and DWF File Import | 793
Parameter Description
Rename Select and enter a new name for the set of options. If the entered name is already assigned to
another set of options, you are prompted to confirm that you want to replace the existing set with
the set being saved.
Delete Select to delete the set of options. You are prompted to confirm that you want to delete the saved
settings.
3. Click OK to close the Saved Settings dialog box. Click OK again to close the import options dialog box.
Preparing to Export
The following procedures are recommended to help ensure a satisfactory translation.
1. Export behaves differently based on whether design layers or sheet layers are selected for export.
796 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files
If one or more sheets are selected for export, a paper space layout is exported for each sheet with the sheet
objects; any design layers visible in sheet layer viewports are exported to model space. (Sheets that do not
share design layers should usually be exported to separate files.) Other sheet layers and unreferenced design
layers are omitted from export.
If only design layers are selected for export, the design layers are exported to model space and all sheet layers
are omitted. If the design layers are exported to a single file, only the visible layers are exported; if the layers
are exported to separate files, all layers are exported.
2. AutoCAD does not have multiple model spaces. If the sheet layer being exported has multiple viewports at
different scales, the model space may have overlapping objects from the design layers, and the scale will be set to
1:1 instead of the expected design layer scale(s). To avoid this problem, set the scale the same for all design layers,
and make sure that no objects overlap. Then, adjust the viewport scales as desired.
3. Do not export design layers in perspective, as they will not be in perspective in the DXF/DWG file. Instead, create
a sheet layer with a viewport set to perspective view.
4. For DXF/DWG versions earlier than 14, object fills will not export. To better approximate the appearance of the
exported file for these versions, remove all fills in a copy of the file before export. This will help identify lines
under solid fills that need to be deleted or trimmed when the solid fill is removed.
DXF/DWG versions 14 and later support associative boundary hatches, or bhatches. Therefore, fills, solid fills,
and hatches can be exported as follows.
5. Set the class and layer visibility appropriately. If invisible Vectorworks layers are exported as DXF/DWG layers,
objects in invisible classes will not be exported, and vice versa. To preview what will be exported, set classes to
show/snap/modify others and layers to show others.
6. DXF/DWG does not support hybrid objects. If only design layers are being exported, set the view for each design
layer so the appropriate 2D or 3D components are exported. From Plan view, the 2D component of a hybrid
symbol is exported; from Top view or any 3D view, the 3D component is exported. To preserve the 3D object
DXF/DWG and DWF File Export | 797
coordinates, use Top view to export all 3D design layers (or use viewports to show other views, and export the
sheets containing those viewports). Ensure that the option Export as Flattened 2D Graphics is not selected if
you want to export 3D coordinates.
7. Symbols, plug-in objects, and layer links export as named blocks in DXF/DWG. Groups can be exported as either
named blocks or anonymous blocks.
The name that these items receive depends on the view that is in effect upon export. As an example, the symbol
Widget would receive the following names, depending on the view:
Symbol Type and View Exported Block Name
Hybrid symbol in Plan view Widget (2D)
Hybrid symbol in 3D view Widget (3D)
Non-hybrid symbol Widget
The assigned layer link depends on whether Project 2D was selected for the layer link.
To check the item names, re-import an exported file into a Vectorworks file.
8. Check the drawing with both black and white backgrounds. If the Vectorworks file has a white background and
uses a dark (but not black) color to draw objects, then others who look at the exported file with a black background
may not be able to see the objects.
9. Set the 2D and 3D conversion resolutions (in the Vectorworks preferences) to a low value if file size is a concern.
Higher resolutions result in larger exported file sizes. Lower resolutions decrease file sizes, but can result in
blockiness, especially when exporting to earlier versions of DXF/DWG.
The export dialog box options are described in DXF/DWG and DWF Export Options on page 798. During the
export, a progress bar displays, along with the number of objects processed.
Parameter Description
Saved Settings Options
Settings Select <Active Settings> to use the export options currently selected in the dialog box;
to use a set of saved export options, select them from the list
Save Opens a dialog box to name and save the currently selected export options so that they
can quickly be selected as a set
Manage Opens the Saved Settings dialog box to rename or delete sets of saved export options
(see Managing Saved Export Options on page 805)
DXF/DWG and DWF File Export | 799
Parameter Description
File Format
Format DXF/DWG export:
Choose from three exported file formats: DXF as plain text, DXF as a binary
encoding, and DWG.
One of the main differences between these formats is file size. Although individual
files can vary, an uncompressed text DXF file is generally larger than an
uncompressed DWG file. However, the file size can be significantly reduced by
using a compression utility. A compressed text DXF file is normally smaller than a
compressed DWG file. Binary DXF file sizes generally fall between the two for both
compressed and uncompressed files.
In addition to file size, consider the formats that other applications can support.
Before exporting to binary DXF or to DWG, ensure that the receiving partys
software can read those formats. Since binary and text DXF both use the same .dxf
extension, if the DXF file cannot be opened, it may be may be mistakenly considered
corrupted. When in doubt, export as text DXF, which is universally supported.
Recent versions of AutoCAD have bugs when reading some DXF files, such as
losing links to images, so DWG is usually a safer choice in that situation.
DXB is a simpler file format used by some third-party applications that do not
support the full DXF or DWG file format. It is not the same as binary DXF; do not
use .dxb as the extension for binary DXF files. The Vectorworks program does not
support DXB.
DWF export:
Choose from five file formats: DWF as plain text, DWF as a regular or compressed
binary encoding, 3D DWF, or DWFx.
Version For best results, export to the highest version supported by the recipients software, or
the default export version, whichever is lower. The latest versions of DXF/DWG and
DWF have features more similar to the Vectorworks program and may provide a better
translation, but not all software packages can read the latest versions. When in doubt,
export as DXF and version 12, which has widespread industry support.
Other options on the dialog box can change or become unavailable depending on the
version selected.
Class/Layer Conversions
Export as DXF/DWG This option is available if the Export option is set to Design Layers Only.
Layers Since Vectorworks classes correspond most closely to DXF/DWG layers, normally, the
Classes option is recommended. There is no direct equivalent for Vectorworks layers in
DXF/DWG. A single Vectorworks design layer is similar to DXF model space.
This is most important for the import of groups and symbols. In a Vectorworks file, the
objects in groups and symbols can belong to different classes, but they must be on the
same layer. In a DXF/DWG file, the entities equivalent to Vectorworks symbols and
groups (known as blocks) can be on different DXF/DWG layers.
Layers normally do not export relative to the Elevation value shown in the Design
Layers tab of the Organization dialog box.
800 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files
Parameter Description
Invisible Classes/ DXF/DWG export:
Layers Are While a Vectorworks file organizes drawings by class and by layer, the DXF/DWG file
format only has layers. The following description assumes that, as recommended,
classes are selected for export as layers. (If instead Vectorworks layers are selected for
export as DXF layers, equivalent options are presented for the layers.)
Select whether to export invisible classes or layers. If Exported As Invisible DXF/
DWG Layers is selected, objects that are in invisible classes in the Vectorworks file
are exported, and can be seen by making the DXF/DWG layer visible. This is the
recommended option. However, if invisible classes contain private information or if the
size of the exported file needs to be reduced, select Not Exported to delete these.
If invisible classes are exported as DXF layers, objects on invisible Vectorworks
layers are not exported. To export these items, first make the layers visible, and
then select the Export command.
DWF export:
This option is unavailable; only visible graphics can be exported to DWF.
Export Layers as For single file export, select this option to export the selected sheet layers or design
Separate Files layers to separate DXF/DWG or DWF files (named after the original layer);
otherwise, the selected layers are exported to one file.
This option is unavailable if the Export option is set to Design Layers Only, and
Export As DXF/DWG Layers is set to Layers. Additionally, DWF versions 4.2 and
5.5 do not support multiple sheets, so this option is unavailable if multiple sheet
layers are selected for export to one of these versions.
All design layers are exported, including those that are set to be invisible.
For batch file export, this setting is ignored; each sheet layer is always exported as a
separate file.
Layer Scale
Rescale Layers To When the Export option is set to Design Layers Only, paper space is not used; all items
are placed in model space. Model space must be at one scale; DXF/DWG files do not
have different layer scales. If the layers to be exported are at various scales, the option
to rescale them to a common scale before export becomes available. By default, the
most frequently used layer scale will be used.
Choosing the best scale for export is important. Select Rescale Layers To and click the
common scale to use from the displayed list.
Symbols on rescaled layers are exported as scaled blocks in the DXF/DWG file.
When sheets are selected for export, all design layers export to model space at
effectively a 1:1 scale, and viewports take care of showing the objects at other scales.
DXF/DWG and DWF File Export | 801
Parameter Description
Sheets to Include
Export The options on this list change depending on the contents of the file being exported and
on which export Version is selected.
Select the items to export from the list. By default, the selected layers are exported to a
single file (to export multiple files instead, select Export Layers As Separate Files).
If Design Layers Only is selected, you can select either classes or layers to Export
as DXF/DWG Layers. If you export the design layers as DXF layers, you cannot
select Export Layers As Separate Files. Additionally, you have the option to
Export as Flattened 2D Graphics when you export design layers only.
If one of the sheet options is selected, the selected sheet layers are exported as paper
space layouts; also, design layers used in viewports are exported to model space.
While multiple sheets can be exported to the same file, note that unrelated sheets
usually should be exported to different files. Select the sheets from the list below.
If one of the saved view options is selected, saved views are each exported as
separate files. Select the views from the list below.
Export Viewports as If one of the sheet options is selected, select this option to export all 2D and 3D objects
2D Graphics in Model that display inside a viewport as 2D projected (flattened) graphics in model space. Each
Space selected sheet is exported to a separate file. On re-import, all exported graphics are
imported into a design layer.
Rendered viewports in any view other than Top/Plan view are exported as groups.
Non-rendered viewports in an orthogonal view (Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left, and
Right) are set to hidden line rendering and then exported as groups.
Non-rendered viewports in an isometric view (including custom views) are
converted to lines before export.
Section viewports are exported as groups.
Viewport annotations are extracted from the viewport groups and exported as single
entities.
All other sheet layer graphics (such as title blocks) are exported as single entities.
Sheets or View Name If Selected Sheets or Selected Saved Views is selected as the Export option, select the
sheets or saved views to export from the displayed list.
References
Export Design Layer Select this option to export each design layer viewport as a separate DXF/DWG file,
Viewports as Separate named with the viewport name. If deselected, design layer viewports are bound into the
Files master DXF/DWG file; this may cause the viewport objects to look different, because
(Vectorworks Design class and layer visibility overrides are not retained. This option is available only for
Series required) DXF/DWG export.
Objects
Export Only Selected Select this option to export only the objects that are currently selected in the drawing;
Objects this option is unavailable if no objects are selected
Export as Flattened If you are exporting design layers only, select this option to export all of the objects
2D Graphics from the current design layer as flattened 2D graphics
802 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files
Parameter Description
Text
Preserve Mapped Font If the file contains text that has been mapped to a different font, select this option to
on Export export the text with the replacement font; if the option is disabled, the text is exported
with the original font
2D Fills and Files
Export 2D Fills Select this option to export solid fills as wipeouts (DXF/DWG versions 2000 and later)
or solid hatches (DXF/DWG version 14 and later). If Export Images and Image Files
is enabled, image fills export as clipped images; if the option is disabled, image fills
export as solid fills.
Export Images and Select this option to export image objects and image files. If this option is disabled,
Image Files objects with image fills export as objects with solid fills. This option is only enabled for
DXF/DWG versions 2000 or higher.
Export Hatches Select this option to export Vectorworks hatches as bhatches; no hatch pattern files are
created unless Export Hatch Pattern Files is also selected
Export Hatch Pattern If Export Hatches is enabled, select this option to create additional hatch pattern (.pat)
Files files in a specified folder. A Vectorworks hatch with multiple levels and colors
generates multiple hatch pattern definitions. See Preparing to Export on page 795 for
more information on the conversion.
The hatch pattern files, and the DXF/DWG exported file and any support files, such
as .jpg images, are placed in this folder. AutoCAD requires the hatch pattern files to
retain the hatch associativity and to add hatches to additional objects with the same
hatch pattern. When Export Hatch Pattern Files is disabled, AutoCAD displays the
hatch but cannot edit it.
This option is unavailable during DWF export.
Export Hatches and Select this option to export all of the fills, patterns, gradients, and hatches within a class
2D Fills into Separate (or design layer, if layers are exported to DXF/DWG layers) to a separate DXF/DWG
DXF/DWG Layers layer. The DXF/DWG layers are named after the original class or layer that contains
the object to which the fill, pattern, gradient, or hatch is applied. For example, if the
Vectorworks file has an object on the Hardscape layer with a hatch applied to it, the
export file will have a layer called Hardscape_Hatch.
3D
Export Solids as ACIS Select this option to export most Vectorworks solids and NURBS surfaces as ACIS
Solids objects. Deselect this option to export solids as polygonal faces (if the target software
package cannot read ACIS solids, for example).
Walls, round walls, roof and floor slabs, filled 3D polygons, meshes, and NURBS
curves cannot be exported as ACIS solids.
This option is unavailable during DWF export.
DXF/DWG and DWF File Export | 803
Parameter Description
Triangulate to Some software packages, such as AutoCAD, are not capable of rendering exported 3D
Preserve Fills surfaces that have more than three or four vertices per face. Select this option to break
up such faces into a set of triangles that can be properly rendered. The algorithm used
works best on planar or nearly planar surfaces, such as the top of an extruded circle.
Even if Export Solids as ACIS Solids is selected, this option may be used to handle
3D objects that cannot be exported as ACIS solids.
When in doubt, select this option (this increases the exported file size and the time
necessary to export it, and may result in unwanted lines in some cases).
Symbols and Groups
Decompose 3D Some software packages cannot handle exported groups and symbols. If a problem
Symbols and Groups occurs, select Decompose 3D Symbols and Groups to convert symbols and groups to
ungrouped objects. Do not select this option unless it is absolutely necessary.
This option is unavailable during DWF export.
Export Groups as Normally, Vectorworks groups are exported as named blocks, which can be opened and
Anonymous Blocks edited in other software packages. However, the named blocks are imported back into
Vectorworks files as symbols. If this creates a problem, select Export Groups as
Anonymous Blocks, which are imported back into Vectorworks files as groups.
This option is unavailable during DWF export.
Line Types
Complex Line Types Select this option to export complex Vectorworks line types as anonymous blocks,
as Blocks which preserves the exact appearance of the drawing. If the option is disabled, complex
line types export as true line types, and additional graphic information is compiled into
a shape file (.shx).
Line Weights and Colors
Use True Colors Exports line colors with the Vectorworks RGB values, and converts line weights to the
closest possible DXF/DWG weight value. (See Line Weight Conversions on
page 804.) Named Vectorworks colors export as named DXF/DWG true colors.
For DXF/DWG versions prior to version 2000, line weights are not supported, and
this option should not be selected; select Use DXF/DWG Indexed Colors and Map
Line Weights to Colors instead.
For DXF/DWG version 2000 and later, select this option only if the exported file
will not be used with a .ctb file for plotting or printing in AutoCAD. If the exported
file is intended to be used with a .ctb file later on, select Use DXF/DWG Indexed
Colors instead.
Use DXF/DWG Exports line colors with DXF/DWG indexed color values, and converts line weights to
Indexed Colors the closest possible DXF/DWG weight value. (See Line Weight Conversions on
page 804.)
Unlike Use True Colors, this option allows you to use the exported file with a .ctb file
for plotting or printing in AutoCAD. You can either use a predefined .ctb file, or select
Map Line Weights to Colors to create a .ctb file specific to this drawing upon export.
804 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files
Parameter Description
Map Line Weights to If Use DXF/DWG Indexed Colors is selected, this additional option creates a .ctb file
Colors for each exported DXF/DWG file (named after the original .vwx file) to be used during
plotting or printing in AutoCAD. The AutoCAD user must put this file in the support
path, as AutoCAD does not read the .ctb file when it is simply included in the same
folder as the DXF/DWG file.
During the export process, a list of line weights in the file displays. Specify the color to
map to each of these line weights. To select a different color for a selected line weight,
click the color box and select a color from the displayed options.
If Export Layers As Separate Files is also selected, the mapping dialog box does
not display; instead, the Vectorworks program automatically maps line weights to
colors according to a predefined standard.
To avoid having a color table file for each exported file, use a single .ctb file for
each unique set of mappings, and delete the others. When an exported file is
opened in AutoCAD, edit the page setup and choose an appropriate color table
file.
When you import the file back into the Vectorworks program, use the reverse process
to convert the colors back to line weights.
Parameter Description
Rename Select and enter a new name for the set of options. If the entered name is already
assigned to another set of options, you are prompted to confirm that you want to
replace the existing set with the set being saved.
Delete Select to delete the set of options. You are prompted to confirm that you want to
delete the saved settings.
3. Click OK to close the Saved Settings dialog box. Click OK again to close the export options dialog box.
Graying of layers and classes Depending on the export options, either layers or classes
Renderworks background images
Batch Publishing
The Publish command exports a series of sheet layers and/or saved views from the current drawing and
externally-referenced files to DXF/DWG or DWF format. Vectorworks Design Series users can also export to PDF
format, or output to a printer with this command.
The publish list and options can be saved as a set. The list order can be changed, and each item can be published in
either color or black and white. If the Issue Manager is in use (Vectorworks Architect or Vectorworks Landmark
required), sheets and views can be sorted by issue date for quick publishing.
To batch publish sheet layers and/or saved views:
1. Set up the sheet layers and/or saved views as desired for publishing.
Set the visibility of layers and classes in the viewports/views. All visible and grayed layers are published. Invisible
layers and classes are not printed, or published to PDF or DWF; they can be published as invisible DXF/DWG
layers, if the option is selected in the DXF/DWG Export Options dialog box. Each sheet layer or saved view is
published as a separate file.
2. Select File > Publish.
The Publish dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Sheets and Saved
Views Available Lists the sheet layers and saved views present in the current file (indicated with
<Active File> in the File Name column) and, if specified, within the selected folder
(indicated with a file name and path). Click in a column header to sort the sheets and views
by the column parameter. For example, click in the Issue Date column to sort by the Issue
Manager issue date (Vectorworks Architect or Vectorworks Landmark required).
Sheets and saved views from restored sets that cannot be found display in red and
cannot be published.
Batch Publishing | 807
Parameter Description
Show All Items This option is deselected by default, so that when you add an item to the publish list it is
automatically removed from the available list. If you need to publish an item to multiple
formats (for example, to both print and export to DWF), select this option to show all sheet
layers and saved views in the file, whether or not they have been selected to be published.
Sheets and Saved Lists the sheet layers/saved views to be published; to change the list order, use the cursor to
Views to Publish drag and drop the items in the # column.
Click Color for each item to toggle between color and black and white .
Add Adds one or more selected item(s) from the file list to the end of the publish list
Add All Adds all sheet layers/saved views in the file list to the end of the publish list
Remove Removes one or more selected item(s) from the publish list
Remove All Removes all sheet layers and saved views from the publish list
Folder path Displays the most recently selected project folder and file path, for including sheet layers and
saved views from other Vectorworks files within the folder
Select Folder Opens the Choose Project Folder dialog box; select a project folder, including any
subfolders, that contains sheet layers and saved views to be published. Once a project folder
has been selected, all saved views and sheet layers from Vectorworks files within the folder
(and any subfolders) are automatically added to the Sheets and Saved Views Available list.
Files must be the same version as the active file.
Add New Items as Sets the default Publish To value for each item that is added to the publish list (DWG/
DXF or DWF). If Vectorworks Design Series is installed, Print and PDF options are also
available.
Publish To Select one or more items in the publish list and then select from this list to change the
output format (DWG/DXF or DWF). If Vectorworks Design Series is installed, Print and
PDF options are also available.
Options Opens the appropriate dialog box to set the options for the currently selected Publish To
format:
DWG/DXF and DWF: see DXF/DWG and DWF Export Options on page 798
Print (Vectorworks Design Series required): see Printing a File on page 84
PDF (Vectorworks Design Series required): see Exporting PDF Files on page 776 in the
Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide
Options apply to all items published with that format; for example, if you publish
multiple items to DWF, the same export options are used for all DWF items.
808 | Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Files
Parameter Description
Export PDFs as If any items are to be published to PDF, select this option to export each selected sheet layer
separate files and saved view as a separate PDF file; deselect this option to create only a single PDF file
(Vectorworks
Design Series
required)
Save a Set Saves the current publish set in the current file, to be restored later; see Saving a Publish
Set on page 808
Manage Sets Manages saved file sets, and restores a previously-saved set of sheets and views for
publishing; see Restoring a Saved Publish Set on page 809
3. Select available items from the left side of the window, and use the buttons in the middle of the window to move
them to the right side of the window to be published. The Publish To column in the right pane indicates the
current output setting for each item. To publish an item to multiple formats, select Show All Items; add the item to
the list on the right side of the window multiple times, and specify a different format for each one.
4. Verify that the output options for each format are set appropriately, and then click Publish.
5. If PDF, DWG/DXF, or DWF is a selected publish format, the Select Folders dialog box opens. Specify a location
for the output folders.
6. Click OK. The output files are printed or created based on the selected settings. Within the specified output folder,
a sub-folder is created for each type of output file. A publish log file is created in the same location, which
summarizes the results of the publish job.
Parameter Description
Name Enter a unique name for the set
Absolute path Sets an absolute path to files used by the saved set. Use the absolute path when the
location of the referenced files with respect to the current file is not going to change.
Batch Publishing | 809
Parameter Description
Path relative to the Sets a relative path to files used by the saved set. Use the relative path when the files
active document might be moved to another computer or platform; as long as the relative path between the
files remains the same, the referenced files can be found. All files must be saved on the
same volume or server to select this option.
2. Click OK. The settings are saved with the file and are available for future publish jobs.
Parameter Description
List of saved sets Lists the currently saved sets by name; select a set to edit, recall, or delete it
Edit Opens the Edit Saved Set dialog box; rename the set and/or change the file path style (relative
or absolute)
Delete Deletes the currently selected saved set(s)
Recall Restores the list of saved views and sheet layers, along with their settings, to the export list in
the Publish dialog box
Creating Worksheets
For complex drawings, it is best to create separate worksheets for each task rather than one large worksheet.
Worksheets can be linked to share data, formulas, and calculations.
Worksheets can be created in several ways:
Use the Create Report command to select worksheet data from the information associated with the objects in the
drawing. See Creating Reports on page 811.
Use the Resource Browser to create a blank worksheet, and then add the desired information to it. See Creating a
Blank Worksheet on page 813.
Import worksheets from other Vectorworks files or from other spreadsheet programs. See Importing Worksheets
on page 844.
Once created, a worksheet is saved with the file and is listed in the Resource Browser. It can also be accessed by
selecting Window > Worksheets.
If the same set of objects are typically used in your drawings, you can create a template file with a worksheet that
serves as a master price list listing all the objects and their costs. Then, to create materials lists and cost estimates for
a new design, simply import or reference the worksheet in the new drawing file.
Creating Reports
The Create Report command allows you to select data that is attached to objects in a drawing (such as manufacturer,
size, and price) and create a worksheet from it. The command can either create a new worksheet or append database
rows to an existing worksheet. For more information about how to attach data to objects, see Record Formats on
page 188.
To create a report from objects in a drawing:
1. Select Tools > Reports > Create Report.
The Create Report dialog box opens. Specify the report criteria. Items in the Worksheet Columns list are listed in
the order in which they will appear in the worksheet; to change the order, click in the # column and drag the item
to the desired position in the list.
812 | Chapter 20: Worksheets
Parameter Description
Title Enter a worksheet title; if the report data is appended to an existing worksheet, this title is
added to a spreadsheet cell above the database rows that are appended
List all Select whether to list all symbols in the drawing, or to list all drawing objects that have a
specific record attached to them
List objects with If you selected the option to list all objects with a specific record, select the record format to
record use
Possible Columns Lists the columns that can be selected for inclusion in the worksheet
Worksheet Columns Lists the columns that are currently selected for inclusion in the worksheet; initially, all
possible columns are placed in the Possible Columns list
Add / Add All To add a column to the worksheet, select it in the Possible Columns list and click Add; click
Add All to move all the columns to the Worksheet Columns list
Remove / Remove To remove an item from the worksheet, select it in the Worksheet Columns list and click
All Remove; click Remove All to move all the columns to the Possible Columns list
Summarize items Summarizes symbols or objects that contain identical fields, rather than creating a new
with the same database sub-row for each; select the field to summarize
Options Opens the Create Report Options dialog box
Parameter Description
New worksheet Select to create a new worksheet
Append to existing Select to append the information to a worksheet, and then select the target worksheet
worksheet
Search in symbols Select to search inside symbol instances for embedded objects or symbols and include
this information in the worksheet
Search in plug-in objects Select to search inside plug-in object instances for embedded objects or symbols and
include this information in the worksheet
5. To add more data to the worksheet, repeat steps 1 through 4 and select the Append to existing worksheet option.
6. Once all the data is added, edit the worksheet as needed. For example, add rows or columns, change the text
format, or add color. To hide the database header rows, toggle the Database Headers setting on the Worksheet
menu. For more information about editing the worksheet, see Using Worksheets on page 814.
Parameter Description
Name Enter a worksheet name. To rename the worksheet later on, select the worksheet in the
Resource Browser, and click Rename from the Resources menu.
Rows / Columns Enter the number of rows and columns for the worksheet; the number of rows and columns can
be modified later
4. Click OK.
A new worksheet window opens.
5. At this point, all rows contain spreadsheet cells, and they are all undefined. Define the contents of each row and
cell as needed:
To add simple text, numbers, or formulas to the worksheet, see Entering Data in Spreadsheet Cells on
page 827.
To list data that is associated with objects in the drawing, change a spreadsheet row into a database row, and
specify which objects to include in the list. A sub-row displays for each object that matches the criteria defined
in the database header row. Then specify which information to display in the columns for each row; these can
be fields from the objects data record, as well as text, numbers, or formulas. See Entering Data in Database
Rows on page 833.
To add images to either spreadsheet or database rows, see Inserting Images in Worksheets on page 617 in the
Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide (Vectorworks Design Series required).
Using Worksheets
Worksheets can obtain data from the drawing based on specified criteria, and then list the data and allow calculations to
be performed on the data.
Using Worksheets | 815
Worksheets can have two types of rows: spreadsheet and database. The cells in a spreadsheet row contain constants
(text or numbers), or formulas. Database rows consist of a header row and sub-rows, and they show data that are
associated with specific drawing objects. The database header row is marked with a diamond shape next to the row
number. Set selection criteria for this row, and a sub-row is created for each object that meets the criteria. In this
example, the database header row 3 is set to list each object in the drawing that has an appliance record attached to it.
The sub-rows 3.1 through 3.5 represent the five appliance objects in the drawing.
Rows are numbered sequentially starting with 1, and columns are labeled alphabetically starting with A. Database
sub-rows are numbered with the database header rows number, followed by a decimal and sequential numbers (header
row 3 has sub-rows 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, and so on). The cells row number and column letter indicate the spreadsheet cell
address (database sub-rows display a blank address).
When worksheets exist in an open file, the Window > Worksheets command becomes available. All the worksheets
present in the indicated file are listed. Worksheets with a check mark are currently open. To open a worksheet, select it
from this menu, or select the worksheet from the Resource Browser and then select Open from the Resources menu.
Selecting a worksheet from the Window menu Selecting a worksheet from the Resources menu
A worksheet opens in a separate window, which can be resized, moved, and closed. Worksheets contain a separate
menu and context menus (see Worksheet Commands on page 819).
Because an open worksheet is in a separate window, it is not printed with the drawing. To include a worksheet as part of
a drawing, select the worksheet in the Resource Browser and click Worksheet on Drawing from the Resources menu.
When the worksheet is open, the worksheet on the drawing displays as an X. When the worksheet is closed, the
updated worksheet displays on the drawing. Double-click the worksheet from the drawing to open it. See Worksheets
as Graphic Objects on page 846.
816 | Chapter 20: Worksheets
Use the Format Cells command to format individual rows, columns, and even cells of the worksheet as needed (see
Formatting Worksheet Cells on page 823). The format is retained when the worksheet is included on the drawing.
Alternatively, use the Attributes palette to modify the fill, pen, and line thickness attributes for the entire worksheet
object.
Keys Description
Arrow (Up, Down, Right, Left) Moves by one cell in the direction indicated
Tab Moves right by one cell
Enter Moves down by one cell
Shift+Tab Moves left by one cell
Shift+Enter Moves up by one cell
If more than one cell is selected, movement is restricted to the selected cells only.
Selecting Cells
When a single cell is selected, the cell border is highlighted. When multiple cells are selected, the border of the entire
selection is highlighted, and the selected cells have a blue fill.
Selection Action
A single cell Click on the cell
A range of cells Click-drag across a range of cells to select them, or click in one corner and
Shift-click in the opposite corner
An entire column or row Click the column letter or row number; click-drag across the column letters or row
numbers to select multiple rows or columns
Non-contiguous cells, rows, Press and hold the Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Macintosh) key and then click on
or columns each cell, row, or column to select
The entire worksheet Click the empty box directly above the row number boxes
No cell address displays; a list of the Select the new value from the list to change both the worksheet and record.
values that are available for the
current cell displays
(Vectorworks Design Series required)
In database sub-rows, if the Vectorworks Architect or Vectorworks
Landmark product is not installed, information that comes from the objects
Neither a cell address nor a cell value data record cannot be edited in the worksheet. To edit a value that displays
displays in a sub-row, select the item that is associated with that row in the drawing;
then use the Data tab of the Object Info palette to edit the object data as
needed.
To hide a row or column, set the Column Width or Row Height to 0. To display the column/row again, select the
entire worksheet and reset the width or height.
Hover the cursor over the bottom right corner of the worksheet to
obtain the resize cursor; drag to add columns and/or rows
Worksheet Commands
Various command menus are available in the worksheet window, as well as sorting functions. To open the main
worksheet menu, click the disclosure arrow just below the Formula bar. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click
(Macintosh) a specific worksheet row or cell to open a context menu. To sort the sub-rows associated with a database
header row, apply sort functions to the columns as needed.
Current cell Cancel Accept entry Current zoom level Formula bar
Summarize
Descending icon
sort icon
Ascending
sort icon
Worksheet menu
Worksheet Menu
The main worksheet menu commands are defined in the following table.
Ascending Sort Sorts the database sub-rows in ascending order, according to the contents of this column
Summarize Summarizes the database sub-rows according to the contents of this column. Sub-rows that
have identical items in this column are grouped together in a single row.
If a column contains data from a numeric field, the summarized column contains a sum of the
values for all objects that are grouped on the row. This may be appropriate for some columns,
but not others. For example, you might have a window schedule that sorts and summarizes the
data by the Window ID column. You would want the Quantity column to show the sum of all
windows with a particular ID, but you would want the Window Height column to show the
height of a single window with that ID (not the height of all windows combined). Add a
summary operator to the Window Height column to show the correct numeric data.
3. Click and drag an icon to the column header cell to be used for the sort or summary. A new icon displays next to
the column heading letter. For an ascending or descending sort, a number in the icon indicates the sort precedence
for that column.
4. Apply additional sort or summary icons as needed. In each group of sub-rows, up to 20 columns can have either an
Ascending or Descending Sort icon, and any number of columns can have a Summarize icon. The Summarize icon
can be used on a column by itself, or in conjunction with one of the sort icons.
5. To remove a sort or summary, click and drag the icon away from the column header cell.
Using Worksheets | 823
Parameter Description
General Specifies the default general format
Decimal Uses decimal numbers; enter a value for the number of decimal places, and if desired, select to
use commas as separators
Scientific Uses scientific numbers; enter a value for the number of decimal places
Fractional Uses fractional numbers; enter the rounding value for fractions
Dimension Uses dimension numbers
Dimension Area Uses the dimension area format (precision and units) as specified for this document; also
displays the area units after the number
Dimension Volume Uses the dimension volume format (precision and units) as specified for this document; also
displays the volume units after the number
Angle Determines the accuracy of angles and the measurement system used; the measurement
system can be degrees/minutes/seconds, or decimal numbers up to eight decimal places
Date Uses date formats; select the desired format from the list
Boolean Select to use a data value of either True or False
824 | Chapter 20: Worksheets
Parameter Description
Text Select to enter a string of characters; the cell contents are treated as text, even if a number is in
the string
Leader Displays the specified leader text before the cell value (except for Boolean and Text formats)
Trailer Displays the specified trailer text after the cell value (except for Boolean and Text formats)
Parameter Description
Alignment Sets the alignment of text in relation to the cell border
Horizontal Specifies horizontal text alignment; select General to align text strings on the left and numbers
on the right
Vertical Specifies vertical text alignment
Text Orientation Sets the text orientation
Vertical Text Orients text vertically
Horizontal Text Orients text horizontally
Wrap Text Select to wrap text that exceeds the cell width (automatically adjusting row height); deselect to
allow text that is longer than the cell width to float over empty adjacent cells. If adjacent
cells contain content, unwrapped text may appear truncated. Numbers that exceed the cell
width are displayed with # characters.
Merge Cells Merges a range of selected spreadsheet cells into one cell; cell and border formatting and text
wrapping are applied to the cell group rather than to the individual cells. The cell contents and
format of only the upper left cell in the group apply to the merged cells. Data and formatting in
the other cells will be lost during the merge.
To split merged cells, select the merged cell group and then deselect Merge Cells.
4. Click the Font tab to specify the font, font size, style, and color of text in selected cells. See Formatting Text on
page 348.
Using Worksheets | 825
Parameter Description
Line Attributes
Style Sets the line style and thickness for the border element
Color Sets the line color for the border element
Presets
None Removes all border formatting
Outline Adds or removes a border only on the outside edges (top, bottom, left, and right) of the cell
selection
826 | Chapter 20: Worksheets
Parameter Description
Inside Adds or removes a border only on the inside (horizontal and vertical) edges of the cell selection
Preview
Top Adds or removes a border at the top of the cell selection
Horizontal When more than one cell is selected, adds or removes a horizontal border between cells
Bottom Adds or removes a border at the bottom of the cell selection
Left Adds or removes a border on the left edge of the cell selection
Vertical When more than one cell is selected, adds or removes a vertical border between cells
Right Adds or removes a border on the right edge of the cell selection
6. Click the Patterns tab to specify fill options for the selected cell(s).
Parameter Description
Style Select None to remove current cell fill options or to specify no fill; select Solid or Pattern to apply
a solid fill color or pattern to the selected cell(s)
Color/Pattern If Style is set to Solid, select the fill Color; if Style is set to Pattern, select the Pattern and the
foreground and background colors
7. If Vectorworks Design Series is installed, click the Images tab to specify the type, size, view, and margin for
images in the selected cells. See Inserting Images in Worksheets on page 617 in the Vectorworks Design Series
Users Guide.
8. Click OK to set the formatting for the selected cell(s). The worksheet formatting also applies to worksheets placed
on a drawing.
Entering Data in Spreadsheet Cells | 827
Formatted worksheet in
the worksheet window
Formatted worksheet
placed on the drawing
3. The cells in the row are empty until you define the contents. Select a cell, and then enter the desired information in
the worksheet Formula bar located at the top of the worksheet.
To enter text or numbers, see Entering Constant Values in Worksheet Cells on page 828.
To enter a formula, see Entering Formulas in Worksheet Cells on page 828.
828 | Chapter 20: Worksheets
To reference other cells in this cell, see Referencing Other Worksheet Cells on page 832.
To insert an image, see Inserting Images in Worksheets on page 617 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users
Guide.
Less than and equal signs (or Less than or equal to =if((E2<=G2),0.05,G2)
Option+ < on Macintosh)
<= or
Greater than sign > Greater than =if((C7>100),100,C7)
Greater than and equal signs (or Greater than or equal to =if((E2>=G2),0.05,G2)
Option+ > on Macintosh)
>= or
To force the program to treat a number as text, enclose the number in single quotation marks, as in '40'; or format
the cell as Text on the Number tab of the Format Cells dialog box.
Formulas follow standard algebraic rules of hierarchy. In the following example, the value in cell C28 is first multiplied
by 12, and then 4.5 is subtracted from that value. The result is then divided by 12.
=((C28*12)-4.5)/12
There are several built-in functions that can be used in formulas, including mathematical functions and functions that
pull information from objects in the drawing. To use one or more worksheet functions in a formula, either enter the
function manually, or use the Paste Function and Paste Criteria commands to select a function and selection criteria
(if required) from dialog boxes. See Worksheet Functions on page 837 for more information about how to use
functions.
If there is a logic problem with a formula, an error code displays in the cell.
2. Enter an equal sign (=), and then enter the formula. The entries automatically display in the worksheet Formula
bar. A formula can consist of functions, operators, cell references, and constant values.
3. When the formula is complete, click the green check mark to validate the entry. To cancel an entry, click the red X.
4. The formula executes as soon as the cell entry has been validated (Auto-recalc must be selected in the worksheet
preferences; see Preferences on page 820).
To enter a formula with the Paste Function and Paste Criteria commands:
1. Select the cell.
2. Enter an equal sign (=). The entry automatically displays in the worksheet Formula bar.
3. Select Paste Function from the Worksheet menu.
The Select Function dialog box opens.
8. When the formula is complete, click the green check mark to validate the entry. To cancel the entry, click the red
X.
9. The formula executes as soon as the cell entry has been validated (Auto-recalc must be selected in the worksheet
preferences; see Preferences on page 820).
Syntax Example
worksheet name:cell address =MyWorksheet:A1
If the name of the worksheet contains spaces, the name must be enclosed with single quotes as in the following
example: ='Appliance Schedule':A1
Entering Data in Database Rows | 833
Combination Description
$A1 Locks the specified column reference but leaves the row reference relative; the same column is
always referred to, but the row changes if the formula is placed in a different row
$A$1 Locks both the specified column and row references; regardless of where the formula is copied, it
always refers to the original cell
A$1 Locks the specified row reference but leaves the column reference relative; the same row is always
referred to, but the column changes if the formula is placed in a different column
In the following example worksheet, the formula =AVERAGE(B1..B3) is in cell B4. If the formula were copied to cell
E9, the formula would automatically be changed to =AVERAGE(E6..E8). Because the references are relative, both the
column and row would change relative to the cell where the formula is placedalways indicating the three cells
directly above the formula.
appliance type, manufacturer, model number, and price. Column E contains a formula, which uses the value in column
D to calculate the price of the appliance with sales tax. Column F lists which layer of the drawing contains the object.
Spreadsheet cells
Database header row
Database sub-rows
3. Specify the selection criteria for which objects to display in the sub-rows. The number of objects that meet the
criteria displays. To specify additional criteria, click More Choices.
4. Click OK to enable database functionality for the row. Beneath the header row, sub-rows are created for each
drawing object that meets the criteria specified. The columns are empty until you define which data from the
objects to display.
Entering Data in Database Rows | 835
2. Enter an equal sign (=), and then enter the record information to display. The entries display in the worksheet
Formula bar. The syntax for retrieving record information is:
Syntax Example
=record name.field name =Furniture.Type
A period (.) must separate the two names or the formula will not be executed.
If the name of the record format or field name contains spaces, the name must be enclosed with single quotes as in
the following example: =Appliance Record.Model Number
3. Click the green check mark to validate the entry.
The database information attached to each object displays in the sub-rows.
Worksheet Functions
Worksheet functions take an argument, perform an action, and return a value or values. There are two basic types of
functions: those that use the value(s) you enter, and those that use information from objects in the drawing. The
arguments required by the two function types are different.
Number or text arguments: Functions that begin with a lower case letter typically require a number value or a
cell address as the argument. For example, the acos function returns the arccosine of the value that is specified in
the function argument. The argument you enter can be a mathematical expression (such as 3/5), an address of a
cell that contains a number (such as A12), or an actual number. The argument for all trigonometry functions must
be in radians.
Criteria arguments: Functions that begin with a capital letter must be applied to one or more specific objects in
the drawing. In a cell in a database header row, a function is automatically applied to the object listed in each
sub-row, so no criteria argument is required.
However, in a spreadsheet cell, you must enter criteria to select the objects the function applies to. For example,
the Width function returns the width of an object. To specify which object to obtain the width of, either use the
Paste Criteria command on the Worksheet menu, or enter the criteria manually. For details about how to specify
criteria such as the object type, class, or visibility, see the developer oriented documentation located at
http://developer.vectorworks.net
The following table lists all of the worksheet functions available, as well as what kind of argument the function takes.
(Vectorworks Design object that meets the specified (returns the image of the symbol
Series required) criteria. In the cell format, named Cabinet)
specify whether to show a
thumbnail of the object, or the
2D attributes applied to the
object.
int(number) Removes any fractional part of =int(B9) round
a number. (returns the value in cell B9 without
Number is the real number to its fractional component)
be changed to an integer.
IsFlipped(criteria) The total number of flipped =IsFlipped(t=rect)
objects that meet the specified (returns the total number of
criteria rectangles in the drawing that are
flipped)
LeftBound(criteria) The left side minimum x =LeftBound(t=locus) BotBound,
coordinate (left boundary) of (returns the x coordinate of the RightBound,
the objects that meet the leftmost locus in the drawing) TopBound
specified criteria
Worksheet Functions | 841
Importing Worksheets
Data from a wide variety of worksheet formats can be imported into a file, including worksheet data from other
programs and worksheets from other Vectorworks files.
Exporting Worksheets
Vectorworks worksheet files can be exported and read by spreadsheet programs, such as Excel, as well as by some
word processing programs. Because many of these programs have different format requirements, several export
formats are available. These include comma delimited, tab delimited, merge, DIF, and SYLK. Using the tab delimited
format, for example, creates a file that can be opened as a table in Microsoft Word.
To export a worksheet from a Vectorworks file:
1. Select File > Export > Export Worksheet.
2. The Export Worksheet dialog box opens.
846 | Chapter 20: Worksheets
Select the format for the export, and whether to export all rows or only the selected rows. Click OK and specify
the name and location of the exported worksheet.
3. Click Save. The specified worksheet rows are exported to the desired location in the set format.
Parameter Description
Select Selects the objects matching the specified criteria without affecting the existing selection
status of other objects
Select Only Deselects all objects prior to performing the selection operation
Deselect Deselects any objects matching the specified criteria without affecting the selection status
of other objects in the file
Execute Immediately Performs the specified selection operation immediately upon exiting the Custom Selection
dialog box; the operation criteria are not saved for future use
Create VectorScript Saves the criteria and command options as a VectorScript that can be executed later
Create Python Script Saves the criteria and command options as a Python script that can be executed later
3. Choose the desired criteria options. The number of objects in the file that meet the criteria displays.
Specify additional options by clicking More Choices. To remove the most recently added option, click Fewer
Choices.
Specify whether to also include objects that are part of symbols, plug-in objects, or viewport annotations.
4. Click OK.
If the Execute Immediately option was chosen, the selection operation is now performed. If one of the create
script options was chosen, when prompted, name the script palette (if none exists) or select an existing script
palette, and name the selection operation script. The script is saved in the script palette, and can be run as
described in Running Scripts on page 854.
Parameter Description
All Checked box: All attributes in the group are selected; click to deselect all attributes in the
group to be saved to the script.
Empty box: No attributes in the group are selected; click to select all attributes in the group
to be saved to the script.
Box displays (Windows) or (Macintosh): One or more attributes in the group are
not selected; click to select all attributes in the group to be saved to the script.
Fill Attributes Saves fill foreground and background colors and fill style
Pen Attributes Saves pen foreground and background colors and pen style
Line Attributes Saves line weight (thickness) and the presence and size of markers
Text Attributes Saves text attributes including font, size, style, spacing, and justification (alignment)
Other Attributes Saves other attributes such as classes, layers, symbols, tools, and SmartCursor settings
(snapping parameter settings, as well as which snapping tools are active on the Snapping
palette)
3. Click OK.
4. When prompted, name the script palette (if none exists) or select an existing script palette, and name the attribute
settings script.
The script displays in a script palette, and can be run as described in Running Scripts on page 854.
Creating Scripts
To create a script:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.
2. From the Resources menu, select New Resource to display the New Resource menu.
3. Select Script.
The Assign Name dialog box opens. Enter the name of the script and click OK.
Newly created scripts are located by default in the active script palette (the palette which is open and active, or
which is open in the Resource Browser). If multiple script palettes exist, but are not currently open, the Select
Script Palette dialog box opens to select a location for the script. Select the palette to add the script to and click
Add. If no script palette exists in the file, a new script palette must be created to contain the script.
4. The Script Editor opens to begin a script editing session. The editor provides a basic authoring environment for
script development and maintenance. Its features allow you to create, edit, and compile scripts, browse available
functions, view errors,and other tasks associated with creating scripts. Select the script language for the script:
Python Script or VectorScript. Scripts are limited to 32,001 characters. For detailed developer-oriented
documentation related to Python and VectorScript, please navigate to
http://developer.vectorworks.net
Creating and Editing Script Palettes and Scripts | 851
Font Settings Compile script Current line number Palette name Script name
Editor menu
Script
language
Parameter Description
Editor menu
Procedure Opens the Procedures dialog box, which lists all the available script functions/procedures
by category and provides a prototype as well as a brief description of what operation is
performed by the function/procedure. The list serves as both a reference and a means of
building the code by pasting the relevant function/procedure into the editor.
Select the procedure or function and click OK to add it to the current line of the script
editor.
852 | Chapter 21: Using Scripts
Parameter Description
Criteria Opens the Criteria dialog box, for automatically defining selection criteria in a script (see
Creating Custom Selection Scripts on page 847)
Tool/Attribute Opens the Custom Tools dialog box, for saving the current tool and attribute state
information into a script (see Creating Custom Tool/Attribute Scripts on page 848)
Parameter The Parameter command provides access to a plug-in objects parameter list for editing,
when working on the script of a plug-in (see Plug-in Definition on page 860)
Text File The Text File command allows script source code to be imported from external text files
Font Settings Opens the Format Text dialog box, where the font settings of the text in the Script Editor
window can be changed. Changes to the text formatting apply to all of the text in the
Editor (formatting a selection of text is not possible). See Formatting Text on page 348
for more information on text formats.
Compile Script The Compile Script button allows a script to be compiled directly from the Script Editor
without the need to execute the script. If errors exist within the script which prevent
successful compilation, they will be displayed and can be resolved without the need to exit
the script editor.
While compiling VectorScripts repeats all errors in the script code, compiling Python
scripts reports only the syntax errors. For example, an undefined variable is not
reported as an error for Python scripts, because this type of error is determined only
during script execution. As a result, Python scripts report most errors when executed.
Language Select Python or VectorScript for the script language
Creating and Editing Script Palettes and Scripts | 853
Parameter Description
Script Options Opens the Script Options dialog box, which lists folders (environment paths) where
(Python scripts only) imported modules are located, for Python scripts that require external libraries.
This dialog box can also be accessed from Tools > Plug-in > Script Options.
Editing Scripts
To edit an existing script from the Resource Browser:
1. From the Resource Browser, select the script to be edited. Scripts are nested in script palette folders.
3. The Script Editor opens, displaying the script source code. See Creating Scripts on page 850 for a description of
the Script Editor.
Encrypting Scripts
A script can be encrypted and locked to prevent editing.
To encrypt a script file:
1. Select Tools > Plug-ins > Encrypt Script.
The Choose Script File dialog box opens.
2. Locate and select the script file to encrypt.
3. Click Open.
The Save Encrypted VectorScript Code Document dialog box opens.
4. Enter a new name for the script, and then select the location for saving the file.
5. Click Save.
The script is saved in an encrypted format.
Running Scripts
Document scripts can be executed in a variety of ways.
Running Scripts | 855
Script Errors
If an error occurs during script execution, an alert dialog box opens.
To handle script errors:
1. From the alert dialog box, click View Error Output.
2. The Script Errors dialog box opens, displaying the nature of the error and the line(s) where the error occurred.
856 | Chapter 21: Using Scripts
3. To edit the script, click Edit Script, or double-click on a script line to edit that line. The Script Editor opens for
making corrections to the script.
Scripted Plug-ins
Document scripts, as described in Creating and Editing Script Palettes and Scripts on page 849, allow scripts to be
created, saved, and executed from the Resource Browser of a Vectorworks file. However, scripted plug-in objects allow
scripts to be available in any Vectorworks file. The three types of plug-insmenu commands (.vsm), tools (.vst), and
objects (.vso)allow scripts to be incorporated into a workspace as menu commands, tool palettes, and objects in
Resource Browser libraries.
Plug-in objects created with scripts become custom items that can streamline and enhance the design/drafting process.
They support the standard Vectorworks program core technologies such as snapping, classing, and advanced object
editing, giving them essentially the same status as Vectorworks built-in object types.
Scripted plug-ins also provide enhanced portability and platform independence for scripts, allowing them to be easily
moved to Vectorworks software installations on either Macintosh or Windows systems. Drawings containing plug-in
objects can be exchanged between users in different countries. The plug-ins can be localized for use in other countries
by translating the names and strings that display.
Plug-in Types
A key feature of scripted plug-ins is their smooth integration into the Vectorworks product interface. These menu
commands, tools, and objects work just like any built-in Vectorworks software tool, object, or menu item. Like built-in
menu commands, scripted menu commands can be set to require certain file conditions such as 2D/3D view orientation
or a selected set of items in order to activate. When a menu command or tool item is selected, the script and any
information needed by the plug-in is loaded into memory, and the plug-in script executes. The Vectorworks program
uses information provided by the plug-in to provide the user interactions (such as snapping) and file environment for
Scripted Plug-ins | 857
the menu command or tool to perform its defined actions. Scripted tools, like their built-in counterparts, make use of
the SmartCursor and other tool-centric Vectorworks program features.
Plug-in objects have characteristics of both tools and symbols. Plug-in objects can be added to a tool palette and
resemble tool items, but in use, they place instances of the object in the file much like the symbol tool places symbols
in a file. Object scripts can also be invoked through events that occur in the file. Placed object instances can be
modified with the Object Info palette to edit the parametric values that are used to define the object, and these changes
will cause the script defining the object to execute for the object to redraw. Global file changes which force a
regeneration of the file can also cause the scripts of objects placed in the file to execute. These characteristics give
plug-in objects enormous flexibility in how they can be displayed within a file.
Plug-in objects can also be used in conjunction with the Resource Browser to create preconfigured object instances that
need minimal editing after placement. Libraries of different object configurations based on a single plug-in object can
be easily created and retrieved through the Resource Browser.
Plug-in Location
When the Vectorworks program launches, it searches for any scripted plug-ins and registers the information necessary
to activate and manage the plug-ins. Include files are searched for in the same folder where the associated plug-in is
located.
Vectorworks software searches for plug-ins in the following order:
1. in the users Plug-ins folder or aliases or shortcuts in the users Plug-ins folder,
2. the Vectorworks Plug-Ins folder and its sub-folders, and
3. aliases or shortcuts in the Plug-Ins folder that point to locations outside the Vectorworks hierarchy.
The users Plug-ins folder exists in a platform-specific location.
When plug-ins are first created, they are always placed in the users Plug-ins folder.
When the Vectorworks program launches, or a workspace is activated, a plug-in is available in the current session
only if it is located in the Plug-ins folder, its sub-folders, users Plug-ins folder and sub-folders, or folders
referenced by aliases (Macintosh) or shortcuts (Windows).
If duplicate plug-in exist in more than one location, the instance that occurs first in the folder hierarchy is the one
that is used.
The flexibility of the plug-in location provides an advantage when upgrading from a previous version of Vectorworks
software. Because third-party plug-ins can be stored in a folder separate from the application, they can easily be
referenced when installing the upgrade. Copying the plug-ins folders to the current versions folders, or referencing
them with an alias or shortcut, is all that is required when upgrading.
Third-party plug-ins and built-in plug-ins, which are encrypted, may allow limited editing of the plug-in parameters
and definition. Options which are not available for editing appear dimmed.
Custom, unencrypted plug-ins are created and edited from the Custom Plug-ins tab of the Plug-in Manager, where you
can specify the plug-in type, category, parameters, options, and code for a new custom plug-in. Plug-ins are saved as
described in Plug-in Location on page 857.
To create a plug-in:
1. Select Tools > Plug-ins > Plug-in Manager.
The Plug-in Manager dialog box opens.
Parameter Description
Custom Plug-ins
Plug-ins list Lists available custom plug-ins; the icon to the left of the plug-in name indicates the type of
plug-in (see Plug-in Types on page 856)
New Creates a new custom plug-in as described in this section
Edit Definition Opens the Edit Plug-in Definition dialog box, to define or edit the properties of the currently
selected custom plug-in (see Plug-in Definition on page 860)
Edit Script Opens the Script Editor window, to create, rename, or edit the code that executes with the
selected custom plug-in. See Specifying the Plug-in Script on page 867.
Duplicate Creates a copy of the currently selected plug-in; specify a name for the copy in the Assign
Name dialog box
Delete Deletes the currently selected plug-in; this action cannot be undone
Third-party Plug-ins Lists any third-party plug-ins, and allows third-party plug-ins to be installed, uninstalled,
and customized as permitted.
Install: Select the installation files from the third-party script provider; they are
automatically copied to your plug-ins folder.
Delete: Removes the plug-in from the Vectorworks program and deletes the plug-in files.
This action cannot be undone.
Customize: When permitted by the third-party provider, a selected plug-in may allow
limited customization. Options that are not available for editing appear dimmed.
Scripted Plug-ins | 859
Parameter Description
Built-in Plug-ins Lists the plug-ins available with the Vectorworks installation; some of these allow limited
customization as permitted. Options that are not available for editing appear
dimmed.Examples of built-in plug-in customization are described in Customizing
Photometric Threshold Colors on page 991 and Customizing Size Settings for Plug-in
Objects on page 998 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
Parameter Description
Name of the Script Specifies the name of the new plug-in; this is also the name of the plug-in file,
Plug-in automatically appended with the appropriate extension (.px, .vsm, .vst, or .vso)
The plug-in will be Describes the location of the plug-in file; plug-ins are saved in the location indicated so
created in that they are not overwritten when installing a new version of Vectorworks software; see
Plug-in Location on page 857
Plug-in type Select the type of plug-in to create
Command Menu command ( .vsm) plug-ins can be used like any standard menu command item,
performing operations on the active Vectorworks file. Menu commands can detect the
view state of the active Vectorworks file, or can determine if a selection set exists upon
which the menu command can act.
Tool Tool item ( .vst) plug-ins allow scripts to be added to a Vectorworks workspace as a tool
palette item. Tools make use of the SmartCursor, and can respond to file state conditions
such as selection status or view orientation.
Objects Plug-in objects ( .vso) allow the creation of complex objects such as standard
architectural or mechanical elements, smart drawing components like callouts or
drawing borders, or other flexible objects which streamline the design process. Plug-in
objects support standard Vectorworks program core technologies such as snapping,
classing, and advanced object editing; they can contain up to 32,767 parameters for
defining and editing the object appearance.
Point Object Point objects are defined by a single point click for placement
860 | Chapter 21: Using Scripts
Parameter Description
Linear Object Linear objects require a user-defined line to create the basic geometry of the object
Rectangle Object Rectangle objects utilize a user-defined rectangle to define and create the basic geometry
of the object
2D/3D Path Object Path objects define a user-defined polygonal path or NURBS curve to create the basic
geometry of the object
Include File Specifies an additional file ( .vss or .px) to be included with a script
Plug-in Definition
The parameters which define the appearance of a scripted command, tool, or object plug-are stored in a parameter
record which is associated with each object instance placed in the file. These records store persistent data between uses
and provide default parameter values. A menu command which displays a dialog box, for example, might need to store
values entered by a user for later use. A tool might provide several mode options in a popup list. Should the user wish
to select a different mode for the tool, the new setting can be saved and reused on a subsequent use of the tool item.
These values can be stored in the parameter record of the menu command or tool and retrieved later when the command
or tool is selected again. Switching files will display stored values associated with the new files or, if no parameter
record exists, will display the default values of the parameter record as created by the plug-in item.
The parameters for each object instance can be modified by using the Object Info palette to access the values in the
object parameter record. A default parameter record is also created when the first instance of an object (or tool) is
created in the file. This default parameter record, which is distinct from the parameter records associated with object
instances, stores the object default settings with the file. It is used when placing subsequent object instances to define
the defaults for each new object instance.
To define the custom plug-in parameters:
1. From the Plug-in Manager Custom Plug-ins tab, select the plug-in to define or edit.
2. Click Edit Definition.
The Edit Plug-in Definition dialog box opens.
Scripted Plug-ins | 861
Parameter Description
General
Type Displays the type of plug-in being created (menu command, tool, object, or include file)
Language Displays either Python or VectorScript, depending on the language used for the script
portion of the plug-in (see Specifying the Plug-in Script on page 867)
Name Specifies the name of the new plug-in; this is also the name of the plug-in file,
automatically appended with the appropriate extension (.px, .vsm, .vst, or .vso). If
renaming a plug-in, update the workspace afterwards to update the plug-in name.
Category Assigns a plug-in to a heading category, to easily find the plug-in in the Workspace Editor
862 | Chapter 21: Using Scripts
Parameter Description
Parameters Specifies the default parameters for the plug-in. Default parameters are applied to the
plug-in at insertion. Parameters are listed in the specified order for the plug-in; change the
parameter order by dragging within the # column.
Parameters list Lists the default object parameters, alternate (localized) name if applicable, format, and
default value. For linear objects, the LineLength parameter displays, which contains the
axis length of the linear object. For rectangular objects, both the LineLength (the initial
length of the object instance) and BoxWidth (the initial width of the object instance)
parameters display. New default values can be specified for these parameters, but they
cannot be deleted.
New Creates a new parameter for the plug-in. The Edit Parameter dialog box opens.
Specify the parameter name, alternate (localized) name if applicable, type, and default
value, and click OK to create the plug-in parameter.
Edit Edits the selected plug-in parameter. Certain third-party and built-in plug-ins allow
parameter editing.
Delete Deletes the selected plug-in parameter
Scripted Plug-ins | 863
Parameter Description
Strings Specifies text strings used by a plug-in
Strings list Lists the strings used by the plug-in (for example, color selector values that specify a
certain color to be used by the plug-in)
Add Adds a text string to the plug-in definition. The Add Category dialog box opens.
The next available Resource ID number is assigned automatically; specify the category
name and click OK.
Edit Edits the currently selected string. The Edit Strings dialog box opens. Select the
individual string value and click Edit to open the Edit String dialog box.
Specify the string value and then click OK; the value depends on the category; for
information, see http://developer.vectorworks.net.
864 | Chapter 21: Using Scripts
Parameter Description
Delete Deletes the currently selected string
Properties Property settings allow plug-ins to behave like standard Vectorworks menu commands,
tools, and objects. These settings control behavior of the plug-in with respect to the state
of the file (selection status, view orientation) as well as define the help text to display.
The properties available depend on the plug-in type. Only custom plug-in properties can
be specified.
Command
Availability Options For each drawing state, specify whether the condition is required (the drawing state
condition is necessary for the command to be active), prohibited (the command is
deactivated if the drawing state condition exists), or can be ignored (the drawing state
does not affect the command activation)
Tooltip Help Specifies the menu command help text; help text describing the menu command displays
when the cursor pauses over the command (currently, this is only available on Macintosh)
Contextual Help Enter the URL starting with http: ; to specify a web page containing help information; to
Override specify a file relative to the Vectorworks program folder, indicate the path starting with . /
(period and forward slash)
Version Created Specifies the version number of Vectorworks when the plug-in was created. For example,
for Vectorworks 2012, 2013, and 2014, use 17, 18, and 19, respectively.
Version Modified Specifies the version number of Vectorworks when the plug-in was last modified. For
example, for Vectorworks 2012, 2013, and 2014, use 17, 18, and 19, respectively.
Version Retired Specifies the version number of Vectorworks when the plug-in was retired. For example,
for Vectorworks 2012, 2013, and 2014, use 17, 18, and 19, respectively.
Scripted Plug-ins | 865
Parameter Description
Tool
Tool Bar String Specifies the descriptive text to display in the Tool bar; usually this includes the name of
the object, and it can include text indicating an action for the user to perform
Icon The default icon can be replaced by a custom icon, if desired. With a third-party icon
editor, create an 8-bit image, centered in an area 26 pixels wide by 20 pixels high. Save
the icon in .png format, and click Import PNG Icon to import it.
Projection Determines what view projection must be active. If 3D projection is required, the view is
changed. If 2D projection is required, the Screen Plane is activated for the tool. Hybrid
projection does not affect the view projection.
Execute Script Tools are set by default to execute immediately when selected. In some cases, however, it
may be desirable to have the script execution wait for mouse movement (such as a tool
which draws interactively based on user mouse movement).
Contextual Help Enter the URL starting with http: ; to specify a web page containing help information; to
Override specify a file relative to the Vectorworks program folder, indicate the path starting with . /
(period and forward slash)
Version Created Specifies the version number of Vectorworks when the plug-in was created. For example,
for Vectorworks 2012, 2013, and 2014, use 17, 18, and 19, respectively.
Version Modified Specifies the version number of Vectorworks when the plug-in was last modified. For
example, for Vectorworks 2012, 2013, and 2014, use 17, 18, and 19, respectively.
Version Retired Specifies the version number of Vectorworks when the plug-in was retired. For example,
for Vectorworks 2012, 2013, and 2014, use 17, 18, and 19, respectively.
Tooltip Help Specifies the help text to display when the cursor pauses over the object icon in a palette
866 | Chapter 21: Using Scripts
Parameter Description
Object
Icon The default icon can be replaced by a custom icon, if desired. With a third-party icon
editor, create an 8-bit image, centered in an area 26 pixels wide by 20 pixels high. Save
the icon in .png format, and click Import PNG Icon to import it.
Projection Determines what view projection must be active. If 3D projection is required, the view is
changed. If 2D projection is required, the Screen Plane is activated for the tool. Hybrid
projection does not affect the view projection.
Execute Script Objects are set by default to execute immediately when selected. In some cases, however,
it may be desirable to have the script execution wait for mouse movement (such as an
object which draws interactively based on user mouse movement).
Default Class Specifies the default class for the object upon insertion; if the class does not exist when
the object is placed, the class is automatically created
Contextual Help Enter the URL starting with http: ; to specify a web page containing help information; to
Override specify a file relative to the Vectorworks program folder, indicate the path starting with . /
(period and forward slash)
Version Created Specifies the version number of Vectorworks when the plug-in was created. For example,
for Vectorworks 2012, 2013, and 2014, use 17, 18, and 19, respectively.
Version Modified Specifies the version number of Vectorworks when the plug-in was last modified. For
example, for Vectorworks 2012, 2013, and 2014, use 17, 18, and 19, respectively.
Version Retired Specifies the version number of Vectorworks when the plug-in was retired. For example,
for Vectorworks 2012, 2013, and 2014, use 17, 18, and 19, respectively.
Tooltip Help Specifies the help text to display when the cursor pauses over the object icon in a palette
Scripted Plug-ins | 867
Parameter Description
Options
(custom parametric
object types only)
Execution Options Objects, like symbols, can be assigned predefined insertion options for document
placement. These options allow objects to properly interact with walls or other advanced
Vectorworks object types. Command and tool plug-ins do not have insertion option
settings.
By default, object geometry will only be recalculated if the object parameters or control
points are edited. When object geometry is recalculated, file default settings for attributes
such as font, text size, or line color will be reapplied to the object. If any of these settings
have been modified since the object was placed or last edited, changes in the appearance
of the object may occur.
The script is called whenever the object parameters have changed. Additionally, for
instances where it is important for the object to recalculate (for example, windows placed
in a wall), the script can cause geometry to be recalculated when the object is rotated
(Reset on Rotate) or moved (Reset on Move).
Alternatively, the plug-in script can become an event handler (Event-Based); scripts must
then respond to a small set of application events. For samples and documentation on event
handling scripts, access the Support area at www.vectorworks.net
Insert in Walls Select the wall insertion option settings for the object. See Creating New Symbols on
page 172.
For objects that do not require insertion options, leave the options at the default settings.
3. When the plug-in parameters have been defined, click OK to return to the Plug-in Manager.
Enter the script source code in the Script Editor window. See Creating Scripts on page 850 for more
information. For detailed developer-oriented documentation, please navigate to http://developer.vectorworks.net
Option Description
Edit the current workspace Changes the currently active workspace
Edit a copy of the current Creates an exact duplicate of the current workspace; this is the
workspace recommended option
Create a new workspace Creates a new workspace where all tools and commands must be
arranged (from scratch)
3. Enter a workspace name if this is either a new workspace or a copy of the current workspace.
4. Click OK.
870 | Appendix A: Using the Workspace Editor
5. Modify the menus, context menus, tools, keyboard shortcuts, and palette positions and settings as described in the
following sections:
Modifying Menus and Commands on page 870
Modifying Context Menus on page 873
Modifying Tool Palettes and Tool Sets on page 874
Modifying Snapping and Mode Shortcuts on page 876
Modifying Palette Positions and Settings on page 877
Some shortcuts are reserved by the Vectorworks program or by the Windows or Macintosh operating system. The
Workspace Editor does not prevent such shortcuts from being assigned to a palette or a tool. If this occurs, the
Windows or Macintosh shortcut typically overrides the shortcut assigned in the Vectorworks program.
If a duplicate item is added to a menu, a palette, or a tool set, the item displays in both locations. Highlight the
undesired occurrence of the tool or command and press the Delete key to remove it.
6. If desired, click Export Workspace to Text File to export a text file list of all menu items, tools, and keyboard
shortcuts contained in the current workspace; when prompted, specify the file name and the location for the file
and click OK. The text file also lists keys reserved by the Vectorworks program or the operating system, shortcuts
that cannot be user modified, and shortcuts that can be modified from within the Workspace Editor.
Click the Menus tab. The left side of the dialog box displays all available commands, grouped by category. The
right side of the dialog box displays the menus and commands currently assigned to the workspace. To easily
identify what changed in this release, the Recent Changes folder lists the new and revised menus and commands
for the current and prior version of the Vectorworks software; it also lists those menus and commands that are now
considered obsolete (legacy). Modify the menus and commands as described in the following table.
Option Description
Add a new menu or Click-drag the New Menu command from the Commands list to the
submenu desired position in the Menus list; type the new menu name in place of
New Menu
Add a command to a menu Click the plus sign (Windows) or triangle (Macintosh) to expand the list
of commands; click-drag the command from the Commands list to the
desired position in the Menus list
Add a separator Click-drag the Separator command (Windows) or separator line
(Macintosh) from the Commands list to the desired position in the Menus
list; a separator line displays
Move an item Click-drag the item in the Menus list to the desired position
Delete an item Select the item from the Menus list and press the Delete key, or drag the
item outside of the Menus list display area (Windows); deleting an item
will delete its stacked items unless they are moved from beneath that item
first
Change a menu name Select the menu from the Menus list and type the desired name;
commands cannot be renamed
The Document Windows, Font, Tool Palettes, and Workspaces menu items are populated at run time. Therefore,
they can only be placed as the last item in a list of submenu items.
2. If desired, assign the combination of keys to use as a shortcut to access a menu command.
872 | Appendix A: Using the Workspace Editor
Macintosh
1. Select the command
2. Select a shortcut key combination
3. Press the desired key
Windows
1. Select the command
2. Select a shortcut key combination
3. Click the screen and press the
desired key
If a keyboard shortcut is already in use, the option to reassign the shortcut to the current menu command is
presented. If the shortcut is reassigned, the original command no longer has a shortcut.
3. If necessary, modify or delete a keyboard shortcut.
Option Description
Modify a keyboard shortcut Select the shortcut from the Menus list; select a new shortcut key
combination and/or enter a different key for the shortcut (if that key is
reserved by the Vectorworks program or is already in use, a message
displays)
Delete a keyboard shortcut Select the shortcut key from the Menus list and press Delete
Option Description
Add a new tool palette Click-drag the New Tool Palette command from the Create list to the
Palettes list; click the items text label and type the new palettes name in
place of New Tool Palette
Add a new tool set Click-drag the New Tool Set command from the Create list to the Palettes
list; click the items text label and type the new tool sets name in place of
New Tool Set
Change a tool set icon To change the default icon for the tool set, select the tool set, click Set
Tool Set Icon, and use the dialog that opens to select a 26 x 20 PNG image
file to use
Add a tool or a tool Click the plus sign (Windows) or triangle (Macintosh) to expand the list of
category to a tool set tools; click-drag the tool (or the entire group of tools) from the Tools list to
the desired position in the Palettes list
Move an item Click-drag the item in the Palettes list to the desired position
Creating or Editing a Workspace | 875
Option Description
Delete an item Select the item in the Palettes list and press the Delete key, or (on
Windows) drag the item outside of the Palettes list display area.
If you delete an item that has other items stacked beneath it, all of the
stacked items are deleted along with the main item; to prevent this, move
the stacked items to another location first.
Change the name of a tool Select the item from the Palettes list, click the items text label, and type
palette or a tool set the desired name; tools cannot be renamed
3. If desired, assign or change the combination of keys to use as a shortcut to access a tool.
Macintosh
1. Select the tool
2. Select a shortcut key combination
3. Press the desired key
Windows
1. Select the tool
2. Select a shortcut key combination
3. Click the screen and press the
desired key
If a keyboard shortcut is already in use, the option to reassign the shortcut to the current tool is provided. If the
shortcut is reassigned, the original tool no longer has a shortcut.
4. If necessary, modify or delete a keyboard shortcut.
Option Description
Modify a keyboard Select the shortcut from the Palettes list; select a new shortcut key
shortcut combination and/or enter a different key for the shortcut (if that key is
reserved by the Vectorworks program or is already in use, a message
displays)
Delete a keyboard shortcut Select the shortcut key from the Palettes list and press Delete
Parameter Description
Mode Groups Sets the shortcut keys to switch modes for the active tool; the key in 1
controls the first mode group, the key in 2 controls the second mode
group, and so on
Other Keys Sets the keyboard shortcuts for the functions below
Toggle SmartCursor Press this key to toggle on and off the SmartCursor cue display
Cues
Toggle Angles Relative Press this key to toggle whether angle snaps are set relative to the axes or
To Prior Segment to the previously drawn segment
Set Datum Press this key to create a datum point for snapping at the current cursor
location
Snap Loupe Press this key to open the Snap Loupe window
Set Smart Point, Edge, Press this key to set a smart point, smart edge, or vector snap lock at the
or Vector Snap Lock current location
Toggle Automatic Press this key to toggle on and off the automatic working plane
Working Plane functionality; see The Automatic Working Plane on page 202
Suspend Snapping Press and hold this key to disable snapping temporarily
X-ray Select Mode Press and hold this key to see and select objects that are normally obscured
behind 2D object fills or 3D rendered objects; see X-ray Select Mode on
page 64
Coincident Selection If the cursor is over multiple objects at the current location, press and hold
this key and click to open a dialog box from which you can select one or
more of the objects; see Coincident Object Selection on page 64
Snapping Keys Sets the keyboard shortcuts to toggle on and off each Snapping palette tool
6. Once palettes are positioned and settings have been established, select Window > Palettes > Save Palette
Positions to save the changes.
7. For each customized workspace, repeat the procedures in the Workspace Editor dialog box (customize menus,
context menus, tools, keyboard shortcuts), and within the drawing file (establish palette positions and settings).
The Workspace Editor Options dialog box displays. Select the option to edit a copy of the current workspace and
specify a new name for the workspace.
6. Modify the menus, context menus, tools, and keyboard shortcuts as described here:
Modifying Menus and Commands on page 870
Modifying Context Menus on page 873
Modifying Tool Palettes and Tool Sets on page 874
Modifying Snapping and Mode Shortcuts on page 876
7. Click OK to save the changes.
8. In the drawing area, modify the palette positions and settings, and select Window > Palettes > Save Palette
Positions to save the changes, as described in Modifying Palette Positions and Settings on page 877.
880 | Appendix A: Using the Workspace Editor
Standards B
Cursors in Vectorworks Fundamentals
The cursor in the Vectorworks Fundamentals program changes depending on which tool, mode, and modifier keys are
currently in use, as well as what type of object the cursor is over in the drawing area. This helps you to know which
actions are available at any given time, without shifting your attention from the drawing.
Cursor Description
2D Polygon tool
Inner Boundary mode is active; click in an enclosed area to create a 2D
polygon based on the areas inner boundary
Reshape tool (2D modes)
Move Polygon Handles mode is active, and the cursor is over a handle;
click-click to move the handle
Move Edges Parallel mode is active, and the cursor is over a handle;
click-click to move the handle
Change Vertex mode is active, and the cursor is over a vertex handle; click
to change the vertex to the type selected in the Tool bar
Add Vertex mode is active, and the cursor is over a handle; click-drag the
handle to create a new vertex
Delete Vertex mode is active, and the cursor is over a vertex handle; click
to delete the vertex
Rectangular Marquee mode is active, and the cursor is not over any
handle
Lasso Marquee mode is active, and the cursor is not over any handle
Polygonal Marquee mode is active, and the cursor is not over any handle
Cursor Description
Align Plane tool
Click to define the X and Y axes on the selected object
Windows Macintosh
Select Faces preference on The cursor highlights faces that can be used in the chamfer operation
Windows Macintosh
Constraint tools
Click the objects to be constrained
Extract tool
Extract Point or The cursor highlights edges that can be used in the extract operation
Extract Curve mode
Windows Macintosh
Cursors in Vectorworks Fundamentals | 883
Cursor Description
Extract Iso-parametric The cursor highlights faces that can be used in the extract operation
Curve or Extract Surface
mode
Windows Macintosh
Eyedropper tool
Pick up Attributes mode is active
Windows Macintosh
Select Faces preference on The cursor highlights faces that can be used in the fillet operation
Windows Macintosh
Windows Macintosh
Windows Macintosh
Pan tool
The Pan tool is active, or the pan mode is activated when another tool is
active (Space bar is pressed)
884 | Appendix B: Standards
Cursor Description
Polyline tool
Bzier Vertex mode
Project tool
The cursor highlights curves that can be used in the project operation
Windows Macintosh
Push/Pull tool
In Extrude Face or Move Face mode, the cursor highlights faces that can
be used in the push/pull operation
Windows Macintosh
Selection tool
Click to scale the selected object
Windows Macintosh
Cursors in Vectorworks Fundamentals | 885
Cursor Description
Lasso Marquee mode is active
The cursor is over edges or points of multiple objects; use either the
Coincident Selection key or the Select Coincident Objects command to
select the appropriate objects
The cursor is over edges or points of multiple objects, and the Shift key is
pressed; use either the Coincident Selection key or the Select Coincident
Objects command to select the appropriate objects to add to the selection
The cursor is over edges or points of multiple objects; use either the
Coincident Selection key or the Select Coincident Objects command to
select the appropriate objects to move
The cursor is over the resizing points of multiple objects; use either the
Coincident Selection key or the Select Coincident Objects command to
select the appropriate objects to resize
Set Working Plane tool
Click to place the working plane
Click the square center grip and move the cursor to move the working
plane
Click a red, green, or blue axis grip and move the cursor to rotate the
working plane
Shear tool
Click the point on the selected object that is to remain fixed, and then
move the cursor to shear the object
Shell Solid tool
The cursor highlights faces that can be used in the shell solid operation
Windows Macintosh
Text tool
Click to create a text object
Cursor Description
Translate View tool
Translates the drawing view from side to side or up and down
Trim tool
Click to trim the object under the cursor
Walkthrough tool
Walk mode; Click-drag to simulate a walkthrough by moving through the
drawing
Look Around mode; Click-drag to change the viewing angle up, down,
left, or right
Elevator mode; Click-drag to move the viewer higher or lower
Worksheet object
The cursor is over a worksheet cell
Windows Macintosh
Zoom tool
Marquee mode is active; click and move the cursor to create a marquee
around the area to zoom in on
Marquee mode is active, and the Alt key (Windows) or Option key
(Macintosh) is pressed; click and move the cursor to create a marquee
around the area to zoom out on
Interactive mode is active; click-drag up to zoom in, or click-drag down to
zoom out
Vectorworks Circle/Arc Conventions | 887
Cursor Description
Context menus
(Macintosh only)
The control key is pressed while the cursor is over an object or an open
area in the drawing; click to open the context menu
Survey Bearings
The acute angle between the Meridian and a line measured from North to South, toward East and West gives a reading
of less than 90.
90
-90
Architectural Scale
The following table provides the architectural scale conversion.
1" = 1' Fraction of inch 12 x 1/1 = 12 Inches/ foot multiplied by 1 : 12 Number to be typed into
equaling 1 foot inverted fraction Paper Scale
1/2" = 1' 12 x 2/1 = 24 1 : 24
1/4" = 1' 12 x 4/1 = 48 1 : 48
3/4"= 1' 12 x 4/3 = 16 1 : 16
1/8" = 1' 12 x 8/1 = 96 1 : 96
3/8" = 1' 12 x 8/3 = 32 1 : 32
5/8" = 1' 12 x 8/5 = 19.2 1 : 19.2
7/8" = 1' 12 x 8/7 =13.714... 1 : 13.7142857
1/16" = 1' 12 x 16/1 = 192 1 : 192
3/16" = 1' 12 x 16/3 = 64 1 : 64
5/16" = 1' 12 x 16/5 = 38.4 1 : 38.4
7/16" = 1' 12 x 16/7 = 27.428... 1 : 27.4285714
9/16" = 1' 12 x 16/9 = 21.333... 1 : 21.3333333
11/16" = 1' 12 x 16/11 = 17.454... 1 : 17.4545454
13/16" = 1' 12 x 16/13 = 14.769... 1 : 14.7692307
15/16" = 1' 12 x 16/15 = 12.8 1 : 12.8
1/32" = 1' 12 x 32/1 = 384 1 : 384
3/32" = 1' 12 x 32/3 = 128 1 : 128
5/32" = 1' 12 x 32/5 = 76.8 1 : 76.8
7/32" = 1' 12 x 32/7 = 54.857 1 :54.8571428
1/64" = 1' 12 x 64/1 = 768 1 : 768
3/64" = 1' 12 x 64/3 = 256 1 : 256
editable, or only the current layer showing/editable. Like hand drafting, each design layer of a Vectorworks drawing
has a scale. Sheet layers, which contain viewports, are at a scale of 1:1 and are the paper space equivalent.
In the Vectorworks program, a tool is always active; switch tools by selecting a different tool.
This table provides the approximate Vectorworks equivalent to many common AutoCAD terms. The help system
includes a PDF listing all commands and tools in the Vectorworks program, along with their location in the workspace,
for further reference. Other useful relevant help sections, accessed from the help system Table of Contents, include
Drawing Structure, Creating Objects, Editing Objects, and Object Operations.
AutoCAD Vectorworks
AC Trim Trim tool
Annotation tools Dims/Notes tool set
Array (Polar, Rectang) Duplicate Array command
Attributes Records, schedule worksheets
Block Symbol or group
Block command Create Symbol command (or Group command)
Break Trim tool, Connect/Combine tool
Build Panel Building Shell tool set
Chamfer 0 0 Join command
Circle Oval tool
Construction Line Guide
Design Center Resource Browser
Copy Duplicate
Distance Tape Measure tool
DRAWORDER Send command
Dynamic Dialog, palette Palette
Entity Object
Erase Clear command or Delete key
Explode Symbols and groups can be edited with the Edit Symbol or Edit Group commands;
exploding first (Decompose or Ungroup commands in Vectorworks) is unnecessary
Extend Connect/Combine tool
Grips Handles
Insert Symbol Insertion tool
Layer Class (Vectorworks layers have no equivalent in AutoCAD)
Linetype Line type
MATCHPROP Eyedropper tool
Menu Workspace
MLine Wall tool and Round Wall tool (Vectorworks walls have a 3D height and additional
functionality)
Model space Design layers
890 | Appendix B: Standards
AutoCAD Vectorworks
Move Select and drag the object
MText Text block
Osnap SmartCursor cues, Snapping palette
Paper space Sheet layers
PEDIT Compose command
PLINE 2D Polygon tool, Polyline tool
Polygon Regular Polygon tool
Properties Attributes palette and/or the Object Info palette of a selected object
Property Palette Object Info palette
Scale Scale Objects command
Stretch Resize by selecting the object and dragging the handles
Toolbar Tool palette
User Coordinate System Snap to Grid tool and Set Origin commands
VPORTS, Viewport Viewports, including sheet layer viewports, design layer viewports, section viewports
Windows and detail viewports (Vectorworks Design Series required for certain viewports)
Xref Workgroup referencing
Zoom All Fit to Objects command
Zoom Extents Fit to Page Area command
Renderworks Shader Definitions C
Renderworks textures are composed of four shaders: color, reflectivity, transparency, and bump. This appendix
describes each shader type and provides a description of the parameters obtained when editing shaders.
Shader Types
Color Shaders
Shader Description
Object Attribute Selects the objects fill color attribute to apply as a color texture
Image Selects an imported image to apply as a color texture; the image can also be tinted with
color (see Creating Image-based Shaders on page 594)
Color Specifies a color to be applied as a texture
Color Click the color box to select the shader color
Brightness (%) Lightens or darkens the selected color
Fresnel Can be used to create a texture with a somewhat fuzzy appearance, like that of a pillow
that appears slightly darker or lighter on its edges
Edge Color Select the edge color by clicking the color box
Center Color Select the main color by clicking the color box
Bricks Creates a variegated brick pattern
Scale (%) Specifies the size of the bricks relative to the texture Size
Colors On the Bricks, Gaps, and Alt Bricks panes, click the color boxes to select color
variations within a brick/gap, or choose the same color for no variation
Choose Image On the Bricks, Gaps, and Alt Bricks panes, click to use an image for the brick or gap
texture. The chosen image is randomized to show no repetition on the textured object, so
each brick/mortar joint will look realistically unique.
For the completed brick surface to display correctly, the brick image should show
only the flat face of a single brick or a portion of a brick, without any mortar joints.
The gap image should show only mortar without any brick. Images of clay tiles and
other similar materials can also be used in place of a brick.
Delete Image Removes the selected image from the shader and uses only colors to create the
variegated pattern
Image Blend (%) When an image is used, specifies the blending between the image and the colors
selected, to enhance the randomization of the resulting pattern. A low percentage value
uses more color in the pattern, while a high value uses more of the image. The selected
colors tint the image unless a blend value of 100% is set.
892 | Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions
Shader Description
Bricks
Contrast (%) Sets the color contrast between the two brick colors, establishing the dot-like variation
within a brick
Brick Width/ Sets the brick width and height in real-world dimensions
Height
Shift (%) Sets the horizontal offset between rows of bricks
Half Brick Row Adds a row of half bricks at the specified row interval
Half Brick Shift For half-brick rows, sets the amount of horizontal shift
(%)
Gaps
Size Sets the size of the mortar joint gap in real-world dimensions
Noise (%) Specifies the wobbliness of the mortar joints
Alt Bricks
Row Adds a row of alternate brick colors at the specified row interval
Column Adds a column of alternate brick colors at the specified column interval. Row must be
greater than 0 to show columns.
Noise
Pattern Select the type of noise pattern to use. The preview helps distinguish the differences
among the patterns. A generic noise pattern to select is Turbulence. Cell Voronoi is
useful for creating speckled noise (set Low and High Clip around 70% each).
An example of each pattern is shown using default values for a color shader on a sphere
with warm lighting on the top and cool lighting on the bottom. For comparison, this
sphere has no texture applied:
Shader Types | 893
Shader Description
Pattern The pattern might look different on a plane as opposed to the sphere used for the
(continued) example. In addition, the appearance of each pattern can be dramatically affected by
changes to its parameters. This example shows three variations of the blistered
turbulence pattern.
Varying only the Low Clip and High Clip percentages can completely change the
appearance of the pattern.
The selected shader type also obviously affects the appearance of the pattern. This
example shows the blistered turbulence pattern as a color shader and as a bump shader.
Shader Description
Blistered Varied distribution of light and dark areas
Turbulence
Shader Description
Displaced Smooth version of turbulence, with random light and dark areas
Turbulence
Hama Similar to the looping pattern of cranal, but more abrupt and with high contrast
Mod Noise Similar to the tiled pattern of cell noise, but with less contrast
896 | Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions
Shader Description
Naki Rough, concrete pattern
Noise Soft, random, and unfocused pattern of wider light areas and some dark areas
Ober A variety of rough and detailed areas, interspersed with looping, flowing lines
Shader Description
Poxo Fine-grained, detailed pattern
Shader Description
VL Noise Smoothed, varied, less-focused noise pattern
Wavy Turbulence Smooth, soft noise pattern with occasional random peaks
Cell Voronoi Similar to mod noise, but with irregular mosaic shapes rather than square tiles
Shader Description
Voronoi 1 Organic, detailed voronoi pattern of small cell shapes
Voronoi 3 Sharp organic voronoi pattern of irregular cell shapes, high contrast with dark outlines
Zada Twisting, organic pattern with sharp looping areas and flat areas
Shader Description
Marble Marbled, veined pattern with high detail
Colors Click the color boxes to select color variations within the noise pattern
Scale
Global (%) Sets the size of the pattern as a percentage of the texture Size
Relative (%) U, Allows the pattern to be stretched in the U, V, and/or W direction; can be used to
V, W simulate the appearance of scratches
Options
Dimensionality Select 2D Wrapped or 3D Solid. Wrapped shaders are 2D patterns projected onto a 3D
object surface. Solid shaders are 3D patterns applied to a 3D object surface; when the
shape changes, the object and pattern are still displayed correctly.
Detail Sets the level of detail or resolution for many of the patterns
Cycles Creates a repeating pattern of banded noise texture; set the number of repetition cycles to
use
Low/High Clip The low and high clip determine the abruptness of the transition between noise colors
(%) and are often set as a combination to achieve a desired effect. Set the Low clip higher or
the high clip lower for a sharp transition to the other color; set the clips evenly to make
the transition between noise colors more even.
Pavement Creates the appearance of cracked pavement; with no gaps, simulates variegated
pavement, and with the same two colors, simulates solid pavement
Scale (%) Sets the size of the pavement as a percentage of the texture Size
Shader Types | 901
Shader Description
Stones
Colors Click the color boxes to select color variations within the pavement, or choose the same
color for no variation
Coarse Marbling Increases or decreases the coarse marbling appearance of the stones
(%)
Fine Marbling Increases or decreases the fine marbling appearance of the stones
(%)
Gaps
Colors Click the color boxes to select color variations within the pavement joints
Width (%) Sets the width of the pavement joint gap as a percentage of the texture Size
Softness (%) Sets the bevel amount between pavement stones and pavement joints
Grain (%) Sets the amount of color variation within the pavement gaps
Smudges
Colors Click the color boxes to select color smudging variation within the pavement gaps
Amount (%) Sets the amount of smudging for the pavement gap smudges
Size (%) Increases or decreases the amount that the smudging extends from the gap centers
Tiles
Pattern Select the type of tile pattern. The preview helps distinguish the differences among the
patterns. Some of the patterns use two of the tile colors, while others make use of all
three.
Brick 1 Alternating brick pattern with two colors
Shader Description
Circles 1 Alternating polka dot pattern with two colors
Shader Description
Lines 2 Line pattern with three colors
Planks Alternating rectangular pattern, similar to wood planks, with two colors
Shader Description
Random Irregular cellular pattern with blends of three colors for a stained glass effect
Shader Description
Scales 1 Alternating scale pattern with two colors
Shader Description
Triangles 1 Alternating triangle pattern with two colors
Shader Description
Weave Basketweave pattern with two colors
Colors Click on each color box to select the color for the grout, and up to three colors for the
tiles
Randomize Uses randomly-selected colors for the pattern, mixing the selected colors in no particular
Colors order
Dimensions
Grout Width (%) Sets the width of the grout joint as a percentage of the texture
Bevel Width (%) Sets the bevel amount between tiles and grout
Horizontal When selected, tiles are oriented horizontally; deselect for vertical tiles
Orientation
Scale
Global (%) Sets the size of the tile pattern as a percentage of the texture Size
Relative (%) U, Sets the relative scale of the tile pattern in the U (width) or V (height), allowing the tiles
V to be stretched
Reflectivity Shaders
Shader Description
Image Specifies an imported image to be used as the reflectivity shader (white is
more reflective; black is less reflective); see Creating Image-based
Shaders on page 594
Backlit This shader is useful for lamp shades, light bulbs, and curtains that are lit
from behind. Deselect Cast Shadows in the Edit Texture dialog box when
using the backlit shader.
Color Specifies a color to be applied as a backlit color; click the color box to
select the color
Brightness (%) Controls the backlit brightness
Reflection (%) Sets the amount of reflection to use, or set to 0 for no reflection
Blurriness (%) Sets the amount of blurriness for the reflection, or set to 0 for no blur
Glass
Edge Color Click the color box to set the color applied to the glass at an angle, which
is seen at the edge of the glass
Center Color Click the color box to set the color at the center (main) part of the glass
Blurriness (%) Sets the amount of blurriness for the reflection, or set to 0 for no blur
908 | Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions
Shader Description
Glow The glow shader offers an alternative to creating line or area lights, and
can create neon signs
Brightness (%) Sets the amount of glow
Emit Light Allows the texture to become a light source, when Indirect Lighting is
enabled (View > Lighting > Set Lighting Options)
Add Matte Reflectivity Creates a partially glowing light that is also lit by other light sources
Reflection (%) Sets the amount of reflection to use, or set to 0 for no reflection
Blurriness (%) Sets the amount of blurriness for the reflection, or set to 0 for no blur
Metallic Creates metallic effects (also try colored mirror shaders for polished metal
effects).
Metallic effects require the presence of light objects in the drawing.
HDRI background lighting will not produce metallic effects.
Color Click the color box to select the metallic color
Pattern Select the type of metallic pattern
Metallic: provides a metallic paint effect (such as for car bodies)
Brushed: provides a brushed metal appearance
Turned: creates a machine-turned round pattern
Reflection (%) Sets the amount of reflection to use, or set to 0 for no reflection
Blurriness (%) Sets the amount of blurriness for the reflection, or set to 0 for no blur
Mirror
Color Click the color box to select the mirror color; use grayscale for a regular
mirror effect, and select colors for mirrored metallic effects
Reflection (%) Sets the amount of reflection to use, or set to 0 for no reflection
Blurriness (%) Sets the amount of blurriness for the reflection; using a non-grayscale
color and some blurriness creates an effective metallic look
Plastic
Color Click the color box to select the plastic color
Brightness (%) Sets how bright the shader appears
Roughness (%) Sets the width of shiny areas on the plastic; increase the percentage for
wider shiny areas
Reflection (%) Sets the amount of reflection to use, or set to 0 for no reflection
Blurriness (%) Sets the amount of blurriness for the reflection, or set to 0 for no blur
Bricks These parameters are the same for all shaders; for a description, see
Color Shaders on page 891
Noise These parameters are the same for all shaders; for a description, see
Color Shaders on page 891
Pavement These parameters are the same for all shaders; for a description, see
Color Shaders on page 891
Shader Types | 909
Shader Description
Tiles These parameters are the same for all shaders; for a description, see
Color Shaders on page 891
Transparency Shaders
Shader Description
Image Mask Selects an imported image to apply as a transparency mask (see Creating
Image-based Shaders on page 594)
Image Selects an imported image to apply as a transparency texture (see
Creating Image-based Shaders on page 594), for colored transparency
and projected colored lights like gobo projections in the Vectorworks
Spotlight software
Color Specifies a color to be applied as a transparency
Color Click the color box to select the transparency color
Brightness (%) Lightens or darkens the selected color
Glass When using glass transparency, set the accompanying color shader to a
dark color (or even black) for best results
Transmission (%) Sets how much light passes through the glass; set to a high value when
the glass is very clear
Index of Refraction As light moves through a medium, the index measures the change in the
direction of the lights rays. An index of 1.0 indicates no change; a typical
value for water and ice is 1.3, and for glass use 1.5 1.6.
To save time, use a value of 1.0x (just above 1) when the glass is
thin.
Color Click the color box to select the color that appears in a very thin object;
for glass, this is usually set to white
Blurriness (%) Blurs the transparency by the specified amount, or set to 0 for no blur.
Blurred glass appears frosted (and takes longer to render).
Absorption Color Click the color box to select the color that a large, thick object assumes,
when a ray of light has traveled the Absorption Distance
Shader Description
Absorption Distance Defines the distance rays of light have to travel before Absorption Color
replaces Color. The lower the value, the more intense the Absorption
Color is. This applies to thick or thin glass.
Bump Shaders
Shader Description
Image Specifies an imported image to be used as the source of the bump map
displacement (see Creating Image-based Shaders on page 594)
Bricks These parameters are the same for all shaders; for a description, see
Color Shaders on page 891
Noise These parameters are the same for all shaders; for a description, see
Color Shaders on page 891
Pavement These parameters are the same for all shaders; for a description, see
Color Shaders on page 891
Tiles These parameters are the same for all shaders; for a description, see
Color Shaders on page 891
Shader Types | 911
Shader Description
Displacement Mapping For realistic bump textures, displacement mapping creates texture and
bumpy details with a rendering technique that appears embossed,
projecting the geometry outward from the surface.
Next View (on View bar) 7, 575 editing properties (Shape tab) 248
Next Working Plane command 583 editing record information (Data tab) 252
No Smoothing command 269 rectangle ratio indicator 212
None class 106 Objects
Normal Distance command 552 changing class or layer visibility 566
Normal of NURBS surface, showing 386 Objects, editing
Normal Scale command 60 adding (Add Solids command) 333
Nudging aligning in 3D 282
shortcut for 18 aligning in screen 281
symbols in walls 490 aligning to grid 283
NURBS Curve tool 387 aligning to the working plane 587
NURBS objects applying attributes to 501
analyzing 406 applying textures to 620
combining two objects 320 applying transparency 508
composing multiple objects 269 centering in 3D 282
connecting to a boundary object 318, 321 centering in screen plane 281
creating contours 416 chamfering (Chamfer Edge tool) 386, 422
creating curves 387 chamfering (Chamfer tool) 327
creating drape surfaces 397 changing stacking order 259
creating fillet surfaces between 398 clipping (Clip Surface command) 331
creating helixes or spirals 415 clipping (Clip tool) 310
creating interpolated surfaces 389 clipping (Intersect Surface command) 330
creating NURBS curve from arc 222 clipping (Subtract Solids command) 333
creating NURBS curve from circle 217 combining (Combine into Surface command) 331
creating planar caps 402 combining (Compose command) 269
creating shells from surfaces 426 combining (Connect/Combine tool) 316
creating surfaces by revolving profiles 402 converting a copy to lines 278
creating surfaces from curves 396 converting a copy to polygons 279
creating tapered extrudes from 292 converting from previous versions 49
decomposing 270 converting to generic 428
editing fillets/chamfers/shells 386 converting to lines 277
editing surface properties of 403 converting to polygons 278
extending 414 creating shells from solids 386, 425
extracting curves from solid edges 404 custom selection with a script 847
extracting surfaces from solid faces 404 cutting/copying/pasting 113, 258
overview of 381 decomposing 270
projecting and adding surfaces 412 deleting 260
projecting and splitting surfaces 411 deselecting 61
projecting and trimming surfaces 411 distributing in 3D 282
rebuilding 409 distributing in screen 281
reshaping curves 303 duplicating (Duplicate Along Path command) 267
reshaping geometry 417 duplicating (Duplicate Array command) 263
reshaping NURBS surfaces 304 duplicating (Duplicate command) 263
reversing curve direction 386 duplicating (Move by Points tool) 255
sectioning NURBS surfaces 334 entering and exiting objects 16
selecting connected objects 270 extracting surfaces from solid faces 404
showing curve direction 386 extruding 289
showing surface normals 386 filleting (Fillet Edge tool) 386, 424
splitting by line 325 filleting (Fillet tool) 326
splitting by point 323 grouping 279
stitching and trimming surfaces 427 intersection (Intersect Solids command) 333
U and V direction of surfaces 404 joining (Join command) 314
joining (Wall Join tool) 444, 450
O locking 271
Object attributes, default 81 mapping textures to 619
Object Info palette marking center of 701
activating 248 measuring 687, 698
assigning textures (Render tab) 247, 605 measuring distances between 713
box position indicator 214, 248 mirroring 275
copying and pasting data 248 moving (Move 3D command) 254
922 | Index